New! - Norman Equipment Co.

GK-1 CATALOG-HANDBOOK • NINTH EDITION-COMPLIANT MACHINE GUARDINGSAFETY PRODUCTS• Safety Interlock Switches• Non-Contact Safety Sensors• Emergency Cable-Pull Switches• Safety Controllers• Safety Light Curtains• Hinged Safety Interlocks• Safety Edges/Bumpers• Safety-Rated Limit Switches• Safety Foot Switches• Safety Pressure Mats

PICTORIAL PRODUCT INDEXKeyed Interlock Switches • Selection Guide: Page 1ST14AZ17 & AZ17ziAZ15/16 & AZ16ziNew!AZ 200Page 2 Pages 4 & 8Pages 12 & 18Page 22Keyed Interlock Switches with Solenoid-Latching • Selection Guide: Page 43AZM170AZM161New!AZM 200New!MZM 100Page 44 Page 50Page 54Page 56Application Accessories (Safety Door Handles, Enabling Devices, Safety Foot Switches, Two-Hand Controls)New!STSNew!B25TG-1ZSDPage 82Page 88Page 90Page 92Emergency Cable-Pull Switches • Selection Guide: Page 101ZS71ZS73ZS75ZS441Page 102Page 106Page 110Page 114Non-Contact Safety Sensors & Compatible Safety Controllers • Selection Guide: Page 129BNS250 & BNS260BNS33 & BNS33SNew!BNS36BNS303Pages 130 & 132Page 134Page 140Page 142New!CSS 180New!CSS 34Page 154Page 156

TZGPICTORIAL PRODUCT INDEXSDGAZ335SHGVSection 1AZ415Page 24Page 28Page 32 Page 36Page 38Section 2TZF/TZMTKF/TKMTZKAZM415AZS/FWSPage 58Page 62Page 66Page 70Page 74Selection Guide: Page 81 Section 3GFSNew!SEPK(G)New!TFA/TFIPage 94Page 98Page 100Section 4ZS75S BidirectionalNew!ZS80New!S900Page 118Page 122Page 126Section 5BNS30 & BNS300BNS333BNS16 & BZ16New!BNS-B20Page 144Page 146Pages 148 & 150Page 152AESSeries AESCoded-MagnetSensor CompatibleSafety ControllersPage 159

PICTORIAL PRODUCT INDEXPulse-Echo Based Non-Contact Safety Sensors • Selection Guide: Page 177 Section 6New!AZ 200New!AZM 200New!MZM 100New!CSS 180New!CSS 34Page 178Page 184Page 190Page 194Page 200Hinged Safety Interlock Switches • Selection Guide: Page 209 Section 7New!TESF & TESZES95 SB & TVS 335 T.C 235/236Pages 210 & 214Pages 216 & 218Page 220Safety-Rated Limit Switches • Selection Guide: Page 227 Section 7Z/T235/236 & Z/T335/336Z332C50Pages 228 & 244Page 256Page 260Safety Light Curtains & Beams • Selection Guide: Page 263 Section 8SLC, SLG & SLBPage 273Safety Category 3 Pressure Mats & Fail-to-Safe Safety Edges Section 8SMS3 SeriesSE SeriesPage 310General &Specific-PurposeSafety ControllersSelection Guide: Page 328Page 318SRB “Protect”Page 330i

ALPHANUMERIC PRODUCT INDEXProductSeriesAES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159AZ15/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12AZ16zi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18AZ17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4AZ17zi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8AZ200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 178New!AZ335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32AZ415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38AZM161 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50AZM170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44AZM200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 184New!AZM415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70AZS2305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74B25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88New!BNS16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148BNS33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134BNS33S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138New!New!BNS36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140BNS250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130BNS260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132BNS30 & BNS300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144BNS303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142BNS333 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146BNS-B20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152BZ16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150C50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260CSS 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156, 200New!New!CSS 180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 194ES95 SB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216FWS1205/2505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 78GFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94MZM100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 190New!PageProductSeriesS900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126New!SDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28SHGV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317SEPK(G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98New!SLC, SLG & SLB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263SMS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309SRB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327ST14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2STS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82New!T.C 235/236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220TESF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210New!New!New!PageTESZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214TFA/TFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100TG-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90TKF/TKM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62TVS335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218TZF/TZM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58TZG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24TZK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66Z332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256Z/T235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228Z/T236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236Z/T335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Z/T336 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250ZS71 & ZS71NA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102ZS73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106ZS75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110ZS75S (Bidirectional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118ZS80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122New!ZS441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114ZSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92iii

KEYED INTERLOCK SWITCHES1SwitchSeriesSELECTION GUIDEHousingMaterialEnvelopeDimensionsContactConfigurationsCatalogPageST14AZ17AZ17ziAZ15/16AZ16ziNew!AZ200TZGGlass-fiber,reinforced thermoplasticGlass-fiber,reinforced thermoplasticGlass-fiber,reinforced thermoplasticGlass-fiber,reinforced thermoplasticGlass-fiber,reinforced thermoplastic3⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄4" × 2"1 1 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄4" × 2 1 ⁄2"1 1 ⁄4" × 2" × 3"1 3 ⁄4" × 2" × 3 3 ⁄4"1 NO & 1 NC2 NC1 NO & 1 NC2 NC1 NC1 NO & 1 NC2 NC1 NO & 2 NC3 NC1 NO & 1 NC2 NC1 NO & 2 NCSDG Die-cast aluminum 1 3 ⁄4" × 2" × 6" 2 NO & 1 NC283 NC1 NO & 1 NCAZ335 Die-cast aluminum 1 1 ⁄2" × 1 3 ⁄4" × 4 1 ⁄2"2 NC1 NO & 2 NC323 NCSHGV(Key Transfer System)Die-cast aluminum 1 3 ⁄4" × 1 3 ⁄4" × 4" 1 NO & 1 NC 36AZ415 Die-cast aluminum 1 3 ⁄4" × 3 1 ⁄2" × 4" 2 NO & 2 NC 3824812182 PNP Safety Outputs1 1 ⁄2" × 8 3 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄2" 1 or 3 Diagnostic 22Outputs241

AZ17 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingGlass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishingthermoplasticActuator Key Stainless steel, 1.4301Degree of Protection IP67Holding Forcezk models: 1.2 poundszrk models: 7 poundsTravel for Positive-Break 8 mm (0.315 inches)Closing ForceApprox. 12N (2.7 pounds)Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°FMechanical Life> 10 6 operationsConformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660-200BG-GS-ET, pr EN 1088UL & CSAMinimum Closing Radius 1.97" (with AZ17-B6 actuator key)7.87" (with B1, B5, B11 and B15actuator key)ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Isolation VoltageType TerminalsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically separated contactbridges4A/230VAC2.5A/230VA (with “ST” quickconnect)Slow-action, positive-break NCcontacts6A (time-delay)250VInsulation displacement contacts& connector for 18AWG flexiblestranded wire (0.75 mm 2 )SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICSAZ17-11zAZ17-02z132114221121122204,27,681113-1421-2204,288111111-1221-22MS AZ 17 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT6

AZ17 TECHNICAL DATADIMENSIONS24.94Switching Symbols (Colors identify -2243 factory prewired models)123.91ø 4,2.17311.2222.878,2.3222.87602.36BLACKBLACKBLUEBROWNBROWNBLUEBLACKBLACKø19.75AZ17-02zConnectionsAZ17-11zPg M1695.28.3120.79AZ17-02zAZ17-11zsame polarity; type four enclosure22.87301.18ø 4-8.16-.31301.18mminch0.670"(17)(Remove outer sleevefrom cable)ACTUATOR KEYSAZ17/170-B1AZ17/170-B5AZ17/170-B11301.18 22301.1822301.18 225,5.27.8720.794,3.177,5.30.8720.794,3.1712.47.8720.79331.3010.4023.912.08AZ17/170-B1530161.18.6325.988.31361.4113.5123.912.0823.912.08301.1822.8720.79AZ17-B64,2.18481.8924.9412.4723.912.0811.436.2412.474,3.177.288.3160,52.38331.3037,51.484,3.17AZ17/170-B1-22458.31ø11.43ø4,2.1718.71ba13.51361.42ab301.1820.7922.87301.18281.1023.9123.917

SERIES AZ17ziIndividually-Coded MovableMachine Guard Safety Interlock Switch®INDIVIDUALLY-CODEDACTUATOR KEYS(15,000 CODES)Features & Benefits• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficultto defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reducesliability exposure.• Individually-coded actuator key (15,000 codes) …provides extra security in high-risk applications.• Compact design … only 1 1 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄4" × 3". Ideal where spaceis limited.• Non-removable actuating head … heightens tamperresistance.• Four optional key entry locations … provide installationflexibility.• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuitinterruption upon actuator key removal.• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … toleratesmechanical abuse without damage.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates themost hostile environments.• Wide selection of accessories … to meet diverseapplication requirements.• Padlockable key … for added security during equipmentmaintenance.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … BG, UL andCSA.DescriptionThe compact Series AZ17zi are designed for use withmovable machine guards which must be closed for operatorsafety. Their tamper-resistant design, and positive-opening NCcontacts, provide a significantly higher level of safety thanconventional spring-driven switches whose contacts canweld/stick shut. Their IP67 rating makes them ideal forinterlocking safety guards in hostile environments.OperationThe AZ17zi is a two-piece, electromechanical safety interlockswitch. It consists of a rugged switch mechanism and anindividually-coded, geometrically-unique actuating key. Thekey must be directly hard-mounted to the movable guard.Upon opening of the guard, the normally-closed (NC)contact(s) are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The positive-breakNC contacts assure circuit interruption (and machinestoppage) upon removal of the actuator key. (The NOcontacts close upon key removal.)When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NCcontacts to re-close, and any NO contacts to re-open. Thetamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple tools,bent wires or other readily available means.SPACE-SAVINGIDC CONTACTS& CONNECTORTypical ApplicationsThe AZ17zi is intended for use as a safety interlock onmovable machine guards which, when open, expose theoperator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typicalapplications are the interlocking of protective gratings, hingedcovers, access panels and other movable guards.8®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

AZ17zi AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIESAVAILABLE MODELS(Includes Individually-Coded Actuator Key and1⁄2" NPT Plastic Adapter)Part NumberAZ17-11zi-B1AZ17-11zi-B5AZ17-11zi-B6RAZ17-11zi-B6LAZ17-02zi-B1AZ17-02zi-B5AZ17-02zi-B6RAZ17-02zi-B6LDescriptionStandard unitStandard unitContacts (withactuator key inserted)1 NO & 1 NC2 NCNote: Standard units feature 1.2 pounds of key retention force. Forunit with 7 pounds of key retention force, please insert “r” inpart number. Example: AZ17-11zri-B1OPTIONAL ACCESSORIESPart NumberDescriptionMS AZ 17-P(See installationon Page 10)MS AZ 17-R/P(See installationon Page 10)Adjustable mounting kit for parallelmountingMounting kits require use of the -B6 keyAdjustable mounting kit for parallel orperpendicular mounting19

AZ17zi TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingGlass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishingthermoplasticActuator Key Stainless steel, 1.4301Degree of Protection IP67Key Retention Force zi models: 1.2 poundszir models: 7 poundsTravel for Positive-Break 8 mm (0.315 inches)Closing ForceApprox. 12N (2.7 pounds)Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°FMechanical Life> 10 6 operationsConformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660-200BG-GS-ET, pr EN 1088UL & CSAMinimum Closing Radius 1.97" (with B6L or B6R actuator key)7.87" (with B1 or B5 actuator key)ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Isolation VoltageType TerminalsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically separated contactbridges4A/230VACSlow-action, positive-break NCcontacts6A (time-delay)250VInsulation displacement contacts& connector for 18AWG flexiblestranded wire (0.75 mm 2 )Note: Pre-wired (5 meter length) cable entry models available. Seeoptional accessories.SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICSAZ17-11zi1321142204,27,681113-1421-22AZ17-02zi1121122204,288111111-1221-22MS AZ 17 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT(Eases installation and facilitatesadjustments due to guard misalignment)MS AZ17-P(for parallelmounting)MS AZ17-R/P(for parallel orperpendicular mounting)10

AZ17zi TECHNICAL DATADIMENSIONSB1 Actuator Key0.177"(4.5)R min. 7.87" (200)0.59"(15) 0.314"(8)R min. 5.51" (140)0.393"(10)1.18"(30)0.866"(22)0.787"(20)0.078"(2)1.30" (33)0.216"(5.5)0.169"(4.3)0.905"(23)B5 Actuator Key0.177"(4.5)0.59"(15)R min. 7.87" (200)0.314"(8)R min. 5.51" (140)1.42" (36)0.511(13)0.216"(5.5)1.18"(30)0.866"(22)0.787"(20)0.169"(4.3)0.472"(12)22.870.905"(23)0.078"(2)0.314"(8)0.787"(20)0.866"(22)1.18"(30)0.169"(4.3)Switching Symbols (Colors identify -2243 factory prewired models)B6L Actuator KeyB6R Actuator Key1.18" (30)0.866"(22)0.944"(21)0.472" (12)0.165"(4.2)85124.9423.91ø 4,2.178,2.32Pg M169.31602.36311.2222.8722.89.20ø19.7520.79301.18ø 4-8.16-.31301.18mminch0.787"(20)REDWHTGRNBLKGRNWHTREDBLK0.314"(8)0.433"(11)0.157"(4)0.944" (24)0.236"(6)AZ17-02ziConnectionsAZ17-11zi0.078"(2)0.905"(23)0.433"(11)R min. 1.97" (50)0.590"(15)R min. 1.97" (50)0.590"(15)R min. 1.97" (50)0.314"(8)R min. 1.97" (50)AZ17-02ziAZ17-11zi0.314"(8)same polarity; type four enclosure(Minimum radius: 50mm)0.670"(17)(Remove outer sleevefrom cable)All dimensions ininches (mm)11

SERIES AZ15/16DescriptionThe Series AZ15/16 is designed for use with movablemachine guards/access gates which must be closed foroperator safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide asignificantly higher level of safety than conventional springdrivenswitches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. Andtheir tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simpletools, bent wires or other readily available means. Their IP67rating makes them ideal for interlocking safety guards inhostile environments.®Tamper-Resistant MovableMachine Guard Safety Interlock SwitchFeatures & Benefits• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficultto defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reducesliability exposure.• Non-removable actuating head … heightens tamperresistance.• Four optional key entry locations … provide installationflexibility.• Individually-coded actuator key option (15,000 codes)… provides extra security in high-risk applications. SeeAZ16zi.• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuitinterruption upon actuator key removal.• High key-retention force (7 pounds) … eliminatesinadvertent opening of guard due to shock/vibration.• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … toleratesmechanical abuse without damage.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates themost hostile environments.• Wide selection of accessories … to meet diverseapplication requirements.• Padlockable key … for added security during equipmentmaintenance.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … BG, UL andCSA.• Explosion-proof model and M12x1 quick-connect (“ST”)available (Please consult factory).Optional SafetyController.See Page 327.OperationThe AZ15/16 electromechanical safety interlock switchconsists of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometricallyuniqueactuating key. The key is mounted to the movableguard. Upon opening of the guard the NC contact(s) areforced to open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanicallinkage with the actuating key. These positive-break NCcontacts assure circuit interruption (and machine stoppage)upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO contact closesupon key removal.)When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NCcontacts to close and the NO contacts to re-open.Typical ApplicationsThe AZ15/16 is intended for use as a safety interlock switchon movable machine guards which, when open, expose theoperator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typicalapplications are the interlocking of protective gratings, accessdoors/gates, hinged covers, access panels and other movableguards.12®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

AZ15/16 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIESAVAILABLE MODELS(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Plastic Adapter**Actuator Key Sold Separately)Part NumberAZ15-zvk (key spring returned)AZ15-zvrk (key maintained upon insertion)*AZ16-zvk (key spring returned)AZ16-zvrk (key maintained upon insertion)*AZ16-02zvk (key spring returned)AZ16-02zvrk (key maintained upon insertion)*AZ16-12zvk (key spring returned)AZ16-12zvrk (key maintained upon insertion)*AZ16-03zvk (key spring returned)AZ16-03zvrk (key maintained upon insertion)*Contacts (withactuator key inserted)1 NC1 NC1 NO & 1 NC1 NO & 1 NC2 NC2 NC1 NO & 2 NC1 NO & 2 NC3 NC3 NC*Feature 7 pound key retention force. For lighter key retention force(1-2 pounds) add suffix "2254".**To order unit with cordgrip instead of 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter, add suffix"CG" to part number...eg. AZ15-zvk-CG.Short-radius actuator keys available. See below.Part NumberAZ15/16-B1AZ15/16-B2AZ15/16-B3AZ15/16-B6AZ15/16-B1-2177AZ15/16-B6-2177AZ15/16-B1-KRHACTUATOR KEYSDescriptionStandard Key (5.9" minimum closing radius)Small radius actuating key (1.8" minimumclosing radius)Small radius actuating key (1.3" minimumclosing radius)Flexible-movement actuating keyFunnel entry adapter with elongatedstraight actuating keyFunnel entry adapter with elongatedflexible-movement actuating keyKey Removal Hand-Grip Assembly with KeyRetention Chain (for use with AZ15...zvrkand AZ16...zvrk)AZ15/16-BI-2024AZ15/16-CAPM20-CGM20- 1 ⁄2"PM20- 1 ⁄2"MACCESSORIESfor AZ15/16 Keyed-Interlock SwitchesAZ15/16-BI-1747AZ15/16-B2-1747AZ15/16-B3-1747PL-M20-24VPL-M20-120VAdd suffix -1637 to basicpart number when orderingAZ15/16-BI-2053(for use with AZ16...zvrk)#6- 3 ⁄8SPH (Package of 6)#10-32× 1 ⁄2" OWOH(Package of 6)SZ16/335AZ15/16-APPart NumberMS AZ 15/16-P(See illustration Page 19)MS AZ 15/16-R/P(See illustration Page 19)Suffix “-ST”DescriptionGasketed key capsKey entry closure caps(for unused entry slots)Cord grip (cable gland)Plastic 1 /2" NPT adapterMetal 1 /2" NPT adapterDoor holding magnet kit(7 pound holding force)(for use with AZ16…zvr-2254models)24VAC/DC pilot light kit120VAC/DC pilot light kitGold contacts(for AZ15/16zvr)Ball latch kit(Adjustable holding force up to22 pounds)#6- 3 ⁄8 Spanner Pan HeadTamper-resistant sheet metalscrews (for actuator key mountingor switch contact cover)#10-32 One-Way Oval HeadTamper-resistant machine screwsActuator Key Lockout Device(Accepts up to 6 padlocks)Alignment Pins (Set of 2)Adjustable mounting kit forparallel mountingAdjustable mounting kit forparallel and perpendicularmountingMS mounting kits require the use of the -B6 keyOptional M12x1 quick-connect(2 contact models only)1AZ15/16-2053 with ball catchHolding force up to 22 poundsAZ15/16-1747 with holding magnetHolding force 7 poundsActuator Key Removal HandleAZ15/16-B1-KRHLockout Device SZ16/335(padlock not included)13

AZ15/16 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingGlass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishingthermoplasticActuator KeyStainless steel (defeat-resistantdesign)Degree of Protection IP67Travel for Positive-Break 8 mm (0.315 inches)Key Ejection Force "-zv" models: 3N ( 0.7 pounds)Key Retention Force "-zvr-2254 models: 5N (1.2 pounds)"-zvr" models: 30N (7 pounds)Closing ForceApprox. 15N (3.4 pounds)Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°FMechanical Life> 1 million operationsConformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660-200BG-GS-ET-15UL & CSA (A600, P300)TUVMinimum Closing Radius 1.3" (with B3 actuator key)1.8" (with B2 actuator key)5.9" (with B1 actuator key)DIMENSIONSELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact GapContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Isolation VoltageRated Impulse WithstandVoltageType Terminals** Units available with M12x1 quick-connect.(Please consult factory).Fine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically separated contactbridges2×2mm (minimum)4A/230VAC (A600)2.5A/230VAC (with M12x1 quickconnect)Slow-action, positive-breakNC contactsFuse 6A (time-delay)500VAC6kVScrew terminals with self-liftingclamps for up to 13 AWG flexiblestranded wire (2.5mm 2 )SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS13211422AZ16z02,3 5,25,5813-1421-22“Make beforebreak”AZ16-02z1121122202,35,55,58811-1221-22AZ16-12z1321311422320 2,3 5,25,5 813-1421-2231-32112131122232AZ16-03z0 2,35,5 85,5 811-1221-2231-32AZ15/16-2053 Ball Latch KitAZ15/16-2024 Gasketed Key Caps14

AZ15/16 ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONSAZ15/16-B1 Actuator KeyAZ15/16-B1 Actuator Keywith AZ15/16-1747Holding Magnet Kit1Minimumactuating radiuswith actuator B1/B1-174751AZ15/16-B1-2177 Actuator Key401.58ø5,5.225.234,31.3720.0811.43562.2416.64Minimumactuating radiuswith actuatorB1/B1-174723,30.93271.08Actuator B1 is standard for AZ15/16; it allows aminimum actuating radius of 150 mm. Please notethat the center of rotation must be in the sameplane as the upper edge of the safety switch.4Ordering example:Switch, holding magnet andactuator: AZ16-zv/B1-1747AZ15/16-B2 Actuator KeyAZ15/16-B2 Actuator Keywith AZ15/16-1747Holding Magnet KitmminchMinimumactuatingradius withactuatorB2/B2-1747Actuator B2 is particularly suitable for smallactuating radii over the wide edge of theactuator (R=45 to 150mm). The basic setting(angle 15°) provides a minimum radius of45mm=1.8 in. For larger radii, the angle hasto be adjusted correspondingly by turning theset screw counter-clockwise.AZ15/16-B3 Actuator KeyAZ15/16-B3 Actuator Keywith AZ15/16-1747Holding Magnet KitMinimum actuatingradius with actuatorB3/B3-1747Actuator B3 is particularly suitablefor small actuating radii over the narrowedge of the actuator (R=32 to150mm). The basic setting (angle10°) provides a minimum radius of32mm=1.3in. For larger radii, theangle has to be adjusted correspondinglyby turning the set screwclockwise.15

AZ15/16 ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONSAZ15/16-B1-2177 Funnel Entry Adapter(with straight actuating key)AZ15/16-B6 Flex Actuator Keya562.24ø5,5.22562.2 401.670.28160.6311.4310.416.64401.58ø5,5.225.2b34,31.3711.4316.6420.0875° 79°23,30.93271.08271.0827,31.09166410,9.445220831,41.26281.1214.568.326.2416

1SaferbyDesign17

SERIES AZ16ziIndividually-Coded MovableMachine Guard Safety Interlock Switch®Features & Benefits• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficultto defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reducesliability exposure.• Individually-coded actuator key (15,000 codes) …provides extra security in high-risk applications.• Non-removable actuating head … heightens tamperresistance.• Four optional key entry locations … provide installationflexibility.• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuitinterruption upon actuator key removal.• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … toleratesmechanical abuse without damage.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates themost hostile environments.• Tamper-resistant key mounting screws … deterbypassing.• Wide selection of accessories … to meet diverseapplication requirements.• Padlockable key … for added security during equipmentmaintenance.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … BG, UL andCSA.DescriptionThe Series AZ16zi are designed for use with movablemachine guards which must be closed for operator safety.Their tamper-resistant design, and positive-opening NCcontacts, provide a significantly higher level of safety thanconventional spring-driven switches whose contacts canweld/stick shut. Their IP67 rating makes them ideal forinterlocking safety guards in hostile environments.OperationThe AZ16zi is a two-piece, electromechanical safety interlockswitch. It consists of a rugged switch mechanism and anindividually-coded, geometrically-unique actuating key. Thekey must be directly hard-mounted to the movable guard.Upon opening of the guard, the normally-closed (NC)contact(s) are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The positive-breakNC contacts assure circuit interruption (and machinestoppage) upon removal of the actuator key. (The NOcontacts close upon key removal.)When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NCcontacts to re-close, and any NO contacts to re-open. Thetamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple tools,bent wires or other readily available means.Typical ApplicationsThe AZ16zi is intended for use as a safety interlock onmovable machine guards which, when open, expose theoperator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typicalapplications are the interlocking of protective gratings, hingedcovers, access panels and other movable guards.Patented geometrically-unique tumblerconfiguration18®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

AZ16zi AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIESAVAILABLE MODELS(Includes Individually-Coded Actuator Key and1⁄2" NPT Plastic Adapter)Part NumberAZ16-12zi-B1AZ16-03zi-B1AZ16-12zi-B1-1747AZ16-03zi-B1-1747AZ16-12zi-B1-2024AZ16-03zi-B1-2024AZ16-12zi-B1-2053AZ16-03zi-B1-2053DescriptionContacts (withactuator key inserted)1 NO & 2 NCStandard unit3 NCStandard unit withbuilt-in key actuator1 NO & 2 NCmagnet latch3 NCStandard unit withbuilt-in slot rubber1 NO & 2 NCseals on key actuator 3 NCStandard unit withbuilt-in ball-latched1 NO & 2 NCkey actuator3 NCMS AZ 15/16 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT(Eases installation and facilitatesadjustments due to guard misalignment)Part NumberM20-CGM20- 1 ⁄2"PM20- 1 ⁄2"MAZ15/16-CAP(3 per kit)#6-3/8 SPH(package of 6)#10-32 × 1 ⁄2" OWOH(package of 6)SZ16/335PL-M20-24VPL-M20-120VMS AZ 15/16-PMS AZ 15/16-R/PSuffix “-2177”AVAILABLE ACCESSORIESDescriptionCord grip (cable gland)Spare Plastic 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter(One supplied with each unit)Metal 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter (optional)Key entry closure caps(for unused entry slots)#6-3/8 Spanner Pan HeadTamper-Resistant Sheet Metal Screws(For use on AZ16zi housing terminal cover)#10-32 One-Way Oval HeadTamper-Resistant Machine Screws(For use in mounting actuator key)AZ16zi Lockout Device(accepts up to 6 padlocks)24VAC/DC LED Pilot Light Kit110VAC/DC Pilot Light KitAdjustable mounting kit for parallel mountingAdjustable mounting kit for parallel orperpendicular mountingFunnel entry adapter (Must be ordered withbase switch for factory assembly…seepage 20)TYPICAL INDIVIDUALLY-CODED KEYS1MS AZ 15/16-R/P(for parallel orperpendicular mounting)EXAMPLE OF INDIVIDUALLY-CODED KEYS15,000 codes provide extra securityin high-risk applicationsNew!MS AZ 15/16-P(for parallel mounting)19

AZ16zi TECHNICAL DATAHousingActuator KeyDegree of ProtectionTravel for Positive-BreakKey Ejection ForceInsertion ForceOperating TemperatureMechanical LifeConformity to StandardsKey Withdrawal SpeedMinimum Closing RadiusGlass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishingplasticStainless steelIP670.315 inches (8 mm)3 N (0.7 pounds)Approx. 15N (3.3 pounds)–22°F to +175°F1 million operationsUL & CSA, BGA600, P3002 meters/second (maximum)9.8" (250mm)SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS132131142232AZ16-12zi05,55,6813-1421-2231-32ContactsContact ConfigurationContact GapSwitching ActionContact RatingRated Insulation VoltageThermal Current RatingCurrent RatingRated ImpulseWithstand VoltageShort Circuit ProtectionType Terminals*Fine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically-separated contactbridges2 × 2 mmSlow-action, positive-breakNC contactsA600500VAC10A (300VAC)6A @ 120VAC4A @ 230VAC2.5V/230VAC (with M12x1 quickconnect)6kVFuse 6A (slow-blow)Screw terminals with self-liftingclamps for up to 2.5 mm 2(AWG13) wire*Optional plug-in M12x1 quick-connect available. Please consultfactory.AZ16-03zi11213112223205,55,58811-1221-2231-32“-2177” Funnel Entry Adapter(Order as part of base switch…e.g. AZ16-02z1-B1-2177)DIMENSIONS5,5.2211.4310.45.240,71.63mminch23.9401.58562.24166410,9.445220831,41.26281.1214.568.326.2420

AZ16zi INDIVIDUALLY-CODED ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS1Applications: harsh environments(coarse dirt, chips, flour…)For holding light to medium-weight guards closed21

SERIES AZ 200Pulse-Echo BasedNon-Contact Safety Interlock SwitchFeatures & Benefits• Tamper resistant … frequency-matched switch andactuator required for operation.• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.• Dual purpose handle … modern, ergonomic design—noadditional door handles are needed.• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …satisfy requirements of Safety Control Category 4.*See Note Below.• One-hand emergency release … hazardous area can beleft quickly and safely.• Switch and actuator do not protrude into dooropening … no risk of injury or damage from a protrudingactuator.• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility.DescriptionThe AZ 200 pulse-echo based non-contact safety interlock isdesigned for use with movable machine guards/access gateswhich must be closed for operator safety.The AZ 200 consists of an interlock switch and actuator unitwith door handle and optional emergency exit handle. Theactuator is always inserted into its housing, protecting theactuator and the operator against damage and injury. Utilizingpulse-echo sensor technology, the actuator and interlock canhave an offset of ±5 mm and the actuator still engages theinterlock. A sensor stimulates a coil in the actuator, which inturns sends a signal back to the sensor. The pulse-echotechnology provides diagnostic information and detects andindicates any misalignment at an early stage. Two differentactuator designs accommodate both sliding or hinged guards.The AZ 200 interlock is a dual channel design with two shortcircuitproof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch upto 250 mA. It features a choice of one or three electronicdiagnostic outputs. These diagnostic outputs signal errorsbefore the safety outputs are switched off, thus enabling acontrolled shutdown of the machine.With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring ofthe safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,AZ 200 safety interlocks with one diagnostic output can bewired in series without detriment to the control category.Series wired AZ 200s continue to fulfill the requirements ofControl Category 4 according to EN 954-1 with door detectionsensors (without the need of a second switch).Typical ApplicationsThe AZ 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switchon movable machine guards which, when open, expose theoperator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typicalapplications are the interlocking of protective gratings, accesspanels and other movable guards. The AZ 200 is suitable forboth sliding guards and hinged guards.22New!AVAILABLE AZ 200 MODELS(Actuator ordered separately below)Model NumberDescriptionAZ200SK-1P2P 2-PNP safety outputs, without doordetection sensors, one diagnostic outputAZ200SK-T1P2P 2-PNP safety outputs, with doordetection sensors, one diagnostic outputAZ200SK-3P2P 2-PNP safety outputs, without doordetection sensors, three diagnostic outputsAZ200SK-T3P2P 2-PNP safety outputs, with doordetection sensors, three diagnostic outputsSensors available with M23 quick disconnect—Replace SK with ST incatalog number.Part number: SZ200Description: Lockout tag, up to 5 padlocksSafety Control Module RequirementsDual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductoroutputs. The internal function tests of the sensor cause theoutputs to periodically switch off for a millisecond. Thismust be tolerated by the control module. The followingSCHMERSAL safety control modules are recommendedfor this application: SRB 301 LCB, SRB 324 ST*Note: A safety control module may be required for resetfunction and/or feedback monitoring functions, aswell as increased output current requirements.

SERIES AZ 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONSAZ 200-B1 ACTUATOR FOR SLIDING DOORSAZ/AZM 200-B1-Leave blank (without emergencyexit handle)P0 (with emergency exit handle)Leave blank (withoutdoor detection sensor)T (with door detection sensor)L (Door hinge on left side)R (Door hinge on right side)Ordering example: To order an AZ 200 actuator handle assembly for a lefthand door, with door detection sensor and emergencyexit handle, order p/n AZ/AZM200-B1-LTP0AZ 200-B30 ACTUATOR FOR HINGED DOORSAZ/AZM 200-B30-ALeave blank (withoutdoor detection sensor)Leave blank (withoutemergency exit handle)P1 (with emergencyexit handle)T (with door detection sensor)L (Door hinge on left side)R (Door hinge on right side)Ordering example: To order an AZ 200 actuator handle assembly for a lefthand door, with door detection sensor and emergencyexit handle, order p/n AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1P1G11NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please seepage 178 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-Contact Safety Sensors” section.23

SERIES TZGDescriptionThe Series TZG is designed for use with movable machineguards/access gates which must be closed for operatorsafety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide asignificantly higher level of safety than conventional springdrivenswitches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. Andtheir tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simpletools, bent wires or other readily available means. Their IP67rating makes them ideal for interlocking safety guards inhostile environments.®Movable Machine GuardSafety Interlock SwitchFeatures & Benefits• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficultto defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reducesliability exposure.• Four optional key entry locations … rotatable actuatorhead provides installation versatility.• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuitinterruption upon actuator key removal.• High key retention force (5 pounds) … eliminatesinadvertent opening of guard due to shock/vibration.• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.• High-strength, galvanized-steel actuator key … toleratesmechanical abuse without damage.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates themost hostile environments.• Wide selection of actuating keys … to meet diverseapplication requirements.• Padlockable key … for added security during equipmentmaintenance.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … BG, UL, CSA.• Funnel-shaped key entry … forgiving of key misalignment.• Special types for food industry … please consult factory.OperationThe Series TZG electromechanical safety interlock switchconsists of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometricallyuniqueactuating key. The key is mounted to the movableguard. Upon opening of the guard the NC contact(s) areforced to open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanicallinkage with the actuating key. These positive-break NCcontacts assure circuit interruption (and machine stoppage)upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO contact closesupon key removal.)When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NCcontacts to close and the NO contact to re-open.Typical ApplicationsThe Series TZG is intended for use as a safety interlockswitch on movable machine guards which, when open,expose the operator/maintenance personnel to machinehazards. Typical applications are the interlocking of protectivegratings, access doors/gates, hinged covers, access panelsand other movable guards.24

TZG AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIESAVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Plastic Conduit Adapter.Actuator Keys Sold Separately)Part Number Contacts Description*TZG01.103TZG01.1101 NO & 1 NC2 NC*Field-rotatable for key entry from right, left or rear.DIMENSIONSKeyed interlock switchwith front* key entry andslow action contacts.Part NumberTZ/COTZ/CWTZ/CORTZ/CKTZ/CWRTZ/COF/HIS.1TZ/COF/HIS.2TZ/CORF/HIS.1TZ/CORF/HIS.2OPTIONAL ACTUATOR KEYSDescriptionStandard straight actuator key(13" minimum closing radius)Right-angled straight actuator key(11.8" minimum closing radius)Radial entry actuator key(11.8" minimum closing radius)Short straight actuator key(6.3" minimum closing radius)Right-angled bent actuator key(11.8" minimum closing radius)Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)(13.8" minimum closing radius)Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)(13.8" minimum closing radius)Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)(7.1" minimum closing radius)Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)(5.9" minimum closing radius)1Dimensional base for actuator25

TZG TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingActuator KeyGlass-fibre reinforced selfextinguishingthermoplasticGalvanized steel(defeat-resistant design)IP6720N (4.8 pounds)12.5mmApprox. 20N (4.8 pounds)Degree of ProtectionHolding ForceTravel for Positive-BreakForce to ReachPositive-BreakClosing ForceOperating TemperatureMechanical LifeShock ResistanceVibration ResistanceConformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660-100BG-GS-ET-15ULCSAMinimum Closing RadiusApprox. 10 N (2.4 pounds)–13°F to +158°F1 million operations (minimum)>30g / 18ms>15g / 10…200HzDependent upon actuator key used.Please see actuator key selectionchart.ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact GapContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageRated ImpulseWithstand VoltageType TerminalsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically separated contactbridges2 × 3.5 mm8A (250VAC)Slow-action, positive-break NCcontacts (TZG models)Snap-action, positive-break NCcontacts (TZGP models)10A (slow-blow) – TZG models6A (slow-blow) – TZGP models250VAC4kVScrew terminals with self-liftingclamps for up to 13 AWG solidwire (2.5mm 2 ) or 13 AWGstranded (1.5mm 2 ) wire26

TZG ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONSACTUATOR KEYSTZ/CO TZ/CW TZ/COR1TZ/CWR TZ/COF/HIS.1 TZ/COF/HIS.2TZ/CORF/HIS.1 TZ/CORF/HIS.2 TZ/CK27

SERIES SDGDescription®The Series SDG is designed for use with movable machineguards/access gates which must be closed for operatorsafety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide asignificantly higher level of safety than conventional springdrivenswitches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. Andtheir tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simpletools, bent wires or other readily available means. Their IP67rating makes them ideal for interlocking safety guards inhostile environments.Movable Machine GuardSafety Interlock SwitchFeatures & Benefits• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficultto defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reducesliability exposure.• Four optional key entry locations … rotatable actuatorhead provides installation versatility.• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuitinterruption upon actuator key removal.• Built-in retention force (1.2 pounds) … eliminatesinadvertent opening of guard due to shock/vibration.• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.• High-strength steel actuator key … tolerates mechanicalabuse without damage.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant metal housing … toleratesthe most hostile environments.• Wide selection of actuating keys … to meet diverseapplication requirements.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … BG, UL, CSA.• Funnel-shaped key entry … forgiving of key misalignment.• Other 2-contact configurations available … pleaseconsult factory.OperationThe Series SDG electromechanical safety interlock switchconsists of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometricallyuniqueactuating key. The key is mounted to the movableguard. Upon opening of the guard the NC contact(s) areforced to open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanicallinkage with the actuating key. These positive-break NCcontacts assure circuit interruption (and machine stoppage)upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO contact closesupon key removal.)When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NCcontacts to close and the NO contact to re-open.Typical ApplicationsThe Series SDG is intended for use as a safety interlockswitch on movable machine guards which, when open,expose the operator/maintenance personnel to machinehazards. Typical applications are the interlocking of protectivegratings, access doors/gates, hinged covers, access panelsand other movable guards.28

SDG AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIESPart Number Contacts Description*SDG01.1044SDG01.1103SDG01.1110AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Conduit Adapter.Actuator Keys Sold Separately)2 NO & 1 NC1 NO & 2 NC3 NCKeyed interlock switchwith front* key entry andslow action contacts.*Field-rotatable for key entry from right, left or rear. Units are suppliedwith tamper-resistant (one-way) screws to replace the standardscrews after rotating the actuator head for desired directionof key entry.Part NumberBOBOWBORBOWRBOF/HIS.1BOF/HIS.2OPTIONAL ACTUATOR KEYSDescriptionStandard straight actuator key(20" minimum closing radius)Right-angled straight actuator key(20" minimum closing radius)Radial entry actuator key(10" minimum closing radius)Right-angled bent actuator key(10" minimum closing radius)Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)(13.8" Minimum closing radius)Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)(13.8" Minimum closing radius)1DIMENSIONSM20x1M20x15.5mmM20x129

SDG TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingActuator KeyDegree of ProtectionCast aluminum with enamel paintSteel (chromated)(defeat-resistant design)IP67 (Switch housing)IP00 (Reversing and locking head)5N (1.2 pounds)12.5mmApprox. 5N (1.2 pounds)Holding ForceTravel for Positive-BreakForce to ReachPositive-BreakClosing ForceOperating TemperatureMechanical LifeShock ResistanceVibration ResistanceConformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660-100BG-GS-ET-15ULCSAMinimum Closing RadiusApprox. 5N (1.2 pounds)–13°F to +158°F1 million operations (minimum)>30g / 18ms>15g / 10…200HzDependent upon actuator key used.Please see actuator key selectionchart.ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact GapContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageRated ImpulseWithstand VoltageType TerminalsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically separated contactbridges2 × 3.5 mm8A (250VAC)Slow-action, positive-break NCcontacts10A (slow-blow)250VAC4kVScrew terminals with self-liftingclamps for up to 13 AWG solidwire (2.5mm 2 ) or 13 AWGstranded (1.5mm 2 ) wire30

SDG ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONSACTUATOR KEYSBOBOW1BORBOWRBOF/HIS.1BOF/HIS.231

SERIES AZ335Tamper-Resistant MovableMachine Guard Safety Interlock SwitchFeatures & Benefits• Rugged, corrosion-resistant die-cast aluminum housing… tolerates the most hostile environments.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruptionupon actuator key removal.• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simpletools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.• Eight optional key entry locations … depending uponmounting of rotatable mounting head.• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerant tomechanical abuse without damage.• Tapered key entry ports … tolerant to key misalignment.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, VDE,UL and CSA.• Lockout accessory … prevents key entry and switchactuation.• Optional M12x1 quick-connect … please consult factory.®DescriptionThe AZ335 Series is designed for use with movable machineguards/access gates which must be closed for operatorsafety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide asignificantly higher level of safety than conventional springdrivenswitches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. Andthe switch’s tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing withsimple tools, bent wires or other readily available means.Their rugged metal housing and IP67 rating make them idealfor interlocking safety guards in industrial and hostileenvironments.OperationThe AZ335 electromechanical safety interlock switch consistsof a rugged switch mechanism and a geometrically-uniqueactuating key. The key is mounted to the movable guard.Upon opening of the guard, the NC contact(s) are forced toopen through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical linkage withthe actuating key. These positive-break NC contacts assurecircuit interruption (and machine stoppage) upon removal ofthe actuator key. (The NO contacts close upon key removal.)When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NCcontact(s) to close, and the NO contacts to re-open.Typical ApplicationsThe AZ335 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch onmovable machine guards which, when open, expose theoperator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typicalapplications are the interlocking of protective gratings, accessdoors/panels, perimeter access gates, hinged covers andother movable guards on textile machinery, packagingequipment, machine tools, assembly machinery, robot workcells and food/chemical processing equipment.AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Adapter. Actuator keys sold separately)Part Number Contacts (with key inserted)AZ335-12ZRK 1 NO & 2 NCAZ335-03ZRK 3 NCNote: Available with optional M12x1 quick-connect.Please consult factory.OPTIONAL ACTUATOR KEYSPart NumberDescriptionAZ335/355-B1 Straight actuator key.AZ335/355-B1-2245 Standard actuator key with rubbergrommeted mounting holes.AZ335/355-B5 Right angle actuator key.AZ335/355-B6AZ335/355-B5-FlexAZ335/355-B6-FlexPart NumberAZ335/355-1990SZ16/335Adjustable short-radius actuator key.Floating standard actuator key (tolerant tox and y axis misalignment of ±5mm).Floating standard short-radius actuator key(tolerant to x and y axis misalignment of±5mm).ACCESSORIESDescriptionKey entry port covers (two-part package).Lockout device (prevents key entry andswitch actuation). Accepts up to six padlocks.32®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

AZ335 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingDiecast aluminum with bakedenamel finishActuator KeyStainless steel(defeat-resistant design)Degree of Protection IP67Travel for Positive-Break 10.7 mm (0.4 inches)Closing ForceApprox. 15 N (3.4 pounds)Operating Temperature –22°F to +195°FMechanical Life> 10 7 operationsKey Holding Force 30 N (7 pounds) (“R” models only)Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660-200BG-GS-ET-15UL & CSAMinimum Closing Radius B1 & B5 keys: 150mmB6, B5-Flex & B6-Flex keys: 100mmELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact GapContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageRated ImpulseWithstand VoltageType TerminalsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically separated contactbridges2 × 1.25mm (minimum)4A (230VAC)25A/230VAC (with optionalM12x1 quick-connect)Slow-action, positive-break NCcontactsFuse 6A (time-delay)500VAC6kVScrew terminals with self-liftingclamps for up to 13 AWGflexible stranded wire (2.5mm 2 )1DIMENSIONS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS361.42132131142232AZ335-12zrk1144.49602.36351.38AZ335-03zrk111230,51.2021315,30.2122327,30.29170.67301.1840,51 59M20381.5033

AZ335 INDIVIDUALLY-CODED ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONSACTUATOR KEYSAZ335/355-B1AZ335/355-B1-2245AZ335/355-B5AZ335/355-B5-FlexAZ335/355-B6AZ335/355-B6-Flexø34

1SaferbyDesign35

SERIES SHGVCable-less Keyed Mechanical Safety GuardInterlock with Key Transfer SystemFeatures & Benefits• Highly tamper resistant … difficult to defeat with simpletools, thereby reducing liability exposure.• Four optional key entry positions … provides installationversatility.• Three optional locking cylinder locations … providesinstallation versatility.• Corrosion resistant … tolerates hostile environments.• Funnel shaped entry … forgiving of mechanical actuatorkey misalignment• Low cost guard locking … eliminates wiring at the guard.• Meets rigid safety agency standards …Selector switch: UL, CSA, IEC, BG, VDEMechanical key locking device: IEC, BG, VDEDescriptionThe SHGV Series consist of a guard-mounted mechanicallocking device and a 2-position key operated selector switchfor control panel mounting. This unique key transfer systemassures the removal of power before allowing the accesscontrol guard to be open … without the need for electricalwiring at the interlocked machine guard location.OperationWhen the machine guard is open the transfer key (foroperating the 2-position selector switch) cannot be withdrawnfrom the guard locking mechanism.Upon closing of the guard, the mechanical actuator keypermits the transfer-key to be turned (locking the guard) andwithdrawn. The transfer-key can now be removed and insertedinto the 2-position selector switch, allowing it to be operated(e.g. power to be turned on) … trapping the transfer key in the“on” position.To unlock (open) the guard, the selector switch must beturned to the off position. The transfer-key can now bewithdrawn and inserted into the guard-locking mechanism forrelease of the mechanical actuator key and opening of theguard.The two lock barrel version allows the removal of a secondtransfer key when the mechanical actuator key has beenreleased. This second transfer key prevents the removal of the“power control” transfer key from the keyed interlock. Thus itcan be removed from the interlock by the operator to protectagainst the inadvertent start-up of the equipment.Part NumberSHGV/L1 (*) ESS21S2/103SHGV/R1 (*) ESS21S2/103SHGV/B1 (*) ESS21S2/103SHGV/LD1 (*) /(*) ESS21S2/103SHGV/RD1 (*) /(*) ESS21S2/103AVAILABLE MODELSLock Barrel LeftDescriptionLock Barrel RightLock Barrel RearLock Barrel Left & Lock Barrelin Front CoverLock Barrel Right & Lock Barrelin Front CoverIncludes guard device SHGV with standard BO actuatorelement, keyed selector switch ESS21S2, and contact blockEF103 ( 1NO/1NC)(*) Individual key identification code stamped on selectorswitch cylinder.Note:This system is recommended for applications in which thereis no residual motion or hazard after the removal of power.For applications in which there is residual motion or thepresence of a hazard immediately following the removal ofpower, a solenoid-locking console ( Model SVE) is recommended.Please consult factory.Typical ApplicationsRecommended for use where wiring directly to the movableguard is cost prohibitive or subject to damage due corrosivechemicals or other harsh environmental conditions.36®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

SERIES SHGV TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSProtection Class IP 65 (Housing) IEC/EN 60529IP 00 (Control Head) IEC/EN 60529Actuating Forces Insertion of actuating element - 15 NWithdrawal of actuating element - 5 NAmbient temperature - 25 °C to + 70 °CStorage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °CMaterial ALsi 12 painted signal red (RAL 3000)HousingSteel passivated withSHG CoverPerbunan seals(oil and gasoline resistant)Mechanical life 2 x 10 6 operating cyclesShock resistance > 30 x g / 18msVibration resistance > 15 x g/10 ... 200 HzClimatic resistance 40/91 to DIN 50015 FW 24 to DIN 50016ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSConformity to Standard IEC/EN 60947-5-1Protection Class IP 65 to IEC/EN 60529ContactsFine silverRated breaking capacity 230Vac/6A - 400VAC/4ARated operating current 230Vac/6A - 400VAC/4ARated insulation voltage 400VAC / 450VDCThermal test current 10 AUtilization CategoryAC-15; DC-13Max. fuse rating10 A (slow blow)Ambient temperature - 25 °C to + 80 °CSwitching frequency 6000 s/h1DIMENSIONAL DRAWING FOR SHGV GUARD LOCKING DEVICE37

SERIES AZ415DescriptionThe AZ415 Series is designed for movable machineguards/access gates which must be closed for operatorsafety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide asignificantly higher level of safety than conventional springdrivenswitches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. Andtheir tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simpletools, bent wires or other readily available means.Operation®The AZ415 electromechanical safety interlock switch consistsof a rugged switch mechanism and a geometrically-uniqueactuating key. The key is mounted to the movable guard.Upon opening of the guard, the NC contacts are forced toopen through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical linkage withthe actuating key. These NC contacts assure circuitinterruption (and machine stoppage) upon removal of theactuator key. (The NO contacts close upon key removal.)In the closed position, the guard is held shut by an adjustableball catch integral to the AZ415 housing.Tamper-Resistant MovableMachine Guard Safety Interlock SwitchFeatures & Benefits• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruptionupon key removal.• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.• High-strength, metal actuator key … tolerates mechanicalabuse without damage.• Rugged, enamel-coated metal housing … tolerates themost hostile environments.• Adjustable actuator key holding force up to 110 pounds… permits use of switch as door latch.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … UL, CSA, IEC,BG and VDE.ACTUATING KEYS & ACCESSORIESPart NumberDescriptionAZM415-B1AZM415-B2AZM415-B3AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Actuator key sold separately … see below)Part Number(AZ415 - Switch Block S1*/Switch Block S2)AZ415-11/11zpk(formerly p/n AZ415-22zpk)AZ415-11/02zpkAZ415-02/11zpkAZ415-02/02zpkAZ/AZM415-B4PSContact Configurationwith actuator key inserted(Switch Block S1*/Switch Block S2)Linear entry actuator keySmall radius x-axis entry actuator key (9.8"minimum closing radius)Small radius y-radius entry actuator key (9.8"minimum closing radius)Slide bolt actuator key2 NO / 2 NC1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NC2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC2 NC / 2 NC*Only Switch Block S1 has positive-break contacts.Typical ApplicationsThe AZ415 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch onmovable machine guards which, when open, expose theoperator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typicalapplications are the interlocking of protective gratings, accessdoors/gates, hinged covers, access panels and othermovable guards.Optional SafetyController.See Page 327.38®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

AZ415 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingDie-cast aluminum with blueenamel finishActuator KeyDie-cast aluminumDegree of Protection IP67Travel for Positive-Break 0.2 inches (5mm)Force to ReachDepending upon ball catch settingPositive-Break(3.5 pounds minimum)Actuator KeyAdjustable, 2.2 to 110 poundsHolding ForceOperating Temperature -13°F to +175°FMechanical Life1 million operationsConformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1BG-GS-ET-19VDE 0660-200Minimum Closing Radius 9.8" (250 mm) with B2 or B3actuating keyELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact GapContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageRated ImpulseWithstandType TerminalsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically separated contactbridges2mm x 2mm4A (230VAC)Slow-action, positive-break NCcontactsFuse 6A (slow-blow)250VAC4kVScrew terminals with self-liftingclamps for up to 1.5mm 2(15AWG) flexible stranded wire1DIMENSIONS (mm)863.39 8.31522.8760,52.38ø6,5.268,60.3436,51.441054.13461.8115.59261.028,6.34883.46M20ø11.43mminchWIRING DIAGRAM(AZ415-11/11 shown)39

AZ415 TECHNICAL DATAACTUATOR KEY DIMENSIONSB2 Actuating radiiFor hinged doors over the wide edgeof the actuatorB3 Actuating radiiFor hinged doors over the small edgeof the actuatorDowel holes are also provided in theactuator body. With the use of dowelpins the removal of the actuator can beprevented.By turning the adjusting screw “a,” theactuator can be brought into anydesired position.Both actuators can also be used onsliding doors.Recommended key clearancegreater than 3 mm> 3mm40

AZ415 TECHNICAL DATAACTUATOR KEY DIMENSIONS552.170-60-.24562.2011254.928.3518,569,52.749.352379.3322.8710

42SaferbyDesign

KEYED INTERLOCK SWITCHESWITH SOLENOID LATCHINGNew!2New!SwitchSeriesSELECTION GUIDEHousingMaterialEnvelopeDimensionsContactConfigurationsCatalogPageAZM170Glass-fiber,reinforced thermoplastic1 1 ⁄4" × 2 1 ⁄2" × 5"1NO/1NC, 1NO/2NC,2NO/2NC, 2NC, 3NC44AZM161New!AZM200Glass-fiber,reinforced thermoplasticGlass-fiber,reinforced thermoplastic1 1 ⁄4" × 3 1 ⁄2" × 5 1 ⁄8" 1NO/2NC & 1NO/1NC 501 3 ⁄4" × 9" × 2" 2 PNP 54New!MZM100Glass-fiber,reinforced thermoplastic1 3 ⁄4" × 7 1 ⁄4" × 1 3 ⁄4"2 PNP Safety Outputs1 Diagnostic Output56TZF/TZMGlass-fiber,reinforced thermoplastic1 1 ⁄2" × 4" × 5" 2 NO & 1 NC 58TKF/TKM Die-cast aluminum 2 1 ⁄2" × 3 1 ⁄2" × 8" 2 NO & 2 NC 62TZKAZM415Glass-fiber,reinforced thermoplasticDie-cast aluminum 2" × 5" × 5 1 ⁄2"AZS 2305 Fail-to-Safe Timer & FWS Fail-to-Safe Standstill Monitors1 3 ⁄4" × 2" × 7" 1 NO & 2 NC 662 NO & 2 NC3 NO & 3 NC707443

SERIES AZM170DescriptionThe AZM170 Series is designed for machines/work cellswhere access to a hazardous work area must be controlleduntil safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching featurepermits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,which may exist immediately after removal of power, haveabated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.The unit features independent actuator key (guard) positionand solenoid-latching pin position contacts. These permit theprevention of machine restart until the guard is closed andthe solenoid-latching pin is in the locked position.The AZM170 consists of an electromechanical safety interlockswitch joined to a solenoid-latching mechanism. Both thesafety switch and solenoid mechanism feature “positive-break”contacts. In addition the actuator key features a built-in latch(unlocked key holding force of 7 pounds), and an auxiliarymanual unlocking device … the latter provided to aid ininstallation and for use in the event of a power failure (whenusing the “unlocking by solenoid” model).Each unit is supplied with a cord grip and a cap to seal theunused key entry port in the solenoid-latching mechanism.Typical ApplicationsThe AZM170 is intended for use as a safety interlock switchon movable machine guards which must not be opened untildangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal ofpower, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typicalapplications are textile machines, stamping presses,articulating robot arms, mixing machines, metal workingequipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.®Solenoid-Latching Machine GuardSafety Interlock SwitchFeatures & Benefits• Compact design … only 1 1 ⁄4" × 3" × 4 1 ⁄4". Ideal where spaceis limited.• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simpletools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure interruption ofsafety circuit upon actuator key removal.• Two key entry locations … provide mounting flexibility.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, high-impact glass-fibrereinforced housing … tolerates the most hostileenvironments.• High-strength stainless steel actuator key … tolerant tomechanical abuse without damage.• Three styles of actuator key … accommodate a widevariety of movable guards.• Easy-to-wire screw terminals … facilitates fast installation.• “Power-on” or “Power-off” latching option … forapplication versatility.• Built-in manual unlatching release (via specialtriangular key) … for easier installation.• “Padlockable” key … for added security duringmaintenance.• Meets rigid IEC, UL, CSA, BG, VDE standards.• Units available with M12x1 quick-connect.(Please consult factory).Two optional key entrances44®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

AZM170 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIESAVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Order desired actuator key separately)Part NumberLocking via spring. Unlocking via energizing of solenoid.AZM170SK-11zrk-2197-*AZM170SK-02zrk-2197-*AZM170SK-12/00zrk-2197-*AZM170SK-11/11zrk-2197-*AZM170SK-02/01zrk-2197-*AZM170SK-02/10zrk-2197-*Locking via energizing of solenoid. Unlocking via spring.(See Note 1 below)AZM170SK-11zrka-*AZM170SK-02zrka-*AZM170SK-12/00zrka-*AZM170SK-11/11zrka-*AZM170SK-02/01zrka-*AZM170SK-02/10zrka-*Available Contacts(with actuator key inserted)1 NO & 1 NC2 NC1 NO & 2 NC2 NO & 2 NC3 NC1 NO & 2 NC1 NO & 1 NC2 NC1 NO & 2 NC2 NO & 2 NC3 NC1 NO & 2 NCIndividually-coded key models available. (Model AZM170zi).(For extra security in “high-risk” applications.)*Please specify solenoid operating voltage via the addition of oneof the following suffix codes:VoltageAdd Suffix24VAC/DC-24VAC/DC115VAC-115VAC230VAC-230VACNote: AZM170SK-xx/yy versions are available as 24VAC/DC only.Example: AZM170sk-11zrk-24VAC/DC designates a switch witha 24VAC/DC solenoid which unlocks upon energizingof solenoid.AZ17/170-B1AZ17/170-B5ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIESPart NumberAZM170-B6AZ17/170-B11AZ17/170-B15AZ17/170-B1-2245AZM-KEYMS AZM 170-PMS AZM 170-R/PDescriptionStandard key (7.87" minimum closing radius)Right-angle key (7.87" minimum closingradius)Flexible, close-radius key (1.97" minimumclosing radius)Elongated standard straight key (7.87" minimumclosing radius)Elongated right-angle key (7.87" minimumclosing radius)Standard straight key with vibration-resistantmounting (7.87" minimum closing radius)Solenoid latch bypass/override key(for locking via spring models only)Adjustable mounting kit for parallel mountingAdjustable mounting kit for parallel orperpendicular mountingAZS2305 Fail-to-Safe Timer (Please see page 74)FWS1205B Fail-to-Safe Standstill Monitor (Page 76)MS mounting kits require the use of -B6 keysMS AZM 170 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT(Eases installation and facilitatesadjustments due to guard misalignment)MS AZM 170-P(for parallel mounting)2Note 1: Use of this model permits the guard to beopened in the event of a power failure. Generallyaccepted safety standards/practices suggest thismodel only be used after conducting a thoroughrisk evaluation in the context of the application.MS AZM 170-R/P(for parallel orperpendicular mounting)Solenoid-latch bypass/override key(for locking via spring models only)45

AZM170 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingGlass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishingthermoplasticStainless steelIP6730N (7 pounds)Actuator KeyDegree of ProtectionUnlocked Key HoldingForceTravel for Positive-BreakClosing ForceLocking ForceOperating TemperatureSolenoid OperatingTemperatureMechanical Life> 10 6 operationsConformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660-200BG-GS-ET, EN 1088UL & CSAMinimum Closing Radius11 mm (0.440 inches)Approx. 12N (2.7 pounds)Approx. 1000N (225 pounds)–22°F to +175°F–7°F to +140°F1.97" (with B6 actuating key)7.87" (with B1, B5, B11 and B15actuating key)ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Isolation VoltageType Terminals*Solenoid Supply VoltagesFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically separated contactbridges4A/230VACSlow-action, positive-break NCcontacts6A (time-delay)250VScrew terminals24VDC/AC110VAC 40-60 Hz230VAC 40-60 HzMax. 10 Watts*Optional insulation displacement connection (IDC) or M12x1quick-connect terminations available. Please consult factory.SWITCHING DIAGRAMS &CONTACT SCHEMATICS(Power-to-unlock)AZM 170SK-11SWITCHING DIAGRAMS &CONTACT SCHEMATICS(Power-to-lock)AZM 170SK-11A1A2141322 2132AZM 170SK-02AZM 170SK-02A1A2121122 2132Note:Above diagrams are with actuator keyinserted and solenoid de-energized.Note:Above diagrams are with actuator keyinserted and solenoid de-energized.46

AZM170 TECHNICAL DATASWITCHING DIAGRAMS &CONTACT SCHEMATICS(Power-to-unlock)AZM 170SK-12/00zrkSWITCHING DIAGRAMS &CONTACT SCHEMATICS(Power-to-lock)AZM 170SK-12/00zrka2AZM 170SK-11/11zrkAZM 170SK-11/11zrkaAZM 170SK-02/01zrkAZM 170SK-02/01zrkaAZM 170SK-02/10zrkAZM 170SK-02/10zrkaNote: Above diagrams are with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.47

48AZM170 TECHNICAL DATADIMENSIONS1084.2524.9415.59903.5423.9117.678,2.32ca. 24.9476,53.01311.22ø 4,2.17ø4-10.16-.39451.77M16301.188.3122.81ACTUATOR KEYS301.18 22.87 20.7923.912.0810.40331.304,3.175,5.27AZ17/170-B1301.18301.1822.874,3.1725.9820.7912.4723.9116.632.08481.89AZ17/170-B15301.18 22.87 20.798.3123.9112.472.08361.417,5.3013.514,3.17AZ17/170-B5281.1012.4711.437.2824.944.16321.2620822.87301.1820.7923.91baabAZM170-B6301.18 22.87 20.7923.912.0860,52.3837,51.48331.304,3.17AZ17/170-B11ø11.4318.718.3113.51ø4,2.1723.91361.42301.18AZ17/170-B1-2245mminchM20

2SaferbyDesign49

AZM161Solenoid-Latching Safety Interlock SwitchDescriptionThe AZM161 Series is designed for machines/work cellswhere access to a hazardous work area must be controlleduntil safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching featurepermits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,which may exist immediately after removal of power, haveabated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.The unit features independent actuator key (guard) positionand solenoid-latching monitoring contacts. There is a mechanicallinkage preventing the solenoid position contacts fromchanging unless the key is inserted (guard closed).The AZM161 consists of an electromechanical safety interlockswitch section with “positive-break” NC contacts and anactuator key. In addition, the solenoid mechanism features 1NO and 2 NC solenoid-latching monitoring contacts, and anauxiliary manual unlocking device … the latter provided to aidin installation and for use in the event of a power failure (whenusing the “unlocking by solenoid” model).OperationThe AZM161 electromechanical safety interlock switchassembly consists of a rugged switch-solenoid-latchingmechanism and a geometrically-unique locking actuator key.The switch actuating key is typically mounted to a movablemachine guard.®When the guard is closed, the actuating key is held in positionby the solenoid-latching mechanism. The guard may only beopened by energizing or de-energizing (depending uponmodel) the solenoid-latching mechanism.Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s “positive-break” NCcontacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contactsclose upon key removal.The machine is prevented from starting until the actuating keyis inserted (guard is closed) and the solenoid has locked it inthe closed position.Features & Benefits• Solenoid-locking design … controls access to hazardousareas until safe conditions exist.• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simpletools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruptionupon actuator key removal.• Conditional “safe” outputs … actuating key must be fullyinserted and solenoid must be actuated to lock key before“closed” safety signal is provided.• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmentalrequirements.• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … toleratesmechanical abuse without damage.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostileenvironments.• Four optional key entry locations … provide installationflexibility.• Independent actuator key position and locking pinposition monitoring contacts … provide a higher degreeof safety.• Available in “solenoid-locking” and “solenoidunlocking”models … for application versatility.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, ULand CSA.• Wide selection of accessories … to meet diverseapplication requirements.Typical ApplicationsThe AZM161 is intended for use as a safety interlock switchon movable machine guards which must not be opened untildangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal ofpower, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typicalapplications are textile machines, stamping presses,articulating robot arms, mixing machines, metal workingequipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.Optional Safety Controller (see page 327) andStandstill Monitor (see pages 74 & 76).50

AZM161 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIESAVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Plastic Adapter. Actuatorkey sold separately)Part Number Contacts DescriptionAZM161SK-12/12rk- 2NO & 4 NC Actuating key locked byspring and unlocked byenergizing solenoid.AZM161SK-12/12rka- 2NO & 4 NC Actuating key locked byenergizing solenoid andunlocked by spring. (SeeNote 1 below)Please specify solenoid operating voltage via addition of one of thefollowing suffix codes:VoltageAdd Suffix24VAC/DC-24VAC/DC110/230VAC-110/230VACExample: AZM161SK-12/12rk-24VAC/DCAdd suffix “T” after the “k” for Manual Emergency ReleaseNote 1: Use of this model permits the guard to be openedin the event of a power failure. Generally acceptedsafety standards/practices suggest this modelonly be used after conducting a thorough riskevaluation in the context of the application.®is a trademark of SCHMERSALAZM161-B1AZM161-B6AVAILABLE KEYS & ACCESSORIESfor AZM161 Keyed-Interlock SwitchesPart NumberAZM161-B1EAZM161-B6-2177AZM-KeyM16-CGDescriptionStandard actuating keyStandard actuating key with heavy-dutymounting bracketSmall radius actuating keyFunnel entry adapter with elongatedflexible-movement actuating keySolenoid-latch bypass keyCord grip (cable gland)M16- 1 ⁄2"P Plastic 1 ⁄2" NPT adapterM16- 1 ⁄2"M Metal 1 ⁄2" NPT adapterPL-M16-24VPL-M16-120VAdd suffix -1637to basic partnumberMS AZM 161-PMS AZM 161-R/P24VAC/DC pilot light kit120VAC/DC pilot light kitGold contactsAdjustable mounting kit for parallel mountingAdjustable mounting kit for parallel orperpendicular mountingAZS2305 Fail-to-Safe Timer (Please see page 74)FWS1205B Fail-to-Safe Standstill Monitor (Page 76)MS mounting kits require the use of -B6 keys2MS AZM 161 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT(Eases installation and facilitatesadjustments due to guard misalignment)Solenoid-latch bypass key(for locking via spring models)MS AZM 161-R/P(for parallel orperpendicular mounting)MS AZM 161-P(for parallel mounting)51

AZM161 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingGlass-fibre reinforced selfextinguishingthermoplasticActuator KeyStainless steel(defeat-resistant design)Degree of Protection IP67Unlocked Holding Force 30N (7 pounds)Travel for Positive-Break 8mm (0.315 inches)Force to Reach10N (Approx. 2.4 pounds)Positive-BreakClosing ForceApprox. 15 N (3.4 pounds)Operating Temperature –13°F to +104°FMechanical Life1 million operationsConformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660-200BG-GS-ET-15ULCSASolenoid Locking ForceKey Return ForceMinimum Closing Radius2,000N (440 pounds)0N5.9" (150mm) with B1 and B1Eactuating key3.7" (95mm) with B6 actuating keyELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsFine silverContact Configuration Double-pole, double-break withelectrically separated contactbridgesContact Gap2 × 2 mm (minimum)Contact Rating4A (230VAC)Switching ActionSlow-action, positive-break NCcontactsShort Circuit Protection Fuse 6A (time-delay)Rated Insulation Voltage 250VACRated Impulse6kVWithstand VoltageType Terminals*Screw terminals with self-liftingclamps for up to 13 AWG flexiblestranded wire (2.5mm 2 )Available Solenoid24VDC, 110VDC, 230VDCSupply Voltages (Vs) 24VAC/50Hz115VAC/60Hz230VAC/50HzSolenoid Power10W (maximum)ConsumptionSolenoid Duty Cycle 100%Solenoid Pull-in Voltage (0.85 to 1.1) VsSolenoid Drop-out Voltage (0.2 to 0.75) Vs*Optional cage clamp terminations available.Please consult factory.SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS (Solenoid-mechanism not energized)AZM 161SK-12/12rkAZM 161SK-12/12rka52Note: Above diagrams are with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.

AZM161 TECHNICAL DATADIMENSIONS (Switch & Actuator Keys)8.31401.57783.07722.83Ø 4.18291.14301.18301.187.28903.5418.715,5.22M16(AZM161SK-12/12… only)M16M161305.12562.20301.1810.39ø 5,5.22562.205.240 +- 01.57562.2016.6332,71.2932,71.29301.1814.5552mminchAZM161-B1 AZM161-B1E AZM161-B6b2.08.20ø5,5.22ø10,5.4111a16.63.43271.062.08271.062.08ø5,5.22401.57ab53

SERIES AZM 200New!Pulse-Echo BasedNon-Contact Solenoid InterlockFeatures & Benefits• Solenoid locking design … controls access to hazardousareas until safe conditions exist.• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.• Dual purpose handle … unlatches and opens guard—noadditional door handles are needed.• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …satisfy requirements of Safety Control Category 4.*See Note Below.• One-hand emergency release … hazardous area can beleft quickly and safely—even during a power failure.• Switch and actuator do not protrude into dooropening … no risk of injury or damage from a protrudingactuator.• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility.DescriptionThe AZM 200 Series is designed for machine/work cellswhere access to a hazardous work area must be controlleduntil safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching featurepermits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,which may exist immediately after removal of power, haveabated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.The AZM 200 consists of a solenoid-latching interlock andactuator unit with door handle and optional emergency exithandle. The actuator is always inserted into its housing,protecting the actuator and the operator against damage andinjury. Utilizing pulse-echo sensor technology, the actuatorand interlock can have an offset of ±5 mm and the actuatorstill engages the interlock.Due to the one-hand operation of the emergency exit handle,the hazardous area can be left quickly and safely—even duringa power failure (when using the “unlock by power” model).The solenoid interlock is a dual channel design with twoshort-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which canswitch up to 250 mA.With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring ofthe safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,multiple AZM 200 solenoid interlocks can be wired in serieswithout detriment to the control category. Series wired AZM200s continue to fulfill the requirements of Control Category 4according to EN 954-1 with door detection sensors (withoutthe need of a second switch).Typical ApplicationsThe AZM 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switchon movable machine guards which must not be opened untildangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal ofpower, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typicalapplications are textile machines, stamping machines,metal working equipment, printing presses andpackaging machines.54AVAILABLE AZM 200 MODELS(Actuator ordered separately below)Model NumberDescriptionLock by Spring, Power to unlockAZM200SK-1P2P 2-PNP safety outputs, without doordetection sensors, one signaling outputAZM200SK-T1P2P 2-PNP safety outputs, with doordetection sensors, one signaling outputPower to lockAZM200SK-1P2Pa 2-PNP safety outputs, without doordetection sensors, one signaling outputAZM200SK-T1P2Pa 2-PNP safety outputs, with doordetection sensors, one signaling outputSensors available with M23quick disconnect—ReplaceSK with ST in catalog number.Note: If switch is ordered withdoor detection sensor(T) the actuator mustalso be ordered as theT version.Part number: SZ200Description: Lockout tag, upto 5 padlocksSafety Control Module RequirementsDual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductoroutputs. The internal function tests of the sensor cause theoutputs to periodically switch off for a millisecond. Thismust be tolerated by the control module. The followingSCHMERSAL safety control modules are recommendedfor this application: SRB 301 LCB, SRB 324 ST*Note: A safety control module may be required for resetfunction and/or feedback monitoring functions, aswell as increased output current requirements.

SERIES AZM 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONSAZM 200-B1 ACTUATOR FOR SLIDING DOORSAZM 200-B30 ACTUATOR FOR HINGED DOORSAZ/AZM 200-B1-AZ/AZM 200-B30-AG1Leave blank (without emergencyexit handle)P0 (with emergency exit handle)Leave blank (withoutdoor detection sensor)T (with door detection sensor)L (Door hinge on left side)R (Door hinge on right side)Ordering example: To order an AZM 200 actuator handle assembly for aleft hand door, with door detection sensor andemergency exit handle, order p/n AZ/AZM200-B1-LTP0Leave blank (withoutdoor detection sensor)Leave blank (withoutemergency exit handle)P1 (with emergencyexit handle)T (with door detection sensor)L (Door hinge on left side)R (Door hinge on right side)Ordering example: To order an AZM 200 actuator handle assembly for a lefthand door, with door detection sensor and emergencyexit handle, order p/n AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1P12NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please seepage 184 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-Contact Safety Sensors” section.55

SERIES MZM 100Non-Contact Magnetic-Latching InterlockFeatures & Benefits• Magnetic-latching design … controls access to hazardousareas until safe conditions exist (100 lbs. locked holdingforce).• Forced-closed operating principle … no mechanical weardue to non-contact design.• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …satisfy requirements of Safety Control Category 4.*See Note Below.• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 200 m.• Automatic magnetic latch (35 N) … no mechanicallatching required (“r” version only).• Smooth surfaces allow for easy cleaning … ideal wherehigh hygienic standards need to be maintained.• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility.New!DescriptionThe MZM 100 Series is designed for machine/work cellswhere access to a hazardous work area must be controlleduntil safe conditions exist. Their magnetic-latching featurepermits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,which may exist immediately after removal of power, haveabated.The MZM 100 consists of a magnetic-latching interlock andactuator unit. An electromagnet is utilized to generate a 500 Nholding force. An integrated pulse-echo based sensor detectsand monitors the position of the safety guard. This sensortechnology permits an offset between the actuator and interlockof ±5 mm vertical and ±3 mm horizontal.The MZM100 magnetic-latching interlock is a dual channeldesign with two short-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each ofwhich can switch up to 250 mA. The holding force is permanentlyelectronically measured and monitored. If the holdingforce drops below 500 N, the safety outputs are not enabled,recognizing a dirty interlock.With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring ofthe safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,MZM 100 magnetic-latching interlocks can be wired in serieswithout detriment to the control category. Series wired MZM100s continue to fulfill the requirements of Control Category 4according to EN 954-1 (without the need of a second switch).Typical ApplicationsThe MZM 100 is intended for use as a safety interlock switchon movable machine guards which must not be opened untildangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal ofpower, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typicalapplications are textile machines, stamping machines, foodprocessing equipment, metal working equipment, wood workingand packaging machines.AVAILABLE MZM 100 MODELS & ACCESSORIES(Accessories ordered separately)Model NumberDescriptionPower to lockMZM100ST-1P2Pa 2-PNP safety outputs,1 diagnostic outputMZM100ST-1P2Pra 2-PNP safety outputs,1 diagnostic output, with latchingAccessoriesMZM100-B1MS MZM 100-WM23-9PM23-9P-5mActuatorMounting SetM23x1, 9 pin female connectorM23x1, 9 pin female connector,5 m cableSafety Control Module RequirementsDual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductoroutputs. The internal function tests of the sensor cause theoutputs to periodically switch off for a millisecond. Thismust be tolerated by the control module. The followingSCHMERSAL safety control modules are recommendedfor this application: SRB 301 LCB, SRB 324 ST*Note: A safety control module may be required for resetfunction and/or feedback monitoring functions, aswell as increased output current requirements.56

SERIES MZM 100 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingFiberglass reinforced thermoplasticDegree of Protection IP67Unlocked Holding Force 35N (7 pounds) (“r” version only)Magnetic Holding Force 500N (112 pounds)Operating Temperature –25°C to +55°CStorage Temperature –25°C to +85°CResponse Time≤ 100msVibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mmShock Resistance 30g/11msMechanical Life1 million operationsMounting40mm profilesConformity to Standards CE BGEN 60947-5-1 UL/CSAEN 954-1IEC 61508ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSMode of Operation Magentic & InductiveRated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%Rated Operating Current 1.0ANo Load Current 0.5AResidual Current≤ 0.5mARated Impulse0.8kVWithstand VoltageRated Insulation Voltage 32 VDCSafety Outputs(2) PNP, short-circuit proofSafety Output0.25A per outputOperating CurrentSafety OutputMax. 4V below ratedOperating Voltage operating voltageSignaling OutputPNP, short-circuit proofSignaling Output Max. 0.05AOperating CurrentSignaling OutputMax. 4V below ratedOperating Voltage operating voltageTerminationConnector M23x12NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please seepage 190 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-Contact Safety Sensors” section.57

SERIES TZF/TZMDescriptionThe TZF/TZM Series is designed for machines/work cellswhere access to a hazardous work area must be controlleduntil safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching featurepermits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,which may exist immediately after removal of power, haveabated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.The unit features independent actuator key (guard) positionand solenoid-latching monitoring contacts. These permit theprevention of machine restart until the guard is closed andthe solenoid-latching pin is in the locked position.The TZF/TZM Series consists of an electromechanical safetyinterlock switch with “positive-break” contacts and a lockingactuator key. In addition, the TZFS model features an auxiliarymanual unlocking device … the latter provided to aid ininstallation and for use in the event of a power failure (whenusing the “unlocking by solenoid” model).Operation®The TZF/TZM Series of electromechanical safety interlockswitch assembly consists of a rugged switch, a solenoidoperatedlatching mechanism, and a geometrically-uniqueactuator key. The switch actuating key is typically mounted toa movable machine guard.When the guard is closed, the actuating key is held in positionby the latching mechanism. The guard may only be opened byenergizing or de-energizing (depending upon model) thelatching mechanism.Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s “positive-break” NCcontacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contactsclose upon key removal.The solenoid-latching mechanism circuit features a NO and aNC contact which permit monitoring its status. This NCcontact is wired in series with the NC contact in the safetyswitch circuit. Thus the machine is prevented from startinguntil the actuating key is inserted (guard is closed) and thesolenoid has locked it in the closed position.Heavy-Duty Solenoid-LatchingSafety Interlock SwitchFeatures & Benefits• Solenoid-locking & spring-locking designs … controlsaccess to hazardous areas until safe conditions exist.• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simpletools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruptionupon actuator key removal.• Conditional “safe” outputs … actuating key must be fullyinserted and solenoid must be actuated to lock key before“closed” safety signal is provided.• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmentalrequirements.• High-strength, galvanized-steel actuator key … toleratesmechanical abuse without damage.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostileenvironments.• Three optional key entry locations … rotatable actuatorhead provides installation versatility.• Independent actuator key position and locking pinposition monitoring contacts … provide a higher degreeof safety.• Padlockable key … for added security during equipmentmaintenance.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … BG, UL, CSA.• Wide selection of actuating keys … to meet diverseapplication requirements.• Special types for food industry … please consult factory.Typical ApplicationsThe TZF/TZM Series is intended for use as a safety interlockswitch on movable machine guards which must not beopened until dangerous conditions, which may exist after theremoval of power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheeloverrun, spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc.Typical applications are textile machines, stamping presses,articulating robot arms, mixing machines, metal workingequipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.58®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

SERIES TZF/TZM AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIESAVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Plastic Conduit Adapter and TZ/CO Standard Actuator key)Part Number Contacts DescriptionTZFCS/96-*TZMC/96-*2NC & 2 NO(NC contactsin series)2NC & 2 NO(NC contactsin series)*Please specify solenoid operating voltage viaaddition of one of the following suffix codes:Voltage Add Suffix24VDCNo Suffix115VAC -115230VAC -230Example: TZMC/96-115Actuating key locked by spring and unlocked by energizing solenoidwith right-side key entry. (Field-rotatable for entry from front or rear).Actuating key locked by energizing solenoid and unlocked by springwith right-side key entry. (Field-rotatable for entry from front or rear).(See Note 1 below)Note 1: Use of this model permits the guard to beopened in the event of a power failure.Generally accepted safety standards/practicessuggest this model only be used after conductinga thorough risk evaluation in the context ofthe application.2OPTIONAL ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIESPart NumberDescriptionTZ/COTZ/CWTZ/CORTZ/CKTZ/CWRTZ/COF/HIS.1TZ/COF/HIS.2TZ/CORF/HIS.1TZ/CORF/HIS.2TZ-69TZ-75AZS2305FWS1205BStandard straight actuator key (13" minimumclosing radius)Right-angled straight actuator key (11.8" minimumclosing radius)Radial entry actuator key (11.8" minimum closingradius)Short straight actuator key (6.3" minimum closingradius)Right-angled bent actuator key (11.8" minimumclosing radius)Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)(13.8" minimum closing radius)Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)(13.8" minimum closing radius)Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)(7.1" minimum closing radius)Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)(5.9" minimum closing radius)Straight safety interlock auxiliary release key (forTZFCS/96 models only)Right-angled safety interlock auxiliary release key(for TZFCS/96 models only)Fail-to-Safe Timer (Please see page 74)Fail-to-Safe Standstill Monitor (Page 76)59

SERIES TZF/TZM TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingGlass-fibre reinforced selfextinguishingthermoplasticActuator KeyGalvanized steel(defeat-resistant design)Degree of Protection IP67Unlocked Holding Force 20N (4.8 pounds)Travel for Positive-Break 14.5 mmForce to Reach20N (Approx. 4.8 pounds)Positive-BreakClosing ForceApprox. 10 N (2.4 pounds)Operating Temperature –13°F to +104°FMechanical Life2 million operations (minimum)Shock Resistance 30g / 11msVibration Resistance 20g / 10…55HzConformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660-100BG-GS-ET-15ULCSASolenoid Locking Force 1,700N (380 pounds)Minimum Closing Radius Dependent upon actuator key used.Please see actuator key selectionchart.ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact GapContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageRated ImpulseWithstand VoltageType TerminalsAvailable SolenoidVoltagesFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically separated contactbridgesGuard monitoring: 2 × 3.5 mmSolenoid monitoring: 2 × 3 mm8A (250VAC)Slow-action, positive-break NCcontacts10A (slow-blow)250VAC4kVScrew terminals with self-liftingclamps for up to 13 AWG solidwire (2.5mm 2 ) or 13 AWGstranded (1.5mm 2 ) wire24VDC115VAC230VACSolenoid Power8.8W (maximum)ConsumptionSolenoid Duty Cycle 100%WIRING DIAGRAM*DIMENSIONS12 213334E2(-)24VDCE1(+)21434322444411331234* Actuating key not inserted and solenoid unlocked.M20x1TZ/69Three-square socketwrench for versionsTZFCS…(supplied)60

SERIES TZF/TZM ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONSACTUATOR KEYSTZ/CO TZ/CW TZ/COR2TZ/CWR TZ/COF/HIS.1 TZ/COF/HIS.2TZ/CORF/HIS.1 TZ/CORF/HIS.2 TZ/CK61

SERIES TKF/TKMDescription®The TKF/TKM Series is designed for machines/work cellswhere access to a hazardous work area must be controlleduntil safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching featurepermits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,which may exist immediately after removal of power, haveabated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.The unit features independent actuator key (guard) positionand solenoid-latching monitoring contacts. These permit theprevention of machine restart until the guard is closed andthe solenoid-latching pin is in the locked position.The TKF/TKM Series consists of an electromechanical safetyinterlock switch with “positive-break” contacts and a lockingactuator key. In addition, the TKFS model features an auxiliarymanual unlocking device … the latter provided to aid ininstallation and for use in the event of a power failure (whenusing the “unlocking by solenoid” model).Heavy-Duty Solenoid-LatchingSafety Interlock SwitchFeatures & Benefits• Solenoid-locking & spring-locking designs … controlsaccess to hazardous areas until safe conditions exist.• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simpletools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruptionupon actuator key removal.• Conditional “safe” outputs … actuating key must be fullyinserted and solenoid must be actuated to lock key before“closed” safety signal is provided (Series TKM).• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmentalrequirements.• High-strength, galvanized-steel actuator key … toleratesmechanical abuse without damage.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant metal housing … tolerateshostile environments.• Three optional key entry locations … rotatable actuatorhead provides installation versatility.• Independent actuator key position and locking pinposition monitoring contacts … provide a higher degreeof safety.• Padlockable key … for added security during equipmentmaintenance.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … BG, UL, CSA.• Wide selection of actuating keys … to meet diverseapplication requirements.• Special types available for concealed installation …please consult factory.Typical ApplicationsThe TKF/TKM Series is intended for use as a safety interlockswitch on movable machine guards which must not beopened until dangerous conditions, which may exist after theremoval of power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheeloverrun, spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc.Typical applications are textile machines, stamping presses,articulating robot arms, mixing machines, metal workingequipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.OperationThe TKF/TKM Series of electromechanical safety interlockswitch assembly consists of a rugged switch, a solenoidoperatedlatching mechanism, and a geometrically-uniqueactuator key. The switch actuating key is typically mounted toa movable machine guard.When the guard is closed, the actuating key is held in positionby the latching mechanism. The guard may only be opened byenergizing or de-energizing (depending upon model) thelatching mechanism.Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s “positive-break” NCcontacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contactsclose upon key removal.The solenoid-latching mechanism circuit features a NO and aNC contact which permit monitoring its status. This NCcontact is wired in series with the NC contact in the safetyswitch circuit. Thus the machine is prevented from startinguntil the actuating key is inserted (guard is closed) and thesolenoid has locked it in the closed position.62®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

SERIES TKF/TKM AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIESAVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Conduit Adapter. Actuator key sold separately)Part Number Solenoid Operating Voltage Contacts DescriptionTKF/90TKF/*/9024VDC115/230VAC (50/60Hz)2NC & 2 NO(NC contactsin series)“Series” actuating key locked by spring and unlocked byenergizing solenoidTKM/90TKM/*/90TKF/R/90TKF/R*/9024VDC115/230VAC (50/60Hz)24VDC115/230VAC (50/60Hz)2NC & 2 NO(NC contactsin series)2NC & 2 NO(NC contactsin series)“Series” actuating key locked by energizing solenoid andunlocked by spring (See Note 1 below)“Parallel” actuating key (for right-hand insertion) lockedby spring and unlocked by energizing solenoid2TKM/R/90TKM/R*/9024VDC115/230VAC (50/60Hz)2NC & 2 NO(NC contactsin series)“Parallel” actuating key (for right-hand insertion)locked by energizing solenoid and unlocked by spring(See Note 1 below)TKF/L/90TKF/L*/9024VDC115/230VAC (50/60Hz)2NC & 2 NO(NC contactsin series)“Parallel” actuating key (for left-hand insertion) lockedby spring and unlocked by energizing solenoidTKM/L/90TKM/L*/9024VDC115/230VAC (50/60Hz)2NC & 2 NO(NC contactsin series)“Parallel” actuating key (for left-hand insertion)locked by energizing solenoid and unlocked by spring(See Note 1 below)* Insert 115 for 115VAC modelInsert 230 for 230VAC modelNote 1: Use of this model permits the guard to be opened in the event of a power failure. Generally accepted safety standards/practices suggest this model only be used after conducting a thorough risk evaluation in the context of the application.Part NumberACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIESDescriptionTK/R/90TK/RF/90TK/P/90TK/PF/90AZS2305FWS1205BStandard “Series” actuator key (For sliding guardsonly)“Series” actuator key with telescopic section (Forsliding guards only)“Parallel” actuator key for right- or left-handinsertion (10” minimum closing radius)“Parallel” actuator key (with telescopic section) forright- or left-hand insertion (10” minimum closingradius)Fail-to-Safe Timer (Please see page 74)Fail-to-Safe Standstill Monitor (Page 76)63

SERIES TKF/TKM TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingCast aluminum, enamel finishActuator Key &Steel, chromatedLocking Bolt(defeat-resistant design)Degree of Protection IP67Unlocked Holding Force 5N (1.2 pounds)Travel for Positive-Break 72 mm (“Series” actuator)38 mm (“Parallel” actuator)Force to Reach5N (Approx. 1.2 pounds)Positive-BreakClosing ForceApprox. 10 N (2.4 pounds)Operating Temperature 32°F to 120°FMechanical Life1 million operations (minimum)Shock Resistance 30g / 18msVibration Resistance 20g / 2…100HzConformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660-100BG-GS-ET-15ULCSASolenoid Locking Force 2,000N (450 pounds)Minimum Closing Radius 250mm (“Parallel” actuator)ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact GapContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageRated ImpulseWithstand VoltageType TerminalsAvailable SolenoidVoltagesFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically separated contactbridgesGuard monitoring: 2 × 3 mmSolenoid monitoring: 2 × 2 mm8A (250VAC)Slow-action, positive-break NCcontacts10A (slow-blow)250VAC4kVScrew terminals with self-liftingclamps for up to 13 AWG solidwire (2.5mm 2 ) or 13 AWGstranded (1.5mm 2 ) wire24VDC115VAC/230VACSolenoid Power12.0W (maximum)ConsumptionSolenoid Duty Cycle 100%DIMENSIONS64

SERIES TKF/TKM ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONSACTUATOR KEYS“Series” TK/R/90(For sliding guards only)“Series” TK/RF/90 (With telescopic section)(For sliding guards only)2(For sliding guards only)“Parallel” Actuator Key TK/P/90“Parallel” Actuator Key TK/PF/90 (With telescopic section)65

SERIES TZKDescriptionThe TZK Series is designed for machines/work cells whereaccess to a hazardous work area must be controlled until safeconditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature permitslocking a machine guard until dangerous conditions, whichmay exist immediately after removal of power, have abated.Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay, motiondetector, position sensor or other suitable component.The unit’s contact arrangement permits the prevention of amachine restart until the guard is closed and in the lockedposition.Each unit is supplied with a 1 ⁄2" NPT conduit adapter.OperationThe TZK Series electromechanical safety interlock switchconsists of a rugged switch with a solenoid-latchingmechanism and a geometrically-unique actuating key. Theswitch actuating key is typically mounted to a movablemachine guard.When the guard is closed, the actuating key is held in positionby the solenoid-latching mechanism. The guard may only beopened by energizing or de-energizing (depending uponmodel) the solenoid-latching mechanism.Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s ”positive-break” NCcontacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contactsclose upon key removal.®Heavy-Duty Solenoid-LatchingSafety Interlock SwitchFeatures & Benefits• Solenoid-locking design … controls access to hazardousareas until safe conditions exist.• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simpletools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuit interruptionupon key removal.• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmental sealingrequirements.• Positive locking … integral mechanical interlock preventssolenoid latching until actuating key is fully inserted.• High-strength steel actuator key … tolerates mechanicalabuse without damage.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates themost hostile environments.• Available in “solenoid-locking” and “solenoidunlocking”models … for application versatility.• Optional “floating” actuator key … tolerates up to 5mm ofguard misalignment without damage.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG (UL andCSA pending)• Rotatable actuating head … four user-selectable 90°positions for installation flexibility.• Funnel entry … forgiving of minor guard misalignment.• Optional spring-loaded actuator keys … tolerates axialmisalignment of guard.• Built-in key entry dust cover … prevents ingress of dirtand dust when key is removed.Typical ApplicationsThe TZK Series is intended for use as a safety interlockswitch on movable machine guards which must not beopened until dangerous conditions, that may exist after theremoval of power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheeloverrun, spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc.Typical applications are textile machines, stamping presses,articulating robot arms, mixing machines, heavy workingequipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.66®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

SERIES TZK AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIESAVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Adapter. Order desired actuatorkey separately)Part Number*TZKF/CS* 1 NO & 2 NC Actuating key locked byspring and unlocked byenergizing solenoidTZKM/C* 1 NO & 2 NC Actuating key locked byenergizing solenoid andunlocked by deenergizingsolenoid(See Note 1 below)*Please specify solenoid operating voltage via addition of one of thefollowing suffix codes:Voltage24VDC115VAC230VACExample: TZKF/CS-115VACContacts(Guard Closed)Add SuffixNo Suffix-115VAC-230VACDescriptionPart NumberTZK/COTZK/CWTZK/COFTZK/CORF/7.5TZK/CORF/15TZK/APLTZ-69TZ-75ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIESDescriptionStandard straight actuating keyStandard right-angle actuating keySpring-loaded actuator key tolerates axialmovement of +7.5°/-15° or -7.5°/+15°depending upon mounting orientationPre-tensioned, spring-loaded actuator keytolerates axial movement of +7.5° or -7.5°depending upon mounting orientationPre-tensioned, spring-loaded actuator keytolerates axial movement of +15° or -15°depending upon mounting orientationMounting adapter plate facilitates easyalignment between actuating key and interlockStandard straight auxiliary release keyRight-angle auxiliary release key2Note 1: Use of this model permits the guard to be openedin the event of a power failure. Generally acceptedsafety standards/practices suggest this modelonly be used after conducting a thorough riskevaluation in the context of the application.AZS2305FWS1205BFail-to-Safe Timer (Please see page 74)Fail-to-Safe Standstill Monitor (Page 76)TZ-75TZ-69Auxiliary release keys(for locking via spring models)67

SERIES TZK TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingGlass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishingthermoplasticActuator KeyGalvanized steelDegree of Protection IP67Travel for Positive-Break 2.3mmKey Insertion Force 10 N (2.2 pounds)Key Holding Force 20 N (4.4 pounds)(without solenoid-latching)Solenoid Locking Force 2,000N (440 pounds)Operating Temperature +32°F to +122°F (0°C to +50°C)Mechanical Life2 x 10 6 Operations (minimum)Mounting Orientation Any positionSolenoid Override Manual release from front surfaceSlack Resistance 30g / 11msVibration Resistance 20g / 10-55HzSwitching Frequency 120 cycles/hour (maximum)Conformity to Standards IEC 947EN 60947DIN VDE 0660EN 1088UL & CSAMinimum Closing Radius 6.9" (175mm) for CO and CORFactuating key9.8" (250mm) for CW actuating key5.9" (150mm) for COF actuating keyELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsSilver-plated, goldContact Configuration Double-pole, double-break,electrically-separated contactbridgesContact Rating 8A/115VAC, 15A/250VAC (AC 15)13A/24VDC (DC13)Switching ActionSlow-action, positive-breakNC contactsShort Circuit Protection 10ARated Insulation Voltage 250VACRated Impulse Withstand 2.5 KVVoltageType TerminalsScrew terminals with self-liftingcable clamps for up to 13AWGflexible stranded wire (1.5mm 2 )Available Solenoid Voltages 24VDC115VAC/50-60 Hz230VAC/50-60 HzSolenoid Power10W (maximum)ConsumptionSolenoid Duty Cycle 100%SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS (Actuator key inserted and no power to solenoid)TZKF/CSTZKM/C12121101,5 511-121101,5 511-12E1E202,33,5521-2233-34E1E202,33,5521-2233-34212233 3421 2233 3468

7,5°SERIES TZK TECHNICAL DATADIMENSIONS (Basic Switch & Optional Mounting Adapter Plate)893.50 321.2612.472,3.096.24501.97TZK/APLMounting Adapter PlateM6702.76212.4714,55.71164.576.246.2429,51.1622,5.89ACTUATOR KEY DIMENSIONSTZK/CO Straight Actuating KeyTZK/CW Right-Angle Actuating Key522.076,5.2653,52.113.128.31301.1811.4313,5.5320.794,3.17481.896,5.268,5.3357,52.2625.98321.2613,5.53401.5713.51301.18 451.77TZK/CORF/15 Flexibly-Mounted “Floating”Actuator KeyTZK/CORF/7.5 Pre-TensionedFlexibly-Mounted Actuator Key481.896,5.268,5.3357,52.263.1225.98321.261787.011787.011937.602068.116,5.264,5.18722.83M20x122.8712.4724.946.24451.77301.1817,5.6912.47411.61mminch3.1215°602.3616,5.65481.8916,5.6513,5.5313,5.5369

SERIES AZM415DescriptionThe AZM415 Series is designed for movable machine guardswhere access to a hazardous work area must be controlleduntil safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching featurepermits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,which may exist immediately after removal of power, haveabated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time-delay,motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.Latching may occur upon energizing or de-energizing thesolenoid — depending upon model. In addition the AZM415features “positive-break” NC contacts, and an adjustable-forceball latch which maintains a holding force on the guard whenthe key is in the unlocked state.A two-key model is also available for guards which may beopen in two directions (Model AZM415-33zpdk).OperationThe AZM415 two-piece electromechanical safety interlockswitch consists of a rugged switch and solenoid-latchingmechanism and a geometrically-unique actuating key. Theswitch actuating key is typically mounted to a movablemachine guard.When the guard is closed, the actuator key is locked inposition by a toggle-lever system. The guard may only beopened by energizing or de-energizing (depending uponmodel) the solenoid-latching mechanism.Upon opening of the guard the switch’s “positive-break” NCcontacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contactsclose upon key removal.Optional SafetyController.See Pages 84, 86,88 and 328.®Heavy-Duty Solenoid-LatchingSafety Interlock SwitchFeatures & Benefits• Solenoid-locking design … controls access to hazardousareas until safe conditions exist.• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruptionupon actuator key removal.• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.• High-strength, metal actuator key … tolerates mechanicalabuse without damage.• Rugged, enamel-coated metal housing … tolerates themost hostile environments.• Adjustable actuator key holding force up to 110 pounds… permits use of switch as door latch.• Available in “solenoid-locking” and “solenoidunlocking”models … for application versatility.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … UL, CSA, IEC,BG and VDE.• Industrial-strength locking force … up to 560 pounds.• Patented toggle-lever locking system … facilitates easyunlocking of (even heavily misaligned) guards.• Two-key model … for double-sided guards (AZM415-33zpdk).• Optional B4 Actuator Key … prevents unintentional guardclosure.AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Actuator key sold separately … see chart below)AZM415Switch insert S1 –solenoid position*Please specify solenoid operating voltage via addition of one of thefollowing suffix codes:VoltageAdd Suffix24VAC/DC -24VAC/DC120VAC-120VACACTUATING KEYS & ACCESSORIESDescriptionPart NumberLinear entry actuator key(For sliding lift-off guards)AZM415-B1Small radius (250mm) x-axis entry actuatorkey (For hinged guards)Small radius (250mm) y-radius entry actuatorkey (For hinged guards)Slide bolt actuator key (For sliding guards)Fail-to-Safe TimerXX / YY ZPKSwitch insert S2 –key position11(1 NO/1 NC)02(2 NC)Fail-to-Safe Standstill Monitor11(1 NO/1 NC)02 (2 NC)20 (2 NO)AZM415-B2AZM415-B3T(manualoverride)Leave blank(power to unlock)A(power to lock)AZ/AZM415-B4pSAZS2305 (Page 74)FWS1205B (Page 76)70®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

AZM415 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingDie-cast aluminum with blueenamel finishActuator KeyDie-cast aluminumDegree of Protection IP67Travel for Positive-Break 5mm (0.2 inches)Force to ReachDepending upon ball catch settingPositive-Break(3.5 pounds minimum)Solenoid Locking Force 560 poundsActuator KeyAdjustable, 2.2 to 110 poundsHolding ForceOperating Temperature -13°F to +175°FMechanical Life1 million operationsConformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1BG-GS-ET-19VDE 0660ULCSAMinimum Closing Radius 9.8" (250mm)DIMENSIONSELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact GapContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageRated ImpulseWithstandType TerminalsAvailable SolenoidSupply Voltages (Vs)Fine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically separated contactbridges2mm x 2mm4A (230VAC)Slow-action, positive-break NCcontactsFuse 6A (slow-blow)250VAC4kVScrew terminals with self-liftingclamps for up to 13AWGflexible stranded wire (1.5 mm 2 )24VAC/DC115VAC/60Hz230VAC/50HzSolenoid Power10W (maximum)ConsumptionSolenoid Duty Cycle 100%2M2071

AZM415 TECHNICAL DATAWIRING SCHEMATICSAZM415xx/yyZPK (Power-to-unlock)11/11WIRING SCHEMATICSAZM415xx/yyZPKA (Power-to-lock)11/1111/0211/0211/2011/2002/1102/1102/0202/0202/2002/2072 Contacts shown with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.

9AZM415 TECHNICAL DATAACTUATOR KEY DIMENSIONSB4pS Actuator for Hand Operated LockingB1 Actuator1254.92552.170-60-.24562.2020.7921.83351.382379.3322.878.35.3518,569,52.74219.75301.186,5.2610

AZS 2305Fail-To-Safe TimerSafety Category (EN954-1):Features• Time can be set between 0.1s and 99min.• To EN 1088• Control Category 3 to EN 954-1• 3 enabling circuits• Recognition of short-circuit betweenconnections• 2 short-circuit proof additionaltransistor outputs• Integral System Diagnostics (ISD)• 2 channel microprocessor controlDimensions55 x 75 x 110 mmISDThe following faults are recognized by the safetycontroller and indicated by means of ISD• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in ordrop-out• Short-circuits between the input connections• Interruption of the input connections• Difference in time setting between channel I andchannel II• Faults on input or relay control circuits of the timerModelDesignationAZS 2305-24VDCAZS 2305-110VACAZS 2305-230VACFunctionTableAdditional semiconductoroutput YFunction of output YAZS 2305 Y1 Enable, enabling circuits closedY2No Enable, enabling circuits openApprovals BG UL CSA74

AZS 2305TypicalApplications2TypicalWiringDiagramA1S13S14S21AZM 16013 14 21 22 1 2 3 4 5 6+24 VDC0 0V+24 VDCS22H1N0VL1X1 X2 Y1 Y2 13 23 33 SA1 Y1 Y2 13 23 33H2L1Emax.100mAmax.100mAK1K1K2K20VA2X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X814 24 34 A2 S13 S14 S21 S22 14 24 340VAES 3335/3336 AZS 2305NK3SK1K43MApplicationNotes• The arrangement in the wiringdiagram fulfills Control Category 1to EN 954-1.• Control Category 3 can beachieved. Exclusion of faults dueto “Breakage or release of theactuator, fault in the solenoidinterlock” is to be substantiatedand documented.• Monitoring of a sliding, hinged orremovable guard device using anAZM range solenoid interlock (A).• The solenoid interlock releases theguard device only when the settime has elapsed. The time beginsto run when the power contactorshave dropped out.• The AES range guard door controllerchecks the position of theguard device.• The coil of the solenoid interlock isenergized by operation of the pushbuttonE• After release has taken place, theguard device must be opened if H1is not connected.• The wiring diagram is with theguard device closed and showsthe de-energized condition.75

FWS 1205Fail-To-Safe Standstill MonitorsSafety Category (EN954-1):Features• Confirmation of standstill using 2 impulsesensors• Control Category 3 to EN 954-1• Operational voltage 24 VDC• Reset input• 2 short-circuit proof semiconductor outputs• Integral System Diagnostics (ISD)• 2 channel microprocessor control• Customer-specific standstill frequenciespossible• 2 enabling pathsDimensions22.5 x 75 x 110 mmISDThe following faults are recognized by the safetycontroller and indicated by means of ISD• Interruption of the connections to one of theinductive proximity switches• Failure of the proximity switches• Failure of one channel being evaluated• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in ordrop-out• Faults on input or relay control circuits of the safetycontrollerModelDesignationFWS 1205A-24VDC (Execution A)FWS 1205B-24VDC (Execution B)FWS 1205C-24VDC (Execution C)StandstillFrequenciesExecution A Execution B Execution CFunctionTableAdditionaltransistor output YFunction ofoutput YInput X1 1Hz 2Hz 1HzInput X2 2Hz 2Hz 1HzY1Enable, Enablingcircuits closedY2FaultApprovals BG UL CSA76

FWS 1205TypicalApplications2TypicalWiringDiagramFWS 1205ApplicationNotes• The solenoid interlock can beopened when the FWS 1205 hasregistered standstill of the motor bymeans of the two PNP inductiveproximity switches. The coil of thesolenoid interlock is then energizedby operation of the pushbutton E• The AES controller checks theposition of the guard device.• Monitoring of the guard deviceusing a solenoid interlock and asafety switch with separateactuator.• Control Category 3 can also beachieved without using the safetyswitch by connecting the NO andNC contacts of solenoid interlock tothe guard door monitor. Exclusionof faults due to “Breakage orrelease of the actuator, fault in thesolenoid interlock” is to be substantiatedand documented.• Release is only possible when therun-down movement has come toan end.• After release has taken place, theguard device must be opened.• The wiring diagram is with theguard device closed and showsthe de-energized condition.77

FWS 2505Fail-To-Safe Standstill MonitorsSafety Category (EN954-1):Features• Confirmation of standstill using 2 impulsesensors• Control Category 3 to EN 954-1• 4 enabling circuits• Available for various operational voltages• Reset input• 2 short-circuit proof semiconductor outputs• 1 N/C auxiliary contact• Integral System Diagnostics (ISD)• 2 channel microprocessor control• Customer-specific standstill frequenciespossible• 24-230VAC/DCDimensions45 x 100 x 121 mmISDThe following faults are recognized by the safety controllerand indicated by means of ISD• Interruption of the connections to the inductiveproximity switches• Short-circuit between connections• Failure of the proximity switches• Failure of one channel being evaluated• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in ordrop-out• Faults on input or relay control circuits of the safetycontrol unitModelDesignationFWS 2505A 24-230V AC/DC (Execution A) FWS 2505C 24-230V AC/DC (Execution C)StandstillFrequenciesExecution AExecution CFunctionTableAdditionaltransistor output YFunction ofoutput Y High (24V)Input X2 1Hz 1HzInput X4 2Hz 1HzY1Y2Enable, Enablingcircuits closedFault conditionOther frequencies on request.Approvals BG UL CSA78

FWS 2505TypicalApplications2TypicalWiringDiagramApplicationNotes• The solenoid interlock can beopened when the FWS 2505 hasregistered standstill of the motor bymeans of the two PNP inductiveproximity switches. The coil of thesolenoid interlock is then energizedby operation of the pushbutton E• The AES guard door controllerchecks the position of the guarddevice.• Monitoring of the guard deviceusing a solenoid interlock.• To achieve Control Category 3 theexclusion of faults due to “Breakageor release of the actuator, fault inthe solenoid interlock” is to besubstantiated and documented.• Release is only possible when therun-down movement has come toan end.• After release has taken place, theguard device must be opened.• The wiring diagram is with theguard device closed and showsthe de-energized condition.79

80SaferbyDesign

APPLICATION ACCESSORIESNew!New!STS Safety HandleAssemblyB25Safety Door HandleTG-1Safety Door Handle3Page 82Page 88Page 90New!ZSDEnabling DeviceGFS SafetyFoot ControlSEPK(G) Two-HandControl ConsolesNew!Page 92Page 94Page 98TFA/TFIGuard Alignment AidPage 10081

SERIES STSSafety Guard Door-Handle System(with Emergency Release Option)Features & Benefits• Suited for all types of guards ... for application versatility.• Dual-purpose handle ... unlatches and opens guard.No additional door handles are needed.• Optional inside “emergency” release handle available ...heightens system safety level.• Interlock switch mountable from inside or outsideguard … for application flexibility.• Rugged, durable design ... actuator designed for 15,000 N(3,400 pounds) of shear force.• Mechanical design facilitates easy actuator keywithdrawal ... without “sticking” or “binding.”• Meets ANSI/RIA R15.06 safety standards ... provides foremergency egress.DescriptionThe STS door handle system consists of one safety interlockswitch (ordered separately), an actuator key and handleassembly (with or without emergency release handle),mounting plates, and an optional lockout/tagout device. Anoptional red interior release handle is available which opensthe guard from the inside in case of an emergency.OperationNew!Should someone find themselves in a hazardous area andthe guard is accidentally closed, the guard can be openedfrom the inside by turning the optional emergency handle (2).Locking of the guard from the inside is not possible.When using the optional emergency handle with a solenoidlatchingkeyed interlock switch, always order the version withan emergency unlocking feature. In this case the emergencylatching release button or knob (1) provided with this modelmust be actuated before operating the emergency releasehandle (2).AVAILABLE ACCESSORIESPart NumberDescriptionMP TG-01 Handle mounting plate forinside mounted actuatorsTFA-010TFI-010TFA-020TFI-020SZ 415-1SZ 415-2AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELSPlease see page 83Alignment aid for outside mounting(for hinged guards)Alignment aid for inside mounting(for hinged guards)Alignment aid for outside mounting(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY)Alignment aid for inside mounting(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY)Lockout tag for STS30-02/-04/-06/-08Lockout tag for STS30-01/-03/-05/-0782

SERIES STSSELECTION TABLE & ORDERING GUIDE: SAFETY DOOR-HANDLE SYSTEMActuatorMounting PositionActuatorDoor HingeWithemergency handleInsideRight➛XX-STS30-01*Left➛XX-STS30-02*OutsideRightXX-STS30-053LeftXX-STS30-06➛➛Withoutemergency handleInsideRightLeft➛ ➛XX-STS30-03*XX-STS30-04*OutsideRightXX-STS30-07LeftXX-STS30-08➛➛*For actuators mounted on the inside, mounting plate MP TG-01(ordered separately) must be used to mount the door handlewhen the door frame width is smaller than the handle.➛➛View from outside the hazardous areaView from inside the hazardous area83

SERIES STSTO ORDER COMPLETE STS DOOR HANDLE SYSTEM1. Complete catalog number by replacing XX with the desired safetyinterlock switch. Please see Catalog GK-1.AZ 16AZ 3350 (See below)AZ 415AZM 161AZM 4152. Order Safety Switch separately (see Catalog GK-1).NOTE: AZ3350 is an AZ335 switch with an actuator head witha funnel shaped key entry (SDG head, see Catalog GK-1).Available only with STS Door Handle System.ModelAZ3350-12zuek-U90AZ3350-12zuek-U270AZ3350-03zk-U90AZ3350-03zk-U270AVAILABLE MODELSDescriptionActuated head rotated 90° for door hinge leftActuated head rotated 270° for door hinge rightActuated head rotated 90° for door hinge leftActuated head rotated 270° for door hinge rightExample: To order a safety door handle system with a right-hand door hinge, an emergency release handle,for inside mounting and equipped with an AZM 415-22XPKT-24 VAC/DC safety inerlock switch,order SCHMERSAL part numbers:• AZM 415-STS30-01• AZM-22XPKT-24 VAC/DCNote: If door frame is smaller than the handle assembly, also order the MP TG-01 Mounting PlateExample: To order a safety door handle system with a left-hand door hinge, an emergency release handle,for inside mounting and equipped with an AZM 161SK-24rkT safety inerlock switch, orderSCHMERSAL part numbers:• AZM 161-STS30-02• AZM 161SK-24rkT84

SERIES STS DIMENSIONSAZ 16-STS30-…AZ 3350-STS30-…AZ 415-STS30-…AZ 16 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07AZ 3350 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07AZ 415 STS30-01/-03/-05/-073AZ 16 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08AZ 3350 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08AZ 415 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08AZM 161-STS30-…AZM 415-STS30-…AZM 161 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07AZM 415 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07AZM 161 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08AZM 415 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08AZ 16 Handle Dimensions85

SERIES STS ACCESSORIESLockout AccessoryMP TG-01 Handle Mounting PlateORDERING DETAILSLockout Tagfor … STS30-02/-04/-06/-08 SZ 415-1for … STS30-01/-03/-05/-07 SZ 415-2TFA Hinged Guard Alignment Aid (for outside mounting)• Mounting outside• Self-centering of the guard door• End stop• Suitable for all types of actuators• Actuator can be easily inserted or extractedTFI Hinged Guard Alignment Aid (for inside mounting)• Mounting inside• Self-centering of the guard door• End stop• Suitable for all types of actuators• Actuator can be easily inserted or extracted86

3SaferbyDesign87

SERIES B25Safety Door Handle Systemfor AZ17 and AZM170 Interlock SwitchesFeatures & Benefits• Ergonomically-designed door handles … for easyoperation.• Pre-machined mounting plates … for easy installation.• Dual-purpose handle … releases interlock acutator keyand opens guard.• Low-profile design … minimizes protruding handle.• No protruding actuator … recessed actuator key whenguard is open makes for safer installation.• User flexibility … actuator can be supplied withouthandle. Users can mount their own handle design on theintegral, pre-tapped (M6) 8mm square shaft.New!AZ17…zrk InstallationAZM170…zrk InstallationDescriptionThe Series BN25 is designed to allow easy realization of a combination door handle and safety interlock for use on light tomedium weight hinged and sliding machine guards. Each unit consists of a door handle assembly with integral handle andsafety interlock actuator key for operating a Series AZ17…zrk or AZM170…zrk interlock switch.OperationUpon manual turning of the star-grip or T-grip handle, the safety interlock switch actuator key is withdrawn from theswitch body … opening the positive-break, normally-closed switch contacts (and, if so equipped, closing the normally-openswitch contact).Opening the normally-closed safety contact(s) removes power to the machine hazard. Upon operation, the actuator key iswithdrawn into the door handle housing … thus eliminating the potential hazard represented by a protruding key.Typical ApplicationsThe low-profile ergonomically-designed door handle is ideal for use on light- to medium-weight movable machine guards.88

SERIES B25AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS & ACCESSORIESCompatibleSafety Interlock*(order separately)Series AZ17…zrkSeries AZM170…zrkSeries AZ17…zrkSeries AZM170…zrkPart NumberAZ17-B25-L-G1AZ17-B25-L-G2AZ17-B25-R-G1AZ17-B25-R-G2AZM170-B25-L-G1AZM170-B25-L-G2AZM170-B25-R-G1AZM170-B25-R-G2MP-B25*DescriptionStar-grip for left-hand hinged guardT-grip for left-hand hinged guardStar-grip for right-hand hinged guardT-grip for right-hand hinged guardStar-grip for left-hand hinged guardT-grip for left-hand hinged guardStar-grip for right-hand hinged guardT-grip for right-hand hinged guardMounting plates for switch & handle assembly*Note: The AZ17 or AZM170Safety Interlock Switchand the mounting platesare not included in thedelivery and must beordered separately.Please note the assemblyrequires the interlock withthe latching (“r”) option.See Catalog GK-1.To order unit withoutStar-grip or T-grip handle,please change suffix toG0. For example …AZ17-B25-L-G0.3Mounting Plates MP-B25Order separatelyDIMENSIONSStar-GripT-GripAZ17…zrk InstallationAZM170…zrk Installation89

SERIES TG-1Door Handle For Use WithSolenoid Locking SwitchesFeatures & Benefits• Integrated door release … eliminates wiring to a consolepush-button.• LED status indicators … door status is known at a glance.• Optional integrated push-button• Optional integrated Emergency-Stop … eliminates wiringto a remote console.• Longer solenoid life … solenoid energized only whilerelease button is pushed.• Tapered key entry ports … tolerant to key misalignment.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, VDE.• Lockout accessory … prevents key entry and switchactuation.DescriptionThe TG-1 handle has an integrated button for unlockingspring-to-lock solenoid switches. There are two LEDsindicating if the door is locked (green) or unlocked (red).OperationPushing the button will energize the solenoid, allowing thedoor to be opened using the same hand. Releasing thehandle and button will de-energize the solenoid, allowing thedoor to lock when closed.AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELSPart NumberDescriptionTG-WGR No top buttonTG-WGR10 With top-mounted emergency-stopTG-WGRS With top-mounted push buttonNote: Other variations are available. Please consult factory.Part NumberM12-8P-5MACCESSORYMatching cable set.Description90

SERIES TG-1 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSWIRING DIAGRAMSHousingDegree of ProtectionTerminationSwitching Voltage forEnabling Switch andEmergency Stop ButtonSwitching SystemRated Operating VoltageLEDPA and POMIP65Plug-in connector M 12 x 1, 8 pole24VDC; max 30VAC/36VDCSlow action, positive-break NCcontacts24VDCLEDsLEDred5 / (GY)4 / (YE)3 / (GN)LEDgreenEnabling Switch(BN) / 2(WH) / 18 / (RD)View of Plug-in Connector8 / (RD)(BN) / 2 1 / (WH)(GN) / 37 / (BU)(YE) / 46 / (PK)Emergency Stop Button orPush Button(BU) / 76 / (PK)35 / (GY)DIMENSIONS20030redLEDgreenLEDSwitch103048,5150Plug-inconnectorM12x148608091

SERIES ZSD3-Position Hand-Held Enabling DeviceFeatures & Benefits• Redundant contacts ... allows use in up to safety controlcategory 4 systems.• Auxiliary contact ... for status signalling.• Positive-break contacts from position 2 to position 3 ...enhances safety.• 3-position (OFF-ON-OFF) design ... provides for machinestop control when operator squeezes or releases actuatorfrom center “on” position.• Rugged IP65 rating ... withstands harsh industrialenvironments.• Optional normally-open top-mounted pushbutton ...enables machine jog/start control.• Meets ANSI/RIA R15.06 safety standards ... to satisfyenabling device requirements.DescriptionThe ZSD is a hand-held “dead man” switch with 3 operatingpositions — OFF-ON-OFF. The machine/robot can beoperated in the “on” position. It provides safety based onnormal human behavior of either releasing or squeezing theactuator in an emergency situation.OperationMachine/robot operation is only allowed when the enablingdevice is held in the middle (“on”) position. Releasing theswitch (position 1) or squeezing the switch (position 3) shutsdown the equipment.Typical ApplicationsUsed in robotic cells and automated manufacturing systemsto provide operator safety during set-up, maintenance,or troubleshooting.SWITCHING DIAGRAM FOR ZSD5Operating CharacteristicsPosition 1 2 3Normally open contact 1–2*Normally open contact 3–4*Auxiliary contact 5–6Open: , Closed:* Positive-break contacts from position 2 to position 3Part NumberZSD5ZSD6ZSD-HAVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(INCLUDES M20 STRAIN RELIEF)Description3-Position Enabling Switch (OFF-ON-OFF)3-Position Enabling Switch (but withtop-mounted pushbutton - 1NO contact)Metal Holding BracketNote: For factory installed cable, add length in meters,e.g. ZSD5-5m.Use of a SCHMERSAL safety controller with cross short monitoringis required (SCHMERSAL models SRB301ST-24 or SRB301SQ).92

ZSD TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSOperating TemperatureOperating HumidityStorage TemperatureOperating FrequencyMechanical LifeShock Operating Extremes 100m/s 2Resistance Damage Limits 1000m/s 2–25°C to +60°C (no freezing)45% to 85% RH maximum(no condensation)–40°C to +80°C (no freezing)1,200 operations/hourPosition 1•2•1: 1,000,000 minimumPosition 1•2•3•1: 100,000 minimumVibration Operating Extremes 5 to 55Hz, amplitude 0.5mm minimumResistance Damage Limits 16.7Hz, amplitude 1.5mm minimumTerminal Pulling Strength 20N minimumTerminal Screw Torque0.5 to 0.6NmDegree of ProtectionIP65WeightApprox. 240g (ZSD6)Approx. 210g (ZSD5)Conforming to StandardsApprovalsIEC60947-5-1, EN60947-5-1,JIS C8201-5-1, ANSI/RIA R15.6UL, CSA, BGELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContact Resistance100mΩ maximumBetween live & dead metal parts:Insulation Resistance100MΩ maximum (at 500VDC)Between positive & negative live parts:100MΩ minimum (at 500VDC)Impulse WithstandVoltageElectrical LifeRecommended Wire SizeRecommended CableConditionalShort Circuit Current2.5kV100,000 cycles (min.) @max. load16 - 26 AWG.275 - .512 inch diameter50A (250V)Recommended Short 250V/10A fast-blow fuse (IEC 60127-1)Circuit ProtectionContact Rating 2A @ 30V, 4A @ 125V3ACCESSORIESPart NumberZSD-HDescriptionMetal holding bracket(for mounting/holding aZSD enabling device)DIMENSIONS (mm)86174 94654 58ZSD5/6x 1.5Note: Model with top-mounted pushbutton shown.93

SERIES GFSSafety Foot Switch®Features & Benefits• Positive-Break Contacts ... assure circuit interruption uponcomplete foot pedal actuation.• Automatic latching following an emergency stop signal ...meets EN 418 standard for E-Stop switches.• Unique design with protective shield ... avoids unintentionalactuation due to falling debris or dropped items.• Release modes ... only manually by pushing the button on thetop of the pedal.• Heavy duty aluminum shield ... tolerates mechanical abusewithout damage.• Meets rigid safety agency standards ... UL, CSA, IEC, BG,VDE.DescriptionExtensive accident prevention research has shown that in theevent of pain/distress, the foot is frequently not removedfrom the foot pedal that is enabling equipment operation.Paradoxically, weight is often shifted forward and pressure onthe foot pedal is increased (rather than removed).Recognizing this, the series GFS safety foot switch features3-stage operation. It is designed to stop hazardous movementsin machinery whether released or fully-depressed in anemergency situation.It’s positive-break, normally-closed contacts provide asignificantly higher level of safety than conventional springdrivencontacts which can weld/stick shut. Their glass-fiberreinforced pedal and aluminum protective shield make themideal for heavy-duty applications in hostile environments.OperationThe results of accident prevention research has beentranslated into a specific product according to the research.In the event of pain, the foot is frequently not removed fromthe switching pedal, but paradoxically pressure is increased,and the weight shifted forward. The solution to this problemis provided by a 3-stage safety foot switch.Position 1. The pedal is not actuated in the upper position.→ Machine “ OFF ”Typical ApplicationsThe GFS foot switch is intended for use in machines or areaswhere operation using the hands is not possible. Typicalapplications are profile and tube bending machines, barturning machines, thread cutting, and wire drawing machines.AVAILABLE MODELSPart NumberGFS 1 S D 1 O VDGFS 2 S D 2 O VDContacts1 NCAll Enclosures include PG to1/2" NPT metal conduit adapterSignal Output0ff2 NCPosition 1(Pedal notactuated)Position 2. The operation circuit contact closes afteractuating the foot pedal (the pedal is in contactwith the tangible pressure-point stop).→ Machine “ ON ”OnPosition 2(Pedal depressedto pressure point)Position 3. The pressure point is overcome in the event ofdanger or sensing pain, the circuit contact opensand is automatically latched.→ Machine “ Emergency Stop ”Operation to position 3 requires manual reset using theintegral push button actuatorOptional safety controllers for E-Stop applications areavailable. Please consult factory.0ffPosition 3(Pedal fullydepressed)94®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

GFS SERIES TECHNICAL DATA3CONTACT DIAGRAMSGFS 1SD/1OVD1 NO1 NCGFS 2SD/2OVD2 NO2 NCPosition1Position2Position3Each contact(Same as GFS 1SD/10VD)Latched(Releasevia topmountedpushbutton95

GFS SERIES TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSEnclosureAluminum (die casting)Protecting Hood (shield) Aluminum (die casting)PedalGlass-fiber reinforcedthermoplastic ( nylon 66)Degree of Protection IP 65 to IEC/EN 60529Ambient temperature –25 °C to + 80 °CMechanical life> 1 million operationsConformity to Standards IEC/EN 60947-5-1, EN 418BG-GS-ET-15ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContact Rating16 A / 400VACSwitching ActionSlow-action NCPositive break contactsRated Insulation Voltage 500 VType TerminalsScrew terminals,2.5 mm 2 max.(including conductor ferrules)Withstand Voltage6 kVThermal test current 10 AMax. fuse rating16 A (slow-blow)GFS SERIES DIMENSIONS (mm)7214,5265220ø 3382,5701564313696

3SaferbyDesign97

SERIES SEPK(G)New!2-Hand Control Consoles(with light force actuators)Features & Benefits• Choice of console material … rugged Lexan or die-castaluminum.• Optional control functions … consoles designed toaccept up to 8 additional control and signalling devices.• Hinged console covers … facilitate easy wiring andassembly.• Ergonomically-designed shelf to support hands duringactuation (SEPG model) … minimizes stress.• Protective safety hoods … protect against accidentalactuation of pushbuttons.• Integral E-stop mushroom pushbutton … for easyemergency stop control• IP65 ingress protection rating … tolerates hostile, wetenvironments.• Meets EN574 standard (SEPG model) … safety ofmachinery for two-hand control consoles.• Available adjustable stands (optional) … to optimize usercomfort.• Available optional accessories … e.g., safety controllers,foot pedals, rollers, special paint finishes for applicationflexibility.• Custom units available … please consult factory.AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELSDescriptionSchmersal’s family of two-hand control consoles have anergonomic design that require the operator to use both handsto initiate a control action. Thus they insure that the operator’shands are kept away from the hazardous area of a machineduring operation.The units are designed such that simultaneous operation(within 0.5 seconds) of both control buttons is required toinitiate the machine cycle. The control buttons must remainactuated to complete the machine cycle.Each is equipped with an integral E-stop mushroompushbutton to facilitate emergency stoppage.Units are available with a wide choice of options andaccessories, such as adjustable stands, auxiliary controlbuttons, foot pedals, special colors, etc. for optimizing safetyand functionality.Typical ApplicationsTwo-hand control consoles are used as protective devices insetting up and operating single-stroke equipment, and otherapplications where it is desired to keep both of the operator’shands safe from a hazardous area during machine operation.Applications are typically found in the metal working, rubber,plastics and chemical industries as well as in semi-automaticassembly equipment.Model NumberSEPK02.0.4.0.22/95SEPK02.0.L.22SEPG05.3.4.0.22/95.E1SEPG05.3.L.22DescriptionPlastic (Lexan), hooded console withone red, 38.5mm E-stop mushroombutton (1NO & 1NC contact) and twolight force (2.3 lbs.) black, 55mmmushroom pushbutton actuators (eachwith 1NO & 1NC contact)Empty plastic (Lexan) hooded console(gray) with 3 bore holes for actuatorsPowder-coated (gray) aluminumhooded console with one red, 38.5mmE-stop mushroom button (1NO & 1NCcontacts) and two light force (2.3 lbs.)black, 55mm mushroom pushbuttonactuators (each with 1NO & 1NCcontact)Empty powder-coated (gray) aluminumhooded console with 3 bore holes foractuatorsNote: Also available as custom control panels with up to 8 controland/or signalling devices in the central portion of the console(in addition to the E-stop actuator) and adjustable height floorstands (with or without rollers). Please consult factory.AVAILABLE ACCESSORIESPart NumberDescriptionSRB201ZH-24VDC Two-hand control safety controller(Please see page 330 for details)EDRR40RTE-stop actuator98EFREF303.1AF02AF10Spring element for E-stopE-stop actuator contact block with1NO & 1NC contactControl actuator contact block with1NO contactControl actuator contact block with1NC contact

SERIES SEPK(G)MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSConsole MaterialConsole ColorIngress ProtectionLexan (SEPK02…)Die-cast aluminum (SEPG05…)RAL 7035, light gray (SEPK02…)RAL 7004, signal gray (SEPG05…)IP65ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Contact Blocks)Contact TypeSpecificationRated OperatingCurrent (Ie)Type AF(OperatingPushbuttons)6A, 250VAC (AC15)3A, 24VDC (DC13)Type EF(E-stop Button)8A, 250VAC (AC15)5A, 24VDC (DC13)Mechanical LifeExpectancy ofContact BlocksTemperature RangeMushroom ButtonActuating ForceDIMENSIONS SEPKType A Contacts:5 million cycles (minimum)Type B Contacts:10 million cycles (minimum)Type AF Contacts: -25°C to +60°CType EF Contacts: -25°C to +80°C2.3 lbs. (SEPK02…)2.3 lbs. (SEPG05… EI)Insulation Voltage (Ui) 500V@Test Voltageof 2,500VShort CircuitProtectionWire Size 2 x 0.5 to 2.5mm 2(2 x 20AWG to13AWG)440V@Test Voltageof 2,500V10A, Slow-blow 10A, Slow-blow2 x 0.5 to 1.5mm 2(2 x 20AWG to15AWG)3DIMENSIONS SEPG99

Series TFA/TFIGuard Alignment AidNew!Features & Benefits• Self-aligning … self-centering design helps align guard.• End-stop … functions as end-stop to protect guard fromexcessive shock on closing.• Easy-to-install … on inside or outside of guard.• Reduces maintenance … minimizes risk of downtime dueto misaligned guard.• Suitable for retrofit … on existing guards.AVAILABLE ACCESSORIESPart NumberDescriptionTFA-010TFI-010TFA-020TFI-020Alignment aid for outside mounting(for hinged guards)Alignment aid for inside mounting(for hinged guards)Alignment aid for outside mounting(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY)Alignment aid for inside mounting(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY)TFA Guard Alignment Aid (for outside mounting)• Mounting outside• Self-centering of the guard door• End stop• Suitable for all types of actuators• Actuator can be easily inserted or extractedTFI Guard Alignment Aid (for inside mounting)• Mounting inside• Self-centering of the guard door• End stop• Suitable for all types of actuators• Actuator can be easily inserted or extracted100

EMERGENCY CABLE-PULL SWITCHESNew!4SELECTION GUIDESwitchSeriesHousingMaterialMaximumSpanContactConfigurationsRatedCatalogPageZS71Die-castaluminum65 feet1 NO & 1 NC2 NC(Optional)102ZS73Die-castaluminum165 feet1 NO & 1 NC2 NC(Optional)106ZS75Die-castaluminum165 feet1 NO & 1 NC2 NC2 NO & 2 NC4 NC(Optional)110ZS441Die-castaluminum80 feet1 NO & 1 NC2 NCNo114BidirectionalZS75SDie-castaluminum165 feet(Each Direction)2 NO & 2 NC4 NC(Optional)118New!ZS80Die-castaluminum165 feet(50m)2 NO & 2 NC1 NO & 3 NC4 NCNo122New!S900Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner126101

ZS71Emergency Cable-Pull Switch (Meets EN418)DescriptionThe ZS71 is designed to provide continuous emergency stopalong exposed areas of machinery and conveyors whichpresent hazards to operators/maintenance personnel. UnlikeE-stop pushbuttons, emergency-stop cable-pull systems canbe actuated at any point along the “trip-wire.”The unit features a positive-opening NC contact which isforced open when the trip-wire is pulled. This design alsoassures actuation if the operator falls into, leans on, or ispushed against the trip-wire.®In addition, the switch is designed to operate if the trip wire iscut or goes slack.Their rugged metal housing, small size and watertight design(IP65) make them ideal for use in hostile environments wherespace is limited.Features & Benefits• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, die-cast aluminumhousing … tolerates the most hostile environments.• “Positive-break” NC contact … assures circuit interruptionupon pulling of trip wire.• Visual position indicator … for ease of installation.• Push/pull operation … actuates if trip-wire is pulled orgoes slack.• Watertight design … meets IP65 requirements, equippedwith watertight collar.• Continuous E-stop protection … for supported trip-wirespans up to 65 feet (20m).• Meets rigid safety standards … UL, CSA.• Low actuating force … operates with only 13.5 lbs offorce. Ideal for short-run applications.• Explosion protected … optional IEC-rated explosion-proofmodels available.• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation.• Optional integrated emergency-stop button … for easyactuation when in proximity to switch.OperationThe ZS71 features an axial actuating shaft and a double-polecontact block with either 1 NO & 1 NC or 2 NC contacts (withtrip-wire pre-tensioned).When the trip-wire is pulled, the positive-break NC contact isforced open via a direct mechanical linkage with the actuatingshaft. If the trip-wire goes slack (e.g. breaks or is cut) the NCcontact opens – resulting in equipment stoppage.Manual (key or pushbutton) reset mechanisms assure theequipment cannot be restarted until the reset is actuated.Optional integrated emergency-stop button on face of switchassures complete emergency stop.Typical ApplicationsThe ZS71 is ideal for replacing multiple, discrete E-stoppushbuttons or achieving a continuous immediatelyaccessible emergency stop … especially where space islimited. Typical applications include conveyor lines, textilemachinery, packaging machinery, turret lathes, and transferlines.102®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

ZS71 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIESPart NumberAVAILABLE STANDARD MODELSContactConfigurationTypeResetPre-TensionedForceTypicalActuatingForce (F)MaximumCableLengthZS71-10/1S WVDA-55N* 1 NO & 1 NC Pushbutton 12.5 lbs (55N) 1.4 lbs (6N) 32.5 ft (10m)ZS71-10/1S WVDA* 1 NO & 1 NC Pushbutton 45.5 lbs (200N) 6 lbs (25N) 65 ft (20m)ZS71-10/1S WVSA-55N* 1 NO & 1 NC Key 12.5 lbs (55N) 1.4 lbs (6N) 32.5 ft (10m)ZS71-10/1S WVSA* 1 NO & 1 NC Key 45.5 lbs (200N) 6 lbs (25N) 65 ft (20m)ZS71-20 WVDA-55N 2 NC Pushbutton 12.5 lbs (55N) 1.4 lbs (6N) 32.5 ft (10m)ZS71-20 WVDA 2 NC Pushbutton 45.5 lbs (200N) 6 lbs (25N) 65 ft (20m)ZS71-20 WVSA-55N 2 NC Key 12.5 lbs (55N) 1.4 lbs (6N) 32.5 ft (10m)ZS71-20 WVSA 2 NC Key 45.5 lbs (200N) 6 lbs (25N) 65 ft (20m)ZS71-10/1S WVD-NA-55N ▲ 1 NO & 1 NC Pushbutton 12.5 lbs (55N) 1.4 lbs (6N) 32.5 ft (10m)ZS71-10/1S WVD-NA ▲ 1 NO & 1 NC Pushbutton 45.5 lbs (200N) 6 lbs (25N) 65 ft (20m)ZS71-20WVD-NA-55N ▲ 2 NC Pushbutton 12.5 lbs (55N) 1.4 lbs (6N) 32.5 ft (10m)ZS71-20WVD-NA ▲ 2 NC Pushbutton 45.5 lbs (200N) 6 lbs (25N) 65 ft (20m)*Available in an IEC-rated explosion-proof design. To order, add prefix “EEX” to part number.▲Equipped with integral emergency stop button.AVAILABLE ACCESSORIESPart NumberDescriptionPL-M20-24V 24V Pilot light kit4PL-M20-120VSTQ441-SCSTQ441-EBSTQ441-CCSTQ441-TBSTQ441-THSTQ441-PUNew! S900120V Pilot light kit5mm diameter steel cable, PVC coatedM10 eye bolt & hex nutCable clampTurnbuckleThimblePulley assembly (for cable "cornering")Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner(see page 126)For recommended installation instructions, please see page 117.ZS71-10/1S WVD-NAEmergency pushbutton option103

ZS71 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingDie-cast aluminum with fiberglassreinforcedthermoplastic coverDegree of Protection IP65 (pushbutton reset)IP54 (key reset)Maximum Supported 65 feet (20m)SpanOperating Temperature –13°F to +158°F (–25°C to +70°C)Mechanical Life1 million operationsConformity to Standards EN418, UL, CSAMinimum Cable Tension 6.7 lbs. (30N)Typical Deflection (S) 4.4" (11cm)Required for OperationELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionType TerminalsFine silver1 NO & 1 NC or 2 NC doublepole,double-break withelectrically-separated contactbridges6A/400VACSnap-action, positive-break NCcontacts (with wire pulling). SnapactionNO contact.6A (external)Screw terminals with clampingwashers-100 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 T(°C)2468101214161820l (m)Cable length vs. temperature rangeAt 3m distance, intermediate wiresupports are required,see accessories.DIMENSIONS104

ZS71 TECHNICAL DATADIMENSIONS401.57301.18ø10.3910.3922.878.3112.476.2453,52.1118.7124.941054.13562.20ø25.98481.89331.30562.20M20522.0517,5.69421.6515.59mminch4SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS105

ZS73 Heavy-Duty Emergency Cable-Pull Switches Meet EN 418DescriptionThe ZS73 is designed to provide a continuous emergencystop along exposed areas of machinery and conveyors whichpresent hazards to operators/maintenance personnel. UnlikeE-stop pushbuttons, emergency stop cable-pull systems canbe actuated at any point along the “trip-wire.”The units feature positive-opening NC contacts which areforced open when the trip-wire is pulled. This design alsoassures machine stoppage if an operator falls into, leans on,or is pulled against the trip wire.In addition the switch is designed to operate if the trip wire iscut or goes slack. To comply with OSHA and other safetyregulations, the ZS73 features a manual mechanical resetwhich must be actuated before the controlled equipment canbe restarted.Their rugged metal housing and watertight design (IP65)make them ideal for achieving a higher degree of E-stopsafety in industrial and hostile environments.®Features & Benefits• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, die-cast aluminumhousing … tolerates the most hostile environments.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruptionupon pulling of trip wire.• Watertight design … meets IP65 requirements.• Continuous E-stop protection … for supported trip-wirespans up to 164 feet (50m).• Meets rigid safety agency standards … EN 418• Available in two operating force models … for applicationcompatibility.• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation.• Satisfies OSHA push/pull operating requirements …trips if cable is pulled or goes slack.• Explosion protected … optional IEC-rated explosion-proofmodels available.• Signal lamp … optional lamp signals tripped and latchedcondition.OperationThe ZS73 features an axial actuating shaft and a double-polecontact block with 1 NO and 1 NC contact or 2 NC contacts(with trip-wire attached). When installed, the trip-wire is pretensioneduntil the actuating shaft is pulled out 6 mm, closingthe NO contact(s).When the trip-wire is pulled, the positive-break NC contact(s)are forced open via a direct mechanical linkage with theactuating shaft. If the trip-wire goes slack (e.g. breaks or iscut) the NO contact, closed during pre-tensioning, opens –resulting in equipment stoppage.Manual pushbutton reset assures the equipment cannot berestarted until the reset is actuated.Typical ApplicationsThe ZS73 emergency cable-pull switches are ideal forreplacing multiple, discrete E-stop pushbuttons or achieving acontinuous, immediately accessible emergency stop. Typicalapplications include conveyor lines, textile machinery,packaging machinery, turret lathes, power plants, gravelprocessing and transfer lines.106®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

ZS73 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIESAVAILABLE STANDARD MODELSPart NumberContact Type Pre-TensionedTypicalConfiguration ResetForceActuatingForce (F)ZS73-10/1S WVD-98N*ZS73-10/1S WVD-177N*ZS73-10/1S WVD-275N*ZS73-10/1S WVD*1 NO & 1 NC1 NO & 1 NC1 NO & 1 NC1 NO & 1 NCPushbuttonPushbuttonPushbuttonPushbutton18-22 lbs (79-98N)26-40 lbs (118-177N)44-62 lbs (197-275N)66-88 lbs (295-390N)1.1-1.7 lbs (5-8N)4.2 -5.6 lbs (19-25N)7.4-9.2 lbs (33-41N)8.5-13.5 lbs (38-60N)ZS73-10/1S WVS-98N* 1 NO & 1 NC Key 18-22 lbs (79-98N) 1.1-1.7 lbs (5-8N)ZS73-10/1S WVS-177N* 1 NO & 1 NC Key 26-40 lbs (118-177N) 4.2 -5.6 lbs (19-25N)ZS73-10/1S WVS-275N* 1 NO & 1 NC Key 44-62 lbs (197-275N) 7.4-9.2 lbs (33-41N)ZS73-10/1S WVS* 1 NO & 1 NC Key 66-88 lbs (295-390N) 8.5-13.5 lbs (38-60N)ZS73-20 WVD-98N2 NC Pushbutton 18-22 lbs (79-98N) 1.1-1.7 lbs (5-8N)ZS73-20 WVD-177N2 NC Pushbutton 26-40 lbs (118-177N) 4.2 -5.6 lbs (19-25N)ZS73-20 WVD-275N2 NC Pushbutton 44-62 lbs (197-275N) 7.4-9.2 lbs (33-41N)ZS73-20 WVD2 NC Pushbutton 66-88 lbs (295-390N) 8.5-13.5 lbs (38-60N)ZS73-20 WVS-98N2 NC Key 18-22 lbs (79-98N) 1.1-1.7 lbs (5-8N)ZS73-20 WVS-177N2 NC Key 26-40 lbs (118-177N) 4.2 -5.6 lbs (19-25N)ZS73-20 WVS-275N2 NC Key 44-62 lbs (197-275N) 7.4-9.2 lbs (33-41N)ZS73-20 WVS2 NC Key 66-88 lbs (295-390N) 8.5-13.5 lbs (38-60N)*Available in an IEC-rated explosion-proof design. To order, add prefix “EEX” to part number.RecommendedCable Length(Minimum & Maximum)

ZS73 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingDie-cast aluminum, color-paintedThermoplastic coverDegree of Protection IP65 (pushbutton reset)IP54 (key reset)Maximum Supported 164 feet (50m)SpanTypical Deflection (S) 5.1" (13cm)Required for OperationMechanical Life1 million operationsOperating Temperature –13°F to +158°F (–25°C to +70°C)Conformity to Standards CE ULBGCSAEN 418IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1Explosion Protection E Ex dll CT6 (“Ex” models only)ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageType TerminalsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically-separated contactbridges6A/400VACSnap-action, positive-break NCcontacts (with wire pulling)6A (Slow blow)400VACScrew terminals with clampingwashersNote: Hard-coated housing available with stainless steel accessories.Please consult factory.Note: Bi-directional unit available, up to 50m each direction. Pleaseconsult factory.DIMENSIONSPushbutton ResetKey Reset15.59M2025.986,5.26301.185.201706.69752.95301.1833,41.31351.381054.13481.89301.1815.59M20562.20281.10702.76983.86mminchSWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS-100 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80T(°C)100 104 423-2411-12231124121020304050l (m)Cable length vs. temperature rangeAt 5m distance, intermediate wire supports arerequired. See accessories.108

ZS73 INSTALLATION DETAILSPRE-TENSIONING ADJUSTMENTTo ensure positive-break operation, the switchshould be pinned through the holes shown (1). Thetrip-wire should be pre-tensioned to the point wherethe linear switch actuating cam is in the middleposition (3). The standard 395N axial pulling forcerequired for pre-tensioning can be reduced byadjusting the grooved nut (2). For trip-wire spans ofless than 30m, the unit can be supplied with lighterforce pre-tensioning springs.PRE-TENSIONING FORCE VS. ACTUATION FORCEThe actuating force is a function of the:• trip-wire span• pre-tensioning spring• set pre-tensioning forceas shown. Units are available with lighter springs fortrip-wire spans of less than 30m. Please seeordering details under AVAILABLE OPTIONS.4109

ZS75 Heavy-Duty Emergency Cable-Pull Switches Meet EN 418®Features & Benefits• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, die-cast aluminumhousing … tolerates the most hostile environments.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruptionupon pulling of trip wire.• Watertight design … meets IP65 requirements.• Continuous E-stop protection … for supported trip-wirespans up to 164 feet (50m).• Meets rigid safety agency standards … EN 418• Available in four operating force models … forapplication compatibility.• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation.• Satisfies OSHA push/pull operating requirements …trips if cable is pulled or goes slack.• Explosion protected … optional IEC-rated explosion-proofmodels available.• Signal lamp … optional lamp signals tripped and latchedcondition.DescriptionThe ZS75 is designed to provide a continuous emergencystop along exposed areas of machinery and conveyors whichpresent hazards to operators/maintenance personnel. UnlikeE-stop pushbuttons, emergency stop cable-pull systems canbe actuated at any point along the “trip-wire.”The units feature positive-opening NC contacts which areforced open when the trip-wire is pulled. This design alsoassures machine stoppage if an operator falls into, leans on,or is pulled against the trip wire.In addition the switch is designed to operate if the trip wire iscut or goes slack. To comply with OSHA and other safetyregulations, the ZS75 features a manual mechanical resetwhich must be actuated before the controlled equipment canbe restarted.Their rugged metal housing and watertight design (IP65)make them ideal for achieving a higher degree of E-stopsafety in industrial and hostile environments.OperationThe ZS75 features an axial actuating shaft and up to twodouble-pole contact blocks. When installed, the trip-wire ispre-tensioned until the actuating shaft is pulled out 6 mm,closing the NO contact(s).When the trip-wire is pulled, the positive-break NC contact(s)are forced open via a direct mechanical linkage with theactuating shaft. If the trip-wire goes slack (e.g. breaks or iscut) the NO contacts, closed during pre-tensioning, open –resulting in equipment stoppage.Manual pushbutton reset assures the equipment cannot berestarted until the reset is actuated.Typical ApplicationsThe ZS75 emergency cable-pull switches are ideal forreplacing multiple, discrete E-stop pushbuttons or achieving acontinuous, immediately accessible emergency stop. Typicalapplications include conveyor lines, textile machinery,packaging machinery, turret lathes, power plants, gravelprocessing and transfer lines.110®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

ZS75 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIESPart NumberZS75-20/2S WVD-98N*ZS75-20/2S WVD-177N*ZS75-20/2S WVD-275N*ZS75-20/2S WVD*ZS75-20/2S WVS-98N*ZS75-20/2S WVS-177N*ZS75-20/2S WVS-275N*ZS75-20/2S WVS*ZS75-40 WVD-98NZS75-40 WVD-177NZS75-40 WVD-275NZS75-40 WVDZS75-40 WVS-98NZS75-40 WVS-177NZS75-40 WVS-275NZS75-40 WVSAVAILABLE STANDARD MODELSContact Type Pre-TensionedTypicalConfiguration ResetForceActuatingForce (F)2 NO & 2 NC Pushbutton 18-22 lbs (79-98N) 1.1-1.7 lbs (5-8N)2 NO & 2 NC Pushbutton 26-40 lbs (118-177N) 4.2-5.6 lbs (19-25N)2 NO & 2 NC Pushbutton 44-62 lbs (197-275N) 7.4-9.2 lbs (33-41N)2 NO & 2 NC Pushbutton 66-88 lbs (295-390N) 8.5-13.5 lbs (38-60N)2 NO & 2 NC Key 18-22 lbs (79-98N) 1.1-1.7 lbs (5-8N)2 NO & 2 NC Key 26-40 lbs (118-177N) 4.2-5.6 lbs (19-25N)2 NO & 2 NC Key 44-62 lbs (197-275N) 7.4-9.2 lbs (33-41N)2 NO & 2 NC Key 66-88 lbs (295-390N) 8.5-13.5 lbs (38-60N)4 NC Pushbutton 18-22 lbs (79-98N) 1.1-1.7 lbs (5-8N)4 NC Pushbutton 26-40 lbs (118-177N) 4.2-5.6 lbs (19-25N)4 NC Pushbutton 44-62 lbs (197-275N) 7.4-9.2 lbs (33-41N)4 NC Pushbutton 66-88 lbs (295-390N) 8.5-13.5 lbs (38-60N)4 NC Key 18-22 lbs (79-98N) 1.1-1.7 lbs (5-8N)4 NC Key 26-40 lbs (118-177N) 4.2-5.6 lbs (19-25N)4 NC Key 44-62 lbs (197-275N) 7.4-9.2 lbs (33-41N)4 NC Key 66-88 lbs (295-390N) 8.5-13.5 lbs (38-60N)*Available in an IEC-rated explosion-proof design. To order, add prefix “EEX” to part number.RecommendedCable Length(Minimum & Maximum)

ZS75 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingDie-cast aluminum, color-paintedDegree of Protection IP65 (pushbutton reset)IP54 (key reset)Maximum Supported 164 feet (50m)SpanTypical Deflection (S) 5.1" (13cm)Required for OperationMechanical Life1 million operationsOperating Temperature –13°F to +158°F (–25°C to +70°C)Conformity to Standards UL CSABGEN 418IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1Explosion Protection E Ex dll CT6 (“Ex” models only)ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageType TerminalsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically-separated contactbridges6A/400VACSnap-action, positive-break NCcontacts (with wire pulling)6A (Slow blow)400VACScrew terminals with clampingwashersDIMENSIONSPushbutton ResetKey Reset692.72542.1323.911546.06873.436,5.26803.15331.30762.99712.80803.1525.98522.05 662.601606.3019,5.77271.0612.4714.55M25702.761003.94mminchSWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS10 4 0 4 1013-1421-2233-3441-42132133411422344210-100 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80T(°C)ZS75-20/2S2010 4 0 4 1011-1221-2231-3241-421121314112223242304050l (m)Cable length vs. temperature rangeZS75-40At 5m distance, intermediate wire supports arerequired. See accessories.112

ZS75 INSTALLATION DETAILSPRE-TENSIONING ADJUSTMENTTo ensure positive-break operation, the switch should bepinned through the holes shown (1). The trip-wire should bepre-tensioned to the point where the linear switch actuatingcam is in the middle position (3). The standard 395N axialpulling force required for pre-tensioning can be reduced byadjusting the grooved nut (2). For trip-wire spans of less than30m, the unit can be supplied with lighter force pre-tensioningsprings.PRE-TENSIONING FORCE VS. ACTUATION FORCEThe actuating force is a function of the:• trip-wire span• pre-tensioning spring• set pre-tensioning forceas shown. Units are available with lighter springs fortrip-wire spans of less than 30m. Please seeordering details under AVAILABLE OPTIONS.4113

Series ZS441 Heavy-Duty Emergency Cable-Pull Switch Meets EN 418Typical ApplicationsZS441 emergency cable-pull switches are ideal for replacingmultiple, discrete E-stop pushbuttons or achieving acontinuous, immediately accessible emergency stop. Typicalapplications include conveyor lines, textile machinery,packaging machinery, turret lathes, power plants, gravelprocessing and transfer lines.®Features & Benefits• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, die-cast aluminumhousing … tolerates the most hostile environments.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruptionupon pulling of trip wire.• Watertight design … meets IP65 requirements.• Continuous E-stop protection … for trip-wire spans up to82 feet (25m).• Meets rigid safety agency standards … EN 418• Available in three reset styles … pushbutton, key andnon-reset.• Available in three operating force models … forapplication compatibility.• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation.• Built-in vibration tolerance … eliminates nuisancetripping.• Push/pull operation … actuates if trip-wire is pulled orgoes slack.DescriptionThe ZS441 Series is designed to provide a continuousemergency stop along exposed areas of machinery andconveyors which present hazards to operators/maintenancepersonnel. Unlike E-stop pushbuttons, emergency stop cablepullsystems can be actuated at any point along the “trip-wire.”The units feature positive-opening NC contacts which areforced open when the trip-wire is pulled. This design alsoassures machine stoppage if an operator falls into, leans on,or is pulled against the trip wire.In addition the switch is designed to operate if the trip wire iscut or goes slack. To comply with OSHA and other safetyregulations, the ZS441 features a manual mechanical resetwhich must be actuated before the controlled equipment canbe restarted.Their rugged metal housing and watertight design (IP65)make them ideal for achieving a higher degree of E-stopsafety in industrial and hostile environments.OperationThe ZS441 features an axial actuating shaft and a doublepolecontact block with 1 NO/1 NC or 2 NC contacts (with tripwireattached). When installed, the trip-wire is pre-tensioneduntil the actuating shaft is pulled out 6 mm, closing the opencontact.When the trip-wire is pulled, the positive-break NC contact isforced open via a direct mechanical linkage with the actuatingshaft. If the trip-wire goes slack (e.g. breaks or is cut) the NOcontact, closed during pre-tensioning, opens – resulting inequipment stoppage.Manual (key or pushbutton) reset mechanisms assure theequipment cannot be restarted until the reset is actuated.114Part NumberPL-M20-24VPL-M20-120VSTQ441-SCSTQ441-EBSTQ441-CCSTQ441-TBSTQ441-THSTQ441-PUNew! S900AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES®24V Pilot light kit120V Pilot light kitDescription5mm diameter steel cable, PVC coatedM10 eye bolt & hex nutCable clampTurnbuckleThimblePulley assembly (for cable "cornering")Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner(see page 126)For recommended installation instructions, please see page 117.is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

ZS441 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIESPart NumberContactConfigurationAVAILABLE STANDARD MODELSTypeResetPre-TensionedForceTypicalActuatingForce (F)RecommendedCable Length(Minimum & Maximum)ZS441-10/1S-60N1 NO & 1 NCNon-Reset13.5 lbs (60N)1.3 lbs (6N)0-16.5 ft (0-5m)ZS441-10/1S-150N1 NO & 1 NCNon-Reset34 lbs (150N)3.1 lbs (14N)16.5-50 ft (5-15m)ZS441-10/1S1 NO & 1 NCNon-Reset50 lbs (220N)5.2 lbs (23N)50-80 ft (15-25m)ZS441-10/1SVD-60N1 NO & 1 NCPushbutton13.5 lbs (60N)1.3 lbs (6N)0-16.5 ft (0-5m)ZS441-10/1SVD-150N1 NO & 1 NCPushbutton34 lbs (150N)3.1 lbs (14N)16.5-50 ft (5-15m)ZS441-10/1SVD1 NO & 1 NCPushbutton50 lbs (220N)5.2 lbs (23N)50-80 ft (15-25m)ZS441-10/1SVS-60N1 NO & 1 NCKey13.5 lbs (60N)1.3 lbs (6N)0-16.5 ft (0-5m)ZS441-10/1SVS-150N1 NO & 1 NCKey34 lbs (150N)3.1 lbs (14N)16.5-50 ft (5-15m)ZS441-10/1SVS1 NO & 1 NCKey50 lbs (220N)5.2 lbs (23N)50-80 ft (15-25m)ZS441-20-60N2 NCNon-Reset13.5 lbs (60N)1.3 lbs (6N)0-16.5 ft (0-5m)ZS441-20-150N2 NCNon-Reset34 lbs (150N)3.1 lbs (14N)16.5-50 ft (5-15m)ZS441-202 NCNon-Reset50 lbs (220N)5.2 lbs (23N)50-80 ft (15-25m)ZS441-20VD-60N2 NCPushbutton13.5 lbs (60N)1.3 lbs (6N)0-16.5 ft (0-5m)ZS441-20VD-150N2 NCPushbutton34 lbs (150N)3.1 lbs (14N)16.5-50 ft (5-15m)ZS441-20VDZS441-20VS-60NZS441-20VS-150N2 NC2 NC2 NCPushbuttonKeyKey50 lbs (220N)13.5 lbs (60N)34 lbs (150N)5.2 lbs (23N)1.3 lbs (6N)3.1 lbs (14N)50-80 ft (15-25m)0-16.5 ft (0-5m)16.5-50 ft (5-15m)4ZS441-20VS2 NCKey50 lbs (220N)5.2 lbs (23N)50-80 ft (15-25m)-100 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80T(°C)1020304050l (m)Cable length vs. temperature range115

ZS441 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousing (Standard) Die-cast aluminum with bakedenamel finishHousing (Optional) Cast ironDegree of Protection IP65 (pushbutton reset)IP54 (key reset)Maximum Supported 80 feet (25m)SpanTypical Deflection (S) 4" (10cm)Required for OperationOperating Temperature –22°F to +195°FMechanical Life3 × 10 4 operationsConformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 ULEN60947-5-1 CSAEN418DIN VDE 0660-200ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageType TerminalsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically-separated contactbridges6A (Slow-blow)Snap-action, positive-break NCcontacts (with wire pulling)Fuse 25A (time-delay)400VACScrew terminals with self-liftingclamps for up to 13 AWG flexiblestranded wire (2.5 mm 2 )SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS50 53 323-2411-1223112412DIMENSIONSNon-ResetPushbutton Reset381.522.87291.14381.522.87291.14ø 291.14ø291.14Key Reset843.319.3510.39SW20.79351.38843.319.3510.39SW20.79953.7412.4710.40351.3825.98371.46953.7412.4710.40331.30371.47301.18301.18913.58863.391064.17M20261.02612.40863.391064.17M20261.02612.40762.99mminch116

ZS441 TECHNICAL DATARecommended Emergency Cable-Pull Switch Installation Instructions(For ZS71, ZS73, ZS75 and ZS441 models)See page 126 for new S900 Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner(not shown above)4Part # S900 - TensionerReplaces turnbuckle & cable clampsNew!117

ZS75S BidirectionalHeavy-Duty Bidirectional EmergencyCable-Pull SwitchTypical ApplicationsZS75S emergency rope-pull switches are ideal for replacingmultiple, discrete E-stop pushbuttons or achieving acontinuous, immediately accessible emergency stop. Typicalapplications include conveyor lines, textile machinery,packaging machinery, turret lathes, power plants, gravelprocessing and transfer lines.DescriptionZS75S is designed to provide a continuous emergency stopalong exposed areas of machinery and conveyors whichpresent hazards to operators/maintenance personnel. UnlikeE-stop pushbuttons, emergency stop cable-pull systems canbe actuated at any point along the “trip-wire.”The units feature positive-opening NC contact(s) which areforced open when the trip-wire is pulled. This design alsoassures machine stoppage if an operator falls into, leans on,or is pulled against the trip-wire.To comply with OSHA and other safety regulations, theZS75S features a manual mechanical reset which must beactuated before the controlled equipment can be restarted. Inaddition the switch is designed to fail-to-safe if the trip wire iscut or goes slack.Their rugged metal housing and watertight design (IP65)make them ideal for achieving a higher degree of E-stopsafety in industrial and hostile environments. An optionalsignal lamp enables distance viewing of switch status.OperationAvailable with 2 NO & 2 NC or 4 NC contacts, the ZS75S isdesigned to mount between two trip-wires.When either trip-wire is pulled, the positive-break NCcontact(s) are forced open via a direct mechanical linkagewith the actuating lever. If either trip-wire goes slack (e.g.breaks or is cut), the tension spring of the other trip wire pullsthe actuating lever — also forcing the NC contacts to open.When actuated, the switch remains latched until manuallyreset via a pushbutton or key. (An optional signal lamp is alsoavailable.)Manual reset assures the equipment cannot be restarted untilactuated.®Features & Benefits• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, die-cast aluminumhousing … tolerates the most hostile environments.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruptionupon pulling of trip wire.• Watertight design … meets IP65 requirements.• Continuous E-stop protection … for trip-wire spans up to164 feet (50m).• Meets rigid safety agency standards … EN418• Available in two operating force models … for applicationcompatibility.• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation.• Satisfies OSHA push-pull operating requirements …trips if cable is pulled or goes slack.• Signal lamp … optional lamp signals tripped and latchedcondition.AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELSPart NumberContactTypeConfigurationResetZS75S-20/2S VD 2 NO & 2 NCPushbuttonZS75S-40 VD4 NCZS75S-20/2S VS 2 NO & 2 NCKeyZS75S-40 VS4 NCNote: Pilot lamp option available for all above models.Add suffix G24 (24VDC)Part NumberPL-M25-24VPL-M25-120VSTQ441-SCSTQ441-EBSTQ441-CCSTQ441-TBSTQ441-THSTQ441-PUAVAILABLE ACCESSORIES24V Pilot light kit120V Pilot light kit5mm diameter steel cable, PVC coatedM10 eye bolt & hex nutCable clampTurnbuckleThimbleDescriptionPulley assembly (for cable “cornering”)118®is a trademark of SCHMERSALSTQ441-SS Stainless springNew!S900 Cable-pull switch wire tensioner (see page 126)For recommended installation instructions, please see page 120.

ZS75S BIDIRECTIONAL TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingDie-cast aluminum, color-paintedDegree of Protection IP65 (pushbutton reset)IP54 (key reset)Actuating ForceDepends uponwire span and modelMaximum Supported 165 feet (50m) in each directionSpanMechanical Life1 million operationsOperating Temperature –13°F to +158°F (–25°C to +70°C)Conformity to Standards UL CSABGEN 418IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageType TerminalsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically-separated contactbridges6A/400VACSnap-action, positive-break NCcontacts (with wire pulling)6A (Slow blow)400VACScrew terminals with clampingwashersDIMENSIONS4SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS45° 20° 0 20° 45°13213341ZS75-20/2S13-1421-2233-3441-421422344210 4 0 4 1011-1221-2231-3241-421121314112223242ZS75-40119

ZS75S BIDIRECTIONAL TECHNICAL DATARECOMMENDED INSTALLATION DETAILSMounting Instructions – Cable Pull Switches Series ZS75S BidirectionalPart # S900 - TensionerReplaces turnbuckle & cable clampsNew!See page 126 for new S900 Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner(not shown above)120

4SaferbyDesign121

ZS80 Emergency Cable-Pull Switch (Meets EN 418)New!Features & Benefits• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostileenvironments.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assures circuitinterruption upon pulling of trip-wire.• Push/pull operation … operates if trip-wire is pulled orgoes slack.• Integrated emergency-stop button … assures completeemergency stop.• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmentalrequirements.• Continuous E-stop protection … for supported spans upto 164 feet (50m).• Visual position indicator … for ease of installation.• Lever for reset … and position indication.• Four contacts in a compact housing … available in threecontact configurations.• Meets rigid safety standards … EN 418, UL/CSA & BGpending.• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation.®DescriptionThe ZS80 is designed to provide continuous emergency stopcontrol along exposed areas of machinery and conveyors whichpresent hazards to operator/maintenance personnel. UnlikeE-Stop pushbuttons, emergency cable-pull systems can beactuated at any point along the “trip wire”.The unit features a double-break contact block offering a choiceof two positive-opening NC contacts and two NO contacts, threepositive-opening NC contacts and one NO contact, or four positive-openingNC contacts … which change state when the cableis pulled or goes slack. Thus the switch can be actuated if anoperator falls into, is pulled into, or leans on the trip wire.In addition the unit features an integrated E-Stop pushbutton, aposition indicator for easier installation, a lever-actuated reset,three cable entries, and an optional signaling lamp.The unit is capable of spanning lengths of up to 50 meters. Itsrugged, metal housing and watertight design (IP 67) make themideal in hostile environments. The units meet EN 418, IEC/EN60947-5-1, and IEC/EN 60947-5-5, with UL and CSA pending.OperationThe ZS80 features an axial actuating shaft and double-break2A-rated contacts with either 2 NC and 2 NO contacts, 3 NC and1 NO contacts, or 4 NC contacts (with trip-wire pre-tensioned).When the trip-wire is pulled, the positive-opening NC contact(s)are forced to open via a direct mechanical linkage with the actuatingshaft … resulting in machine stoppage.If the trip-wire goes slack (e.g. breaks or is cut) the NC contact(s)opens … also resulting in equipment stoppage.The integral lever-actuated reset mechanism assures that theequipment cannot be restarted until the cable-pull switch resethas been actuated.Typical ApplicationsThe ZS80 is ideal for replacing multiple, discreteE-stop pushbuttons or achieving a continuous,immediately accessible emergency stop … especiallywhere space is limited. Typical applications includeconveyor lines, textile machinery, packaging machinery,and transfer lines.122®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

ZS80 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIESPart NumberZS80-2O/2S WVDZS80-3O/1S WVDZS80-40 WVDContactConfiguration2 NO & 2 NC1 NO & 3 NC4 NCAVAILABLE STANDARD MODELSPre-TensionedForceTypical ActuatingForce (F)RecommendedCable Length(Maximum)22 lbs (100N) 9.2 lbs (41N) 165 ft (50m)22 lbs (100N) 9.2 lbs (41N) 165 ft (50m)22 lbs (100N) 9.2 lbs (41N) 165 ft (50m)AVAILABLE ACCESSORIESPart NumberDescriptionPL-M20-24V 24V Pilot light kitPL-M20-120VSTQ441-SCSTQ441-EBSTQ441-CCSTQ441-TBSTQ441-THSTQ441-PU120V Pilot light kit5mm diameter steel cable, PVC coatedM10 eye bolt & hex nutCable clampTurnbuckleThimblePulley assembly (for “cable cornering”)4New!S900 Cable-pull switch wire tensioner (see page 126)123

ZS80 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingDie-cast aluminum, enamel finishCoverFiberglass reinforced thermoplasticcover (ULTRAMID A3X2G5, Black)Degree of Protection IP67Maximum Supported 165 feet (50m)SpanOperating Temperature –4°F to +158°F (–20°C to +70°C)Mechanical Life1 million operationsConformity to Standards CEEN 418BG/UL/CSA PendingELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageType TerminalsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically-separated contactbridges2A/250VACSlow-action, positive-break NCcontacts with wire pull6A (Slow blow)250VACScrew terminals with self-liftingclamps for up to 13 AWG flexiblestranded wire (2.5mm 2 )-100 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80T(°C)DIMENSIONS1020304050l (m)Cable length vs. temperature rangeSWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICSZS80 2O/2S ZS80 3O/1S ZS80 4O124

4SaferbyDesign125

S900Cable-Pull Switch Wire TensionerFeatures & Benefits• Smooth adjustment … reduces adjustment effort.• Only one tool required … simplifies installation.• Anti-slip design … reduces need for readjustment.• Ergonomic … risk of injury is reduced.• Time-saving … cost of ownership is reduced.AVAILABLE MODELModel NumberS900DescriptionCable Pull Wire TensionerDescriptionThe S900 is a unique wire tensioning device whichsimplifies the installation and adjustment of cable pullswitches. Conventional systems are usually time consumingand difficult to install and adjust. The S900 eliminates theneed for a turnbuckle and at least 3 cable clamps.S900-SHShackleNote: The cable-pull switch is purchased separately.S900-SH shackle is required to utilize with SchmersalZS71, ZS73W, ZS75W and ZS80 cable-pull switches.DIMENSIONS126

4SaferbyDesign127

128SaferbyDesign

NON-CONTACT SAFETY SENSORSThese rugged presence-sensing devices feature a sealed (IP67) housing, making them ideal interlocks in hostileenvironments. Their tamper-resistant design and small size make them attractive alternatives to conventionalproximity sensors, magnetic switches, and limit switches. Used with SCHMERSAL’s matched safety circuit monitors,they allow achieving the highest levels of machine safety.New!New!SensorSeriesSELECTION GUIDEApproximateEnvelopeDimensionsOperatingVoltageContactConfiguration(s)BNS250 1.0"×1.4"× ⁄0.5" 24VDC 1 NO & 1 NC1 NO & 2 NCBNS260 1.0"×1.4"× ⁄0.5" 24VDC 1 NO & 1 NC1 NO & 2 NC2 NC3 NCCatalogPageNo.BNS33 3.5"×1.0"× ⁄0.5" 24VAC/DC 1 NO & 1 NC120VAC/DC1 NO & 2 NC2 NC1343 NCNew! BNS33S .625"×3.5"×1" 24VDC100VAC/DC1 NO & 2 NC138New! BNS36 3.5"×1.0"× ⁄0.5" 24VDC 1 NO & 1 NC1 NO & 2 NC2NC, 3NC140BNS303 1.25" ⁄0 100VAC/DC 1 NO & 1 NC1 NO & 2 NC142BNS30 & BNS300 1.25" ⁄0 24VDC 1 NC144BNS333 4.5"×1.7"×1.7" 24VDC 1 NC 146BNS16 1.25"×2"×3" 100VAC/DC 1 NO & 2 NC2 NC148BZ16 1.25"×2"×3" 24VDC 1 NO & 1 NC 150New! BNS-B20 NA 24VDC 1 NO & 1 NC 152New! CSS 180 0.7"×3.6" 24VDC 2 PNP 154New! CSS 34 1"×4"×1" 24VDC 2 PNP 156Coded-Magnet Sensor Compatible AES Safety Controllers1591301325129

SERIES BNS250Coded-Magnet SensorsFeatures & Benefits• Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliabilityin the most hostile environments.• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simplemagnets.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates mostindustrial environments.• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easyinstallation and provide visual indication of switch status.• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstandmechanical abuse.• Satisfy CE & fail-to-safe requirements … when used withSeries AES safety controllers.DescriptionThe Series BNS250 coded-magnet sensors are designed foruse as a safety interlock switch on movable machineguards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of amultiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. Thereed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presenceof their matched magnetic field array.Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant designprevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly codedmagnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features a 1-meter long prewired pigtail.OperationThe reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationaryportion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assemblymounted to the movable element of the machine guard. Whenthe guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field alignswith the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When theguard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is notproperly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensoroutput will remain “off.”Typical ApplicationsThe sealed, compact BNS250 is ideal for use on movablemachine guards in hostile environments. Typical applicationsinclude food processing equipment, chemical processingequipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Please order BPS250 magnet separately)Part NumberContactConfiguration*DescriptionBNS250-11z 1 NO & 1 NCMultiple reed switch(100VAC/DC) assemblyBNS250-12z 1 NO & 2 NCwith 1-meter prewiredpigtailBNS250-11zG 1 NO & 1 NCMultiple reed switch(24VDC/10mA) assemblyBNS250-12zG 1 NO & 2 NCwith 1 meter prewired pigtailand built-in LED displayBNS250-11zG-2205(side entry cable)1 NO & 1 NCMultiple reed switch(24VDC/10mA) assembly with5 meter pigtail (side entry) andbuilt-in LED displayBPS250 N/A Coded-magnet actuator*Contact configuration in presence of BPS250 coded-magnetactuator.*Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are foruse in safety applications only when used withan electrically-compatible safety controller orsafety PLC. (For recommended compatibleSCHMERSAL safety controllers, please seethe selection chart on Page 159, or call ouroffice for other new, available models.)!USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAYDAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.130

BNS250 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingFiberglass reinforced thermoplasticSwitching Distance “S”* “On”: 4mm (0.16")“Off”: 14mm (0.55")Degree of Protection IP67Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°FOperating Principle MagneticShock Resistance30g/11msVibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mmConformity to Standards CE, UL, CSAVDE 0660 Part 209*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. Theproximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSMaximum Operating Voltage 100VAC/DC24VDC for -11zG or -12zG versionsMaximum Continuous 100 mA (BNS250-11z/12z)Current Rating10 mA (BNS250-11zG/12zG)Maximum Switching1W (BNS250-11z/12z)Capacity (Power Rating) 240mW (BNS250-11zG/12zG)Type Connection* 1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm 2(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available onrequest. Please consult factory.DIMENSIONS25.9819.75331.3022.87135.1ø4,5.1813.518,7.34331.3022.8713.518,7.34100039.3725.9819.75ø4,5.18mminchNote: BNS250 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.WIRING DETAILS5BNS250-11zBNS250-12zBNS250-11zGBNS250-12zG13(black)14(blue)13(black)14(blue)13(black)14(blue)13(black)14(blue)21(white)22(brown)21(white)C(brown)21(white)22(brown)21(white)C(brown)Contacts shown with gate closedMISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE131

SERIES BNS260Coded-Magnet SensorsFeatures & Benefits• Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliabilityin the most hostile environments.• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simplemagnets.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates mostindustrial environments.• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easyinstallation and provide visual indication of switch status.• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstandmechanical abuse.• Satisfy CE & fail-to-safe requirements … when used withSeries AES safety controllers.DescriptionThe Series BNS260 coded-magnet sensors are designedfor use as a safety interlock switch on movable machineguards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of amultiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. Thereed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presenceof their matched magnetic field array.Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant designprevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperlycoded magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module featuresa 1-meter long prewired pigtail or an available connector.OperationThe reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationaryportion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assemblymounted to the movable element of the machine guard. Whenthe guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field alignswith the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When theguard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is notproperly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensoroutput will remain “off.”Typical ApplicationsThe sealed, compact BNS260 is ideal for use on movablemachine guards in hostile environments. Typical applicationsinclude food processing equipment, chemical processingequipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.Note: 4 pole models accept either a screw-on or snap-onconnector.6 pole models accept only a snap-on connector.AVAILABLE BNS260 CODED-MAGNET SENSORSOrdering Details (Order BPS260 Actuator below)BNS260- Z - -Safety ContactsSignalling Contacts11 (1 NO/1 NC)02 (2 NC)Leave blank(no signalling contact)/01 (1 NC)Leave blank(without LED)G (with LED)Leave blank (Cable)ST (Connector)L (Left hand hinge)R (Right hand hinge)Ordering example: To order a BNS260 with 1NO/1NC safety contacts,a NC signaling contact, LED left hand hinge and cableorder p/n BNS260-11/01ZGLCODED MAGNET ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIESModel NumberBPS260-1BPS260-2BNS260M8S-4P-XXM8S-6P-XXM8SRA-4P-XXM8SRA-6P-XXDescriptionStandard ActuatorActuator for 90° operationSpacer for mounting reed switch ormagnet on ferrous materialStraight snap-on connector.Available -2m, -5m and -10m lengthsRight angle snap-on connector.Available -2m, -5m and -10m lengths*Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are foruse in safety applications only when used withan electrically-compatible safety controller orsafety PLC. (For recommended compatibleSCHMERSAL safety controllers, please seethe selection chart on Page 159, or call ouroffice for other new, available models.)132!USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAYDAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.

BNS260 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingFiberglass reinforced thermoplasticSwitching Distance “S”* “On”: 5mm (0.2")“Off”: 15mm (0.6")Degree of Protection IP67Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°FOperating Principle MagneticShock Resistance30g/11msVibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mmConformity to Standards CE, VDE 0660 Part 209 cUL pending*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. Theproximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSMaximum Operating VoltageMaximum ContinuousCurrent RatingMaximum Switching75VAC/DC24VDC for LED versions400 mA without LED10 mA with LED10va without LED240mW with LEDType Connection* 1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm 2(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail or M84 or 6 pin connector (ST)*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available onrequest. Please consult factory.DIMENSIONSBNS260BPS260mmNote: BNS260 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.WIRING DETAILS (Contact configuration shown in presence of BPS260 Coded-magnet actuator)BNS260-02z(G)BNS260-02/01z(G) BNS260-11z(G) BNS260-11/01z(G)5Contacts shown with gate closed. Color configuration shown for cabled versions, connector color codes may vary.QUICK-CONNECT DIAGRAMSMISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCEBNS260 4-PoleBNS260 6-Pole133

SERIES BNS33 & BNS33SCoded-Magnet SensorsDescriptionThe Series BNS33 coded-magnet sensors are designed foruse as a safety interlock switch on movable machineguards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of amultiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. Thereed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presenceof their matched magnetic field array.Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67(submersible) standards (IP69K for BNS33S). Their tamperresistantdesign prevents bypassing with a simple magnet orimproperly coded magnetic field. In addition, the BNS modulefeatures an optional built-in LED display of switch status, anda 1-meter long prewired pigtail to assure sealing integrity.Features & Benefits• Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliabilityin the most hostile environments.• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simplemagnets.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates mostindustrial environments.• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easyinstallations and provide visual indication of switch status.• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstandmechanical abuse.• Satisfy EN954, Category 1, 3, or 4 … when used withappropriate Series AES safety controllers.• Optional high-strength field coded-magnets …extends sensing range to 10mm.• Units available with M8 quick-connect.(Please consult factory).• Available stainless steel housing (BNS33S) … idealfor the food industry.OperationThe reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationaryportion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assemblymounted to the movable element of the machine guard. Whenthe guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field alignswith the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When theguard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is notproperly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensoroutput will remain “off.”Typical ApplicationsThe sealed, compact BNS33 is ideal for use on movablemachine guards in hostile environments or where space islimited. Typical applications include food processingequipment, chemical processing equipment, woodworkingmachinery, packaging machinery, and articulating robot armrest position sensing.*Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are foruse in safety applications only when used withan electrically-compatible safety controller orsafety PLC. (For recommended compatibleSCHMERSAL safety controllers, please seethe selection chart on Page 159, or call ouroffice for other new, available models.)Required SafetyController.!USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAYDAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.134

BNS33 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIESPart NumberBNS33-11z**BNS33-12z***BNS33-11zG**BNS33-12zG***BNS33-12z-2187**AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Please order BPS33 or BPS33-2326 magnet separately)ContactConfiguration*1 NO & 1 NC1 NO & 2 NC1 NO & 1 NC1 NO & 2 NC1 NO & 2 NCMaximumContact Rating100VAC/DC(400mA)24VDC(10mA)120VAC/DC(250mA)DescriptionMultiple reed switchassembly with 1-meterprewired pigtailMultiple reed switchassembly with 1-meterprewired pigtail andbuilt-in LED displayMultiple reed switchassembly with 1-meterprewired pigtailAVAILABLE ACCESSORIESPart NumberDescriptionBN31/33M8ST-2MM8ST-5MM8ST-10MM8ST-15MM8ST-RA-2MM8ST-RA-5MBNS-SS-CVRBPS-SS-CVRShim plate for mounting reed switchassembly on ferrous materialStraight quick-connect with 2M cableStraight quick-connect with 5M cableStraight quick-connect with 10M cableStraight quick-connect with 15M cableRight-angle quick-connect with 2M cableRight-angle quick-connect with 5M cableStainless-steel protective cover forBNS33-xxxStainless-steel protective cover forBPS33-xxxBNS33S-12z**BNS33S-12zG**New!New!1 NO & 2 NC1 NO & 2 NC100VAC/DC(250mA)24VDC(10mA)Multiple reed switchassembly with 1-meterprewired pigtail andstainless steelenclosureCoded MagnetSensorBPS33N/AN/ACoded-magnet actuator(5mm sensing distance)BPS33-2326 N/A N/ACoded-magnet actuator(10mm sensing distance)BPS33S N/A N/ANew!Stainless steelcoded-magnet actuatorMultiple Reed Switch AssemblySafety ControllerBNS33-11z-ST**BNS33-11zG-ST**BNS33-12z-ST***1NO & 1NC1NO & 1NC1NO & 2NC60VAC/DC(400mA)24VDC(10mA)60VAC/DC(400mA)Multiple reed switchassembly with M8x1quick-connectCoded-Magnet Sensor andSafety Controller sold separately.5BNS33-12zG-ST***1NO & 2NC24VDC(10mA)*Contact configuration in presence of BPS33 coded-magnet actuator.**These models feature isolated contacts.***These models feature C-form contacts.Note: Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on request.Please consult factory.Note: SPEZ-2237 for sliding doors is available for BNS33-11z and -11zG only.Contact factory for more information.135

BNS33 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingFiberglass reinforced thermoplasticSwitching Distance “S”* “On”: 5mm (0.2")“Off”: 15mm (0.6")“On”: 8mm (0.3") (For BNS33S only)“Off”: 18mm (0.7") (For BNS33S only)Degree of Protection IP67 (BNS33S: IP69k)Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F (+178°F for BNS33S)Operating Principle MagneticShock Resistance 30g/11msVibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mmConformity to Standards CE, UL, CSAVDE 0470 Part 1IEC 529/EN60529*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. Theproximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSFor electrical ratings see page 139Type Connection* 1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm 2(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail.M8x1 quick-connect for versionswith “ST” suffix*Longer prewired cables available on request. Please consult factory.BPS33 MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCEBNS33S MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE136

BNS33 TECHNICAL DATADIMENSIONSNote: 27mm width and14.5mm depth forBNS33S/BPS33SM8250.9870.283,50.14883.47783.070,5.02ø5.02 DIA18,5.073BNS33 with Quick-Connect Terminal4,50.183.012130.51Note: BNS33 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.WIRING DETAILS5Quick-Connect forBNS33-11 unitsQuick-Connect forBNS33-12 units2 32 31 41 4Contacts shown with gate closedPins 1-2 are Normally-closedPins 3-4 are Normally-openPin 1: CommonPins 2 & 4 are Normally-closedPin 3 is Normally-open137

SERIES BNS33SStainless Steel Coded-Magnet SensorsNew!Features & Benefits• Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliabilityin the most hostile environments.• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simplemagnets.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates mostindustrial environments.• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easyinstallations and provide visual indication of switch status.• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstandmechanical abuse.• Satisfy EN954, Category 1, 3, or 4 … when used withappropriate Series AES safety controllers.• Stainless steel housing … ideal for the food industry.DescriptionThe Series BNS33S coded-magnet sensor is designed foruse as a safety interlock switch on movable machineguards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of amultiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. Thereed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presenceof their matched magnetic field array.Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP69Kstandards. Their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassingwith a simple magnet or improperly coded magnetic field. Inaddition, the BNS module features an optional built-in LEDdisplay of switch status, and a 1-meter long prewired pigtail toassure sealing integrity.OperationThe reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationaryportion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assemblymounted to the movable element of the machine guard. Whenthe guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field alignswith the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When theguard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is notproperly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensoroutput will remain “off.”Part NumberBNS33S-12z**BNS33S-12zG**AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Please order BPS33S magnet separately)ContactConfiguration*1 NO & 2 NC1 NO & 2 NCMaximumContactRating100VAC/DC(250mA)24VDC(10mA)BPS33S N/A N/ADescriptionMultiple reedswitch assemblywith 1-meterprewired pigtailand stainlesssteel enclosureStainless steelcoded-magnetactuator*Contact configuration in presence of BPS33S coded-magnet actuator.**These models feature isolated contacts.Note: Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available onrequest. Please consult factory.Typical ApplicationsThe sealed, compact BNS33S is ideal for use on movablemachine guards in hostile environments or where space islimited. Typical applications include food processingequipment, chemical processing equipment, woodworkingmachinery, packaging machinery, and articulating robot armrest position sensing.*Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are foruse in safety applications only when used withan electrically-compatible safety controller orsafety PLC. (For recommended compatibleSCHMERSAL safety controllers, please seethe selection chart on Page 159, or call ouroffice for other new, available models.)!USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAYDAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.138

BNS33S TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingType V4A (316L) stainless steelSwitching Distance “S”* “On”: 8mm (0.3")“Off”: 18mm (0.7")Degree of Protection IP69kOperating Temperature –13°F to +178°FOperating Principle MagneticShock Resistance 30g/11msVibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mmConformity to Standards CE, UL, CSAVDE 0470 Part 1IEC 529/EN60529*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. Theproximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSFor electrical ratings see pageType Connection* 1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm 2(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail.*Longer prewired cables available on request. Please consult factory.DIMENSIONSNote: BNS33 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.WIRING DETAILSBNS33S MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE5Contacts shown with gate closed139

SERIES BNS36Coded-Magnet SensorsNew!Features & Benefits• Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliabilityin the most hostile environments.• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simplemagnets.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates mostindustrial environments.• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easyinstallation and provide visual indication of switch status.• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstandmechanical abuse.• Satisfy CE & fail-to-safe requirements … when used withSeries AES safety controllers.DescriptionThe Series BNS36 coded-magnet sensors are designedfor use as a safety interlock switch on movable machineguards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of amultiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. Thereed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presenceof their matched magnetic field array.Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant designprevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperlycoded magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features anoptional built-in LED display of switch status, and a 1-meterlong prewired pigtail or an available connector.OperationThe reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationaryportion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assemblymounted to the movable element of the machine guard. Whenthe guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field alignswith the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When theguard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is notproperly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensoroutput will remain “off.”AVAILABLE BNS36 CODED-MAGNET SENSORSOrdering Details (Order BPS36 Actuator below)BNS36- Z - -Safety ContactsSignalling Contacts11 (1 NO/1 NC)02 (2 NC)Leave blank(no signalling contact)/01 (1 NC)Leave blank(without LED)G (with LED)Leave blank (Cable)ST (Connector)L (Left hand hinge)R (Right hand hinge)Ordering example: To order a BNS36 with 1NO/1NC safety contacts,a NC signaling contact, LED left hand hinge and cableorder p/n BNS36-11/01ZGLCODED MAGNET ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIESModel NumberDescriptionTypical ApplicationsThe sealed, compact BNS36 is ideal for use on movablemachine guards in hostile environments. Typical applicationsinclude food processing equipment, chemical processingequipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.BPS36-1BPS36-2BNS36M8S-4P-XXM8S-6P-XXStandard ActuatorActuator for 90° operationSpacer for mounting reed switch ormagnet on ferrous materialStraight snap-on connector.Available -2m, -5m and -10m lengthsNote: 4 pole models accept either a screw-on or snap-onconnector.6 pole models accept only a snap-on connector.M8SRA-4P-XXM8SRA-6P-XXRight angle snap-on connector.Available -2m, -5m and -10m lengths*Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are foruse in safety applications only when used withan electrically-compatible safety controller orsafety PLC. (For recommended compatibleSCHMERSAL safety controllers, please seethe selection chart on Page 159, or call ouroffice for other new, available models.)140!USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAYDAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.

BNS36 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingFiberglass reinforced thermoplasticSwitching Distance “S”* “On”: 7mm“Off”: 17mmDegree of Protection IP67Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°FOperating Principle MagneticShock Resistance30g/11msVibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mmConformity to Standards CE, BG-GS-ET14, cUL pending*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. Theproximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSMaximum Operating Voltage 75V DC24VDC for LED versionsMaximum Continuous 400 mA without LEDCurrent Rating10 mA with LEDMaximum Switching10va without LED240mW with LEDType Connection* 1 meter long LiYY* 0.25mm 2(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail or M84 or 6 pin connector (ST)*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available onrequest. Please consult factory.DIMENSIONSBNS36BPS36BNS36 SpacerNote: BNS36 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.WIRING DETAILS (Contact configuration shown in presence of BPS36 Coded-magnet actuator)BNS36-02z(G)BNS36-02/01z(G) BNS36-11z(G) BNS36-11/01z(G)5Contacts shown with gate closed. Color configuration shown for cabled versions, connector color codes may vary.QUICK-CONNECT DIAGRAMSMISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCEBNS36 4-PoleBNS36 6-Pole141

SERIES BNS303Coded-Magnet SensorsFeatures & Benefits• Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliabilityin the most hostile environments.• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simplemagnets.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates mostindustrial environments.• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstandmechanical abuse.• Satisfy EN954, Category 4 … when used with appropriatesafety controller.DescriptionThe Series BNS303 coded-magnet sensors are designed foruse as a safety interlock switch on movable machineguards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of amultiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. Thereed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presenceof their matched magnetic field array.Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant designprevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly codedmagnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features anintegral built-in LED display of switch status, and a 1-meterlong prewired pigtail.OperationThe reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationaryportion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assemblymounted to the movable element of the machine guard. Whenthe guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field alignswith the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When theguard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is notproperly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensoroutput will remain “off.”AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Please order BPS300 or BPS303 magnet separately)Part NumberContactConfiguration*DescriptionBNS303-11z 1 NO & 1 NCMultiple reed switch(100VAC/DC/400mA)BNS303-12z 1 NO & 2 NCassembly with 1-meterprewired pigtailBNS303-11zG 1 NO & 1 NCMultiple reed switch(24VDC/10mA) assemblywith 1-meter prewiredBNS303-12zG 1 NO & 2 NC pigtail and built-in LEDdisplayBPS300N/ACoded-magnet actuator(front mount)BPS303**N/ACoded-magnet actuator(rear mount)*Contact configuration in presence of BPS300 or BPS303 codedmagnetactuator.**Available with stainless-steel outer jackets. Please consult factory.Typical ApplicationsThe sealed, compact BNS303 is ideal for use on movablemachine guards in hostile environments. Typical applicationsinclude food processing equipment, chemical processingequipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.*Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are foruse in safety applications only when used withan electrically-compatible safety controller orsafety PLC. (For recommended compatibleSCHMERSAL safety controllers, please seethe selection chart on Page 159, or call ouroffice for other new, available models.)BPS300 ActuatorBPS303 Actuator**!USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAYDAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.142

BNS303 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingFiberglass reinforced thermoplasticSwitching Distance, “S”* “On”: 5mm (0.2")“Off”: 15mm (0.6")“On”: 8 mm ¸“Off”: 18mm˝Suffix 2211 only˛Degree of Protection IP67Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°FOperating Principle MagneticShock Resistance 30g/11msVibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mmConformity to Standards CE, UL, CSAVDE 0660 Part 209EN1088*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. Theproximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSMaximum Operating Voltage 24VDC (with LED)100VAC/DC (without LED)Maximum Continuous 10mA (with LED)Current Rating400mA (without LED)Maximum Switching10VACapacity (Power Rating)Type Connection* 1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm 2(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available onrequest. Please consult factory.DIMENSIONS6.24361.42mminchø 4,5.182.08ø2.0890°14.55x 1,5.0615.59301.18M 301.202.08ø2.08441.74100039.37ø301.1814.55ø 371.465BPS 303 (Ideal for use in the food industry)15.59Note: BNS303 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.WIRING DETAILSMISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCEBNS303-11z13(black)21(white)14(blue)22(brown)13(black)21(white)BNS303-11zG14(blue)22(brown)22(black)32(white)BNS303-12z14(blue)C(brown)BNS303-12zG13(black)21(white)14(blue)C(brown)Contacts shown with gate closed143

SERIES BNS30 & BNS300Coded-Magnet Sensor withIntegral Safety Control ModuleDescriptionThe Series BNS30 and BNS300 coded-magnet sensors aredesigned for use as a safety interlock switch on movablemachine guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor setconsists of a multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnetactuator. The reed switches, wired in series, will only close inthe presence of their matched magnetic field array.In addition, the Series features an integral monitoring andcontrol circuit which detects faults in the reed switch array(satisfying EN954, Category 1 without use of an ancillarysafety relay module).Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant designprevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly codedmagnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features anintegral LED display of switch status and a 1-meter longprewired pigtail.OperationThe reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationaryportion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assemblymounted to the movable element of the machine guard. Whenthe guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field alignswith the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When theguard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is notproperly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensoroutput will remain “off.”Features & Benefits• Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliabilityin the most hostile environments.• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simplemagnets.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates mostindustrial environments.• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easyinstallations and provide visual indication of switch status.• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstandmechanical abuse.• Integral reed switch monitoring & control module…detects faults in reed switch array. Satisfies EN954, SafetyCategory 1.• Available in metal (BNS30) or plastic (BNS300)housings … for application versatility.AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Please order BPS300 or BPS303 magnet separately)ContactPart NumberConfiguration*DescriptionBNS30-01ZG**andBNS300-01zG**BPS300BPS303***1 NCN/AN/AMultiple reed switch(24VDC/30mA) assemblywith 1-meter prewired pigtailand built-in LED displayCoded-magnet actuator(front mount)Coded-magnet actuator(rear mount)*Contact configuration in presence of BPS300 or BPS 303coded-magnet actuator.**Important Note: The BNS30 and BNS300 are 4-wire sensorsdesigned to satisfy EN954, Category 1requirements. They are not designed for usewith a separate safety controller.***Available with stainless-steel outer jacket. Please consultfactoryTypical ApplicationsThe sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movablemachine guards in hostile environments. Typical applicationsinclude food processing equipment, chemical processingequipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.BPS300 ActuatorBPS303 Actuator***144

BNS300 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingFiberglass reinforced thermoplastic (BNS300)Brass, nickel-plated (BNS30)Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 5mm (0.2")“Off”: 15mm (0.6")Degree of Protection IP67Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°FOperating Principle MagneticShock Resistance 30g/11msVibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mmConformity to Standards CE, UL, CSAVDE 0660 Part 209EN954-1EN1088BG-GS-ET-14*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. Theproximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSMaximum Supply VoltageMaximum ContinuousCurrent RatingMaximum SwitchingCapacity (Power Rating)Type Connection*24VDC30mAVoltage: 250VACCurrent: 3A (750VA)1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm2(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) availableon request. Also available with M12x1 quick-connect. Pleaseconsult factory.DIMENSIONS & WIRING DETAILS6.24361.422.08ø2.08x 1.5.0690°M 301.20ø 4,5.1814.5515.59301.18mminch783.07BN 24 VDCBKBKBU 30 mABNS300-01-zGL+L-100040ø301.182.0815.59ø2.0814.55ø 371.46BPS 300 (Ideal for use in the food industry)5Note: BNS300 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE145

SERIES BNS333Coded-Magnet Sensors withIntegral Safety Control ModuleFeatures & Benefits• Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliabilityin the most hostile environments.• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simplemagnets.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates mostindustrial environments.• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easyinstallation and provide visual indication of switch status.• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstandmechanical abuse.• Integral reed switch monitoring/control module …detects faults in reed switch array. Satisfies EN954,Category 1.AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Please order BPS300 or BPS303 magnet separately)ContactPart NumberConfiguration*DescriptionDescriptionThe Series BNS333 coded-magnet sensors are designed foruse as a safety interlock switch on movable machineguards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of amultiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. Thereed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presenceof their matched magnetic field array.In addition, the BNS333 features an integral monitoring andcontrol circuit which detects faults in the reed switch array(satisfying EN954, Category 1 without use of an ancillarysafety circuit monitoring module).Their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with asimple magnet or improperly coded magnetic field. Inaddition, the BNS module features an optional built-in LEDdisplay of switch status.OperationThe reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationaryportion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assemblymounted to the movable element of the machine guard. Whenthe guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field alignswith the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When theguard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is notproperly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensoroutput will remain “off.”BNS333-01YU** 1 NCMultiple reed switch(24VAC/DC/40mA) assembly withintegral switch monitoringand control module.Actuation from rear (“U”)BNS333-01YD**Same as above butactuation from front(“D”)BNS333-01YL**Same as above butactuation from left (“L”)BNS333-01YR**Same as above butactuation from right (“R”)BNS333-01YV**Same as above butactuation from top (“V”)BPS300N/ACoded-magnet actuator(front mount)BPS303***N/ACoded-magnet actuator(rear mount)*Contact configuration in presence of BPS300 or BPS 303coded-magnet actuator.**The BNS333 is a 4-wire sensor designed to satisfy EN954,Category 1 requirements. It is not designed for use with aseparate safety controller.***Available with stainless steel outer jacket. Please consultfactoryTypical ApplicationsThe sealed, compact BNS333 is ideal for use on movablemachine guards in hostile environments. Typical applicationsinclude food processing equipment, chemical processingequipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.BPS300 ActuatorBPS303 Actuator***146

BNS333 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingFiberglass reinforced thermoplasticSwitching Distance “S”* “On”: 4mm (0.16")“Off”: 14mm (0.55")Degree of Protection IP65Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°FOperating Principle MagneticShock Resistance 30g/11msVibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mmConformity to Standards CEVDE 0660, Part 209EN 954-1EN 1088BG-GS-ET-1L*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. Theproximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSMaximum Operating Voltage 24VDCMaximum Continuous 40mACurrent RatingMaximum SwitchingVoltage: 250VACCapacity (Power Rating) Current: 5A(1,250VA)Type ConnectionScrew terminalsDIMENSIONS & WIRING DETAILS401.57401.572.08ø2.08451.777,3.2990°ø 4,5.1814.5515.59301.185,3.492.08ø2.081124.40602.36ø301.1815.5914.55ø 371.46BPS 333 (Ideal for use in the food industry)5301.18M2034,31.35mminch123424 VDC40 mABNS333-01yL+L-MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCEActuating directions147

SERIES BNS16Coded-Magnet SensorsFeatures & Benefits• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliabilityin the most hostile environments.• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simplemagnets.• Satisfies EN954 Category 4 … when used withappropriate Series AES safety controller.• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstandmechanical abuse.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates mostindustrial environments.• Long-life … no mechanical wear due to non-contact design• Same mounting as Series AZ16 … ideal alternative inwet, dirty environments.AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(BNS16 actuator sold separately)DescriptionThe Series BNS16 coded-magnet sensors are designed foruse as a safety interlock on movable machine guards. Eachsensor set consists of a multiple reed switch unit and acoded-magnet actuator. The sensor outputs will only changestate in the presence of their matched magnetic field array.Both switch and magnet assembly are sealed to IP67(submersible) standards. The unit features the same mountingdimensions as our popular Series AZ16 keyed safety interlockswitches ... providing an attractive alternative in applicationscharacterized by alignment problems and/or harshenvironments.OperationThe reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationaryportion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assemblymounted to the movable element of the machine guard. Whenthe guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field alignswith the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When theguard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is notproperly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensoroutput will remain “off.”Typical ApplicationsThe sealed, compact BNS16 is ideal for use on movablemachine guards in hostile environments or where space islimited. Typical applications include food processingequipment, chemical processing equipment, woodworkingmachinery, packaging machinery, and articulating robot armrest position sensing.Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are foruse in safety applications only when used withan electrically-compatible safety controller orsafety PLC. (For recommended compatibleSCHMERSAL safety controllers, please seethe selection chart on Page 159, or call ouroffice for other new, available models.)Part NumberBNS16 - 12ZDBNS16 - 12ZUBNS16 - 12ZVBNS16 - 12ZRBNS16 - 12ZLBNS16 - 12ZLRBPS16Actuator PlaneFront coverBackTopRightLeftDual actuation - both Left and Right(2) BPS16 actuators requiredCoded-magnet actuatorActuating Planes!USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAYDAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.148

BNS16 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingFiberglass reinforced thermoplasticSwitching Distance “S”* “On”: 8mm (0.315")“Off”: 18mm (0.700")Maximum Switching 5H (in combination with Series AESFrequencysafety controller)Degree of Protection IP67 per IEC 60529Operating Temperature –25°C to +70°C (–13°F to +158°F)Operating Principle MagneticShock Resistance 30g/11msVibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mmConformity to Standards EN 60347-5-3/PDF-MCE*When no ferromagnetic material is present in vicinity of the sensoror actuator.ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSMaximum Contact Rating* 100VAC/DCMaximum Continuous 0.4ACurrent RatingMaximum Switching10VACapacity (Power Rating)Type Connection3 removable cable entries(M20x1.5) give access to screwterminals with self-lifting clampsfor up to 13AWG (2.5mm 2 )flexible stranded wire.*Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) are to be suppressedby means of a suitable circuit.AXIAL TOLERANCEDIMENSIONS5WIRING DETAILS1 NO2 NCContacts shown with gate closed149

SERIES BZ16Dual-Channel Non-Contact Safety Interlock Switch(with “tamper-resistant” actuating key)Features & Benefits• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simplemagnets.• 10 mm actuating distance … extends applicationversatility.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates mostindustrial environments.• IP 67 rated … ideal for wash-down applications.• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstandmechanical abuse.• Non-contact operation … tolerant to minor misalignment.• Integral “positive-guided” relays … heightens reliability.AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Includes 1/2" NPT Plastic Adaptor)Actuating Key sold separately ... see belowDescriptionThe BZ16 is a non-contact safety interlock switch with aninternal dual-channel design. The assembly consists of theswitch and a coded actuating key. The switch can be actuatedfrom the front, top, and rear with each version available with1 NO/1 NC or 2 NC contacts.OperationWhen 24VDC is applied to the switch an internal oscillator isenergized. The operating frequency is sent to a transmittingsolenoid in the active area of the switch. When the actuatingkey is in the proper location it receives the signal, modifies it,and returns it to the switch. This signal is then sent to amonitoring module.In addition a permanent magnet is located in the actuator.When the actuator is in place, the magnetic field activates aHall-effect sensor in the active area. This signal is sent to asecond monitoring module.Thus this dual-channel device only operates if both channelsare actuated concurrently. Any fault in either channel will berecognized by the next switching cycle such that authorizedoperation is prevented.Part NumberBZ16-02DBZ16-02VBZ16-02UBZ16-11DBZ16-11VBZ16-11UBZ16 - B1!Part NumberContactConfiguration*2 NCDescriptionFrontTopRearFront1 NO & 1 NC TopRearACTUATING KEY(Sold separately)DescriptionActuating “Key”A SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY BE REQUIRED TOMEET SAFETY CONTROL CATEGORIES 3 OR 4.Typical ApplicationsThe BZ16 safety interlock switch is suitable for sliding, hinged,or lift-off safety guards. It is ideal for food processing andother “washdown” applications.150

BZ16 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingFiberglass reinforced thermoplasticSelf-extinguishingDegree of Protection IP67ActuatorNon-contact (via coded actuator)Switching Distance* “On”: Max. 10mm (Note a minimumdistance of 2 mm must bemaintained when approaching theswitch laterally)“Off”: Min. 20mmMaximum Switching 1HzFrequencyOperating Temperature 0°C to 55°COperating Principle Magnetic & Hall EffectConformity to Standards EN 60947-5-3/PDF-MEN 954-1, EN 1088CE*When no ferromagnetic material is present in the vicinity of thesensor or actuator.ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSOperating Voltage 24VDC ± 15%Contact Configuration 1 NO & 1 NC (or) 2 NCPower Consumption

SERIES BNS-B20New!Coded-Magnet Sensor withSafety Door HandleFeatures & Benefits• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simplemagnets• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliabilityin the most hostile environments.• Dual-function latch & sensor … integral magnetic holdinglatch (with force of 100N).• Application flexibility … 3-contact design compatible with35mm, 40mm, and 45mm aluminum profiles• Long-life … no mechanical wear due to non-contactdesign.• Satisfies EN 954 Safety Control Category 4 … whenused with compatible SCHMERSAL Series AES safetycontroller.• Easy-to-install … optional M12 x 1 quick disconnect &LED status indicator in NC circuit• Application diversity … suitable for hinged & slidingguards, available for left- or right-hand doors/guards.• Integral LED … displays switch status (non-LED modelsalso available).DescriptionThe Series BNS-B20 is designed for use as a combinationdoor handle and safety interlock switch for use on light tomedium weight hinged and sliding machine guards. Eachunit consists of a door handle assembly equipped with twomultiple reed switch arrays and coded magnet actuators. Inaddition, the unit features two latching magnets that attractpole pieces in the sensor unit—providing a holding force ofapproximately 100 Newtons.The reed switches will only close in the presence of theirmatched magnetic field array … thus enabling machineoperation. Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealedto IP67 standards. Their tamper-resistant design preventsbypassing with simple magnets. The unit also features anLED display of switch status and an optional M12x1 quickconnectfor ease of wiring and installation.OperationThe unit consists of two components … the door handle unitand the sensor unit. The sensor unit is typically mounted tothe stationary portion of the guard structure, with the codedmagnet/handleassembly mounted to the movable element ofthe machine guard.When the guard is closed, the matched magnetic fields alignwith the reed switch arrays, closing the switches and enablingmachine operation. When the guard is open, or the magneticfields are not properly aligned with their reed switch arrays,the sensor output will remain “off.”Typical ApplicationsThe sealed low-profile, ergonomic door handle system is idealfor use on movable machine guards in hostile environments.The absence of protruding elements eliminate/reduce risk ofinjury and unintentional opening of the guard. Typical applicationsinclude food processing equipment, chemical processingequipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,and printing equipment.AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS & ACCESSORIES*(Please order sensor, actuator-door handle unit andoptional connector separately)Part Number Description TerminationBNS-B20-12ZG-LBNS-B20-12ZG-RBNS-B20-12ZG-HBNS-B20-12ZG-ST-LBNS-B20-12ZG-ST-RSensor unit for left-handhinged doorSensor unit for right-handhinged doorSensor unit for both rightandleft-hand hinged doorSensor unit for left-handhinged doorSensor unit for right-handhinged doorBNS-B20-B-01 Actuator-door handle unit N/AM12-8P-5M5m cable with M12x1,N/A8-pin connectorNote: Sensor unit is also available for ASI Safety-at-Work bussystems. Please add suffix “-AS” to sensor part number.** 3, 5, and 10 meter cable lengths available on request;add suffix “-XXm”1 meter ofbottom-mountedcable**1 meter ofrear-mountedcable**Bottom-mountedM12 conncetor(M12x1, 8-pin)*Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are foruse in safety applications only when used withan electrically-compatible safety controller orsafety PLC. (For recommended compatibleSCHMERSAL safety controllers, please seethe selection chart on Page 159, or call ouroffice for other new, available models.)!USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAYDAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.152

SERIES BNS-B20 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingOperating PrincipleMaximum Sensing Gap(Sar)(Sao)Protection ClassAmbient OperatingTemperatureMaximum StorageTemperatureSwitching FrequencyResistance to ShockResistance to VibrationMax. door/guard weightGlass fiber reinforced thermoplasticMagnetic22mm0mmIP67–25°C to +70°C–25°C to +70°C5 Hz30g/11ms10-55Hz, amplitude 1mmHinged guard: 5KgSliding guard: 3KgConformity to Standards IEC 60947-5-3BG-GS-ET-14ULCSAMaximum Latching Force Approx. 100N (22 lbs.)Safety Control Category Up to Safety Control Category 4per EN 954-1 when used withappropriate SCHMERSAL SeriesAES safety controllerCompatible Extrusion 35mm, 40mm, 45mmFramesELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSMaximum Switching Voltage 24 VDCMaximum Switching Current 10mAMaximum Switching Capacity 240mWIndication of Switching LED (Illuminated when guardConditionis closed)Termination M12x1 or cable (LiYY 6 x 0.25mm 2 )Contact Configuration 1 N.O. & 2 N.C.(LED in N.C. circuit)Note: Available in “ASI Safety-at-Work” configuration.WIRING DETAILSContacts shownwith gate closedDIMENSIONSPIN configuration M12, 8 pinsNote: Loads with high switch-on or switch-off voltagespikes must be suppressed by an appropriateprotective circuit.5153

SERIES CSS 180New!Pulse-Echo BasedNon-Contact Safety SensorFeatures & Benefits• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostileenvironments.• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor andactuator required for operation.• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easyinstallation and troubleshooting.• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of SafetyControl Category 4. *See note below.• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 200m.• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for applicationversatility.AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES(Accessories Ordered Separately)Model NumberDescriptionCSS-8-180-2P-E-LEnd or single device with pre-wired cableDescriptionThe CSS 180 non-contact, electronic safety sensor isdesigned for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoringthe position of movable safety guards. In this applicationthe safety sensor monitors the closed position of hinged,sliding or removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator.The CSS 180 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximitydevices with defined behavior under fault conditionsaccording to EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M(self-monitoring).OperationThe CSS 180 Safety Sensor and CST 180 actuator are amatched pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, thesensor excites the actuator at a predetermined resonantfrequency and the reads back the actuator oscillation. Thesensor evaluates the actuator frequency and its distance tothe actuator.Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guardby the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuitproof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch upto 500 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and themonitoring of the safety outputs, a number of CSS 180 SafetySensors can be wired in series without detriment to the controlcategory. Series wired safety sensors continue to fulfill therequirements of Control Category 4 according to EN 954-1.CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-LCSS-8-180-2P-Y-LCSS-8-180-2P+D-M-LCST-180-1CSA-M-1End or single device with diagnosticoutput, pre-wired cableSeries device with double pre-wired cableSeries device with diagnostic output,pre-wired cableActuatorMagnetic latchH-18 Mounting clampSensors available with M12 cable connector – Add ST after L incatalog numberSafety Control Module RequirementsDual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductoroutputs. The internal function tests of the sensor causethe outputs to periodically switch off for a millisecond.This must be tolerated by the control module. The followingSCHMERSAL safety control modules are recommendedfor this application: SRB 301 LCB and SRB 324ST*Note: A safety control module may be required for resetfunction and/or feedback monitoring functions, aswell as increased output current requirements.Typical ApplicationsThe sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movablemachine guards where multiple guard monitoring on amachine is required, and/or where hostile environmentsexist. Typical applications include printing machinery, textilemachinery, paper converting equipment, material handlingsystems, packaging machinery, chemical processing equipment,and woodworking machinery.154

SERIES CSS 180 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingGlass fiber reinforced thermoplasticDegree of Protection IP67Switching Distance 8mm (Nominal)7.0mm to 9.5mm (Maximum)Operating Temperature –25°C to +55°CStorage Temperature –25°C to +85°CHysteresis≤ 0.5mmRepeatability≤ 0.2mmResponse Time≤ 30msVibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mmShock Resistance 30g/11msConformity to Standards CE BGEN 60947-5-3 ULEN 954-1IEC 61508ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSMode of Operation InductiveRated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%Rated Operating Current 1.0ANo Load Current 0.05AResidual Current≤ 0.5mARated Impulse0.8kVWithstand VoltageRated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDCSafety Outputs(2) PNP, short-circuit proofSafety Output Current 0.5A per outputSafety Output Max. 0.5VVoltage DropSignaling OutputPNP, short-circuit proofSignaling OutputMax. 4V below rated operatingOperating Voltage voltageSignaling Output Max. 0.05AOperating CurrentType Interconnection 4x0.5mm 2 , 5x0.34mm 2 , orCable 7x0.25mm 2NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please seepage 194 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-Contact Safety Sensors” section.5155

SERIES CSS 34Pulse-Echo Based CompactNon-Contact Safety SensorNew!DescriptionThe CSS 34 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is designed forapplication in safety circuits and is used for monitoring the positionof movable safety guards. In this application the safety sensormonitors the closed position of hinged, sliding or removableguards with the aid of a coded actuator.The CSS 34 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximitydevices with defined behavior under fault conditions according toEN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M (self-monitoring).The CSS 34 Safety Sensor and CST 34 actuator are a matchedpair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the sensor excitesthe actuator at a predetermined resonant frequency and the readsback the actuator oscillation. The sensor evaluates the actuatorfrequency and its distance to the actuator.Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard bythe safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuitproof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up to250 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the monitoringof the safety outputs, a number of CSS 34 Safety Sensorscan be wired in series without detriment to the control category.Series wired safety sensors continue to fulfill the requirements ofControl Category 4 according to EN 954-1.The models CSS34 F0/F1 have an integrated feedback optionthat control positive-guided contactors/relays without the need fora downstream safety control module. The integrated start/restartinterlock feature provides an input for a reset pushbutton withedge detection, or without edge detection (suitable for automaticreset). The CSS34F0/F1 models are suitable as individual or enddevices in a series wired chain of standard CSS34 sensors toreplace a safety control module. The CSS34F0/F1 system, comprisingthe sensor, monitored relay and the reset switch, meetsthe requirements of Control Category 4 according to EN954-1,provided that positive guided contactors/relays are used.Typical ApplicationsThe sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movablemachine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a machineis required, and/or where hostile environments exist. Typicalapplications include printing machinery, textile machinery, paperconverting equipment, material handling systems, packagingmachinery, chemical processing equipment, and woodworking156 machinery.Features & Benefits• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.• Four different actuating surfaces … for a variety ofmounting options.• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostileenvironments. Meets both IP65 and IP67 requirements.• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor andactuator required for operation.• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easyinstallation and troubleshooting.• Integral self-monitoring (CSS34), feedback and resetfunctions (CSS34F0/F1) … satisfy requirements of SafetyControl Category 4, and may remove need for safety controlmodule. *See note below.• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 200m.• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for applicationversatility.• Integrated mounting plate included … allows for easyand accurate alignment of sensor and actuator.AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACTUATORS(Actuators Ordered Separately)Model NumberStandard VersionDescriptionCSS12-34-VDML*Top Actuating surface with diagnostic outputCSS12-34-VDMST* Top Actuating surface with diagnosticoutput, M12 Cable connectorCSS14-34-SDML* Side Actuation surface with diagnostic outputCSS14-34-SDMST* Side Actuation surface with diagnosticoutput, M12 Cable connectorF0Integrated Feedback, without edgedetection, auto-resetCSS12-34F0-VDMST Top Actuating surface with diagnostic output,M12 Cable connectorCSS14-34F0-SDMST Side Actuation surface with diagnosticoutput, M12 Cable connectorF1Integrated Feedback, with edgedetection of reset button, manual resetCSS12-34F1-VDMST Top Actuating surface with diagnosticoutput, M12 Cable connectorCSS14-34F1-SDMST Side Actuation surface with diagnosticoutput, M12 Cable connectorCST34-S-1Side surface actuatorCST34-V-1Top surface actuatorSensors available with a serial diagnostic cable, for use with aPROFIBUS DP network. Please consult factory.*See note below.Safety Control Module RequirementsDual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductoroutputs. The internal function tests of the sensor causethe outputs to periodically switch off for a millisecond. Thismust be tolerated by the control module. The followingSCHMERSAL safety control module is recommended forthis application: SRB 301 LCB, SRB 324 ST*Note: A safety control module may be required for resetfunction and/or feedback monitoring functions, aswell as increased output current requirements.

SERIES CSS 34 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingGlass fiber reinforced thermoplasticDegree of Protection IP65 and IP67Switching Distance Top (V) 12mm Nominal10-15mm (Maximum)Side (S) 14mm Nominal12-17mm (Maximum)Operating Temperature –25°C to +70°CStorage Temperature –25°C to +85°CHysteresis1mmRepeatability≤ 0.5mmResponse Time≤ 30msVibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mmShock Resistance 30g/11msConformity to Standards CE BGEN 60947-5-3 UL/CSAEN 954-1IEC 61508ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSMode of Operation InductiveRated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%Rated Operating Current 0.6ANo Load Current 0.1AResidual Current≤ 0.5mARated Impulse1 kVWithstand VoltageRated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDCSafety Outputs(2) PNP, short-circuit proofSafety Output Current 0.25A per outputSafety Output Max. 0.5VVoltage DropSignaling OutputPNP, short-circuit proofSignaling OutputMax. 4V below rated operatingOperating Voltage voltageSignaling Output Max. 0.05AOperating CurrentInterconnection Cable: Y-UL2517/8xAWG22 (8x0.35mm 2 ), 2mConnector:M12x1, 8 pin quick connectNOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please seepage 200 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-Contact Safety Sensors” section.5157

158SaferbyDesign

BNS SERIES - COMPATIBLE SERIES AES SAFETY CONTROLLERSSELECTION CHARTAVAILABLE STANDARD MODELSSafety ControllerSuitable for use withCoded-Magnet SensorPart Numbers belowBNS250...BNS33...BNS303...BNS250...BNS33...BNS303...BNS36BNS260}}}12Z(G)11Z(G)11Z(G)02Z(G)BNS16-12ZBNS33-12Z(G)-2187BNS-B20-12Z(G)Max. Numberof Directly-ConnectedBNS SeriesSensors(without “daisychaining”)Safety ControllerPart Number(and available supply voltages)Numberof SafetyOutputs(EnablingPaths)Max.AchievableSafetyControlCategory perEN 954-1Type ofResetFeedbackCircuit1 AES1102 (24VAC, 24VDC, 110VAC) 1 1 Automatic No2 AES1112 (24VAC, 24VDC, 110VAC) 1 1 Automatic No1 AES1135 (24VDC)1 1/3* Automatic No2 AES1165 (24VDC)1 1/3* Automatic No1 AES1235 (24VDC)2 3 Automatic Yes2 AES1265 (24VDC)2 3 Automatic Yes1 AES2135 (24-230V AC/DC)1 1/3* Automatic No1 AES2335 (24-230V AC/DC)3 3 Automatic Yes1 SRB211AN (24VAC/DC) 2 Stop Cat. 0 4 Automatic Yes1 Stop Cat. 1or Manual1 AES1337 (24VAC/DC)3 4 Automatic Yesor Manual6 AES228523 Automatic YesSRB207AN-230V (48-240VAC)or Manual5*Category 3 when safety controller is directly connected to load.159

AES 1102/AES 1112BNS Compatible ControllersFeatures• Control Category 1 to EN 954-1• 1 enabling path• Monitoring of 1 or a number of guarddevices• Connection of BNS .. -12z magnetic safetysensors with 1 NO and 2 NC contacts• LED function indicators• Available for various operational voltagesDimensions22.5 x 100 x 121 mmModelDesignationAES 1102-24VDCAES 1102-24VACAES 1102-42VACAES 1102-110VACAES 1102-230VACAES 1112-24VDCAES 1112-24VACAES 1112-42VACAES 1112-110VACAES 1112-230VACApprovals BG UL CSA160

AES 1102/AES 1112TypicalApplicationTypicalWiringDiagramUeYE GN YE GN YE GNBN WH BN WH BN WHPK GY PK GY PK GYL1A1A2S22S32S14 C 1324 VDCK3K2K1AES 1102514K4N3 MApplicationNotes• AES to secure a number of guarddevices using series-parallel circuitsfor Control Category 1 to EN954-1.• Only suitable for the connection ofmagnetic safety sensors.• Monitoring a number of guarddevices using BNS 33..-12z-2187range magnetic safety sensors withisolated contacts.• The wiring diagram is with guarddevices closed and shows the deenergizedcondition.• Use with multiple “daisy-chained”inputs does not permit identificationof which guard/coded-magnet sensoris in an open/fault conditionCircuitOptions• Monitoring One Guard DeviceMonitoring one guard device usinga BNS .. -12z Series coded-magnetsafety sensor.161

AES 1135/AES 1165BNS Compatible Safety ControllersFeatures• Control Category 3 to EN 954-1• 1 enabling circuit• Enable delay time can be modified• Monitoring of mechanical position switches,safety switches, solenoid interlocks, codedmagnet sensors or E-stops• Can be used as emergency-stop controllerfor Category 0 to EN 60204-1• Monitoring for short-circuit betweenconnections with NO-NC contactcombination• Connection of input expansion modulespossibleDimensions22.5 x 100 x 121 mmModelDesignationAES 1135-24VDCAES 1165-24VDCFunctionTableAdditional semiconductoroutput YFunction of output YSwitching ConditionAES 1135 Y1 Enable Enable circuit closedY2 No enable Enable circuit openApprovals BG UL CSA162

AES 1135/AES 1165TypicalApplicationsTypicalWiringDiagram+24 VDC100mAA1max.S13A1 A2 11 12 13 14 21 22 23 24S14 S21 S22 13K1K2L1AES 1145/1146 1135AZM 415-22+24VDC100m AA1max.A2S13S13S14 S21 S2 13S1K1K2S2S14 S21 S214L1AES1165/116 614A2Y1 Y2 X114 140V0VNMNK3K43MNMK3K4MSK3 SK1 3 5ApplicationNotes• AES to achieve up to ControlCategory 3.• Monitoring a sliding, hinged orremovable guard device usinga solenoid interlock.• The NC contact must have positiveopening function when the guarddevice is opened.• Control Category 3 to EN 954-1can be achieved by substantiationand documentation of exclusionof “faults due to breakage orloosening of the actuator or in thesolenoid interlock”.• If the load is directly switched bythe AES, the complete system canbe classified in Control Category 3to EN 954-1. If one or two externalrelays or contactors are used toswitch the load, the system canthen only be classified in ControlCategory 3 to EN 954-1 if exclusionof the fault “Failure of the externalcontactors” can besubstantiated and isdocumented, e.g. by usingreliable de-rated contactors.A second contactor leads to anincrease in the level of security byredundant switching of the load.• The wiring diagram is with guarddevice closed and shows thede-energized condition.CircuitOptions• Extension of Enable Delay TimeThe enable delay time can beincreased from 0.1 s to 1 s bychanging the position of a jumperlink connection under the cover ofthe unit.• Monitor 2 NC ContactsJumper A1 (24 VDC) to X1163

AES 1235/AES 1265BNS Compatible Safety ControllersDimensionsISD22.5 x 100 x 121 mmThe following faults are recognized by the safetycontroller and indicated by means of ISD• Failure of door contacts to open or close• Short-circuits on or between the switch connections• Interruption of the switch connections• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in ordrop-out• Faults on the input circuits or on the relay controlof the guard door monitorFeatures• Control Category 3 to EN 954-1• 2 enabling circuits• Enable delay time can be modified• Monitoring of mechanical position switches,safety switches, solenoid interlocks, codedmagnet sensors or E-stops• NO-NC contact combination can beconnected• Can be used as emergency-stop controllerfor Stop Category 0 to EN 60204-1• Monitoring for short-circuit betweenconnections with NO-NC contactcombination• ISD Integral System Diagnostics• 2 short-circuit proof additional transistoroutputs• Feedback circuit to monitor external relays• Start function• Operational voltage 24 VDC• Connection of input expansion modulespossible• Additional contact by means of outputexpansion modulesModelDesignationAES 1235-24VDCAES 1265-24VDCFunctionTableAdditional semiconductoroutput YFunction of output YSwitching ConditionAES 1235 Y1 Authorized operation Enabling paths closedY2 No authorized operation Enabling paths openAES 1265 Y1 Authorized operation Enabling paths closedY2 Fault Enabling paths openApprovals BG UL CSA164

AES 1235/AES 1265TypicalApplicationsTypicalWiringDiagramL10V+24 VDCA1A2Y1X11323max. 100mAK1K2AES 1235AES 1236S13S14 S21 S2214240VK3SK3K43M5ApplicationNotes• AES achieve Control Category 3 toEN 954-1.• Monitoring a sliding, hinged orremovable guard device, eachusing a coded magnet sensor A.• The feedback circuit monitors positionsof the contactors K3 and K4.• If only one external relay or contactoris used to switch the load,the system can be classified inControl Category 3 to EN 954-1 ifexclusion of the fault “Failure ofthe external contactor” can besubstantiated and is documented,e.g. by using a reliable de-ratedcontactor. A second contactorleads to an increase in thelevel of security by redundantswitching of the load.• The wiring diagram is with guarddevices closed and shows the deenergizedcondition.CircuitOptions• Start Pushbutton sA start pushbutton (NO) can optionallybe connected to the inputs inthe feedback circuit. With the guarddevice closed, the enabling circuitsare then not closed until the startpushbutton has been operated.• Feedback CircuitA feedback circuit is shown connectedin the wiring diagram. If nofeedback circuit is used, input X1must be connected to 24 VDCsupply or a jumper between outputY2 and input X1.• Extension of Enable Delay TimeThe enable delay time can beincreased from 0.1 s to 1 s bychanging the position of a jumperlink connection under the cover ofthe unit.165

AES 2135BNS Compatible Safety ControllersFeatures• Control Category 3 to EN 954-1• 1 enabling circuit• Enable delay time can be modified• Monitoring of mechanical position switches,safety switches, solenoid interlocks, codedmagnet sensors or E-stops• Can be changed from NO-NC to NC-NCcontact combination• Can be used as emergency-stop controllerfor Category 0 to EN 60204-1• Monitoring for short-circuit betweenconnections with NO-NC contactcombination• ISD Integral System Diagnostics• Connection of input expansion modulespossible• 2 semiconductor auxiliary outputs (nonsafety)Dimensions45 x 100 x 121 mmISDThe following faults are recognized by the safetycontroller and indicated by means of ISD• Failure of door contacts to open or close• Short-circuits on or between the switch connections• Interruption of the switch connections• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in ordrop-out• Faults on the input circuits or on the relay controlof the guard door monitorModelDesignationAES 2135 24-230V AC/DCFunctionTableAdditional semiconductoroutput YFunction of output YSwitching ConditionAES 2135 Y1 Enable Enable circuit closedY2 No enable Enable circuit openApprovals BG UL CSA166

AES 2135TypicalApplicationsTypicalWiringDiagram5ApplicationNotes• AES to achieve Control Category 3to EN 954-1.• Monitoring a sliding, hinged orremovable guard device, eachusing a safety coded magnet A.• If the load is directly switched bythe AES, the complete system canbe classified in Control Category 3to EN 954-1.• If one or two external relays or contactorsare used to switch the load,the system can then only beclassified in Control Category 3 toEN 954-1 if exclusion of the fault“Failure of the external contactors”can be substantiated and is documented,e.g. by using reliablede-rated contactors. A secondcontactor leads to an increase inthe level of security byredundant switching ofthe load.• The wiring diagram is withguard devices closed andshows the de-energizedcondition.CircuitOptions• Modification for 2 NC ContactsThe controller can be modified tomonitor two normally closed contactsby jumping between the terminalsX3 and X4. The short circuitmonitoring between connectionsthen becomes inoperative.• Extension of Enable Delay TimeThe enable delay time can beincreased from 0.1 s to 1 s byjumping between the terminals X7and X8.167

AES 2335BNS Compatible Safety ControllersDimensionsISD45 x 100 x 121 mmThe following faults are recognized by the safetycontroller and indicated by means of ISD• Failure of door contacts to open or close• Short-circuits on or between the switch connections• Interruption of the switch connections• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in ordrop-out• Faults on the input circuits or on the relay controlof the guard door monitor• Failure of or functional fault on the safety controllerFeatures• Control Category 3 to EN 954-1• 3 enabling circuits• Enable delay time can be modified• Monitoring of mechanical position switches,safety switches, solenoid interlocks, codedmagnet sensors or E-stops• NO-NC contact combination can beconnected• Can be used as emergency-stop controllerfor Category 0 to EN 60204-1• Monitoring for short-circuit betweenconnections• ISD Integral System Diagnostics• Available for various operational voltages• Short-circuit proof additional transistoroutputs• Feedback circuit to monitor external relays• Start function• Connection of input expansion modulespossible• Additional contact by means of outputexpansion modulesModelDesignationAES 2335 24-230V AC/DCFunctionTableAdditional semiconductoroutput YFunction of output YSwitching ConditionAES 2335 Y1 High (+24V) Enable circuit closedY2 High (+24V) Enable circuit openApprovals BG UL CSA168

AES 2335TypicalApplicationsTypicalWiringDiagram5ApplicationNotes• The wiring diagram shown achievesControl Category 1 to EN 954-1.• Monitoring a sliding, hinged orremovable guard device.• To achieve Control Category 3 toEN 954-1, the feedback circuit mustbe connected.• In addition, exclusion of faults dueto breakage or loosening of theactuator or in the solenoid interlockis to be substantiated and documented.• The NC contact A must have positiveopening function when theguard device is opened.• If only one external relay or contactoris used to switch the load, thesystem can be classified in ControlCategory 3 to EN 954-1 if exclusionof the fault “Failure of the externalcontactor” can be substantiatedand is documented, e.g. byusing a reliable de-ratedcontactor. A second contactorleads to an increase in the levelof security by redundant switchingof the load.• The wiring diagram is with guarddevice closed and shows the deenergizedcondition.CircuitOptions• Start Pushbutton sA start pushbutton (NO) can optionallybe connected to the inputs inthe feedback circuit. With the guarddevice closed, the enabling circuitsare then not closed until the startpushbutton has been operated.• Feedback CircuitFor this purpose, the positive-drivecontacts of the external contactorscan be connected to input X1-X2. Thepower supply to this feedback circuitis either from semiconductor outputY2 or, if this is already used, with 24VDC from terminal S13 or S21.• Modification for 2 NC ContactsThe controller can be modified tomonitor two normally closed contactsby jumping between theterminals X3 and X4. The shortcircuit monitoring between connectionsthen becomes inoperative.169

AES 1337BNS Compatible Safety ControllersTECHNICAL FEATURESModel AES 1337 shown.DescriptionThe above “general-purpose” safety controllers aredesigned for use with safety devices having Normally-Open(N.O.) or Normally-Closed (N.C.) outputs. Each is equippedfor connection of one input device in dual-channel configuration.In addition they feature user-selectable monitoredmanualor automatic reset, feedback monitoring of positiveguidedcontrolled loads and cross-short recognition (onselected models).Input Voltage24 VAC/DC# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Dual-Channel)MonitoredMonitored Contact Configuration 1 N.O. 1 N.C.Number & Type Safety Outputs 3 N.O. (Dry Contacts)Number & Type Auxiliary1 N.C. 24 VDC(Non-Safety or Signalling Output)Typical Input Devices Monitored • E-stops (N.C.)• Interlock switches (N.C.)Type of Reset• Monitored-manual(24 VDC trailing edge)(Selectable)• AutomaticFeedback MonitoringYesLED DisplaysGreen LEDs for:• K1 (safety relay 1)• K2 (safety relay 2)• Ui (voltage beyond internalfuse)Conformity to StandardsStop Category 0UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)Safety Control Category Rating 4Per EN 954-1Type FuseHybridSelected Features• Cross-short recognition• Selectable monitoredmanualor automatic reset• Feedback monitoringFront ViewAVAILABLE MODELSModel NumberOperating VoltageAES 1337AES 133724 V AC/DCModel AES 1337 shown.170

AES 1337MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D)Ambient OperatingTemperature RangeMechanical Life ExpectancyWeightMountingTYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")-25°C to +45°C(-13°F to +113°F)10 7 switching cycles230 gmDIN rail (35mm)ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSOperating Voltage24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 HzPower Consumption 2.4 W (max.), 3.8 VAFuse (Input Power)24 V Internal electronic (hybrid) Fuse F1,Tripping current > 0.6 A (Resets afterinterruption of supply voltage)Fuse (Safety Outputs) 6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)Switching Capacity 230 VAC, 6 A Resistive(Safety Outputs)(inductive with suitable surge supressor)Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 100mA(Auxiliary Contacts)Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1Contact Type & Materials AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guidedContact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)Air Clearance &DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2Creepage DistanceCable Connections • Self-lifting, plug-in screw terminalsfor 13 to 20 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 0135171

SERIES SRB 211 ANBNS Compatible Safety ControllersTECHNICAL FEATURESNew!DescriptionThe Model SRB 211 AN is a “general purpose” unitdesigned for use with safety devices having Normally-Openand Normally-Closed dry contact switching outputs. It isequipped for connection of one monitored input device indual-channel configuration. In addition it features userselectablemonitored-manual or automatic reset, stopcategory 0 & 1 safety outputs, and feedback monitoringof positive-guided controlled loads.Input Voltage24 V AC/DC# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Dual-Channel)MonitoredCompatible Input Device N.O./N.C (Dry Contacts)Contact ConfigurationNumber & Type3 N.O. (1 delayed : 1-30 sec.)Safety Outputs(dry contacts)Number & Type Auxiliary PNP(Non-Safety orSignalling Outputs)Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C./N.O.)Monitored• Interlock switches (N.C./N.O.)Type of Reset• Monitored-manual(Selectable)(24 VDC trailing edge)• AutomaticFeedback Monitoring YesLED DisplaysGreen LEDs for:• K1 (safety relay 1)• K2 (safety relay 2)• K3/4 (safety relay 3 & 4)• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)• UB (voltage at input terminals)Conformity to StandardsStop CategoryUL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)0 (2 safety outputs)1 (1 safety output)Safety Control Category 4Rating Per EN 954-1Selected Features• Plug-in screw terminals• Cross-short recognition• Stop category 0 & 1safety outputs• Selectable trailing edge orautomatic reset• Resetable electronic fuse• Feedback monitoringAVAILABLE MODELSModel NumberSRB 211 ANOperating Voltage24 V AC/DC172

SERIES SRB 211 ANMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D)Ambient OperatingTemperature RangeMechanical Life ExpectancyWeightMountingTYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")-25°C to +45°C(-13°F to +113°F)>10 7 switching cycles255 gmDIN railOperating VoltagePower Consumption24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz5.2 W, 7.2 VA (max.), plus signalingoutput Y1Fuse (Input Power) Internal electronic Fuse F1,Tripping current > 1.5A(Resets approx. 1 second)Fuse (Safety Outputs)Switching Capacity(Safety Outputs)4 A Slow-blow (Recommended)230 VAC, 4 A Resistive(inductive with suitable suppressor circuit)Switching Capacity 24 VDC 100mA(Auxiliary Contacts)Application Category AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1Pick-up Delay≤ 40 msDrop-out Delay ≤ 50 msContact Type & AgSnOAgNi, self cleaning, positive-guidedMaterialsContact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2Creepage DistanceCable Connections • Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminalsfor 13 to 20 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 0135173

AES 2285/SRB 207 AN BNS Compatible Safety ControllersTECHNICAL FEATURESDescriptionThe Model SRB 207 AN is a “general purpose” unitdesigned for use with safety devices having Normally-Open (N.O.) and Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts.Each is equipped for connection with up to six inputdevices such as E-stop push button and BNS codedmagnets. In addition it features user-selectable monitoredmanualor automatic reset, six (non-safety) semiconductoroutputs for signalling/annunciation, and two safety outputs.Input VoltageSee available models below# Discrete Input Devices 6 (Dual-Channel)MonitoredCompatible Input Device N.O./N.C. (Dry Contacts)Contact ConfigurationNumber & Type2 N.O. (Dry Contacts)Safety OutputsNumber & Type Auxiliary 6 - short circuit proof, PNP-type(Non-Safety orsemiconductor Y1 - Y6 max 20mASignalling Outputs)1 - N.C. Auxiliary outputTypical Input Devices • Interlocks (N.O./N.C.)Monitored• Limit switches (N.O./N.C.)Type of Reset• Monitored-manual (trailing edge)(Selectable)• AutomaticFeedback Monitoring YesLED DisplaysGreen LEDs for:• K1 (safety relay 1)• K2 (safety relay 2)• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)Conformity to StandardsStop Category 0UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)Safety Control Category 3Rating Per EN 954-1Selected Features• Plug-in screw terminals• Cross-short recognition• Up to 6 monitored devices• Seven auxiliary outputs• Selectable monitored-manual orautomatic resetFront View AES 2285/SRB 207AVAILABLE MODELSModel NumberOperating Input VoltageNew!AES 2285SRB 207 AN-230V24 VDC48 - 230 VAC174

AES 2285/SRB 207 ANMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D)Ambient OperatingTemperature RangeMechanical Life ExpectancyWeightMounting45mm x 100mm x 121mm(1.77" x 3.9" x 4.75")-25°C to +45°C(-13°F to +113°F)>10 7 switching cycles300 gmDIN railTYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM (shown with 1 input)ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSOperating VoltagePower Consumption24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%48 VAC-240VAC, 50-60 Hz3.0 W max. (For 24 VDC)Approx. 6.8 VA (For 230 VAC)(Plus signalling contacts Y1-Y6)Fuse (Input Power)24 V Internal electronic Fuse F1,Tripping current > 1 A (Resets afterapprox. 1 second)230 V Primary : Fuse (glass), trippingcurrent > 1 ASecondary : Internal electronic fuse,tripping current > 0.12 AFuse (Safety Outputs)Switching Capacity(Auxiliary Contacts)Switching Capacity(Safety Outputs)6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)Y1-Y6: 24 VDC, 20mA (PNP)31-32: 24 VDC, 2 A (Dry)230 VAC, 6 A Resistive(inductive with suitable supressor circuit)Application Category AC-15 / DC-13 : EN 60 947-5-1Pick-up DelayDrop-out DelayContact Type & MaterialContact ResistanceAir Clearance &Creepage DistanceCable Connections≤ 120 ms/≤ 30ns (auto start/reset button)≤ 20 msAgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided100 mOhm (max. in new state)DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2• Self-lifting, plug-in screwterminals for 13 to 20 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 0135175

176SaferbyDesign

PULSE-ECHO BASEDNON-CONTACT SAFETY SENSORSNew!New!New!New!SwitchSeriesNew!AZ 200New!CSS 34SELECTION GUIDETypeNew!AZM 200 Solenoid Interlock 1 3 ⁄4" × 9" × 2"New!MZM 100New!CSS 180InterlockMagnetic-LatchingInterlockCylindricalSafety SensorRectangularSafety SensorEnvelopeDimensions1 1 ⁄2" × 8 3 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄2"1 3 ⁄4" × 7 1 ⁄4" × 1 3 ⁄4"1" × 4" × 1"ContactConfigurations2 PNP Safety Outputs1 or 3 diagnostic outputs2 PNP Safety Outputs1 diagnostic output2 PNP Safety Outputs1 diagnostic output2 PNP Safety Outputs1 diagnostic outputCatalogPage1781841900.7" × 3.6" 2 PNP Safety Outputs 1942006177

SERIES AZ 200Pulse-Echo BasedNon-Contact Safety Interlock SwitchFeatures & Benefits• Tamper resistant … frequency-matched switch andactuator required for operation.• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.• Dual purpose handle … modern, ergonomic design—noadditional door handles are needed.• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …satisfy requirements of Safety Control Category 4.*See Note Below.• One-hand emergency release … hazardous area can beleft quickly and safely.• Switch and actuator do not protrude into dooropening … no risk of injury or damage from a protrudingactuator.• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility.DescriptionThe AZ 200 pulse-echo based non-contact safety interlock isdesigned for use with movable machine guards/access gateswhich must be closed for operator safety.The AZ 200 consists of an interlock switch and actuator unitwith door handle and optional emergency exit handle. Theactuator is always inserted into its housing, protecting theactuator and the operator against damage and injury. Utilizingpulse-echo sensor technology, the actuator and interlock canhave an offset of ±5 mm and the actuator still engages theinterlock. A sensor stimulates a coil in the actuator, which inturns sends a signal back to the sensor. The pulse-echotechnology provides diagnostic information and detects andindicates any misalignment at an early stage. Two differentactuator designs accommodate both sliding or hinged guards.The AZ 200 interlock is a dual channel design with two shortcircuitproof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch upto 250 mA. It features a choice of one or three electronicdiagnostic outputs. These diagnostic outputs signal errorsbefore the safety outputs are switched off, thus enabling acontrolled shutdown of the machine.With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring ofthe safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,AZ 200 safety interlocks with one diagnostic output can bewired in series without detriment to the control category.Series wired AZ 200s continue to fulfill the requirements ofControl Category 4 according to EN 954-1 with door detectionsensors (without the need of a second switch).Typical ApplicationsThe AZ 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switchon movable machine guards which, when open, expose theoperator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typicalapplications are the interlocking of protective gratings, accesspanels and other movable guards. The AZ 200 is suitable forboth sliding guards and hinged guards.178New!AVAILABLE AZ 200 MODELS(Actuator ordered separately below)Model NumberDescriptionAZ200SK-1P2P 2-PNP safety outputs, without doordetection sensors, one diagnostic outputAZ200SK-T1P2P 2-PNP safety outputs, with doordetection sensors, one diagnostic outputAZ200SK-3P2P 2-PNP safety outputs, without doordetection sensors, three diagnostic outputsAZ200SK-T3P2P 2-PNP safety outputs, with doordetection sensors, three diagnostic outputsSensors available with M23 quick disconnect—Replace SK with ST incatalog number.Part number: SZ200Description: Lockout tag, up to 5 padlocksSafety Control Module RequirementsDual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductoroutputs. The internal function tests of the sensor cause theoutputs to periodically switch off for a millisecond. Thismust be tolerated by the control module. The followingSCHMERSAL safety control modules are recommendedfor this application: SRB 301 LCB, SRB 324 ST*Note: A safety control module may be required for resetfunction and/or feedback monitoring functions, aswell as increased output current requirements.

SERIES AZ 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONSAZ 200-B1 ACTUATOR FOR SLIDING DOORSAZ 200-B30 ACTUATOR FOR HINGED DOORSAZ/AZM 200-B1-AZ/AZM 200-B30-AG1Leave blank (without emergencyexit handle)P0 (with emergency exit handle)Leave blank (withoutdoor detection sensor)T (with door detection sensor)L (Door hinge on left side)R (Door hinge on right side)Ordering example: To order an AZ 200 actuator handle assembly for a lefthand door, with door detection sensor and emergencyexit handle, order p/n AZ/AZM200-B1-LTP0Leave blank (withoutdoor detection sensor)T (with door detection sensor)L (Door hinge on left side)R (Door hinge on right side)Leave blank (withoutemergency exit handle)P1 (with emergencyexit handle)Ordering example: To order an AZ 200 actuator handle assembly for a lefthand door, with door detection sensor and emergencyexit handle, order p/n AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1P1DIMENSIONS OF AZ 200 & AZ/AZM 200-B1 HANDLE6AZ/AZM 200-B1for sliding doors179

SERIES AZ 200 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingFiberglass reinforced thermoplasticDegree of Protection IP67Unlocked Holding Force 30N (7 pounds)Operating Temperature –25°C to +60°CStorage Temperature –25°C to +85°CResponse Time≤ 60msVibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mmShock Resistance 30g/11msMechanical Life1 million operationsMounting40-45mm profilesConformity to Standards CE BGEN 60947-5-1 UL/CSA PendingEN 954-1IEC 61508DIMENSIONS OF AZ 200 & AZ/AZM 200-B30 HANDLEDoor hinge onleft-hand sideAELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSMode of Operation InductiveRated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%Rated Operating Current 0.6ANo Load Current 0.1AResidual Current≤ 0.5mARated Impulse0.8kVWithstand VoltageRated Insulation Voltage 32 VDCSafety Outputs(2) PNP, short-circuit proofSafety Output0.25A per outputOperating CurrentSafety OutputMax. 4V below ratedOperating Voltage operating voltageSignaling OutputPNP, short-circuit proofSignaling Output Max. 0.05AOperating CurrentSignaling OutputMax. 4V below ratedOperating Voltage operating voltageType Terminals Screw Terminals for up to 15AWG flexible stranded wire(1.5 mm 2 )Door hinge onright-hand sideAZ/AZM 200-B30for hinged doorsBLegendA=Front and rear manual releaseB=Cable entry M20 x 1,5C=Emergency exit P1D=Door handle G1CCDD180

SERIES AZ 200 DIAGNOSTICSFunction table of visual diagnostic LED, electronic diagnostic output and safety outputsLED State AZ 200SafetyOutputsDiagnostic OutputsAZ200...-3P2PAZ200...-1P2POUT OUT2 OUT3 OUTGreenDoor open0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V 0 VGreenDoor closed0 V0 V 0 V 0 V 20 VYellow & GreenDoor closed and actuator inserted24 V24 V 0 V 0 V 224 VBlinking red (1–6 impulses)Error: see blinking codes24 V 124 V 24 V 0 V 20 V1After 30 min ➞ 0 V2With door detection sensor (-T) always highDiagnostic LED error codesThe blinking sequence of the redLED of the AZ 200 identifies theactive error. The following errorsare indicated:Indication (red)Meaning1 blinking impulse Error output Y12 blinking impulses Error output Y23 blinking impulses Cross-wire4 blinking impulses Temperature too high5 blinking impulses Target error6 blinking impulses Error target combinationContinuous redErrorBlinking Codes (red) Meaning Autonomous switch-off after Cause1 blinking impulse Error output Y1 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y1”, althoughthe output is switched off2 blinking impulses Error output Y2 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y2”, althoughthe output is switched off3 blinking impulses Cross-wire 30 min. Cross-wire between the output cables or error atboth outputs4 blinking impulses Temperature too high 30 min. Temperature measurement indicates too high aninner temperature5 blinking impulses Target error 0 min.The difference between the code (frequency) ofthe detected target and the set value is too large,false target6 blinking impulses Error target combination 0 min. An invalid combination of targets was detected atthe 4 coils of the AZ200 T. (Current setting: latchingbolt detected & door target not detected => latchbreakage or tampering attempt)6Continuous Red Internal error 0 min.181

SERIES AZ 200 WIRING EXAMPLESWIRING EXAMPLE: SINGLE DEVICE WIRINGWIRING COMPARTMENTSupply VoltageSupply VoltageSafety Input 1Safety Input 2GroundGroundMeaningSafety Output 1Safety Output 2Diagnostic Output24 V24 VX1X2GNDGNDY1Y2TerminalOUTNote: In case of single device wiring, thebridge between the “24 V” terminal andthe “X1” and “X2” terminals must beestablished; for series wiring, this bridgemust only be established in the firstdevice of the series.WIRING EXAMPLE: SERIES WIRING OF 3 AZ 200182Only interlocks with onediagnostic output can bewired in series.

6SaferbyDesign183

SERIES AZM 200New!Pulse-Echo BasedNon-Contact Solenoid InterlockFeatures & Benefits• Solenoid locking design … controls access to hazardousareas until safe conditions exist.• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.• Dual purpose handle … unlatches and opens guard—noadditional door handles are needed.• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …satisfy requirements of Safety Control Category 4.*See Note Below.• One-hand emergency release … hazardous area can beleft quickly and safely—even during a power failure.• Switch and actuator do not protrude into dooropening … no risk of injury or damage from a protrudingactuator.• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility.DescriptionThe AZM 200 Series is designed for machine/work cellswhere access to a hazardous work area must be controlleduntil safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching featurepermits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,which may exist immediately after removal of power, haveabated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.The AZM 200 consists of a solenoid-latching interlock andactuator unit with door handle and optional emergency exithandle. The actuator is always inserted into its housing,protecting the actuator and the operator against damage andinjury. Utilizing pulse-echo sensor technology, the actuatorand interlock can have an offset of ±5 mm and the actuatorstill engages the interlock.Due to the one-hand operation of the emergency exit handle,the hazardous area can be left quickly and safely—even duringa power failure (when using the “unlock by power” model).The solenoid interlock is a dual channel design with twoshort-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which canswitch up to 250 mA.With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring ofthe safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,multiple AZM 200 solenoid interlocks can be wired in serieswithout detriment to the control category. Series wired AZM200s continue to fulfill the requirements of Control Category 4according to EN 954-1 with door detection sensors (withoutthe need of a second switch).Typical ApplicationsThe AZM 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switchon movable machine guards which must not be opened untildangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal ofpower, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typicalapplications are textile machines, stamping machines,metal working equipment, printing presses andpackaging machines.184AVAILABLE AZM 200 MODELS(Actuator ordered separately below)Model NumberDescriptionLock by Spring, Power to unlockAZM200SK-1P2P 2-PNP safety outputs, without doordetection sensors, one signaling outputAZM200SK-T1P2P 2-PNP safety outputs, with doordetection sensors, one signaling outputPower to lockAZM200SK-1P2Pa 2-PNP safety outputs, without doordetection sensors, one signaling outputAZM200SK-T1P2Pa 2-PNP safety outputs, with doordetection sensors, one signaling outputSensors available with M23quick disconnect—ReplaceSK with ST in catalog number.Note: If switch is ordered withdoor detection sensor(T) the actuator mustalso be ordered as theT version.Part number: SZ200Description: Lockout tag, upto 5 padlocksSafety Control Module RequirementsDual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductoroutputs. The internal function tests of the sensor cause theoutputs to periodically switch off for a millisecond. Thismust be tolerated by the control module. The followingSCHMERSAL safety control modules are recommendedfor this application: SRB 301 LCB, SRB 324 ST*Note: A safety control module may be required for resetfunction and/or feedback monitoring functions, aswell as increased output current requirements.

SERIES AZM 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONSAZM 200-B1 ACTUATOR FOR SLIDING DOORSAZM 200-B30 ACTUATOR FOR HINGED DOORSAZ/AZM 200-B1-AZ/AZM 200-B30-AG1Leave blank (without emergencyexit handle)P0 (with emergency exit handle)Leave blank (withoutdoor detection sensor)T (with door detection sensor)L (Door hinge on left side)R (Door hinge on right side)Ordering example: To order an AZM 200 actuator handle assembly for aleft hand door, with door detection sensor andemergency exit handle, order p/n AZ/AZM200-B1-LTP0Leave blank (withoutdoor detection sensor)T (with door detection sensor)L (Door hinge on left side)R (Door hinge on right side)Leave blank (withoutemergency exit handle)P1 (with emergencyexit handle)Ordering example: To order an AZM 200 actuator handle assembly for a lefthand door, with door detection sensor and emergencyexit handle, order p/n AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1P1DIMENSIONS OF AZM 200 & AZ/AZM 200-B1 HANDLE6AZ/AZM 200-B1for sliding doors185

SERIES AZM 200 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingFiberglass reinforced thermoplasticDegree of Protection IP67Unlocked Holding Force 30N (7 pounds)Solenoid Holding Force 2300N (506 pounds)Operating Temperature –25°C to +60°CStorage Temperature –25°C to +85°CResponse Time≤ 30msVibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mmShock Resistance 30g/11msMechanical Life1 million operationsMounting40-45mm profilesConformity to Standards CE BGEN 60947-5-1 UL/CSAEN 954-1IEC 61508DIMENSIONS OF AZM 200 & AZ/AZM 200-B30 HANDLEELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSMode of Operation InductiveRated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%Rated Operating Current 1.0ANo Load Current 0.5AResidual Current≤ 0.5mARated Impulse0.8kVWithstand VoltageRated Insulation Voltage 32 VDCSafety Outputs(2) PNP, short-circuit proofSafety Output0.25A per outputOperating CurrentSafety OutputMax. 4V below ratedOperating Voltage operating voltageSignaling OutputPNP, short-circuit proofSignaling Output Max. 0.05AOperating CurrentSignaling OutputMax. 4V below ratedOperating Voltage operating voltageType Terminals Screw Terminals for up to 15AWG flexible stranded wire(1.5 mm 2 )Door hinge onleft-hand sideADoor hinge onright-hand sideAZ/AZM 200-B30for hinged doorsBLegendA=Front and rear manual releaseB=Cable entry M20 x 1,5C=Emergency exit P1D=Door handle G1CCDD186

SERIES AZM 200 DIAGNOSTICSFunction table of visual diagnostic LED, electronic diagnostic output and safety outputsDiagnostic OutputsLED State AZM 200 Safety OutputsAZM200...-1P2POUTGreenDoor open0 V0 VYellow & greenActuator inserted and locked24 V24 VBlinking yellowActuator inserted and not locked0 V24 VBlinking red (1–6 impulses)Error: see blinking codes24 V 10 V1After 30 min ➞ 0 VDiagnostic LED error codesThe blinking sequence of the redLED of the AZM 200 identifies theactive error. The following errorsare indicated:Indication (red)Meaning1 blinking impulse Error output Y12 blinking impulses Error output Y23 blinking impulses Cross-wire4 blinking impulses Temperature too high5 blinking impulses Target error6 blinking impulses Error target combinationContinuous redErrorBlinking Codes (red) Meaning Autonomous switch-off after Cause1 blinking impulse Error output Y1 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y1”, althoughthe output is switched off2 blinking impulses Error output Y2 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y2”, althoughthe output is switched off3 blinking impulses Cross-wire 30 min. Cross-wire between the output cables or error atboth outputs4 blinking impulses Temperature too high 30 min. Temperature measurement indicates too high aninner temperature5 blinking impulses Target error 0 min.The difference between the code (frequency) ofthe detected target and the set value is too large,false target6 blinking impulses Error target combination 0 min. An invalid combination of targets was detected atthe 4 coils of the AZM. (Current setting: latchingbolt detected & door target not detected => latchbreakage or tampering attempt)6Continuous Red Internal Error 0 min.187

SERIES AZM 200 WIRING EXAMPLESWIRING EXAMPLE: SINGLE DEVICE WIRINGWIRING COMPARTMENTMeaningSupply VoltageSupply VoltageSafety Input 1Safety Input 2Solenoid InputGroundGroundSafety Output 1Safety Output 2Diagnostic OutputTerminal24 V24 VX1X2INGNDGNDY1Y2OUTNote: In case of single device wiring, thebridge between the “24 V” terminal andthe “X1” and “X2” terminals must beestablished; for series wiring, this bridgemust only be established in the firstdevice of the series.WIRING EXAMPLE: SERIES WIRING OF 3 AZM 200+24VDC24V 24V X1 X2 INAZM 20024V 24V X1 X2 INAZM 20024V 24V X1 X2 INAZM 200GNDGNDY1 Y2 OUTGNDGNDY1 Y2 OUTGNDGNDY1 Y2 OUT0VResetI1I2PLCI3+24VDCK BK AQ1Q2Q3A1 S12 S22 X1 X213 23 33 41SRB 301 LC/BA21424 34 42188Only interlocks with onediagnostic output can bewired in series.0VK AK BN

6SaferbyDesign189

SERIES MZM 100Non-Contact Magnetic-Latching InterlockFeatures & Benefits• Magnetic-latching design … controls access to hazardousareas until safe conditions exist (100 lbs. locked holdingforce).• Forced-closed operating principle … no mechanical weardue to non-contact design.• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …satisfy requirements of Safety Control Category 4.*See Note Below.• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 200 m.• Automatic magnetic latch (35 N) … no mechanicallatching required (“r” version only).• Smooth surfaces allow for easy cleaning … ideal wherehigh hygienic standards need to be maintained.• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility.New!DescriptionThe MZM 100 Series is designed for machine/work cellswhere access to a hazardous work area must be controlleduntil safe conditions exist. Their magnetic-latching featurepermits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,which may exist immediately after removal of power, haveabated.The MZM 100 consists of a magnetic-latching interlock andactuator unit. An electromagnet is utilized to generate a 500 Nholding force. An integrated pulse-echo based sensor detectsand monitors the position of the safety guard. This sensortechnology permits an offset between the actuator and interlockof ±5 mm vertical and ±3 mm horizontal.The MZM100 magnetic-latching interlock is a dual channeldesign with two short-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each ofwhich can switch up to 250 mA. The holding force is permanentlyelectronically measured and monitored. If the holdingforce drops below 500 N, the safety outputs are not enabled,recognizing a dirty interlock.With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring ofthe safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,MZM 100 magnetic-latching interlocks can be wired in serieswithout detriment to the control category. Series wired MZM100s continue to fulfill the requirements of Control Category 4according to EN 954-1 (without the need of a second switch).Typical ApplicationsThe MZM 100 is intended for use as a safety interlock switchon movable machine guards which must not be opened untildangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal ofpower, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typicalapplications are textile machines, stamping machines, foodprocessing equipment, metal working equipment, wood workingand packaging machines.AVAILABLE MZM 100 MODELS & ACCESSORIES(Accessories ordered separately)Model NumberDescriptionPower to lockMZM100ST-1P2Pa 2-PNP safety outputs,1 diagnostic outputMZM100ST-1P2Pra 2-PNP safety outputs,1 diagnostic output, with latchingAccessoriesMZM100-B1MS MZM 100-WM23-9PM23-9P-5mActuatorMounting SetM23x1, 9 pin female connectorM23x1, 9 pin female connector,5 m cableSafety Control Module RequirementsDual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductoroutputs. The internal function tests of the sensor cause theoutputs to periodically switch off for a millisecond. Thismust be tolerated by the control module. The followingSCHMERSAL safety control modules are recommendedfor this application: SRB 301 LCB, SRB 324 ST*Note: A safety control module may be required for resetfunction and/or feedback monitoring functions, aswell as increased output current requirements.190

SERIES MZM 100 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingFiberglass reinforced thermoplasticDegree of Protection IP67Unlocked Holding Force 35N (7 pounds) (“r” version only)Magnetic Holding Force 500N (112 pounds)Operating Temperature –25°C to +55°CStorage Temperature –25°C to +85°CResponse Time≤ 100msVibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mmShock Resistance 30g/11msMechanical Life1 million operationsMounting40mm profilesConformity to Standards CE BGEN 60947-5-1 UL/CSAEN 954-1IEC 61508DIMENSIONSSwitchELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSMode of Operation Magentic & InductiveRated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%Rated Operating Current 1.0ANo Load Current 0.5AResidual Current≤ 0.5mARated Impulse0.8kVWithstand VoltageRated Insulation Voltage 32 VDCSafety Outputs(2) PNP, short-circuit proofSafety Output0.25A per outputOperating CurrentSafety OutputMax. 4V below ratedOperating Voltage operating voltageSignaling OutputPNP, short-circuit proofSignaling Output Max. 0.05AOperating CurrentSignaling OutputMax. 4V below ratedOperating Voltage operating voltageTerminationConnector M23x1Actuator6Mounting SetExploded View191

SERIES MZM 100 DIAGNOSTICSFunction table of visual diagnostic LED, electronic diagnostic output and safety outputsState MZM 100LEDSafety outputs Diagnostic outputgreen yellow red Y1, Y2 OUTGuard openon off off0 V0 VGuard closed, unlockedon blinks off0 V24 VGuard closed and lockedon on off24 V24 VWarning, door locked on on blinks**24 V* 0 VError, door locked on off blinks**0 V 0 V* after 30 min. 0V ** see blinking codeDiagnostic LED error codesThe blinking sequence of the redLED of the MZM 100 identifies theactive error. The following errorsare indicated:Indication (red)Meaning1 blinking impulse Error output Y12 blinking impulses Error output Y23 blinking impulses Cross-wire5 blinking impulses Target error6 blinking impulses Error holding force10 blinking impulses Magnet is too hotContinuous RedInternal ErrorBlinking Codes (red) Meaning Autonomous switch-off after Cause1 blinking impulse Error output Y1 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y1”, althoughthe output is switched off2 blinking impulses Error output Y2 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y2”, althoughthe output is switched off3 blinking impulses Cross-wire 30 min. Cross-wire between the output cables or error atboth outputs5 blinking impulses Target error 0 min. The difference between the code (frequency) of thedetected target and the set value is too large, false target6 blinking impulses Holding force error 0 min. The required holding force is not obtained (misalignment/soiling).The holding force is < 500 N.10 blinking impulses Magnet temperature 0 min. The magnet is too hot: Temperature is too high T>70°CContinuous Red Internal error 0 min.192

SERIES MZM 100 WIRING EXAMPLESafety Sensors in large systemsThe sensors have separate inputand output cables. The output of onesensor can be directly wired into theinput of the next sensor. The sensorchain can be built up over a length oftwo hundred meters.The supply voltage is wired in bothsafety inputs of the last solenoidinterlock of the chain (starting fromthe control relay). The safety outputsof the first interlock are wired to thecontrol relay.SERIES CONNECTION OF MZM 100Safety outputs -> Control relayWIRING OF THE INTEGRATED CONNECTOR MZM 1006Solenoid interlock with diagnostic outputPin configurationA1 Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 1A2 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 3X1 safety input 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 2X2 safety input 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 6Y1 safety output 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 4Y2 safety output 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 7OUT diagnostic output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 5IN magnet control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 8193

SERIES CSS 180New!Pulse-Echo BasedNon-Contact Safety SensorFeatures & Benefits• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostileenvironments.• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor andactuator required for operation.• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easyinstallation and troubleshooting.• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of SafetyControl Category 4. *See note below.• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 200m.• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for applicationversatility.AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES(Accessories Ordered Separately)Model NumberDescriptionCSS-8-180-2P-E-LEnd or single device with pre-wired cableDescriptionThe CSS 180 non-contact, electronic safety sensor isdesigned for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoringthe position of movable safety guards. In this applicationthe safety sensor monitors the closed position of hinged,sliding or removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator.The CSS 180 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximitydevices with defined behavior under fault conditionsaccording to EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M(self-monitoring).OperationThe CSS 180 Safety Sensor and CST 180 actuator are amatched pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, thesensor excites the actuator at a predetermined resonantfrequency and the reads back the actuator oscillation. Thesensor evaluates the actuator frequency and its distance tothe actuator.Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guardby the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuitproof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch upto 500 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and themonitoring of the safety outputs, a number of CSS 180 SafetySensors can be wired in series without detriment to the controlcategory. Series wired safety sensors continue to fulfill therequirements of Control Category 4 according to EN 954-1.CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-LCSS-8-180-2P-Y-LCSS-8-180-2P+D-M-LCST-180-1CSA-M-1End or single device with diagnosticoutput, pre-wired cableSeries device with double pre-wired cableSeries device with diagnostic output,pre-wired cableActuatorMagnetic latchH-18 Mounting clampSensors available with M12 cable connector – Add ST after L incatalog numberSafety Control Module RequirementsDual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductoroutputs. The internal function tests of the sensor causethe outputs to periodically switch off for a millisecond.This must be tolerated by the control module. The followingSCHMERSAL safety control modules are recommendedfor this application: SRB 301 LCB and SRB 324ST*Note: A safety control module may be required for resetfunction and/or feedback monitoring functions, aswell as increased output current requirements.Typical ApplicationsThe sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movablemachine guards where multiple guard monitoring on amachine is required, and/or where hostile environmentsexist. Typical applications include printing machinery, textilemachinery, paper converting equipment, material handlingsystems, packaging machinery, chemical processing equipment,and woodworking machinery.194

SERIES CSS 180 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingGlass fiber reinforced thermoplasticDegree of Protection IP67Switching Distance 8mm (Nominal)7.0mm to 9.5mm (Maximum)Operating Temperature –25°C to +55°CStorage Temperature –25°C to +85°CHysteresis≤ 0.5mmRepeatability≤ 0.2mmResponse Time≤ 30msVibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mmShock Resistance 30g/11msConformity to Standards CE BGEN 60947-5-3 ULEN 954-1IEC 61508ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSMode of Operation InductiveRated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%Rated Operating Current 1.0ANo Load Current 0.05AResidual Current≤ 0.5mARated Impulse0.8kVWithstand VoltageRated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDCSafety Outputs(2) PNP, short-circuit proofSafety Output Current 0.5A per outputSafety Output Max. 0.5VVoltage DropSignaling OutputPNP, short-circuit proofSignaling OutputMax. 4V below rated operatingOperating Voltage voltageSignaling Output Max. 0.05AOperating CurrentType Interconnection 4x0.5mm 2 , 5x0.34mm 2 , orCable 7x0.25mm 2DIMENSIONSCST ActuatorCSS 180 Safety Sensor5.6mm hole diameterRefer to order information for cabletypes, cable length and cable crosssectionalarea.Mounting ClampMagnetic Latch38142866181,5342116365,25,260195

SERIES CSS 180 TECHNICAL DATASWITCHING DISTANCES, FLUSH MOUNTINGTypical Response Rangeof the Sensor CSS 180S ON Switch-on point S ON 0 V196

SERIES CSS 180 WIRING EXAMPLE 1Safety Sensors in large systemsThe sensors have separate input and outputcables. The output of one sensor can bedirectly wired into the input of the next sensor.The sensor chain can be built up over alength of two hundred meters.Sensors used:1 Safety Sensor CSS-8-180-2P-E-L:This sensor has one output cable. It isdesigned for the beginning of a chainor for use as a single device.3 Safety Sensors CSS-8-180-2P-Y-L:These sensors have separate inputand output cables. The output of thefirst sensor is wired into the input ofthe next sensor and so on. This typeof sensor can also be used as the firstsensor in a chain, if the supply voltageis bridged to the safety inputs.SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS-8-180CSS-8-180-2P-Y-LInputGray cableOperating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)(BU) blue 0 VSafety Input (BK) black channel 1(WH) white channel 2OutputBlack cableOperating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)(BU) blue 0 VSafety Output (BK) black channel 1(WH) white channel 26CSS-8-180-2P-E-LOutputBlack cableOperating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)(BU) blue 0 VSafety Output (BK) black channel 1(WH) white channel 2197

SERIES CSS 180 WIRING EXAMPLE 2Series connection ofSafety Sensors CSS 180in small systems with acentralized controlcabinet or wiring viajunction boxes.SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS-8-180Sensors used:1 Safety Sensor CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L:This sensor has one output cable. It isdesigned for the beginning of a chain or foruse as a single device.3 Safety Sensors CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-L:The inputs and outputs of the sensors arebrought out in one cable. The sensors arewired together in series in the control cabinetor in junction boxes.This type of sensor can also be used as thefirst sensor in a chain, if the supply voltage isbridged to the safety inputs. For very longsensors chains it is recommended to feed thepower supply directly to the first sensor in thechain to avoid excessive voltage drop. The safeoutputs of the last sensor in the chain are connectedto the safety control module.If junction boxes are used, standard installationcable can be used for the wiring between junctions.When laid together with control cables ina separated cable channel, shielding is notnecessary.Note: CSS units should be connected to thesame regulated power supply.CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-LOperating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)(BU) blue 0 VSafety Input (WH) white channel 1(VT) violet channel 2Safety Output (RD) red channel 1(BK) black channel 2(GY) gray diagnostic outputCSS-8-180-2P+D-E-LOperating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)(BU) blue 0 VSafety Output (BK) black channel 1(WH) white channel 2(GY) gray diagnostic output198

WIRING EXAMPLES FOR PULSE-ECHO BASED SENSORSSERIES-WIRING OF VARIOUS SENSORS AND SOLENOID INTERLOCKS WITH DIAGNOSTIC OUTPUTOpen solenoidinterlockSafetyoutputs➞SAFETYCONTROLLERThe CSS 180, CSS 34, MZM 100, AZ 200 and AZM 200 can be wired in series in any desired combination. For the CSS 180, 16devices maximum can be wired in series; for the CSS 34 and AZM 200, maximum 31 devices. If the CSS 180 is used in a “mixed”series-wiring, the maximum number of series-wired devices is limited to 16. The maximum number of devices depends upon amaximum cable length of 200m.PRODUCT SELECTIONThis example applies to the following series-wired devices.6DeviceDescriptionCSS-8-180-2P+E-LwithCST-180-1With diagnostic output,connecting cable 5-wireActuatorCSS-14-34-S-D-M-LwithCST-34-S-1AZM 200..-T-1P2P,aPosition of the activeface, on the side,connecting cable, 7-wireActuator, on the side1 diagnostic output withpower-to-lock principleand door detection sensor199

SERIES CSS 34Pulse-Echo Based CompactNon-Contact Safety SensorNew!DescriptionThe CSS 34 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is designed forapplication in safety circuits and is used for monitoring the positionof movable safety guards. In this application the safety sensormonitors the closed position of hinged, sliding or removableguards with the aid of a coded actuator.The CSS 34 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximitydevices with defined behavior under fault conditions according toEN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M (self-monitoring).The CSS 34 Safety Sensor and CST 34 actuator are a matchedpair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the sensor excitesthe actuator at a predetermined resonant frequency and the readsback the actuator oscillation. The sensor evaluates the actuatorfrequency and its distance to the actuator.Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard bythe safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuitproof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up to250 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the monitoringof the safety outputs, a number of CSS 34 Safety Sensorscan be wired in series without detriment to the control category.Series wired safety sensors continue to fulfill the requirements ofControl Category 4 according to EN 954-1.The models CSS34 F0/F1 have an integrated feedback optionthat control positive-guided contactors/relays without the need fora downstream safety control module. The integrated start/restartinterlock feature provides an input for a reset pushbutton withedge detection, or without edge detection (suitable for automaticreset). The CSS34F0/F1 models are suitable as individual or enddevices in a series wired chain of standard CSS34 sensors toreplace a safety control module. The CSS34F0/F1 system, comprisingthe sensor, monitored relay and the reset switch, meetsthe requirements of Control Category 4 according to EN954-1,provided that positive guided contactors/relays are used.Typical ApplicationsThe sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movablemachine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a machineis required, and/or where hostile environments exist. Typicalapplications include printing machinery, textile machinery, paperconverting equipment, material handling systems, packagingmachinery, chemical processing equipment, and woodworking200 machinery.Features & Benefits• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.• Four different actuating surfaces … for a variety ofmounting options.• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostileenvironments. Meets both IP65 and IP67 requirements.• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor andactuator required for operation.• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easyinstallation and troubleshooting.• Integral self-monitoring (CSS34), feedback and resetfunctions (CSS34F0/F1) … satisfy requirements of SafetyControl Category 4, and may remove need for safety controlmodule. *See note below.• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 200m.• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for applicationversatility.• Integrated mounting plate included … allows for easyand accurate alignment of sensor and actuator.AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACTUATORS(Actuators Ordered Separately)Model NumberStandard VersionDescriptionCSS12-34-VDML*CSS12-34-VDMST*CSS14-34-SDML*CSS14-34-SDMST*F0Top Actuating surface with diagnostic outputTop Actuating surface with diagnosticoutput, M12 Cable connectorSide Actuation surface with diagnostic outputSide Actuation surface with diagnosticoutput, M12 Cable connectorIntegrated Feedback, without edgedetection, auto-resetCSS12-34F0-VDMST Top Actuating surface with diagnostic output,M12 Cable connectorCSS14-34F0-SDMST Side Actuation surface with diagnosticoutput, M12 Cable connectorF1Integrated Feedback, with edgedetection of reset button, manual resetCSS12-34F1-VDMST Top Actuating surface with diagnosticoutput, M12 Cable connectorCSS14-34F1-SDMST Side Actuation surface with diagnosticoutput, M12 Cable connectorCST34-S-1Side surface actuatorCST34-V-1Top surface actuatorSensors available with a serial diagnostic cable, for use with aPROFIBUS DP network. Please consult factory.*See note below.Safety Control Module RequirementsDual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductoroutputs. The internal function tests of the sensor causethe outputs to periodically switch off for a millisecond. Thismust be tolerated by the control module. The followingSCHMERSAL safety control module is recommended forthis application: SRB 301 LCB, SRB 324 ST*Note: A safety control module may be required for resetfunction and/or feedback monitoring functions, aswell as increased output current requirements.

SERIES CSS 34 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingGlass fiber reinforced thermoplasticDegree of Protection IP65 and IP67Switching Distance Top (V) 12mm Nominal10-15mm (Maximum)Side (S) 14mm Nominal12-17mm (Maximum)Operating Temperature –25°C to +70°CStorage Temperature –25°C to +85°CHysteresis1mmRepeatability≤ 0.5mmResponse Time≤ 30msVibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mmShock Resistance 30g/11msConformity to Standards CE BGEN 60947-5-3 UL/CSAEN 954-1IEC 61508ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSMode of Operation InductiveRated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%Rated Operating Current 0.6ANo Load Current 0.1AResidual Current≤ 0.5mARated Impulse1 kVWithstand VoltageRated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDCSafety Outputs(2) PNP, short-circuit proofSafety Output Current 0.25A per outputSafety Output Max. 0.5VVoltage DropSignaling OutputPNP, short-circuit proofSignaling OutputMax. 4V below rated operatingOperating Voltage voltageSignaling Output Max. 0.05AOperating CurrentInterconnection Cable: Y-UL2517/8xAWG22 (8x0.35mm 2 ), 2mConnector:M12x1, 8 pin quick connectDIMENSIONSCST ActuatorCSS 34 Safety Sensor6Integrated Mounting Plate(included with delivery)201

SERIES CSS 34 TECHNICAL DATASWITCHING DISTANCESThe actuating curves represent the pointsat which the CSS 34 sensor switches onand off upon the approach of the actuator.Actuation From SideActuation From TopLegendSSwitching DistanceV, V1, V2 Possible misalignment(see drawings at right)S ON Switch-on pointS OFF Switch-off pointS HHysteresis areaS H = SOFF – SONSao Assured operation pointSar Assured release point(according to EN60947-5-3)Sideways MisalignmentHorizontal: Max ±10mm (V2)Vertical: Max ±18mm (V1)Top MisalignmentHorizontal: Max ±8.5mm (V)Minimum distance between twosensor sets: approximately 100mmFunction table of visual diagnostic LEDVisual diagnostic (red) Cause of fault1 pulse Fault on Output Y12 pulsesFault on Output Y23 pulses4 pulses5 pulsesContinuous202Cross-wire short Y1/Y2Ambient temperature too highIncorrect or defective actuatorInternal faultSix different fault conditions are signalled by the diagnostic LEDflashing with predefined pulse sequence or with continuous red light.Electronic Diagnostic function of CSS34 or CSS34F with conventional diagnostic outputSensor Condition*Only for CSS34F0/F1 with feedback circuit1The sensor waits for a signal from the feedback circuit:F0 – Close feedback circuitF1 – Trailing edge on feedback circuitLEDsGreen Red YellowElectronicdiagnostic output24V DC, 50mASafety outputsNo Target, Power On On Off Off 0V 0VActuated On Off On 24V 24VActuated in limit area On OffActuated andfeedback circuit open*Actuated in limit area andfeedback circuit open*OnOnOffFlashes(1Hz)Flashes(5Hz)Flashes(1Hz/5Hz)24V pulsedFault On Flashes On 0VOff24V24V 0V 124V pulsed 0V 130 min. delay24V➞0V

SERIES CSS 34 WIRING EXAMPLE 1Series wiring with single diagnostic outputThe supply voltage is wired to both safety inputsof the last sensor of the chain (starting from thesafety controller). The safety outputs of the firstsensor are wired to the safety controller. Thesensor chain can be built up over a length oftwo hundred meters.Sensors used:Safety Sensor CSS14-34-SDML:This sensor has one output cable. The output of the first sensor is wired intothe input of the next sensor and so on.SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS 34CSS14-34-SDMLOperating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)6(BU) blue 0 VSafety Input (WH) white channel 1(VT) violet channel 2Signal Output (GY) gray diagnostic(PK) pink nonfunctionSafety Output (BK) black channel 1(RD) red channel 2203

SERIES CSS 34 WIRING EXAMPLE 2Wiring example for series-wiring of the CSS 34 and CSS34F1 safety sensors with conventional diagnostic outputsIn a safety chain of multiple sensors, only the first device canbe a sensor of the CSS 34F type. All other components of thechain must be of the default type CSS 34, up to a maximumlength of 200m.The CSS 34F1 safety sensor enables a direct control of thecontactor or relay. The internal monitoring module of the CSS34F1 version monitors the trailing edge of the reset button inaddition to the feedback contacts. The sensor is switched onwhen the button is released. It can be used for manual reseton safety guards with accessible protection field. The protectedfield must be designed in such manner that a single reset buttoncan be used.SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS34 AND CSS34F1204

SERIES CSS 34 WIRING EXAMPLE 3Wiring example for the CSS 34F0 safety sensors withconventional diagnostic output with auxiliary relay forcontrolling high-capacity contactorsAdditional auxiliary relays are used when the capacity ofthe safety outputs of the sensor is insufficient to enable direct controlof the contactors or to switch, e.g., from 24V DC to 230V AC.The NC contacts of the load-switching contactors are monitored.CONNECTION OF CSS34F0 WITH RELAYS TO SWITCH HIGH-CAPACITY LOADS6205

COMPATIBLE PULSE-ECHO SAFETY CONTROLLERS SRB301LC/BTECHNICAL FEATURESInput Voltage24 V AC/DC# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual channel)MonitoredMonitored Contact N.C. (Dry Contacts) orConfigurationPNP-switchingNumber & Type Safety 3 N.O. (Dry Contacts)OutputsNumber & Type Auxilliary 1 N.C. (Dry Contacts)(Non-Safety or SignallingOutput)Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)Monitored• Interlock switches (N.C.)• Devices with PNP semiconductoroutputsType of Reset• Manual (24 V Leading Edge)(Selectable)• AutomaticFeedback Monitoring YesLED DisplaysGreen LEDs for:• K1 (safety relay 1)• K2 (safety relay 2)• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)• UB (voltage at input terminals)Conformity to Standards UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)Stop Category 0Safety Control Category 4Rating Per EN 954-1ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSOperating Voltage 24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 HzPower Consumption 1.7 W (max.), 1.9 VAFuse (Input Power) Internal glass fuse F1: T 0.25 AFuse (Safety Outputs) 6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)Switching Capacity 230 VAC, 6 A Resistive(Safety Outputs)(inductive with suitablesupressor circuit)Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 2 A(Auxilliary Contacts)Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1Pick-up Delay≤ 30 msDrop-out Delay≤ 50 msContact Type & Materials AgSnO, self cleaning,positive-guidedContact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)Air Cleaner &DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2Creepage DistanceCable Connections • Screw terminals for13 to 20 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D) 22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")Ambient Operating -25°C to +45°CTemperature Range (-13°F to +113°F)Mechanical Life>10 7 switching cyclesExpectancyWeight230 gm (0.5 lbs.)MountingDIN rail (35mm)Terminal Connections For Use With AZM 200Supply VoltageMonitored Input #1(N.C.)Monitored Input #2(N.C.)Safety Output #1(N.O.)A1A2S12S2213 14Safety Output #2(N.O.)Safety Output #3(N.O.)Feedback Monitoringwith Automatic orManual (Leading Edge) ResetAuxiliary Output(N.C.)23 2433 34X1X241 42206

COMPATIBLE PULSE-ECHO SAFETY CONTROLLERS SRB324STTECHNICAL FEATURESInput Voltage24 V AC/DC# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual channel)MonitoredMonitored Contact N.C. (Dry Contacts) orConfigurationPNP-switchingNumber & Type Safety 5 N.O. (2 delayed: 1-30 sec.)Outputs(dry contacts)Number & Type Auxilliary 1 N.C. (Dry Contacts)(Non-Safety or Signalling 3-PNPOutput)Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)Monitored• Interlock switches (N.C.)• Devices with PNP semiconductoroutputsType of Reset• Monitored-manual (trailing edge)(Selectable)• AutomaticFeedback Monitoring YesLED DisplaysGreen LEDs for:• K1-K4 (safety relays 1-4)• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)• UB (voltage at input terminals)Conformity to Standards UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)Stop Category0 (3 safety outputs)1 (2 safety outputs)Safety Control Category 4Rating Per EN 954-1Terminal Connections For Use With AZM 200ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSOperating Voltage 24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 HzPower Consumption 4.8 W, 7.8 VA max.(Plus signalling contacts Y1-Y3)Fuse (Input Power) • Internal glass fuse F1,tripping current > 2.5 A(reset approx. 1 second)• Internal hybrid fuse F2,tripping current > 1.0 A(reset after interruption ofsupply voltage)Fuse (Safety Outputs) 6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)Switching Capacity 230 VAC, 6 A Resistive(Safety Outputs Stop 0) (inductive with suitablesupressor circuit)Switching Capacity Y1-Y3: 24 VDC, 100mA (PNP)(Auxilliary Contacts) 61/62: 24 VDC, 2A max. (Dry)Application Category AC-15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1Pick-up Delay≤ 30 msDrop-out Delay ≤ 30 ms (13/14, 23/24, 33/34)Contact Type & Materials AgSnO, self cleaning,positive-guidedContact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)Air Cleaner &Creepage DistanceCable ConnectionsDIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2• Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals13 to 20 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D) 45mm x 100mm x 121mm(1.8" x 3.9" x 4.75")Ambient Operating -25°C to +45°CTemperature Range (-13°F to +113°F)Mechanical Life>10 7 switching cyclesExpectancyWeight480 gmMountingDIN rail6Supply VoltageMonitored Input #1Monitored Input #2Safety Output #1 (NO)A1A2S12S2213 14Safety Output #2 (NO)Safety Output #3 (NO)Safety Output #4Stop Category 1 (NO)Safety Output #5Stop Category 1 (NO)23 2433 3447 4857 58Feedback MonitoringMonitored-Manual ResetAutomatic ResetJumperAuxiliary PNP OutputX1X2X3X4X4X5S31S32Y1 Y2 Y3207

208SaferbyDesign

HINGED SAFETY INTERLOCK SWITCHESSwitchSeriesNew!TESFSELECTION GUIDEHousingMaterialDie-cast zincAngular Displacementfor Contact OpeningAdjustableContactConfigurations1 NO & 2 NC2 NO & 2 NCCatalogPage210TESZGlass-fiber,4.5°1 NO & 2 NC214reinforced thermoplastic3 NCES95 SBGlass-fiber,reinforced thermoplastic7°1 NO & 1 NC2 NC216TVS335T.C 235Die-cast aluminum,enamel finishDie-cast zinc,enamel finish2°4.5°1 NO & 1 NC2 NC1 NO & 1 NC2 NC1 NC2182207T.C 236Glass-fiber,reinforced thermoplastic4.5°1 NO & 1 NC2 NC1 NC220209

SERIES TESFDescriptionThe TESF Series is designed for use with movable hingedmachine guards which must be closed for operator safety.Their tamper-resistant design and positive-opening NCcontacts provide a significantly higher level of safety thanconventional, spring-driven limit switches or proximityswitches often used to monitor hinged guard positions.Their compact, low-profile design and IP65 rating makethem ideal for interlocking hinged safety guards in industrialenvironments. Designed to mount directly on the hingedguard and its stationary frame, it is easy to install on a widerange of extruded aluminum guard sizes and other guardstyles.Among its unique features is its ability to adjust the switchingpoint in the field to meet specific application requirements.*Once adjusted, the switching point is easily permanentlylocked to prevent further adjustment by unauthorizedpersonnel. In addition it features top or bottom cable entries,1 NO or 2 NO and 2 NC contacts, designs suitable for insideoroutside-guard mounting, and the ability to open a full 180°.*Note: The unit is delivered factory set with a switching point ata 3° opening angle with positive-break occurring at 5°.Please note that with use this factory-set point mayincrease 2° during lifetime. This should be considered ...especially where finger or hand protection is desired.OperationThe installed TESF features two integral contact blocks …each featuring a NO and a NC contacts. NC contacts arepositive-opening, while the NO contact(s) may be used forsignaling purposes. The electromechanical switch elementsare actuated when the hinged guard is opened to the user’sdesired switching position (angle of opening). At this point theunit’s positive-break, normally-closed contacts are forced toopen by a direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism, whilethe normally-open contacts close. The opening of the positivebreakNC contacts ensure circuit interruption and machinestoppage. Machine restart is not possible while theguard remains opened.210New!®®is a trademark of SCHMERSALAdjustable Switching PointHinged Interlock SwitchFeatures & Benefits• Tamper-resistant … integral switch elements and actuatorprevent bypassing.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuitinterruption when guard is opened to user’s desiredswitching position (angle of opening).• User-selectable switching point … makes unit suitable fora wide range of applications.• Models available for inside-of-guard or front-of-guardmounting … for application versatility.• Choice of top or bottom cable entry … for installationflexibility.• Permits wide guard opening … up to 180°.• Splash-proof design … meets IP65 environmentalrequirements.• Slotted mounting holes … permit installation to most30mm to 60mm aluminum profiles.• Rugged construction … tolerates mechanical abuse andhostile environments.• Meets rigid safety standards … UL, CSA, & BG (inpreparation).AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS(Includes hinge switch assembly and additional hinge)Part Number(Contacts)TESF/O(2NO & 2NC)TESF/180(2NO & 2NC)TESF/U(2NO & 2NC)TESF/ST24.1PE/U(1NO & 2NC)TESF/ST24.2PE/U(1NO & 2NC)TESF/ST24.1PE/O(1NO & 2NC)TESF/ST24.2PE/O(1NO & 2NC)TESF/ST24.1PE/180(1NO & 2NC)TESF/ST24.2PE/180(1NO & 2NC)TESFA/180(2NO & 2NC)TESFA/ST24.1PE/180(1NO & 2NC)TESFA/ST24.2PE/180(1NO & 2NC)Part NumberTESF/STESFA/STESF-14DescriptionFor front installation with factoryset switching point at 3°For inside installation with factoryset switching point at 3°For front or inside installation withuser adjustable switching pointFor front or inside installation withuser adjustable switching pointFor front or inside installation withuser adjustable switching pointFor front installation with factoryset switching point at 3°For front installation with factoryset switching point at 3°For inside installation with factoryset switching point at 3°For inside installation with factoryset switching point at 3°Hinged interlock with integral fixedto-movableguard frame alignmentaid. For inside installation withfactory set switching point at 3°Hinged interlock with integral fixedto-movableguard frame alignmentaid. For inside installation withfactory set switching point at 3°Hinged interlock with integral fixedto-movableguard frame alignmentaid. For inside installation withfactory set switching point at 3°AVAILABLE ACCESSORIESDescriptionSwitching Point Adjustment ToolTypeConnectionsScrewterminalsScrewterminalsScrewterminals24VDCQuick disconnect(bottom entry)24VDCQuick disconnect(top entry)24VDCQuick disconnect(bottom entry)24VDCQuick disconnect(top entry)24VDCQuick disconnect(bottom entry)24VDCQuick disconnect(top entry)Screwterminals24VDCQuick disconnect(bottom entry)24VDCQuick disconnect(top entry)A 22 mm gap between the door and door frame is required for models with thealignment aid and for inside mount models.Additional hinge assembly (without alignment aid)Additional hinge assembly (with integral alignment aid)

SERIES TESF TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSMaterials of Construction Housing & hinge: die-cast zincCover: thermoplasticFactory Set Displacement 3°Angle for NC ContactOpening and NO ContactClosingDegree of ProtectionIP65Maximum Opening Angle 180°Operating Temperature –10°F to +148°FMechanical Life> 10 6 Operations (minimum)Mechanical Loading Capacity F1: 5000 N (110 lbs.)(See dimensional drawings) F2: 5000 N (110 lbs.)F3: 2000 N (45 lbs.)Installed PositionRandomOperating Rate1200 operations/hour (maximum)Shock Tolerance30g/18msVibration Tolerance20g, 10 … 200 HzCable Entry M16 x 1.5Maximum Actuation Speed 180°/0.3 secondsConformity to Standards UL, CSA, & BGIA (in preparation)ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsSilver-nickel, gold-platedContact Rating2A/250 VAC (AC15)1A/24 VDC (DC13)Contact SystemCross Point SystemContact Force1N per contactSwitching ActionSlow-acting, positive-breakNC contactsShort-Circuit Protection 2.0 A (Slow blow)Rated Impulse2.5 kVWithstand VoltageRated Insulation Voltage 250 VACThermal Rated Current 2.5 ARated Operating Voltage 250 VACSwitching of Small Loads 5 VDC/1 mA (minimum)Electrical Connections* Screw terminals for 15AWGmaximum stranded wire or24 VDC quick disconnect:M12 (8 Pole)Front installation:Guard closedCONNECTOR PIN CONFIGURATIONFront installation:Guard opened through 180°Inside installation:Guard closedSWITCHING DIAGRAMS &CONTACT SCHEMATICSInside installation:Guard opened through 180°7The unit is delivered factory set with a switching point at a 3° openingangle and positive-break occurring at 5° (with consideration of thetolerances and wear at the end of the mechanical lifetime, relative tothe factory preset). Please note that with use this factory-set point mayincrease 2° during lifetime. This should be considered … especiallywhere finger or hand protection is desired. Note: On connector modelscontact 43-44 is not wired.211

SERIES TESF TECHNICAL DATADIMENSIONS (SWITCH & HINGE ASSEMBLY SHOWN WITH ALIGNMENT AIDS)M16 x 1.5(Top)Optional Alignment AidsF3(Bottom)F1F2DIMENSIONS (ADDITIONAL HINGE SHOWN WITH ALIGNMENT AIDS)F3F1F2212

SERIES TESF TECHNICAL DATADETERMINING THE DOOR GAP AS DEPENDENT ON OPENING ANGLE, DOOR WIDTH AND OVERLAPOpening angle “ß” of the door 3° 4° 5° 6° 7° 8° 9° 10°Door width “C” in mmDoor gap “D” in millimeters with overlap “B” = 0 mm100 5.2 7.0 8.7 10.4 12.2 13.9 15.6 17.4150 7.8 10.5 13.1 15.7 18.3 20.9 23.5 26.0200 10.5 13.9 17.4 20.9 24.4 27.8 31.3 34.7250 13.1 17.4 21.8 26.1 30.5 34.8 39.1 43.3300 15.7 20.9 26.1 31.3 36.5 41.7 46.9 52.1350 18.3 24.4 30.5 36.6 42.6 48.7 54.7 60.7400 20.9 27.9 34.8 41.8 48.7 55.6 62.5 69.4450 23.5 31.4 39.2 47.0 54.8 62.6 70.4 78.1500 26.2 34.9 43.6 52.2 60.9 69.6 78.2 86.8550 28.8 38.3 47.9 57.5 67.0 76.5 86.0 95.5600 31.4 41.8 52.3 62.7 73.1 83.5 93.8 104.1650 34.0 45.3 56.6 67.9 79.2 90.4 101.6 112.8700 36.6 48.8 61.0 73.1 85.3 97.4 109.4 121.5750 39.2 52.3 65.3 78.4 91.4 104.3 117.3 130.2800 41.8 55.8 69.7 83.6 97.4 111.3 125.1 138.8850 44.5 59.3 74.0 88.8 103.5 118.2 132.9 147.5900 47.1 62.7 78.4 94.0 109.6 125.2 140.7 156.2950 49.7 66.2 82.8 99.3 115.7 132.1 148.5 164.91,000 52.3 69.7 87.1 104.5 121.8 139.1 156.4 173.61,050 54.9 73.2 91.5 109.7 127.9 146.1 164.2 182.21,100 57.5 76.7 95.8 114.9 134.0 153.0 172.0 190.91,150 60.2 80.2 100.2 120.1 140.1 160.0 179.8 199.61,200 62.8 83.7 104.5 125.4 146.2 166.9 187.6 208.31,250 65.4 87.2 108.9 130.6 152.3 173.9 195.4 217.01,300 68.0 90.6 113.2 135.8 158.4 180.8 203.3 225.61,350 70.6 94.1 117.6 141.0 164.4 187.8 211.1 234.31,400 73.2 97.6 122.0 146.3 170.5 194.7 218.9 243.01,450 75.8 101.1 126.3 151.5 176.6 201.7 226.7 251.71,500 78.5 104.6 130.7 156.7 182.7 208.7 234.5 260.3Calculation exampleThe actual door gap “D1” is calculated from the door gap “D” calculated accordingto the above table less the overlap of door and frame “B”:D1 = D – BExample: A door made of 40 mm aluminium profile with a length of 950 mm is tobe secured with a TESF. According to the technical data sheet the safety contact ofthe TESF opens at 3° in new state (5° at end of useful life). In new state a door gapof approx. 49.7 mm is derived from the above table. The actual door gap, calculatedusing the above formula D1 = D – B produces (49.7 – 40 = 9.7); D1 = 9.7 mm. Atthe end of useful life there is a door gap of approx. 82.8 mm and an actual doorgap of (82.8 – 40 = 42.8); D1 = 42.8 mm.7213

Series TESZHinged Safety Interlock SwitchFeatures & Benefits• Tamper-resistant … integral switch element and actuatorprevents bypassing.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuitinterruption upon only 4° of guard displacement.• Splashproof design … meets IP65 environmentalrequirements.• Rugged construction … tolerates mechanical abuse andhostile environments.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG. (UL andCSA pending)• Easy to install … fits most popular extruded hinged guarddesigns.• Compatible with popular extruded profile widths.• Optional integral manual reset … please consult factory.AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELSDescription®The TESZ Series are designed for use with hinged movablemachine guards which must be closed for operator safety.Their tamper-resistant design and positive-opening NCcontacts provide a significantly higher level of safety thanconventional, spring-driven limit switches often used tomonitor hinged-guard position. Their compact, low-profiledesign and IP65 rating make them ideal for interlockinghinged safety guards in industrial environments. Designed tomount directly on the hinged guard and its stationary frame, itis easy to install on a wide range of guard styles and sizes.Part Number*TESZ1102/30TESZ1110/30TESZ1102/35TESZ1110/35TESZ1102**TESZ1110**TESZ1102/45TESZ1110/45Contacts(Guard Closed)1 NO & 2 NC3 NC1 NO & 2 NC3 NC1 NO & 2 NC3 NC1 NO & 2 NC3 NCDescriptionHinged safety interlockswitch for 30mm widthextruded guardsHinged safety interlockswitch for 35mm widthextruded guardsHinged safety interlockswitch for 40mm widthextruded guardsHinged safety interlockswitch for 45mm widthextruded guardsOperationThe installed TESZ features an integral electromechanicalswitch element which is actuated when opening a hingedmachine guard. After opening the guard only 4°, the unit’spositive-break, normally-closed contact(s) are forced to openby a direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism. Thesepositive-break contacts ensure circuit interruption andmachine stoppage. The normally-open signalling contactcloses after 13.5° of guard displacement.Note: Adjustable switching point series TESF hingemodel available. Suitable for front of guard orinside mounting. See page 210.SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS*Includes hinge assembly with switch, switch actuator and anadditional hinge assembly (without switch or switch actuator).**Available with stainless-steel hinges. (Please consult factory)AVAILABLE ACCESSORIESPart Number*DescriptionTESZ/S/30Hinge assembly (without switch or switchactuator) for 30mm width extruded guardsTESZ/S/35Hinge assembly (without switch or switchactuator) for 35mm width extruded guardsTES/SHinge assembly (without switch or switchactuator) for 40mm width extruded guardsTESZ/S/45Hinge assembly (without switch or switchactuator) for 45mm width extruded guards*Includes hinge and hinge pin.11120 4°13 5°21332234TESZ110211-1221-2233-3413 °11120 4°13 5°21421312232TESZ111011-1221-2231-32

SERIES TESZ TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSMaterials of Construction Hinge: AluminumSwitch Cover: ThermoplasticDisplacement Angle for 4°NC Contact OpeningDegree of Protection IP65Displacement Angle for 13.5°NO Contact ClosingDIMENSIONS*Maximum Opening Angle 135°Operating Temperature –13°F to +149°FMechanical Life>10mm6 operationsMechanical Loading Maximum torque of 3KN/m atCapacity inch 1m distance from hingeOperating Rate1,200 operations/hour (maximum)Shock Tolerance30g/18msVibration Tolerance 20g/10… 200HzConformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660EN 1088ULCSAELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageRated Impulse WithstandVoltageElectrical ConnectionsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically-separated contactbridges2A (250VAC), AC-15, DC-13Slow-acting, positive-break NCcontact6.0A (Slow blow)250VAC (maximum)2.5kVScrew terminals for 15 AWGmaximum stranded wire sizeDIMENSIONS361.42TESZ1102 & TESZ1110SERIES135°Part Number Dimension “A” Dimension “B” Dimension “C”TESZ1102/30TESZ1110/301.34" (34mm) 5.28" (132mm) 4.41" (112mm)TESZ1102/35TESZ1110/351.53" (39mm) 5.28" (132mm) 4.41" (112mm)TESZ1102TESZ11101.73" (44mm) 3.62" (92mm) 2.44" (62mm)TESZ1102/45TESZ1110/451.93" (49mm) 5.28" (132mm) 4.41" (112mm)5.2019.75M20762.99421.65712.800°15.595.20TESZ/S SERIESmminch"C""B"923.627"A""A"712.80®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL215

Series ES95 SBHinged Safety Interlock SwitchTypical ApplicationsThe ES95 SB is intended for use as a safety interlock switchon hinged, movable machine guards which, when open,expose operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards.Their sealed design (IP67) and oil-tolerant seals make themideal for use in hostile environments.Features & Benefits• Tamper-resistant … integral actuator shaft preventsbypassing.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuitinterruption upon only 7° of guard displacement.• Watertight, oiltight design … meets IP67 washdownand immersion requirements.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates themost hostile environments.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … CSA, IECand BG.• Four 90° actuator head positions … provide installationflexibility.Description®The ES95 SB Series are designed for use with hingedmovable machine guards which must be closed for operatorsafety. Their tamper-resistant design and positive-openingNC contacts provide a significantly higher level of safety thanconventional, spring-driven limit switches often used tomonitor hinged-guard position. Their IP67 rating make themideal for interlocking safety guards in hostile environments.Part NumberES95-SB10/1SES95-SB20AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELSContacts(Guard Closed)1 NO & 1 NC2 NCDescription*Hinged safety interlockswitch with 10mmdiameter shaft bore hole*The actuator head may be rotated into any one of four 90° positions.Shown with Safety-RatedPositive-Break ® limit switch.OperationThe ES95 SB is a single-piece, electromechanical safetyinterlock switch which is designed to mount to a hingedmachine guard. After opening the guard only 7°, the unit’spositive-break, normally-closed contacts are forced to openby a direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism. Thesepositive-break contacts ensure circuit interruption (andmachine stoppage).216®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

ES95 SB TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingGlass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishingthermoplasticDisplacement Angle 7°for Contact OpeningDegree of Protection IP67Operating Temperature –22°F to +195°FMechanical Life10 million operationsOperating Rate3,600 operations/hour (maximum)Mounting Arrangement Mounts on 9mm diameter shaftvia mounting screwConformity to Standards BGCSASUVAELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact RatingSwitching ActionRated Insulation VoltageRated ImpulseWithstand VoltageType TerminalsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically-separated contactbridges5A/24VAC6A/400VACSlow-action, positive-break NCcontacts500VAC6kVScrew terminals with self-liftingclamps for up to 13AWGSWITCHING DIAGRAMES95 SB 1O/1SES95 SB 2ODIMENSIONS20.79291.14532.098.314,3.178.31291.149.5.3914.55271.0613.5122.875.2060,52.3820.7822.87411.6120.787ø4,3.1711.43mminch18.71301.18M2014.55301.18Additional fixing holes can be broken out if required.217

Series TVS335Hinged Safety Interlock SwitchFeatures & Benefits• Tamper-resistant … integral actuation shaft preventsbypassing.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuitinterruption upon only 3° of guard displacement.• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown andimmersion requirements.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates themost hostile environments.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, UL andCSA.• Four 90° actuator head positions … provide installationflexibility.• Optional LED indicators … provide visual display ofsupply voltage and switch operation.Description®The TVS335 Series are designed for use with hinged movablemachine guards which must be closed for operator safety.Their tamper-resistant design and positive-opening NCcontacts provide a significantly higher level of safety thanconventional, spring-driven limit switches often used tomonitor hinged-guard position. Their IP67 rating make themideal for interlocking safety guards in hostile environments.Part NumberTV8S-335-11ZTV8S-335-02ZAVAILABLE STANDARD MODELSContacts(Guard Closed)1 NO & 1 NC2 NCDescription*Hinged safety interlockswitch with 8mmdiameter shaft boreholeOperationThe TVS335 is a single-piece, electromechanical safetyinterlock switch which is designed to mount to a hingedmachine guard. After opening the guard only 3°, the unit’spositive-break, normally-closed contacts are forced to open bya direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism. These positivebreakcontacts ensure circuit interruption (and machinestoppage).Optional SafetyController.See Page 327.TV10S-335-11ZTV10S-335-02ZTV8S-335-11ZG24TV8S-335-02ZG241 NO & 1 NC2 NC1 NO & 1 NC2 NCHinged safety interlockswitch with 10mmdiameter shaft boreholeHinged safety interlockswitch with 8 mmdiameter shaft boreand integral LEDindicators for supplyvoltage (green) andswitch operation(yellow)TV10S-335-11ZG24TV10S-335-02ZG241 NO & 1 NC2 NCHinged safety interlockswitch with 10 mmdiameter shaft boreand integral LEDindicators for supplyvoltage (green) andswitch operation(yellow)*The actuator head may be rotated into any one of four 90° positions.218®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

TVS335 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingDiecast aluminum, enamel finishDisplacement Angle 3°for Contact OpeningDegree of Protection IP67Operating Temperature –22°F to +158°FMechanical Life>10 6 operationsOperating Rate5,000 operations/hour (maximum)Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660-200BG-GS-ET15ULCSADIMENSIONSELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageRated ImpulseWithstand VoltageElectrical ConnectionsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically-separated contactbridges4A (230VAC)2.5A (400VDC)1A (500VAC)Slow-action, positive-break NCcontactsFuse 6A (time-delay)500VAC6kVScrew terminals with selfliftingclamps 13AWG (2.5mm 2 )maximum wire sizemminch*Travel positive breakSWITCHING DIAGRAMS &CONTACT SCHEMATICS1321TV8S 335-11zTV10S 335-11z1422354° 3° 0 3° 354°13-1421-227° 7°TV8S 335-02zTV10S 335-02z11211222354° 3° 0 3° 354°11-1221-227° 7°LED IndicatorsGreen LED (gn) indicator forsupply voltage and yellowLED (ge) indicator for switchoperation for 24VDC. TheLED’s must not be wired,however, in the safetycircuit!Shown here:TV8S 335-11zG24Shown here:NO contact (model -11ZG24) serves for alarm andsignaling purposes.7Protected against wrong polarity connection.Protected against transient voltages.219

Series T.C 235/236Hinged Safety Interlock Switch®Features & Benefits• Tamper-resistant … integral actuator arm preventsbypassing by operator.• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuitinterruption upon only 4.5° of guard displacement.• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown andimmersion requirements.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates themost hostile environments.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, UL andCSA.• Four 90° actuator head positions … provide installationflexibility.DescriptionThe T.C 235/236 Series are designed for use with hingedmovable machine guards which must be closed for operatorsafety. Their tamper-resistant design and positive-opening NCcontacts provide a significantly higher level of safety thanconventional, spring-driven limit switches often used tomonitor hinged-guard position. Their IP67 rating make themideal for interlocking safety guards in hostile environments.OperationThe T.C 235/236 is a single-piece, electromechanical safetyinterlock switch which is designed to mount to a hingedmachine guard. After opening the guard only 4.5°, the unit’spositive-break, normally-closed contacts are forced to open bya direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism. These positivebreakcontacts ensure circuit interruption (and machinestoppage).Part NumberT3C235-11ZT3C236-11ZT3C235-02ZT3C236-02ZAVAILABLE STANDARD MODELSContacts(Guard Closed)1 NO & 1 NC2 NCDescription*Hinged safety interlockswitch with actuating leverto right in rest positionTypical ApplicationsThe T.C 235/236 is intended for use as a safety interlockswitch on hinged, movable machine guards which, whenopen, expose operator/maintenance personnel to machinehazards. Their sealed design (IP67) and oil-tolerant sealsmake them ideal for use in hostile environments.T3C235-01ZT3C236-01ZT4C235-11ZT4C236-11ZT4C235-02ZT4C236-02ZT4C235-01ZT4C236-01Z1 NC1 NO & 1 NC2 NC1 NCHinged safety interlockswitch with actuating leververtical to switch body inrest positionT5C235-11ZT5C236-11ZT5C235-02ZT5C236-02Z1 NO & 1 NC2 NCHinged safety interlockswitch with actuating leverto left in rest positionT5C235-01ZT5C236-01Z1 NC*The actuator head may be rotated into any one of four 90° positions.220®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

T.C 235/236 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousing(Series 235): Diecast zinc, enamelfinish(Series 236): Glass-fiber, reinforced,self-extinguishing thermoplasticDisplacement Angle 4.5°for Contact OpeningDegree of Protection IP67Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°FMechanical Life>106 operationsOperating Rate5,000 operations/hour (maximum)Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660-200BG-GS-ET15DIN-EN50047ULCSAELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageRated ImpulseWithstand VoltageElectrical ConnectionsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically-separated contactbridges4A (230VAC)2.5A (400VDC)1A (500VAC)Slow-action, positive-break NCcontactsFuse 6A (time-delay) as apositive-break switch500VAC6kVScrew terminals with self-liftingclamps for 13AWG (2.5mm2)maximum wire sizeOptional SafetyController.See Page 327.7221

T.C 235 TECHNICAL DATAContact function diagramsSlow action1 NO + 1 NC180°12,5°3,5° 04,5°13-1421-22T3C 235-11z90° 3,5° 0 3,5° 90°12,5°12,5°13-1421-224,5° 4,5°T4C 235-11zSlow action2 NC180° 12,5° 4,5°12,5° 4,5°011-1221-22T3C 235-02z90° 4,5° 0 4,5° 90°12,5°12,5°12,5°12,5°11-1221-224,5° 4,5°T4C 235-02zSlow action1 NC180° 12,5° 4,5°011-12T3C 235-01z90° 4,5° 0 4,5° 90°12,5° 12,5° 11-12T4C 235-01zDimensionsmminchM20M20Types of Actuator LeversLever 3 CLever 4 C13211422Slow actionT3C 235-11zT4C 235-11zPart No.11 1221 2211 12Slow actionSlow actionT3C 235-02zT3C 235-01zT4C 235-02zT4C 235-01z222

T.C 235 TECHNICAL DATA0 3,5°180°13-1421-224,5° 12,5°0 4,5° 12,5° 180°11-1221-224,5° 12,5°T5C 235-11zT5C 235-02z0 4,5° 12,5° 180°11-12T5C 235-01zM20Lever 5 CT5C 235-11zT5C 235-02zT5C 235-01z7223

T.C 236 TECHNICAL DATAContact function diagramsSlow action1 NO + 1 NC180°12,5°3,5° 04,5°13-1421-22T3C 236-11z90° 3,5° 0 3,5° 90°12,5°12,5°13-1421-224,5° 4,5°T4C 236-11zSlow action2 NC180° 12,5° 4,5°12,5° 4,5°011-1221-22T3C 236-02z90° 4,5° 0 4,5° 90°12,5°12,5°12,5°12,5°11-1221-224,5° 4,5°T4C 236-02zSlow action1 NC180° 12,5° 4,5°011-12T3C 236-01z90° 4,5° 0 4,5° 90°12,5° 12,5° 11-12T4C 236-01zDimensionsmminchTypes of Actuator LeversLever 3 CLever 4 C13211422Slow actionT3C 236-11zT4C 236-11zPart No.11 1221 2211 12Slow actionSlow actionT3C 236-02zT3C 236-01zT4C 236-02zT4C 236-01z224

T.C 236 TECHNICAL DATA0 3,5°180°13-1421-224,5° 12,5°0 4,5° 12,5° 180°11-1221-224,5° 12,5°T5C 236-11zT5C 236-02z0 4,5° 12,5° 180°11-12T5C 236-01zLever 5 CT5C 236-11zT5C 236-02zT5C 236-01z7225

226SaferbyDesign

SAFETY-RATED LIMIT SWITCHESSwitchSeriesHousingMaterialHousingDimensionsZ/T235 Die-cast zinc 1 1 ⁄4"×1 1 ⁄4"×2 1 ⁄2"Z/T236Glass-fibre reinforcedthermoplastic1 1 ⁄4"×1 1 ⁄4"×2 1 ⁄2"Z/T335 Die-cast aluminum 1 1 ⁄2"×1 1 ⁄4"×3"Z/T336Glass-fibre reinforcedthermoplastic1 1 ⁄2"×1 1 ⁄2"×3"Z332 Die-cast aluminum 1 1 ⁄2"×1 1 ⁄2"×3"SELECTION GUIDEDegree ofProtectionIP67IP67IP67IP67IP65ContactConfigurations1 NO & 1 NC2 NO2NC1 NO & 1 NC2 NO2NC1 NO & 1 NC2 NO2NC1 NO & 1 NC2 NO2NC1 NO & 1 NC(snap-actiononly)CatalogPage2282362442502567C50Glass-fibre reinforcedthermoplastic1"×1 1 ⁄8"× 3 ⁄4" IP30 1 NO & 1 NC260227

SERIES Z/T235Safety-Rated, Positive-BreakMiniature DIN Limit SwitchesFeatures & Benefits• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … won’t stick or weld shut.• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostileenvironments.• Six popular actuator styles … for application versatility.• Four 90° actuator mounting positions … provideinstallation flexibility.• Slow or snap-action operation … choose to best satisfyapplication requirements.• Safety-system approved … models with positive-breakcontacts approved for use in machine guarding applications.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, VDE,UL and CSA.®DescriptionThe Z/T235 Series limit switches are designed for use withmovable machine guards/access gates which must be closedfor operator safety … and for any other presence/positionsensing application normally addressed with conventional limitswitches. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a higherlevel of safety and reliability than conventional spring-drivenswitches whose contacts can weld or stick shut.Each is available with a choice of six standard actuators …rounded plunger, roller plunger, roller rocking lever, rodrocking lever, adjustable roller rocking lever and one-wayroller lever … mountable in any one of four 90° positions. Allrocking levers are positively-locked to the shaft, and areadjustable throughout 360° in 10° increments.Units are available with a choice of slow-action or snap-actioncontacts.Their rugged metal housing and IP67 rating make them idealalternatives to conventional limit switches.ORDERING GUIDEFOR FEATURE:SPECIFY:1. Contact operation:Slow ActionTSnap ActionZ2. Operating head V3. Roller lever 12 H4. Body size 235-5. No. of NO contacts 16. No. of NC contacts 17. Degree of protection IP 67 z8. Sealing of operating head (optional) z*Example 1: TV12 H 235-11zExample 2: ZV 12 H 235-11z*Available on rocking lever actuator style only.Typical ApplicationsThe Z/T235 Series may be used in any presence/positionsensing application normally addressed with conventionallimit switches. Models with positive-break NC contacts areapproved for use in safety systems. For safety applicationsthe switch must be mounted such that the actuating elementof the machine displaces the switch actuator far enough toexceed the positive-break point. (See contact functiondiagrams: symbol *).Optional SafetyController.See Page 327.228®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingChromated diecast zinc with brownenamel finishOperating Temperature –22°F to +175°F (–30°C to +80°C)Mechanical Life20 million operationsMinimum Cam Speed Z235 Series: 0.04m./minute(Referenced to Plunger) T235 Series: 2.4m./minuteMaximum Operating Rate 5000 operations/hourBounce TimeZ235 Series: £ 3 msT235 Series: Function of cam speedChangeover Time Z235 Series: £ 5 ms for minimumcam speedT235 Series: Function of cam speedDegree of Protection IP67Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660 Part 200BG-GS-ET15DIN EN 50 047CSA-C22.2UL508ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact GapContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageRated ImpulseWithstand VoltageType TerminalsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically-separated contactbridgesZ235 Series: 2x0.08 inches(2x2mm)T235 Series: 2x0.14 inches(2x3.5mm)4A/230VAC2.5A/400VACSnap-action, positive-break NCcontacts (Z235)Slow-action, positive-break NCcontacts (T235)Fuse: 10A (time delay)2.5A (no time delay6A (time delay) as positive-breakposition switch500VAC6kVScrew terminals, maximum2.5mm (AWG13) wireCONTACT SYSTEMSSeries T235Slow-actionswitchSeries Z235Snap-actionswitch7229

Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATAContact function diagramsSnap action positive break1 NO + 1 NC02,54,8613-1421-2213-14ZS 235-11z02,54,8613-1421-2213-14ZR 235-11z121-22121-22Slow action1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)0 3,5 62,53,813-1421-22TS 235-11z0 3,5 62,53,813-1421-22TR 235-11z0 3,5 60 3,5 62 NO (simultaneous)3,513-1423-24TS 235-20z3,513-1423-24TR 235-20z2 NC (simultaneous)0 2,5 3,8 62,5 3,811-1221-22TS 235-02z0 2,5 3,8 62,5 3,811-1221-22TR 235-02zDimensionsmminchTypes of ActuatorsActuating force/-torqueActuating speed Z/T atRounded plungerStyle S9 N (19 N positive break)0°: min. 10/60 mm/min, max. 1 m/sRoller plungerStyle R9 N (19 N positive break)30°: min. 20/120 mm/min, max. 1 m/s13211422Snap Actionpositive breakZS 235-11zZR 235-11zPart No.1321132314221424Slow actionSlow actionTS 235-11zTS 235-20z*TR 235-11zTR 235-20z*11211222Slow actionTS 235-02zTR 235-02z230* Not for use in safety applications

Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATA02,5602,5603,69,34,813-1421-22Z4S 235-11z4,813-1421-22Z4R 235-11z13-147,1 21-22ZK 235-11z113-1421-22113-1421-221,413-1421-220 3,5 60 3,5 60 5,29,32,53,813-1421-22T4S 235-11z2,53,813-1421-22T4R 235-11z3,65,513-1421-22TK 235-11z0 3,5 60 3,5 60 5,29,313-1423-24T4S 235-20z13-1423-24T4R 235-20z13-1423-24TK 235-20z3,53,55,20 2,5 3,8 60 2,5 3,8 60 3,6 5,5 9,32,53,811-1221-22T4S 235-02z2,53,811-1221-22T4R 235-02z3,65,511-1221-22TK 235-02zRounded plunger (central mounting)Style 4STop roller plunger (central mounting)Style 4ROne-way roller leverStyle K9 N (19 N positive break)0°: min. 10/60 mm/min, max. 1 m/s9 N (19 N positive break)30°: min. 20/120 mm/min, max. 1 m/s8 N (18 N positive break)30°: min. 24/240 mm/min, max. 1 m/s7Z4S 235-11zZ4R 235-11zZK 235-11zT4S 235-11zT4R 235-11zTK 235-11zT4S 235-20z*T4R 235-20z*TK 235-20z*T4S 235-02zT4R 235-02zTK 235-02z* Not for use in safety applications231

Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATAContact function diagramsSnap action positive break1 NO + 1 NC70°30° 0 30° 70°13-1457° 57° 21-2213-1421-2212° 12°ZV12H 235-11z70°30° 0 30° 70°13-1457° 57° 21-2213-1421-2212° 12°ZV14H 235-11zSlow action1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)2 NO (simultaneous)2 NC (simultaneous)70° 41° 0 41° 70°45°30°30°45°70° 41° 0 41° 70°41°41°70° 30° 0 30° 70°45° 45°45°45°30°30°13-1421-2213-1423-2411-1221-22TV12H 235-11zTV12H 235-20zTV12H 235-02z70° 30° 0 30° 70°45°41°41°45°70° 41° 0 41° 70°41°41°70° 30° 0 30° 70°45° 45°45°45°30°30°13-1421-2213-1423-2411-1221-22TV14H 235-11zTV14H 235-20zTV14H 235-02zDimensionsmminchTypes of ActuatorsActuating force/-torqueActuating speed Z/T at13211422Snap Actionpositive breakRoller rocking leverStyle 12H15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)30°: min. 687/4122 mm/min, max. 1 m/sZV12H 235-11zRoller rocking leverStyle 14H15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)30°: min. 687/4122 mm/min, max. 1 m/sZV14H 235-11zPart No.1321132314221424Slow actionSlow actionTV12H 235-11zTV12H 235-20z*TV14H 235-11zTV14H 235-20z*11211222Slow actionTV12H 235-02zTV14H 235-02z232* Not for use in safety applications

Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATA70°30° 0 30° 70°13-1457° 57° 21-2213-1421-2212° 12°ZV7H 235-11z70°30° 0 30° 70°13-1457° 57° 21-2213-1421-2212° 12°ZV10H 235-11z01,22,8713-145,5 21-2213-1421-22Z3K 235-11z70° 30° 0 30° 70°45°41°41°45°13-1421-22TV7H 235-11z70° 41° 0 41° 70°45°30°30°45°13-1421-22TV10H 235-11z0 4 72,84,313-1421-22T3K 235-11z70° 41° 0 41° 70°41°41°13-1423-24TV7H 235-20z70° 41° 0 41° 70°41°41°13-1423-24TV10H 235-20z0 4 7413-1423-24T3K 235-20z70° 30° 0 30° 70°45° 45°45°45°30°30°11-1221-22TV7H 235-02z70° 30° 0 30° 70°45° 45° 11-1245° 45° 21-2230° 30°TV10H 235-02z0 2,8 4,3 72,84,311-1221-22T3K 235-02zAdjustable roller rocking lever*Style 7HRod rocking lever*Style 10HOne-way roller leverStyle 3K15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)30°: min. 240/1440 mm/min, max. 1 m/sZV7H 235-11z*15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)30°: min. 687/4122 mm/min, max. 1 m/sZV10H 235-11z*9 N (19 N positive break)30°: min. 27/160 mm/min, max. 1 m/sZ3K 235-11z7TV7H 235-11z*TV10H 235-11z*T3K 235-11zTV7H 235-20z*TV10H 235-20z*T3K 235-20z*TV7H 235-02z*TV10H 235-02z*T3K 235-02z* Not for use in safety applications233

Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATAContact function diagramsSnap action positive break1 NO + 1 NC0251213-149,6 21-2213-1421-22Z4K 235-11z01,84,912,813-1410,1 21-2213-1421-22ZK4 235-11zSlow action1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)0 7 1257,613-1421-22T4K 235-11z0 7,2 12,84,97,713-1421-22TK4 235-11z2 NO (simultaneous)0 7 12713-1423-24T4K 235-20z0 7,2 12,87,213-1423-24TK4 235-20z2 NC (simultaneous)0 5 7,6 1257,611-1221-22T4K 235-02z0 4,9 7,7 12,84,97,711-1221-22TK4 235-02zDimensionsmminchTypes of ActuatorsOne-way roller leverStyle 4KOne-way roller leverStyle K4Actuating force/-torqueActuating speed Z/T at6 N (16 N positive break)30°: min. 44/264 mm/min, max. 1 m/s6 N (16 N positive break)30°: min. 56/336 mm/min, max. 1 m/s13211422Snap Actionpositive breakZ4K 235-11zZK4 235-11zPart No.1321132314221424Slow actionSlow actionT4K 235-11zT4K 235-20z*TK4 235-11zTK4 235-20z*11211222Slow actionT4K 235-02zTK4 235-02z234*Not for use in safety applications.

SaferbyDesign7235

SERIES Z/T236Safety-Rated, Positive-BreakMiniature DIN Limit SwitchesFeatures & Benefits• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … won’t stick or weld shut.• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostileenvironments.• Six popular actuator styles … for application versatility.• Four 90° actuator mounting positions … provideinstallation flexibility.• Slow or snap-action operation … choose to best satisfyapplication requirements.• Safety-system approved … models with positive-breakcontacts approved for use in machine guarding applications.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, VDE,UL and CSA.®DescriptionThe Z/T236 Series limit switches are designed for use withmovable machine guards/access gates which must be closedfor operator safety … and for any other presence/positionsensing application normally addressed with conventional limitswitches. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a higherlevel of safety and/or reliability than conventional spring-drivenswitches whose contacts can weld or stick shut.Each is available with a choice of six standard actuators …rounded plunger, roller plunger, roller rocking lever, rodrocking lever, adjustable roller rocking lever and one-wayroller lever … mountable in any one of four 90° positions. Allrocking levers are positively-locked to the shaft, and areadjustable throughout 360° in 10° increments.Units are available with a choice of slow-action or snap-actioncontacts.Their rugged fiberglass-reinforced housing and IP67 ratingmake them ideal alternatives to conventional limit switches.Typical ApplicationsThe Z/T236 Series may be used in any presence/positionsensing application normally addressed with conventionallimit switches. Models with positive-break NC contacts areapproved for use in safety systems. For safety applicationsthe switch must be mounted such that the actuating elementof the machine displaces the switch actuator far enough toexceed the positive-break point. (See contact functiondiagrams: symbol *).ORDERING GUIDEFOR FEATURE:SPECIFY:1. Contact operation:Slow ActionTSnap ActionZ2. Operating head V3. Roller lever 7 H4. Body size 236-5. No. of NO contacts 16. No. of NC contacts 17. Degree of protection IP 67 z8. Sealing of operating head (optional) z*Example 1: TV7 H 236-11zExample 2: ZV7 H 236-11z*Available on rocking lever actuator style only.236®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingGlass fiber reinforced selfextinguishingthermoplasticOperating Temperature –22°F to +175°F (–30°C to +80°C)Mechanical Life20 million operationsMinimum Cam Speed Z236 Series: 0.04m./minute(Referenced to Plunger) T236 Series: 2.4m./minuteMaximum Operating Rate 5000 operations/hourBounce TimeZ236 Series: £ 3 msT236 Series: Function of cam speedChangeover Time Z236 Series: £ 5 ms for minimumcam speedT236 Series: Function of cam speedDegree of Protection IP67Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660 Part 200BG-GS-ET15DIN EN 50 047CSA-C22.2UL508ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact GapContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageRated ImpulseWithstand VoltageType TerminalsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically-separated contactbridgesZ236 Series: 2x0.08 inches(2x2mm)T236 Series: 2x0.14 inches(2x3.5mm)4A/230VAC2.5A/400VACSnap-action, positive-break NCcontacts (Z236)Slow-action, positive-break NCcontacts (T236)Fuse: 10A (time delay)2.5A (no time delay6A (time delay) as positive-breakposition switch500VAC6kVScrew terminals, maximum2.5mm (AWG13) wireCONTACT SYSTEMSSeries T236Slow-actionswitchSeries Z236Snap-actionswitch7237

Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATAContact function diagramsSnap action positive break1 NO + 1 NC02,54,8613-1421-2213-14ZS 236-11z02,54,8613-1421-2213-14ZR 236-11z121-22121-22Slow action1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)0 3,5 62,53,813-1421-22TS 236-11z0 3,5 62,53,813-1421-22TR 236-11z0 3,5 60 3,5 62 NO (simultaneous)3,513-1423-24TS 236-20z3,513-1423-24TR 236-20z2 NC (simultaneous)0 2,5 3,8 62,5 3,811-1221-22TS 236-02z0 2,5 3,8 62,5 3,811-1221-22TR 236-02zDimensionsmminchTypes of ActuatorsActuating force/-torqueActuating speed Z/T atRounded plungerStyle S9 N (19 N positive break)0°: min. 10/60 mm/min, max. 1 m/sRoller plungerStyle R9 N (19 N positive break)30°: min. 20/120 mm/min, max. 1 m/s13211422Snap Actionpositive breakZS 236-11zZR 236-11zPart No.1321132314221424Slow actionSlow actionTS 236-11zTS 236-20z*TR 236-11zTR 236-20z*11211222Slow actionTS 236-02zTR 236-02z238* Not for use in safety applications

Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATA02,5602,5603,69,34,813-1421-22Z4S 236-11z4,813-1421-22Z4R 236-11z13-147,1 21-22ZK 236-11z113-1421-22113-1421-221,413-1421-220 3,5 60 3,5 60 5,29,32,53,813-1421-22T4S 236-11z2,53,813-1421-22T4R 236-11z3,65,513-1421-22TK 236-11z0 3,5 60 3,5 60 5,29,313-1423-24T4S 236-20z13-1423-24T4R 236-20z13-1423-24TK 236-20z3,53,55,20 2,5 3,8 60 2,5 3,8 60 3,6 5,5 9,32,53,811-1221-22T4S 236-02z2,53,811-1221-22T4R 236-02z3,65,511-1221-22TK 236-02zRounded plunger (central mounting)Style 4STop roller plunger (central mounting)Style 4RTop roller leverStyle K9N (19N positive break)0°: min. 10/60 mm/min, max. 1 m/s9 N (19N positive break)30°: min. 20/120 mm/min, max. 1 m/s8 N (18 N positive break)30°: min. 24/240 mm/min, max. 1 m/s7Z4S 236-11zZ4R 236-11zZK 236-11zT4S 236-11zT4R 236-11zTK 236-11zT4S 236-20z*T4R 236-20z*TK 236-20z*T4S 236-02zT4R 236-02zTK 236-02z* Not for use in safety applications239

Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATAContact function diagramsSnap action positive break1 NO + 1 NC70°30° 0 30°57°70°57° 13-1421-2213-14ZV1H 236-11z02,75,4713-1421-2213-14Z1R 236-11z21-2221-2212° 12°1Slow action1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)70° 30° 0 30° 70°45°45°13-1421-22TV1H 236-11z02,3713-1421-22T1R 236-11z41° 41°12 NO (simultaneous)70° 41° 0 41° 70°13-1423-24TV1H 236-20z02,3 713-1423-24T1R 236-20z41°41°2,32 NC (simultaneous)70° 30° 0 30° 70°45° 45°45°45°11-1221-22TV1H 236-02z01 2,3711-1221-22T1R 236-02z30°30°2,3DimensionsmminchTypes of ActuatorsActuating force/-torqueActuating speed Z/T atRoller rocking leverStyle 1H15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)30°: min. 92/492 mm/min, max. 1 m/sTop roller leverStyle 1R15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)30°: min. 27/160 mm/min, max. 1 m/s13211422Snap Actionpositive breakZV1H 236-11zZ1R 236-11zPart No.1321132314221424Slow actionSlow actionTV1H 236-11zTV1H 236-20z*T1R 236-11zT1R 236-20z*11211222Slow actionTV1H 236-02zT1R 236-02z240* Not for use in safety applications

Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATA70°30° 0 30°70°70°30° 0 30°70°02,8757°57°13-1457°57°13-1413-1421-2213-14ZV7H 236-11z21-2213-14ZV10H 236-11z5,5 21-2213-14Z3K 236-11z21-2221-2221-2212° 12°12° 12°1,270° 30° 0 30° 70°45°41° 41°45°13-1421-22TV7H 236-11z70° 30° 0 30° 70°45°45°41° 41°13-1421-22TV10H 236-11z0 4 72,84,313-1421-22T3K 236-11z70° 41° 0 41° 70°41°41°13-1423-24TV7H 236-20z70° 41° 0 41° 70°41°41°13-1423-24TV10H 236-20z0 4 7413-1423-24T3K 236-20z70° 30° 0 30° 70°45° 45°45°45°11-1221-22TV7H 236-02z70° 30° 0 30° 70°45° 45°45° 45°11-1221-22TV10H 236-02z0 2,8 4,3 711-1221-22T3K 236-02z30°30°30°30°2,84,3Adjustable roller rocking lever*Style 7HRod rocking lever*Style 10HOne-way roller leverStyle 3K15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)30°: min. 240/1440 mm/min, max. 1 m/s15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)30°: min. 687/4122 mm/min, max. 1 m/s9 N (19 N positive break)30°: min. 27/160 mm/min, max. 1 m/s7ZV7H 236-11z*ZV10H 236-11z*Z3K 236-11zTV7H 236-11z*TV10H 236-11z*T3K 236-11zTV7H 236-20z*TV10H 236-20z*T3K 236-20z*TV7H 236-02z*TV10H 236-02z*T3K 236-02z* Not for use in safety applications241

Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATAContact function diagramsSnap action positive break1 NO + 1 NC0251213-149,6 21-2213-1421-22Z4K 236-11z01,84,912,813-1410,1 21-2213-1421-22ZK4 236-11zSlow action1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)0 7 1257,613-1421-22T4K 236-11z0 7,2 12,84,97,713-1421-22TK4 236-11z2 NO (simultaneous)0 7 12713-1423-24T4K 236-20z0 7,2 12,87,213-1423-24TK4 236-20z2 NC (simultaneous)0 5 7,6 1257,611-1221-22T4K 236-02z0 4,9 7,7 12,84,97,711-1221-22TK4 236-02zDimensionsmminchTypes of ActuatorsOne-way roller leverStyle 4KOne-way roller leverStyle K4Actuating force/-torqueActuating speed Z/T at6 N (16 N positive break)30°: min. 44/264 mm/min, max. 1 m/s6 N (16 N positive break)30°: min. 56/336 mm/min, max. 1 m/s13211422Snap Actionpositive breakZ4K 236-11zZK4 236-11zPart No.1321132314221424Slow actionSlow actionT4K 236-11zT4K 236-20z*TK4 236-11zTK4 236-20z*11211222Slow actionT4K 236-02zTK4 236-02z242* Not for use in safety applications

SaferbyDesign7243

SERIES Z/T335Heavy-Duty Safety-Rated,Positive-Break Limit Switches®Features & Benefits• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … won’t stick or weld shut.• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostileenvironments.• Six popular actuator styles … for application versatility.• Four 90° actuator mounting positions … provideinstallation flexibility.• Slow or snap-action operation … choose to best satisfyapplication requirements.• Safety-system approved … models with positive-breakcontacts approved for use in machine guarding applications.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, VDE,UL and CSA.• Optional LED indicators … provide visual display ofsupply voltage and switch operation.DescriptionThe Z/T335 Series limit switches are designed for use withmovable machine guards/access gates which must be closedfor operator safety … and for any other presence/positionsensing application normally addressed with conventional limitswitches. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a higherlevel of safety and/or reliability than conventional spring-drivenswitches whose contacts can weld or stick shut.Each is available with a choice of six standard actuators …rounded plunger, roller plunger, roller rocking lever, rodrocking lever, adjustable roller rocking lever and one-wayroller lever … mountable in any one of four 90° positions. Allrocking levers are positively-locked to the shaft, and areadjustable throughout 360° in 10° increments.Units are available with a choice of slow-action or snap-actioncontacts.Their rugged metal housing and IP67 rating make them idealalternatives to conventional limit switches.ORDERING GUIDEFOR FEATURE:SPECIFY:1. Contact operation:Slow ActionTSnap ActionZ2. Operating head 4V3. Roller lever H4. Body size 335-5. No. of NO contacts 16. No. of NC contacts 17. Degree of protection IP 67 z8. Sealing of operating head (optional) zExample 1: T4VH 335-11zExample 2: Z4VH 335-11zNote: The Z/T335 Series is also available with 1 NO and 2 NC andwith 3 NC contacts. Please consult factory.Typical ApplicationsThe Z/T335 Series may be used in any presence/positionsensing application normally addressed with conventionallimit switches. Models with positive-break NC contacts areapproved for use in safety systems. For safety applicationsthe switch must be mounted such that the actuating elementof the machine displaces the switch actuator far enough toexceed the positive-break point. (See contact functiondiagrams: symbol *).Optional SafetyController.See Page 327.®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL INC.244

Z/T335 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingDiecast aluminum with enamelfinishOperating Temperature –22°F to +195°F (–30°C to +90°C)Mechanical Life30 million operationsMaximum Operating Rate 5000 operations/hourBounce TimeZ335 Series: < 2 msT335 Series: Function of cam speedChangeover Time Z335 Series: < 2 ms for cam speedof 1 mm/minuteT335 Series: Function of cam speedDegree of Protection IP67Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660 Part 200BG-GS-ET-15DIN EN 50041CSA-C22.2 No. 14 (Suffix -1577)UL508 (Suffix -1594)ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact GapContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageRated ImpulseWithstand VoltageType TerminalsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically-separated contactbridgesZ335 Series: 2x0.03 inchesT335 Series: 2x0.16 inches4A/230VAC2.5A/400VACZ335 Series: Snap-action withpositive-break NCcontactsT335 Series: Slow-action,positive-break NCcontactsFuse: 10A (time delay)16A (no time delay6A (time delay) as positivebreakposition switch500VAC6kVScrew terminals, maximum2.5mm 2 (AWG13) wireSNAP ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMSSLOW ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMSSlow Action SwitchT335Snap Action SwitchZ335LED INDICATOR MODELSGreen LED (gn) indicator supply voltage and yellow LED (ye) indicator for switch operation ofNO or NC contacts for 24VDC. Available for all models of Series 335.Shown here:Z4VH 335-11zG24Wiring diagram:7Shown here:indication of operation of NC contact(terminals 21-22);for indication of operation of NO contact useterminals 13-14protected against wrong polarity connectionprotected against transient voltages 700VAttention: no inductive loads245

Z/T335 TECHNICAL DATAContact function diagramsSnap action positive break1 NO + 1 NC00211,6613-143,9 21-2213-1421-223,9 6ZS 335-11z00211,6613-143,9 21-2213-1421-223,9 6ZR 335-11z2 NC11-1221-2211-12ZS 335-02z11-1221-2211-12ZR 335-02z21-2221-220,80,8Slow action 1 NO + 1 NCbreak before make or make before break2 NO simultaneous contacts staggered(2-step)2 NC simultaneous contacts staggered(2-step)1 NC + 1 NC (CW-CCW)-11z-20z-02z0 3622,80 3630 2 2,86TS 335…13-1421-2213-1423-2411-1221-220 363,74,50 361,30 3,7 4,5 613-1421-2213-1423-2411-1221-22-11zu-20zh-02zh-11z-20z-02z0 3622,80 3630 2 2,86TR 335…13-1421-2213-1423-2411-1221-220 363,74,50 361,30 3,7 4,5 613-1421-2213-1423-2411-1221-22-11zu-20zh-02zh22,822,822,822,8DimensionsmminchTypes of ActuatorsRounded plungerStyle SRoller plungerStyle RActuating ForceActuating Force13211422Snap Actionpositive breakZS 335-11z12 NZR 335-11z12 N11211222Snap Actionpositive breakZS 335-02z12 NZR 335-02z12 NPart No.1321132314221424Slow ActionMake before breakSlow Action2-stepTS 335-11zTS 335-11zuTS 335-20z*TS 335-20zh*15 N17 NTR 335-11zTR 335-11zuTR 335-20z*TR 335-20zh*15 N17 N11211222Slow Action2-stepTS 335-02zTS 335-02zh14 NTR 335-02zTR 335-02zh14 N24611211222Slow Action1 NC CW + 1 NC CCW* Not for use in safety applications

Z/T335 TECHNICAL DATA80°24° 0 24°80°80°24° 0 24°80°80°24° 0 24°80°45° 45°13-1421-2213-14Z4VH 335-11z45° 45°13-1421-2213-14Z4V7H 335-11z45° 45°13-1421-2213-14Z4V10H 335-11z12° 12°21-2212° 12°21-2212° 12°21-2280°45° 045° 80°80°45° 045° 80°80° 45° 045° 80°11-1211-1211-1219° 19°21-2211-12Z4VH 335-02z19° 19°21-2211-12Z4V7H 335-02z19° 19°21-2211-12Z4V10H 335-02z21-2221-2221-228° 8°8° 8°8° 8°-11z-20z-02zT4VH 335…80° 36° 0 36° 80°80° 36° 0 36° 80°13-1413-1434°34° 21-2256° 56° 21-2224° 24°4 5°45°80° 36° 0 36° 80°80° 36° 0 36° 80°13-1413-1423-2423-2436°36°16° 16°80° 24° 0 24° 80°80° 45° 0 45° 80°34°34° 11-1256°56° 11-1234°34° 21-2234°34° 21-22-11zu-20zh-02zh-11z-20zT4V7H 335…80° 36° 0 36° 80°80° 36° 0 36° 80°13-1413-1434°34° 21-2256° 56° 21-2224° 24°4 5°45°80° 36° 0 36° 80°80° 36° 0 36° 80°13-1413-1423-2423-2436°36°16° 16°-11zu-20zh-11z-20zT4V10H 335…80° 36° 0 36° 80°80° 36° 0 36° 80°13-1413-1434°34° 21-2256° 56° 21-2224° 24°45° 45°80° 36° 0 36° 80°80° 36° 0 36° 80°13-1413-1423-2423-2436°36°16° 16°-11zu-20zh24° 24°24° 24°80° 0 24° 58°-01/01zh50° 11-1221-2224°-02z80° 24° 0 24° 80°34°34° 11-1234°34° 21-2224° 24°80° 45° 0 45° 80°56°56° 11-1234°34° 21-2224° 24°-02zh-02z80° 24° 0 24° 80°34° 34° 11-1234° 34° 21-2224° 24°80° 45° 0 45° 80°56°56° 11-1234° 34° 21-2224° 24°-02zh4V operating head withroller rocking leverStyle HActuating Force4V operating head withadjustable roller rocking leverStyle 7H*Actuating Force4V operating head withrod rocking leverStyle 10H*Actuating ForceZ4VH 335-11z27 NcmZ4V7H 335-11z*27 NcmZ4V10H 335-11z*27 Ncm7Z4VH 335-02z27 NcmZ4V7H 335-02z*27 NcmZ4V10H 335-02z*27 NcmT4VH 335-11zT4VH 335-11zu27.5 NcmT4V7H 335-11z*T4V7H 335-11zu*27.5 NcmT4V10H 335-11z*T4V10H 335-11zu*27.5 NcmT4VH 335-20z*T4VH 335-20zh*28 NcmT4V7H 335-20z*T4V7H 335-20zh*28 NcmT4V10H 335-20z*T4V10H 335-20zh*28 NcmT4VH 335-02zT4VH 335-02zh27.5 NcmT4V7H 335-02z*T4V7H 335-02zh*27.5 NcmT4V10H 335-02z*T4V10H 335-02zh*27.5 NcmTVH 335-01/01z26.5 Ncm(other levers upon request)* Not for use in safety applications247

Z/T335 TECHNICAL DATAContact function diagramsSnap action positive break1 NO + 1 NC002,111,66,313-144,2 21-2213-1421-226,3Z1K 335-11z0 4,52,20 3,61113-148,8 21-2213-1421-2211Z3K 335-11z2 NC4,24,211-1221-2211-12Z1K 335-02z8,88,811-1221-2211-12Z3K 335-02z21-2221-220,81,4Slow action 1 NO + 1 NCbreak before make or make before break2 NO simultaneous contacts staggered(2-step)2 NC simultaneous contacts staggered(2-step)1 NC + 1 NC (CW-CCW)-11z-20z-02z0 3,26,313-1421-222,1 30 6,313-1423-243,20 2,1 36,311-1221-222,1 3T1K 335…0 3,26,313-1421-224 50 3,26,313-1423-241,30 4 5 6,311-1221-222,1 3-11zu-20zh-02zh-11z-20z-02z0 6,6114,56,30 116,60 4,5 6,3 114,56,3T3K 335…13-1421-2213-1423-2411-1221-220 6,6 118,2 9,90 6,6 112,80 4,5 8,2 114,5 6,39,913-1421-2213-1423-2411-1221-22-11zu-20zh-02zhDimensionsmminchTypes of ActuatorsOne-way roller leverStyle 1KOne-way roller leverStyle 3KActuating ForceActuating Force13211422Snap Actionpositive breakZ1K 335-11z12 NZ3K 335-11z5.0 N11211222Snap Actionpositive breakZ1K 335-02z12 NZ3K 335-02z5.0 NPart No.1321132314221424Slow ActionMake before breakSlow Action2-stepT1K 335-11zT1K 335-11zuT1K 335-20z*T1K 335-20zh*15 N17 NT3K 335-11zT3K 335-11zuT3K 335-20z*T3K 335-20zh*6.3 N7.2 N11211222Slow Action2-stepT1K 335-02zT1K 335-02zh14 NT3K 335-02zT3K 335-02zh6.0 N248* Not for use in safety applications

SaferbyDesign7249

SERIES Z/T336Heavy-Duty Safety-Rated,Positive-Break Limit SwitchesFeatures & Benefits• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … won’t stick or weld shut.• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostileenvironments.• Six popular actuator styles … for application versatility.• Four 90° actuator mounting positions … provideinstallation flexibility.• Slow or snap-action operation … choose to best satisfyapplication requirements.• Safety-system approved … models with positive-breakcontacts approved for use in machine guarding applications.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, VDE,UL and CSA.®DescriptionThe Z/T336 Series limit switches are designed for use withmovable machine guards/access gates which must be closedfor operator safety … and for any other presence/positionsensing application normally addressed with conventional limitswitches. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a higherlevel of safety and/or reliability than conventional spring-drivenswitches whose contacts can weld or stick shut.Each is available with a choice of six standard actuators …rounded plunger, roller plunger, roller rocking lever, rodrocking lever, adjustable roller rocking lever and one-wayroller lever … mountable in any one of four 90° positions. Allrocking levers are positively-locked to the shaft, and areadjustable throughout 360° in 10° increments.Units are available with a choice of slow-action or snap-actioncontacts.Their rugged fiberglass-reinforced thermoplastic housing andIP67 rating make them ideal alternatives to conventional limitswitches.ORDERING GUIDEFOR FEATURE:SPECIFY:1. Contact operation:Slow ActionTSnap ActionZ2. Operating head 4V3. Roller lever H4. Body size 336-5. No. of NO contacts 16. No. of NC contacts 17. Degree of protection IP 67 z8. Sealing of operating head (optional) z*Example 1: T4VH 336-11zExample 2: Z4VH 336-11z*Available on rocking lever actuator style only.Typical ApplicationsThe Z/T336 Series may be used in any presence/positionsensing application normally addressed with conventionallimit switches. Models with positive-break NC contacts areapproved for use in safety systems. For safety applicationsthe switch must be mounted such that the actuating elementof the machine displaces the switch actuator far enough toexceed the positive-break point. (See contact functiondiagrams: symbol *).250®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

Z/T336 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingGlass fiber reinforced selfextinguishingthermoplasticOperating Temperature –22°F to +195°F (–30°C to +90°C)Mechanical Life30 million operationsMaximum Operating Rate 5000 operations/hourBounce TimeZ336 Series: < 2 msT336 Series: Function of cam speedChangeover Time Z336 Series: < 2 ms for cam speedof 1 mm/minuteT336 Series: Function of cam speedDegree of Protection IP67Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660 Part 200BG-GS-ET-15DIN EN 50041CSA-C22.2 No. 14 (Suffix -1577)UL508 (Suffix -1594)ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact GapContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageRated ImpulseWithstand VoltageType TerminalsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically-separated contactbridgesZ336 Series: 2x0.03 inchesT336 Series: 2x0.16 inches4A/230VAC2.5A/400VACZ336 Series: Snap-action withpositive-break NCcontactsT336 Series: Slow-action,positive-break NCcontactsFuse: 10A (time delay)16A (no time delay6A (time delay) as positivebreakposition switch500VAC6kVScrew terminals, maximum2.5mm (AWG13) wireSNAP ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMSSLOW ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMSSlow Action SwitchT336Snap Action SwitchZ3367251

Z/T336 TECHNICAL DATAContact function diagramsSnap action positive break1 NO + 1 NC00211,6613-143,9 21-2213-1421-223,9 6ZS 336-11z00211,6613-143,9 21-2213-1421-223,9 6ZR 336-11z2 NC11-1221-2211-12ZS 336-02z11-1221-2211-12ZR 336-02z21-2221-220,80,8Slow action 1 NO + 1 NCbreak before make or make before break2 NO simultaneous contacts staggered(2-step)2 NC simultaneous contacts staggered(2-step)1 NC + 1 NC (CW-CCW)-11z-20z-02z0 3613-1421-222 2,80 36313-1423-240 2 2,8611-1221-22TS 336…0 3613-1421-223,7 4,50 3613-1423-241,30 3,7 4,5 611-1221-22-11zu-20zh-02zh-11z-20z-02z0 3622,80 3630 2 2,86TR 336…13-1421-2213-1423-2411-1221-220 363,74,50 361,30 3,7 4,5 613-1421-2213-1423-2411-1221-22-11zu-20zh-02zh22,822,822,822,8DimensionsmminchTypes of ActuatorsRounded plungerStyle SRoller plungerStyle RActuating ForceActuating Force13211422Snap Actionpositive breakZS 336-11z12 NZR 336-11z12 N11211222Snap Actionpositive breakZS 336-02z12 NZR 336-02z12 NPart No.1321132314221424Slow ActionMake before breakSlow Action2-stepTS 336-11zTS 336-11zuTS 336-20z*TS 336-20zh*15 N17 NTR 336-11zTR 336-11zuTR 336-20z*TR 336-20zh*15 N17 N11211222Slow Action2-stepTS 336-02zTS 336-02zh14 NTR 336-02zTR 336-02zh14 N25211211222Slow Action1 NC CW + 1 NC CCW* Not for use in safety applications

Z/T336 TECHNICAL DATA80°24° 0 24° 80°13-1445° 45° 21-2213-1421-2212° 12°Z4VH 336-11z80°24° 0 24° 80°13-1445° 45° 21-2213-1421-2212° 12°Z4V7H 336-11z80°24° 0 24°45° 45°12° 12°80°13-1421-2213-1421-22Z4V10H 336-11z80°45° 0 45° 80°11-1219° 19° 21-2211-12Z4VH 336-02z80°45° 0 45° 80°11-1219° 19° 21-2211-12Z4V7H 336-02z80° 45° 0 45° 80°11-1219° 19° 21-2211-12Z4V10H 336-02z21-2221-2221-228° 8°8° 8°8° 8°-11z-20z-02zT4VH 336…80° 36° 0 36° 80°80° 36° 0 36° 80°13-1413-1434°34° 21-2256° 56° 21-2224° 24°4 5°45°80° 36° 0 36° 80°80° 36° 0 36° 80°13-1413-1423-2423-2436°36°16° 16°80° 24° 0 24° 80°80° 45° 0 45° 80°34°34° 11-1256°56° 11-1234°34° 21-2234°34° 21-22-11zu-20zh-02zh-11z-20zT4V7H 336…80° 36° 0 36° 80°80° 36° 0 36° 80°13-1413-1434°34° 21-2256° 56° 21-2224° 24°4 5°45°80° 36° 0 36° 80°80° 36° 0 36° 80°13-1413-1423-2423-2436°36°16° 16°-11zu-20zh-11z-20zT4V10H 336…80° 36° 0 36° 80°80° 36° 0 36° 80°13-1413-1434°34° 21-2256° 56° 21-2224° 24°45° 45°80° 36° 0 36° 80°80° 36° 0 36° 80°13-1413-1423-2423-2436°36°16° 16°-11zu-20zh24° 24°24° 24°80° 0 24° 58°-01/01zh50° 11-1221-2224°-02z80° 24° 0 24° 80°34°34° 11-1234°34° 21-2224° 24°80° 45° 0 45° 80°56°56° 11-1234°34° 21-2224° 24°-02zh-02z80° 24° 0 24° 80°34° 34° 11-1234° 34° 21-2224° 24°80° 45° 0 45° 80°56°56° 11-1234° 34° 21-2224° 24°-02zh4V operating head withroller rocking leverStyle H4V operating head withadjustable roller rocking leverStyle 7H*4V operating head withrod rocking leverStyle 10H*Actuating ForceActuating ForceActuating ForceZ4VH 336-11z27 NcmZ4V7H 336-11z*27 NcmZ4V10H 336-11z*27 Ncm7Z4VH 336-02z27 NcmZ4V7H 336-02z*27 NcmZ4V10H 336-02z*27 NcmT4VH 336-11zT4VH 336-11zuT4VH 336-20z*T4VH 336-20zh*T4VH 336-02zT4VH 336-02zh27.5 Ncm28 Ncm27.5 NcmT4V7H 336-11z*T4V7H 336-11zu*T4V7H 336-20z*T4V7H 336-20zh*T4V7H 336-02z*T4V7H 336-02zh*27.5 Ncm28 Ncm27.5 NcmT4V10H 336-11z*T4V10H 336-11zu*T4V10H 336-20z*T4V10H 336-20zh*T4V10H 336-02z*T4V10H 336-02zh*27.5 Ncm28 Ncm27.5 NcmTVH 336-01/01z 26.5 Ncm(other levers upon request)* Not for use in safety applications253

Z/T336 TECHNICAL DATAContact function diagramsSnap action positive break1 NO + 1 NC002,111,66,313-144,2 21-2213-1421-226,3Z1K 336-11z0 4,52,20 3,61113-148,8 21-2213-1421-2211Z3K 336-11z2 NC4,24,211-1221-2211-12Z1K 336-02z8,88,811-1221-2211-12Z3K 336-02z21-2221-220,81,4Slow action 1 NO + 1 NCbreak before make or make before break2 NO simultaneous contacts staggered(2-step)2 NC simultaneous contacts staggered(2-step)1 NC + 1 NC (CW-CCW)-11z-20z-02z0 3,26,313-1421-222,1 30 6,313-1423-243,20 2,1 36,311-1221-222,1 3T1K 336…0 3,26,313-1421-224 50 3,26,313-1423-241,30 4 5 6,311-1221-222,1 3-11zu-20zh-02zh-11z-20z-02z0 6,6114,56,30 116,60 4,5 6,3 114,56,3T3K 336…13-1421-2213-1423-2411-1221-220 6,6 118,2 9,90 6,6 112,80 4,5 8,2 114,5 6,39,913-1421-2213-1423-2411-1221-22-11zu-20zh-02zhDimensionsmminchTypes of ActuatorsOne-way roller leverStyle 1KOne-way roller leverStyle 3KActuating ForceActuating Force13211422Snap Actionpositive breakZ1K 336-11z12 NZ3K 336-11z5.0 N11211222Snap Actionpositive breakZ1K 336-02z12 NZ3K 336-02z5.0 NPart No.1321132314221424Slow ActionMake before breakSlow Action2-stepT1K 336-11zT1K 336-11zuT1K 336-20z*T1K 336-20zh*15 N17 NT3K 336-11zT3K 336-11zuT3K 336-20z*T3K 336-20zh*6.3 N7.2 N11211222Slow Action2-stepT1K 336-02zT1K 336-02zh14 NT3K 336-02zT3K 336-02zh6.0 N254* Not for use in safety applications

SaferbyDesign7255

SERIES Z332Heavy-Duty Safety-Rated,Positive-Break Limit SwitchesFeatures & Benefits• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … won’t stick or weld shut.• Watertight design … meets IP65 washdown requirements.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostileenvironments.• Five popular actuator styles … for application versatility.• Four 90° actuator mounting positions … provideinstallation flexibility.• Safety-system approved … for use in machine guardingapplications.• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, VDE,and CSA.®DescriptionThe Z332 Series limit switches are designed for use withmovable machine guards/access gates which must be closedfor operator safety … and for any other presence/positionsensing application normally addressed with conventional limitswitches. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a higherlevel of safety and/or reliability than conventional spring-drivenswitches whose contacts can weld or stick shut.Each is available with a choice of five standard actuators …rounded plunger, roller plunger, roller rocking lever, rodrocking lever and adjustable roller rocking lever … mountablein any one of four 90° positions. All rocking levers arepositively-locked to the shaft, and are adjustable throughout360° in 10° increments.Their rugged metal housing and IP65 rating make them idealalternatives to conventional limit switches.ORDERING GUIDEFOR FEATURE:SPECIFY:1. Contact operation:Snap ActionZ2. Operating head 4V3. Roller lever H4. Body size 332-5. No. of NO contacts 16. No. of NC contacts 17. Degree of protection IP 65 yExample: Z4VH 332-11yTypical ApplicationsThe Z332 Series may be used in any presence/positionsensing application normally addressed with conventional limitswitches. Featuring positive-break NC contacts, they areapproved for use in safety systems. For safety applicationsthe switch must be mounted such that the actuating elementof the machine displaces the switch actuator far enough toexceed the positive-break point. (See contact functiondiagrams: symbol *).256®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

Z332 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingDiecast aluminum with enamelfinishOperating Temperature –22°F to +195°F (–30°C to +90°C)Mechanical Life1 million operationsMinimum Cam Speed 1 mm/minute(Referenced to Plunger)Maximum Operating Rate 5000 operations/hourBounce Time2 msChangeover Time 1.5 ms for minimum cam speedDegree of Protection IP65Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660 Part 200BG-GS-ET-15DIN EN 50041CSA-C22.2 No. 14 (Suffix -1220)Contact SystemELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsContact ConfigurationContact GapContact RatingSwitching ActionShort Circuit ProtectionRated Insulation VoltageRated ImpulseWithstand VoltageType TerminalsFine silverDouble-pole, double-break withelectrically-separated contactbridges2 × 0.05 in. immediately afterswitching2 × 0.19 in. with full travel ofactuator2.5A/250VACZ332 Series: Snap-action withpositive-break NCcontactsFuse: 20A (time delay)25A (no time delay6A (time delay) as positivebreakposition switch250VAC6kVScrew terminals, maximum2.5mm (AWG13) wireMagnetic storagesnap-action systemSNAP ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMS• Snap-action switching, 1 NO 1 NC• Change-over, double-gap with four terminals• Two electrically separated moving contacts• Plated solid silver contacts• Positive-break NC contact with snap-action switching• Reliable change-over, even with slow plunger actuation• Snap-action system separated from contact system• Full contact force right up to operating point• Constant operating position, as independent of contact burning• Short, constant flight time of only 1.5 ms• Short bounce time• High short-circuit resistance• High vibration resistance of 10 g still only 0.01 mm before operating point• Wide contact gap of 2 × 1.25 mm immediately after switching point7257

Z332 TECHNICAL DATAContact function diagramsSnap action positive break1 NO + 1 NC02613-143,2 21-2213-14ZS 332-11y02613-143,2 21-2213-14ZR 332-11y21-2221-221,41,4DimensionsmminchTypes of ActuatorsRounded plungerStyle SRoller plungerStyle RActuating ForceActuating ForcePart No.13211422Snap Actionpositive breakZS 332-11y31 NZR 332-11y31 N258

Z332 TECHNICAL DATA90° 24° 0 24°90°90° 24° 0 24°90°90°24° 0 24°90°13-1439° 39° 21-2215° 15°13-1421-22Z4VH 332-11y13-1439° 39° 21-2215° 15°13-1421-22Z4V7H 332-11y15° 15°13-1421-2213-1421-22Z4V10H 332-11z4V operating head withroller rocking leverStyle HActuating Force4V operating head withadjustable roller leverStyle 7H*Actuating Force4V operating head withrod rocking leverStyle 10H*Actuating ForceZ4VH 332-11y35 NcmZ4V7H 332-11y*35 NZ4V10H 332-11y*35 Ncm* Not for use in safety applications7259

SERIES C50Compact, Safety-Rated,Positive-Break Limit Switches®Features & Benefits• “Positive-Break” NC contact … won’t stick or weld shut.• Compact size … ideal where space is limited.• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostileenvironments.• Meets rigid safety standards … IEC, VDE.• Electrically-insulated contacts … for added safety.AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELSContactPart NumberConfigurationActuator TypeC50RC50ST1 NO & 1 NC1 NO & 1 NCRoller plungerAdjustable plungerDescriptionThe C50 Series limit switches are designed for use withmovable machine guards/access gates which must be closedfor operator safety … and for any other presence/positionsensing application normally addressed with conventional limitswitches. Their positive-opening NC contact provides a higherlevel of safety and reliability than conventional spring-drivenlimit switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut.Typical ApplicationsThe C50 Series may be used in any presence/positionsensing application normally addressed with conventionallimit switches.OperationThe C50 Series are designed to mount to a machine structuresuch that when the guard is open, it directly drives the switchactuator to force open the unit’s positive-break, normallyclosedcontact. The positive-break NC contact ensures circuitinterruption (and machine stoppage). Note that for safetyapplications, these switches must be mounted in the “positivemode.”Optional SafetyController.See Page 327.®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL260

SERIES C50 TECHNICAL DATAMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSHousingGlass-fiber reinforced (UL94-V0),self-extinguishing thermoplasticOperating Temperature –13°F to +167°FDegree of Protection IP30Maximum Operating Rate 1,800 operations/hourMechanical Life>5 million operationsRepeat Accuracy +/- 0.02 mmConformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1EN 60947-5-1DIN VDE 0660 Part 200EN 60204-1UL & CSAELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSContactsFine silverContact Configuration Double-pole, double-break withelectrically-separated bridgesContact Rating4A/400VAC (AC-15)Switching ActionSlow-action, positive-break NCcontactsElectrical Connections Screw terminals (M3), maximum13AWG wireShort Circuit Protection 4A (Slow-blow)DIMENSIONS & SWITCHING DIAGRAMSø12.477,5.302,5.10Switching Diagram21,5.85ø5.20C50 R7,5.30mminch19-24.75-.94Circuit DiagramC50 STø4,2.173,50.14715.59301.1810,5.4125.98C50 Series21,5.85261

262SaferbyDesign

SAFETY LIGHT CURTAINS & BEAMSSELECTION GUIDESeries Description Range Catalog PageSLC/G 41014mm & 30mm5m (14mm)18m (30mm)273SLB 200 Safety Category 2 Light Beam 4m302SLB 400 Safety Category 4 Light Beam 15m 3038263

264SaferbyDesign

Safety light curtains and safety light gridsSystem features:• Control Category 2 and 4 acc. to EN 954-1or acc. to EN 61496, Type 2 and Type 4• Different integrated functions:Start/Restart interlockContactor monitoringMutingBlankingMaster/Slave configuration• Diagnostic display• Optical synchronisation• Maintenance- free• Compact design• Simple, flexible mounting and adjustment8265

Introduction – Optoelectronic safety sensorsEN 61496The field of automation issubject to a permanent andinnovative change of productsand applications. The focus ison increasing the productivityand realising a smoothrunningproduction processwith a minimum of humaninterventions on machineryand systems. The ideal, a fullyautomatic and totally safemachine however will alwaysremain a dream, though therobots used in productionplants already are a big steptowards this aim.Human intervention andknowledge will always berequired for thecommissioning, monitoringand maintenance of modernindustrial systems. Manhowever is not infallible andignorance or lack ofinformation, thoughtlessnessor negligence often leads todamages.For these reasons,harmonised standards, i.e. theMachinery Directive EC98/37/EC and otherregulations, wereimplemented at Europeanlevel.These standards aim atdetecting and constructivelyavoiding all possible risks andhazards during the planningand project phase ofmachines and systems. Safetycomponents must be used tominimise or eliminate theresidual risks.In this way, manufacturers andusers are making equivalentefforts to set up an optimalprocess flow, which offers thehighest possible protection tothe operating staff. Thechallenge for allmanufacturers of safetycomponents is to designefficient and safe productsolutions for mechanicalengineers. Flaps and doorsare the simplest means ofaccess to the machine.These separatinghardguarding safety solutionsoffer an efficient and effectiveprotection against hazardousmovements and productsbeing ejected from themachine.When these safety guards areopened, the machine isbrought to standstill (throughthe corresponding safetysensor transmitting the “stop”signal to the control), whichinterrupts and therefore slowsdown the production. In caseof continuous processes,which must not beinterrupted, solenoidinterlocks protect man and thework piece against damages.Safety fences are not suitablefor production processesrequiring the material to betransported into the workingarea by means of conveyorbelts, as it does not allow foran ergonomic and optimalwork sequence.A “virtual safety guard“ in theform of an activeoptoelectronic device (AOPD),e.g. a safety light curtain, is aperfect solution, offering bothan optimal protection ofhuman life and uninterruptedproduction process.266

Typical applications:• Power-driven machines• Power-driven presses inmetalworking, plastics,leather, stone working andrubber processing industry• Folding presses andattachments• Filter presses• Punching machines inleather, textile and plasticsprocessing• Robots stations and weldingbooths• Printing and injectionmoulding machines• Transport engineering• Pallet loaders and palletizers• Materials handling andstorage technology• and so onDepending on the application,the AOPD are used for dangerpoint, danger zone andperimeter guarding. The usercan choose from a large rangeof different optoelectronicsafety solutions e.g. lightbarriers, light grids, lightcurtains and laser scanners.8267

Design and operating principleOptoelectronicSafety light barriersThe safety light barriersystems of the SLB range areactive optoelectronicprotective devices (AOPD)fulfilling the Control Category2 or 4 in accordance with EN954-1 or EN 61496. Thesesystems are used as entryguards on hazardous zones,danger points and entrances.They protect human lifewithout restricting theproduction flow.Typical applications for safetylight barriers are on robots,automatic-processing plants,transfer lines, rack storagesand pallet loaders.The entire safety light barriersystem includes a lightemitter, a light receiver and asafety monitoring module.The safety monitoring moduleevaluates the signals of theemitter.If the light beam is interrupted,a signal is emitted to bring thedangerous movement of themachine to standstill.The safety monitoring moduleintegrates functions such asstart and restart interlock aswell as a contactormonitoring.The maintenance-free safetysensors of the system withprotection class IP 67 have anintegrated soiling check.Because of their small size,safety light barriers can befitted almost everywhere.Safety light grids /light curtainsThe safety light curtains andsafety light grids of the SLCand SLG meet therequirements of ControlCategory 2 or 4 to EN 954-1and Type 2 or Type 4 to EN61496.They safeguard danger pointsand hazardous areas ondifferent applications, e.g.presses, robot stations,injection moulding machines,pallet machines, etc.In these active optoelectronicprotective devices (AOPD), theemitter and receiver are fittedin two separate enclosures.An invisible infrared signal issent from the emitter andevaluated by the receiver. Ifthe light beam is interruptedby an object or a person, astop signal is emitted to bringthe machine to standstill.The protection field is definedby the height and width of theprotection field. Theprotected height is the rangebetween the first and lastinfrared light beam of a lightcurtain. The protected heightdefines the physical size ofthe system to be used.The protected width oroperating range is thedistance between thetransmitter and receiver unit.For an accurate detection ofobjects with different sizes inthe hazardous area,the user can choose betweenlight grids and light curtainswith different resolutions.Here, the following ruleapplies: the smaller thedistance between twoadjacent light beams, themore accurate the detectionsensitivity of the AOPD.For the detection of bodyparts, a distinction is madebetween finger, hand andbody protection.EN 999 or EN 294 sets thebiometric data for fingerprotection to 14 mm, for handdetection to 40 mm, for legdetection up to 70 mm and forbody detection to over 70mm.Safety light grids with 2, 3 or 4individual beams are generallyused to detect the penetrationof the entire human body.Safety light curtains aremultiple beam systems (> 5individual beams) and canalso detect smaller objects incase of intrusion into theprotected field. Themaintenance- free safety lightcurtains and light grids can besmoothly fitted using an M12connector and have adiagnostic LED indication forstatus messages.Depending on the type ofsafety light curtain or light gridused, the components havean integrated evaluation withProtected width (operating range)start/restart interlock andcontactor monitoring.Additional functions such asblanking, muting andcascading of the light curtainsare available as well.These functions are simplyconfigured in the AOPDthrough the contactconfiguration (no configurationsoftware required).The SLC and SLG productseries therefore offer amaximum of flexibility forsafeguarding different dangerpoints.Protectied height268Light beam

safety systemsImportant conditions forthe use of optoelectronicsafety devices:In order to choose theappropriate activeoptoelectronic protectivedevice (AOPD) such aslight barriers and lightcurtains/grids and to usethem correctly, both therequirements of the standards(EN 61496, EN 999,EN 294,C standards etc.) andproduct-specific features(detection sensitivity, range,etc.) must be taken intoaccount. AOPD’s can beused, provided that:• the dangerous movementcan be stopped at all timesand that it is ensured thatthe danger point can only bereached after the movementhas come to standstill,• the run-out time of themachine and all safetycomponents is known,• no objects (work pieces,sparks, liquids, etc.) can beejected,• the AOPD meet therequirements of Type 2 orType 4 acc. to EN 61496,• the danger point can only bereached by passing throughthe protected field of theAOPD,• reaching over, under orthrough the protected field isimpossible,• the start or restart commanddevices are fitted in such away that the entirehazardous area iscompletely visible from theoutside and that it cannot beactivated from outside thehazardous area• and the safety distance iscalculated andconstructively applied inaccordance with EN 999.The effectiveness of the safetyguard corresponds to the riskassessment, which wascarried out during theplanning and design phase,taking all important boundaryconditions, e.g. environment,machine and function.8269

ApplicationSafety distanceEN 999Safety distances for lightcurtainsBetween the interruption of alight beam and the standstillof the machine, a certain timeexpires. The safety light gridor light curtain must be sizedand installed such that a stopwould be signalled and thehazard ceased prior to aperson or a body memberaccessing the hazard.The standard EN 999 providesthe user with detailedinformation about thecalculation of the minimumsafety distances. Theseinclude the followingimportant influencing factors:• run-out time of the entiresystem, taking the differentreaction times of theindividual systems intoaccount (e.g. machine,safety monitoring module,AOPD etc.)• capacity of the AOPD todetect body parts (fingers,hand and entire humanbody)• set-up of the safety guard innormal condition (verticalfitting), parallel condition(horizontal fitting) or at anarbitrary angle in front of thesafety guard and• the speed at which theprotection field isapproached.For the calculation of theminimum safety distance S tothe hazardous area, EN 999presents the following generalformula:S = K x T + CWhere:S the safety distance to thedanger point (mm)K the approach speed of thebody or the body part(mm/s)T the entire reaction time ofthe system(s)(including the machine’s runouttime, the reaction time ofthe safety guard and thesafety monitoring module etc.)C additional distance (mm) infront of the safety guardNormal approach for lightcurtains:(resolution: max. 40 mm)The minimum safety distanceS is calculated in the followingway:S = 2000 T + 8 (D-14)(D = resolution).This formula applies to safetydistances up to 500 mm.The minimum safety distanceSmin may not be less than100 mm.If the calculation produces adistance larger than 500 mmfor S, the calculation can berepeated with a lowerapproach speed:S = 1600 T + 8 (D-14)In this case, Smin may not beless than 500 mm.Light curtainApproachdirectionIf the danger point of themachine is accessible fromthe top because of itsparticular construction, theheight H of the topmost beamof the light barrier must be atleast 1800 mm above thebase G of the machine.Normal approach for lightcurtains:(resolution: from 40 mm upto max. 70mm)The minimum safety distanceS is calculated in the followingway:S = 1600 T + 850The height of the topmostlight beam must be at least900 mm, the height of thelowermost light beammaximum 300 mm abovethe bottom (for the protectionof children younger than14: 200 mm)Danger pointReference floor270

Normal approach for lightgrids:(resolution: > 70 mm)The minimum safety distanceS is calculated using thefollowing formula:S = 1600 T + 850For safety guards withmultiple beams, height H (mm)above the reference floor ofthe individual beams must beNumber Height above theof beams reference floor2 400, 9003 300, 700, 11004 300, 600, 900,1200applied in the following way:When using light curtains orlight grids, particular attentionmust be paid to the tamperingpossibilities of the safetyguard and to the mechanicalrisks (e.g. crushing, shearing,cutting, ejection).Horizontal approach forlight curtains/grids(resolution: > 50 mm)The minimum safety distanceS is calculated using thefollowing formula:S = 1600 T + 1200 – 0.4 HHere, Smin is 850 mm.The lowest authorised heightH depends on the resolution Dof the light curtain:H = 15 (D-50)For this type of safety guard,the maximum height H is 1000mm.In the risk analysis, specialattention must be paid to theprevention of unintentionalundetected access fromunderneath the protectionfield.Further calculation examplescan be found in DIN EN 999as well as in the mountinginstructions of the SLC/SLGsafety sensors.Danger pointDanger pointLight curtain/gridDirection ofapproachDirection ofapproachReference floorLight curtain/gridReference floor8271

Modes of operation and functionsMaster/Slave cascadingFor the SLC/SLG…M/Sproduct series, the masterlight curtain can be extendedwith another (slave) lightcurtain (cascading). In thisway, multiple protection fieldscan be generated. Aprotection field is createdbetween the emitter andreceiver of the master as wellas other protection fieldsbetween the slavecomponents.This device cascadingprovides for a comfortableand efficient protection ofcontiguous protection fieldsagainst reaching over orthrough the protection field.The slave light curtains areconnected to the master bymeans of an M12 connector.The master and slave lightcurtains are available indifferent sizes and resolutionsand allow for almost anycombination.MutingIf goods or objects must betransported in or out of thehazardous area withoutstopping the machine, thesafety light curtain must beautomatically and temporarilysuspended by the safetyrelatedparts of the controlsystem.To this end, two or four mutingsensors are used to detectwhether a person isapproaching the hazardousarea or a transport systementers or leaves the hazardousarea. Suitable muting sensorsare light barriers, proximityswitches or position switches.The integrated safety-mutingcontroller of the safety lightcurtain or light grid monitorsand controls the mutingprocess.The safety outputs are notdisabled.When the mutingfunction is used, an externalmuting lamp must beconnected as well in order toenable the system beingactivated. Any malfunction ofthe monitored signal sourcewill cause the OSSD’s to beswitched off.Depending on the application,different light curtains withintegrated muting function aswell as external or internalmuting sensors are available.Detailed product informationcan be found in this brochurefrom page 33.Blanking /Floating BlankingIf continuity of the productionprocess is required, a part ofthe protection field can beblanked without triggering astop signalIn this way, objects such aswork pieces can be fed or aconveyor belt can bepositioned at a fixed positionin the protection field.The integrated floatingblanking function of theSLC…B light curtains enablesa flexible blanking of up tothree adjacent light beams inthe protection field of the lightcurtain. This function isrequired to ensure that one,two or three adjacent lightbeams can be interrupted atan undefined position in theprotection field.In this way, objects such asfixtures or materials withslightly varying heights can befed through the light curtainwithout triggering a stopsignal. Five different floatingblanking functions areavailable. The distinguishingfeature of the different modesis the number of light beamsthat can be interrupted by anobject. In addition to that, itcan be defined whether theobject may interrupt theprotection field permanently oronly temporarily. Theinterrupted light beams can beat any position in theprotection field.Aport from the first infraredlight beam (the beam closestto the connector), any lightbeam can be used for floatingblanking.A complex programmingthrough software andcomputer or complicatedteach-in procedures is notrequired, as the floatingblanking functions areconfigured in the connector ofthe AOPD’s receiver unit.When floating blanking isapplied, the resolution of thelight curtain changes. Thetechnical documentation of thedifferent light curtains includesthe tables with the effectiveresolutions D to calculate theminimum safety distance to EN999.Further technical productinformation can be found inthis brochure.MasterSlave2721 21 Floating-Blanking-Area2 movable object

Safety light curtains and safety light gridsSelection tableType Detection Protected Range Contactor Start/ Master / Muting Blanking PageEN 61496 sensitivity height monitoring restart Slave(mm) (mm) (m) interlockSLC/G 210 2 20-30-40 160 – 1810 1650-90 X X 2752-3-4SLC/G 210 2 20-30-40 160 – 1810 18-RF 50-90 • • 2762-3-4SLC/G 210 2 30-40-50 160 – 1510 18-RFM/S • • • 277SLC/G 210 2 20-40 160 – 1210 6-RFLC 2-3-4 • • 278SLC/G 410 4 14-20-30 160 – 1810 1840-50-90 X X 2792-3-4SLC/G 410 4 14-20-30 160 – 1810 18-RF 40-50-90 • • 2802-3-4SLC/G 410 4 14-20-30 160 – 1810 18-RFM/S • • • 281SLC 410 4 14-20-40 160 – 1810 18-B 90 X X • 282SLC 410 4 14-20-40 160 – 1810 18-BM X X • • 282SLC/G 412 4 40 510 – 1210 602-3-4 • • 283SLG 412-P 4 2 510 6• • 284SLC/G 415I 4 30-40-90 310 - 1810 602-3-4 • • • 288SLG 415L 4 2-3 510, 810 2,5• • • 289SLG 415T 4 2-3 510, 810 3,5X only in combination with safety monitoring module• integratednot available• • • 2908273

274SaferbyDesign

OSSD FALOSSD FAILCSafety light curtains and safety light gridsSLC 210453585 24 40==BA10• Safety light curtain• Control category Type 2to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2• Resolution 20, 30, 40, 50 and 90 mm• Protection field heightfrom 160 mm to 1810 mm• Range from 0 ... 16 m• Self-test every 0.5 s• semiconductor outputs• Optical synchronisation• Status display• Protection class IP 65Legend:A: Total length (B + 91 mm)B: Protection field heightC: 85 mm (SLC)ApprovalsOrdering detailsSLC 210-E/R➀-➁-12-➂No. Replace Description➀ xxxx Height of protection fieldAvailable lengths:0160 mm*** 0310 mm0460 mm 0610 mm0760 mm 0910 mm1060 mm 1210 mm1360 mm 1510 mm1660 mm 1810 mm➁ 20, 30 Resolution 20, 30 mm40, 50 Resolution 40, 50 mm90 Resolution 90 mm➂Range 6 mHRange 1 ...16 mHigh RangeSLG 2103545 = =2440• Safety light grid• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid• Protection field heights 510 mm,810 mm or 910 mmApprovalsOrdering detailsSLG 210-E/R➀-12-➁BA10No. Replace Description➀Distance betweenoutermost beams:0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam0900-04 900 mm, 4-beam➁Range 0 ... 6 mHRange 1 ...16 mHigh RangeMounting brackets and T-slots are included inthe delivery.*** only for resolution 20, 30 mmTechnical dataStandards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2Control Category toIEC/EN 61496-1, -2 Type 2Enclosure:AluminiumEnclosure dimensions:35 x 45 mmConnection: connector plug M 12,5-poleMax. cable length:100 mProtection class: IP 65 to EN 60529Response time:5,5 – 28 ms(depends onlength and resolution)Detection sensitivity (Resolution): 20, 30, 40,50 and 90 mmProtection field height:(Resolution: 20, 30 mm): 160 ... 1810 mm(Resolution: 40, 50, 90 mm): 310 ... 1810 mm(2-, 3-, 4-beam): 510, 810, 910 mmProtection fieldwidth, range:0 ... 6 m (Standard),1 ... 16 m (High range)Start/restart interlock: *Contactor control: *Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),codedUe: 24 VDC ± 20%Safety outputs:2 x PNP, 500 mALeakage current: **Safety outputs:< 0,3 mAPower consumption: Emitter 2 W,Receiver 3 WData interface: –Status anddiagnostics displayLED indicationAmbient temperature: 0 °C … + 55 ºCStorage andtransport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºC* only in combination with safetymonitoring module** In case of failure (interruption of the0 V supply) the maximum leakagecurrent is 0.3 mA.Ordering detailsAccessories:Connector plug M 12 x 1for Emitter/ ReceiverKD M12-5-5 mKD M12-5-15 mfor Emitter/ Receiver(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)R = angled connector KD M12-5-RS = straight connector KD M12-5-SFurther accessories can befound on pages 292-294.275

OSSD FAILCOSSD FAILCSafety light curtains and safety light gridsSLC 210...RF3545 ==2440BA10• Safety light curtain• Control category Type 2to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2• Resolution 20, 30, 40, 50 and 90 mm• Protection field heightfrom 160 mm to 1810 mm• Integrated start/restart interlock• Integrated contactor control• Range from 0 ... 18 m• Self-test every 0.5 s• Semiconductor outputs• Optical synchronisation• Status display• Protection class IP 65SLG 210...RF3545 = =2440• Safety light grid• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid• Protection field heights 510 mm,810 mm or 910 mmLegend: A: Total length (B + 91 mm) B: Protection field height C: 85 mm (SLC)BA10Technical dataStandards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2Control category toIEC/EN 61496-1, -2 Type 2Enclosure:AluminiumEnclosure dimensions:35 x 45 mmConnection: (Emitter): connector plugM 12, 5-pole,(Receiver): connector plugM 12, 8-poleMax. cable length:100 m(Master/Slave) 50 mProtection class: IP 65 to EN 60529Response time:5,5 - 28 ms(depends onlength and resolution)Detection sensitivity (Resolution): 20, 30, 40,50 and 90 mmProtection field height:(Resolution: 20, 30 mm): 160 ... 1810 mm(Resolution 40, 50, 90 mm): 310 ... 1810 mm(2-, 3-, 4-beam): 510, 810, 910 mmProtection field width, range: 0 ... 18 mStart/restart interlock:integratedContactor control:integratedCascading (Master/Slave) –Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),codedUe: 24 VDC ± 20%Safety outputs:2 x PNP, 500 mALeakage current: *Safety outputs:< 0,3 mAPower consumption: Emitter 2 W,Receiver 3 WData interface: –Status and diagnostics: 7-segment andLED displayAmbient temperature: 0 °C … + 55 ºCStorage andtransport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºCApprovalsOrdering detailsSLC 210-E/R➀-➁-RFNo. Replace Description➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm)Available lengths:0160 mm** 0310 mm0460 mm 0610 mm0760 mm 0910 mm1060 mm 1210 mm1360 mm 1510 mm1660 mm 1810 mm➁ 20 Resolution 20 mm30 Resolution 30 mm40 Resolution 40 mm50 Resolution 50 mm90 Resolution 90 mm276ApprovalsOrdering detailsSLG 210-E/R➀-RFNo. Replace Description➀Distance betweenoutermost beams:0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam0900-04 900 mm, 4-beamMounting brackets and T-slots are included inthe delivery.** only for resolution 20, 30 mm* In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply)the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.Ordering detailsAccessories:Connector plug M 12 x 1for emitterKD M12-5-5 mKD M12-5-15 mfor emitter (pre-wiring possible,however without cable)R = angled connectorKD M12-5-RS = straight connectorKD M12-5-Sfor receiverKD M12-8-5 mKD M12-8-15 mFurther accessories can be found onpages 292-294.

OSSD FAILCOSSD FAILCSafety light curtains and safety light gridsSLC 210...RFM/S3545 ==2440B10 A10• Safety light curtain• Control category Type 2 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2• Resolution 30, 40 and 50 mm• Protection field height-Master from 310 mmto 1510 mm• Protection field height-Slave from 160 mmto 1510 mm• Integrated start/restart interlock• Integrated contactor control• Cascading of Master and Slave devices• Range from 0 ... 18 m• Semiconductor outputs• Optical synchronisation• Status display• Protection class IP 65SLG 210...RFM/S3545 = =2440• Safety light grid• 2- oder 3-beam light grid• Protection field heights 510 mm,or 810 mmLegend:A: Total length Slave / Master (B + 91 mm) B: Protection field height C: 85 mm (SLC)B10 A10Technical dataStandards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2Control category toIEC/EN 61496-1, -2 Type 2Enclosure:AluminiumEnclosure dimensions:35 x 45 mmConnection: (Emitter): connector plugM 12, 5-pole,(Receiver): connector plugM 12, 8-poleMax. cable length:100 m(Master/Slave) 50 mProtection class: IP 65 to EN 60529Response time:5,5 - 28 ms(depends onlength and resolution)Detection sensitivity (Resolution): 30, 40and 50 mmProtection field height:(Resolution 30 mm): 160 ... 1510 mm(Resolution 40, 50 mm): 310 ... 1510 mm(2-, 3-beam): 510, 810mmProtection field width, range: 0 ... 18 mStart/restart interlock:integratedContactor control:integratedCascading (Master/Slave):possibleLight emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),codedUe: 24 VDC ± 20%Safety outputs:2 x PNP, 500 mALeakage current: *Safety outputs:< 0,3 mAPower consumption: Emitter 2 W,Receiver 3 WData interface: –Status and diagnostics: 7-segment andLED displayAmbient temperature: 0 °C … + 55 ºCStorage andtransport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºCApprovalsOrdering detailsSLC 210-E/R➀-➁-RF➂No. Replace Description➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm)Available lengths:0160 mm 0310 mm0460 mm 0610 mm0760 mm 0910 mm1060 mm 1210 mm1360 mm 1510 mm➁ 30 Resolution 30 mm40 Resolution 40 mm50 Resolution 50 mm➂ M MasterfunktionSSlavefunktionApprovalsOrdering detailsSLG 210-E/R➀-RF-➁No. Replace Description➀Distance betweenoutermost beams:0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam➁ M Master functionSSlave functionMounting brackets and T-slots are included inthe delivery.Different lengths and resolutions can becombined for Master/Slave.* In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply)the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.Ordering detailsAccessories:Connector plug M 12 x 1for emitterKD M12-5-5 mKD M12-5-15 mfor emitter (pre-wiring possible,however without cable)R = angled connector KD M12-5-RS = straight connector KD M12-5-Sfor receiverKD M12-8-5 mKD M12-8-15 mfor Master/ SlaveconnectionFurther accessories can befound on pages 292-294.VL M/S-M12-5-0,3 mVL M/S-M12-5-3 mVL M/S-M12-5-5 mVL M/S-M12-5-10 m277

OSSD FAILCOSSD FAILCSafety light curtains and safety light gridsSLC 210...RFLC3545 ==2440• Safety light curtain• Control category Type 2to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2• Resolution 30 and 40 mm• Protection field heights from160 mm to 1210 mm• Range 0 ... 8 m• Self-test every 0.5 s• Semiconductor outputs• Optical synchronisation• Status display• Protection class IP 65Legend:A: Total length (B + 91 mm)B: Protection field heightC: 85 mm(SLC), 135 mm (SLG)BA10SLG 210...RFLC3545 ==2440• Safety light grid• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid• Protection field heights 510 mm,810 mm or 910 mmBA10Technical dataStandards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2Control category toIEC/EN 61496-1, -2 Type 2Enclosure:AluminiumEnclosure dimensions:45 x 35 mmConnection: (Emitter): connector plugM 12, 5-pole,(Receiver): connector plugM 12, 8-poleMax. cable length:100 mProtection class: IP 65 to EN 60529Response time:2 - 25 ms(depends onlength and resolution)Detection sensitivity (Resolution): 30 and40 mmProtection field height:(Resolution 30 and 40 mm): 160 ... 1210 mm(2-, 3-, 4-beam): 510, 810, 910 mmProtection field width, range: 0 ... 8 m(Standard)Start/restart interlock:integratedContactor control:integratedCascading (Master/Slave): –Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),codedUe: 24 VDC ± 20%Safety outputs:2 x PNP, 500 mALeakage current: **Safety outputs:< 0,3 mAPower consumption: Emitter 2 W,Receiver 3 WData interface: –Status and diagnostics: 7-segment andLED displayAmbient temperature: 0 °C … + 55 ºCStorage andtransport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºCApprovalsApprovals** In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply)the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.Ordering detailsSLC 210-E/R➀-➁-RFLCNo. Replace Description➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm)Available lengths:0160 mm* 0310 mm0460 mm 0610 mm0760 mm 0910 mm1060 mm 1210 mm➁ 30 Resolution 30 mm40 Resolution 40 mm278Ordering detailsSLG 210-E/R➀-RFLCNo. Replace Description➀Distance betweenoutermost beams:0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam0900-04 900 mm, 4-beamMounting brackets and T-slots are included inthe delivery.* only for resolution 30 mmOrdering detailsAccessories:Connector plug M 12 x 1for emitterKD M12-5-5 mKD M12-5-15 m(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)R = angled connectorKD M12-5-RS = straight connectorKD M12-5-Sfor receiverFurther accessories can be found onpages 292-294.KD M12-8-5 mKD M12-8-15 m

OSSD FAILCOSSD FAILCSafety light curtains and safety light gridsSLC 4103545 ==2440BA10• Safety light curtain• Control category Type 4to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2• Resolution 14, 20, 30, 40, 50 and 90mm• Protection field heights from 160 mmto 1810 mm• Range 0 ... 5 m or 0 ... 18 m• Semiconductor outputs• Optical synchronisation• Status display• Protection class IP 65Legend:A: Total length (B + 91 mm)B: Protection field heightC: 85 mm (SLC), 135 mm (SLG)ApprovalsOrdering detailsSLC 410-E/R➀-➁-12No. Replace Description➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm)Available lengths:0160 mm*** 0310 mm0460 mm 0610 mm0760 mm 0910 mm1060 mm 1210 mm1360 mm 1510 mm1660 mm 1810 mm➁ 14 Resolution 14 mm20 Resolution 20 mm30 Resolution 30 mm40 Resolution 40 mm50 Resolution 50 mm90 Resolution 90 mmSLG 4103545 ==2440• Safety light grid• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid• Protection field heights 510 mm,810 mm or 910 mm• Range 0 ... 18 mApprovalsOrdering detailsBA10SLG 410-E/R➀-12No. Replace Description➀Distance betweenoutermost beams:0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam0900-04 900 mm, 4-beamMounting brackets and T-slots are included inthe delivery.*** only for resolutions 14, 20, 30 mmTechnical dataStandards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2Control category toIEC/EN 61496-1, -2 Type 4Enclosure:AluminiumEnclosure dimensions:35 x 45 mmConnection:connector plugM 12, 5-poleMax. cable length:100 mProtection class: IP 65 to EN 60529Response time:6 - 27 ms(depends onlength and resolution)Detection sensitivity (Resolution): 14, 20, 30,40, 50 and 90 mmProtection field height:(Resolution 14, 20, 30 mm): 160 ... 1810 mm(Resolution 40, 50, 90 mm): 310 ... 910 mm(2-, 3-, 4-beam): 510, 810, 910 mmProtection field width, range:(Resolution 14mm): 0 ... 5 m(Resolution 20 to 90 mm): 0 ... 18 m(2-, 3-, 4-beam): 0 ... 18 mStart/restart interlock: *Contactor control: *Cascading (Master/Slave): –Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),codedUe: 24 VDC ± 20%Safety outputs:2 x PNP, 500 mALeakage current: **Safety outputs:< 0,3 mAPower consumption: Emitter 2 W,Receiver 3 WData interface: –Status and diagnostics: 7-segment andLED displayAmbient temperature: 0 °C … + 55 ºCStorage andtransport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºC* only in combination with safety monitoringmodule** In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply)the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.Ordering detailsAccessories:Connector plug M 12 x 1for emitter/ receiver KD M12-5-5 mKD M12-5-15 m(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)R = angled connector KD M12-5-RS = straight connector KD M12-5-SFurther accessories can be found onpages 292-294.279

Safety light curtains and safety light gridsSLC 410...RF• Safety light curtain• Control category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2• Resolution 14, 20, 30, 40, 50 and 90mm• Protection field height from 160 mmto 1810 mm• Integrated start/restart interlock• Integrated contactor control• Range 0 ... 5 m or 0 ... 18 m• Semiconductor outputs• Optical synchronisation• Status display• Protection class IP 65Legend:A: Total length (B + 91 mm)B: Protection field heightC: 85 mm (SLC) 135 mm (SLG)ApprovalsOrdering detailsSLC 410-E/R➀-➁-RFNo. Replace Description➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm)Available lengths:0160 mm 0310 mm0460 mm 0610 mm0760 mm 0910 mm1060 mm 1210 mm1360 mm 1510 mm1660 mm 1810 mm➁ 14 Resolution 14 mm20 Resolution 20 mm30 Resolution 30 mm40* Resolution 40 mm50* Resolution 50 mm28090* Resolution 90 mmSLG 410...RF• Safety light grid• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid• Protection field heights 510 mm,810 mm or 910 mm• Range 0 ... 18 mApprovalsOrdering detailsSLG 410-E/R➀-RFNo. Replace Description➀Distance betweenoutermost beams:0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam0900-04 900 mm, 4-beamMounting brackets and T-slots are included inthe delivery.* for resolution 40, 50 and 90 mm, minimumprotection field height 310 mmTechnical dataStandards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2Control category toIEC/EN 61496-1, -2 Type 4Enclosure:AluminiumEnclosure dimensions:50 x 60 mmConnection:(Emitter): connectorplug M 12, 5-pole,(Receiver): connectorplug M 12, 8-poleMax. cable length:100 mProtection class: IP 65 to EN 60529Response time:6 - 27 ms(depends onlength and resolution)Detection sensitivity (Resolution): 14, 20, 30,40, 50 and 90 mmProtection field height:(Resolution 14, 20, 30 mm): 160 ... 1810 mm(Resolution 40, 50, 90 mm): 310 ... 1810 mm(2-, 3-, 4-beam): 510, 810, 910 mmProtection field width, range:(Resolution 14mm): 0 ... 5 m(Resolution 20 bis 90 mm): 0 ... 18 m(2-, 3-, 4-beam): 0 ... 18 mStart/restart interlock:IntegratedContactor control:IntegratedCascading (Master/Slave): –Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),codedUe: 24 VDC ± 20%Safety outputs:2 x PNP, 500 mALeakage current: *Safety outputs:< 0,3 mAPower consumption: Emitter 2 W,Receiver 3 WData interface: –Status and diagnostics: 7-segment andLED displayAmbient temperature: 0 °C … + 55 ºCStorage andtransport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºC* In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply)the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.Ordering detailsAccessories:Connector plug M 12 x 1for emitterKD M12-5-5 mKD M12-5-15 m(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)R = angled connectorKD M12-5-RS = straight connectorKD M12-5-Sfor receiverFurther accessories can be found onpages 292-294.KD M12-8-5 mKD M12-8-15 m

OSSD FAILCOSSD FAILCSafety light curtains and safety light gridsSLC 410...RFM/S3545 ==2440B10 A10• Safety light curtain• Control category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2• Resolution 14, 20, 30 and 50 mm• Protection field height from 160 mmto 1510 mm• Integrated start/restart interlock• Integrated contactor control• Cascading of Master and Slave devices• Range 0 ... 5 m or 0 ... 18 m• Semiconductor outputs• Optical synchronisation• Status display• Protection class IP 65Legend:A: Total length Slave / Master (B + 91 mm)B: Protection field heightC: 85 mm (SLC), 135 mm (SLG)ApprovalsOrdering detailsSLC 410-E/R➀-➁-RF➂No. Replace Description➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm)Available lengths:0160 mm 0310 mm0460 mm 0610 mm0760 mm 0910 mm1060 mm 1210 mm1360 mm 1510 mm➁ 14 Resolution 14 mm20 Resolution 20 mm30 Resolution 30 mm50** Resolution 50 mm➂ M** MasterfunktionS*** SlavefunktionSLG 410...RFM/S3545 ==2440• Safety light grid• 2- or 3-beam light grid• Protection field heights 510 mmor 810 mm• Range 0 ... 18 mApprovalsOrdering detailsB10 A10SLG 410-E/R➀-RF➁No. Replace Description➀Distance betweenoutermost beams:0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam➁ M MasterfunktionSSlavefunktionMounting brackets and T-slots are included inthe delivery.** minimum protection field height 310 mm*** for resolution 50 mm, minimum protectionfield height 310 mmTechnical dataStandards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2Control category toIEC/EN 61496-1, -2 Type 4Enclosure:AluminiumEnclosure dimensions:35 x 45 mmConnection:(Emitter): connectorplug M 12, 5-pole,(Receiver): connectorplug M 12, 8-poleMax. cable length:100 mMax. cable length: Master/Slave 50 mProtection class: IP 65 to EN 60529Response time:3 - 27 ms(depends onlength and resolution)Detection sensitivity (Resolution): 14, 20,30 and 50 mmProtection field height:(Resolution 14, 20, 30 mm): 160 ... 1510 mm(Resolution 50 mm): 310 ... 1510 mm(2-, 3-beam): 510, 810mmProtection field width, range:(Resolution 14 mm): 0 ... 5 m(Resolution 20, 30, 50 mm): 0 ... 18 m(2-, 3-beam): 0 ... 18 mStart/restart interlock:integratedContactor control:integratedCascading (Master/Slave):possibleLight emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),codedUe: 24 VDC ± 20%Safety outputs:2 x PNP, 500 mALeakage current: *Safety outputs:< 0,3 mAPower consumption: Emitter 2 W,Receiver 3 WData interface: –Status and diagnostics: 7-segment andLED displayAmbient temperature: 0 °C … + 55 ºCStorage andtransport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºC* In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply)the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.Ordering detailsAccessories:Connector plug M 12 x 1for emitterKD M12-5-5 mKD M12-5-15 m(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)R = angled connector KD M12-5-RS = straight connector KD M12-5-Sfor receiverKD M12-8-5 mKD M12-8-15 mFor Master/Slave connectionVL M/S-M12-5-0,3 mVL M/S-M12-5-3 mVL M/S-M12-5-5 mVL M/S-M12-5-10 mFurther accessories can be foundon pages 292-294.281

OSSD FAILCOSSD FAILCSafety light curtainsSLC 410...B2823545 ==2440BA10• Safety light curtain• Control category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2• Resolution 14, 20, 40 and 90 mm• Protection field height from 160 mmto 1810 mm• Integrated blanking function• Cascading of Master and slave devices• Range 0 ... 5 m or 0 ... 18 m• Semiconductor outputs• Optical synchronisation• Status display• Protection class IP 65Legend:A: Total lengthB: Protection field heightC: 85 mm (SLC), 135 mm (SLG)ApprovalsOrdering detailsSLC 410-E/R➀-➁-B➂No. Replace Description➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm)Available lengths:0160 mm 0310 mm0460 mm 0610 mm0760 mm 0910 mm1060 mm 1210 mm➁ 14 Resolution 14 mm20 Resolution 20 mm40 Resolution 40 mm90*** Resolution 90 mm➂ M Master function (forresolution 14 and 20 mm)SLC 410...BM• Safety light curtain• Master functionApprovalsNote3545 = =2440B10 A10The SLC 410 BM Master can be combinedwith all slaves of the SLC 410...RFS series.Mounting brackets and T-slots are included inthe delivery.*** minimum protection field height 610 mmTechnical dataStandards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2Control category toIEC/EN 61496-1, -2 Type 4Enclosure:AluminiumEnclosure dimensions:35 x 45 mmConnection:(Emitter): connectorplug M 12, 5-pole,(Receiver): connectorplug M 12, 8-poleMax. cable length:100 mMax. cable length: Master/Slave 50mProtection class: IP 65 gem. EN 60529Response time:6 - 27 ms(depends onlength and resolution)Detection sensitivity (Resolution): 14, 20, 40and 90 mmProtection field height:(Resolution 14, 20, 40 mm): 160 ... 1810 mm(Resolution 90 mm): 610 ... 1810 mmProtection field width, range:(Resolution 14 mm): 0 ... 5 m(Resolution 20, 40, 90 mm): 0 ... 18 mStart/restart interlock: *Contactor control: *Cascading (Master/Slave):only forSLC 410...BMBlanking function:5 modesLight emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),codedUe: 24 VDC ± 20%Safety outputs:2 x PNP, 500 mALeakage current: **Safety outputs:< 0,3 mAPower consumption: Emitter 2 W,Receiver 3 WData interface: –Status and diagnostics: 7-segment andLED displayAmbient temperature: 0 °C … + 55 ºCStorage andtransport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºC* only in combination with safety monitoringmodule** In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply)the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.Ordering detailsAccessories:Connector plug M 12 x 1for emitterKD M12-5-5 mKD M12-5-15 m(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)R = angled connectorKD M12-5-RS = straight connectorKD M12-5-Sfor receiverKD M12-8-5 mKD M12-8-15 mFor Master/Slave connectionVL M/S-M12-5-0,3 mVL M/S-M12-5-3 mVL M/S-M12-5-5 mVL M/S-M12-5-10 mFurther accessories can be found onpages 292-294.

Safety light curtains and safety light grids for high operating rangeSLC 412• Safety light curtain• High operating range 0 ... 60 m• Control category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2• Resolution 40 mm• Protection field heightn from 510 mmto 1210 mm• Integrated start/restart interlock• Integrated contactor control• Semiconductor outputs• Optical synchronisation• Status display• Protection class IP 65Legend:A: Total length (B + 91 mm)B: distance of the outermost beamsC: 85 mm (SLC), 135 mm (SLG)SLG 412• Safety light grid• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid• Protection field heights 510 mm,810 mm or 910 mmTechnical dataStandards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2Control category toIEC/EN 61496-1, -2 Type 4Enclosure:AluminiumEnclosure dimensions:50 x 60 mmConnection:(Emitter): connectorplug M 12, 5-pole,(Receiver): connectorplug M 23,19-poleMax. cable length:100 mProtection class: IP 65 gem. EN 60529Response time:7 – 28,5 ms(depends onlength and resolution)Detection sensitivity (Resolution): 40 mmProtection field height:(Resolution 40 mm): 610, 910, 1210 mm(2-, 3-. 4-beam): 510, 810, 910 mmProtection field width, range:(Resolution 40 mm): 0 … 60 m (High Range)(2-, 3-. 4-beam): 0 ... 16 m (Standard),0 … 60 m (High Range)Start/restart interlock:integratedContactor control:integratedLight emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),codedUe: 24 VDC ± 20%Safety outputs:2 x PNP, 500 mALeakage current: **Safety outputs:< 0,3 mAPower consumption: Emitter 2 W,Receiver 3 WData interface: –Status and diagnostics: 7-segment andLED displayAmbient temperature: 0 °C … + 55 ºCStorage andtransport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºCApprovalsApprovals** In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply)the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.Ordering detailsSLC 412-E/R➀-40-12-HNo. Replace Description➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm)Available lengths:0610 mm0910 mm1210 mm40 Resolution 40 mmOrdering detailsSLG 412-E/R➀-12-➁No. Replace Description➀Distance betweenoutermost beams:0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam0900-04 900 mm, 4-beam➁Range 0 ...16 mHRange 0 ...60 m(High Range)Mounting brackets and T-slots are included inthe delivery.Ordering detailsAccessories:Connector plug M 12 x 1for emitterKD M12-5-5 mKD M12-5-15 m(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)R = angled connector KD M12-5-RS = straight connector KD M12-5-Sfor receiverKD M23-19-3 mKD M23-19-5 mKD M23-19-10 mKD M23-19-15 mKD M23-19-20 mFurther accessories can be foundon pages 292-294.283

Safety light grid (retro-reflector)SLG 412-PA38 CS1S36050 60BMUTS2S 42550• Safety light grid• Emitter and receiver in one enclosure(retro reflector)• Control category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2• Protection field heightn 510 mm• 2-beam light grid• Integrated start/restart interlock• Integrated contactor control• Range 0 ... 6 m• Semiconductor outputs• Optical synchronisation• Status display• Protection class IP 65Technical dataStandards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2Control category toIEC/EN 61496-1, -2 Type 4Enclosure:AluminiumEnclosure dimensions:50 x 60 mmConnection: (Emitter/Receiver): connectorplug M 12, 8-poleMax. cable length:100 mProtection class: IP 65 to EN 60529Response time:7 msDetection sensitivity (Resolution): –Protection field height:510 mmProtection field width, range: 0 ... 6mStart/restart interlock:integratedContactor control:integratedLight emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),codedUe: 24 VDC ± 20%Safety outputs:2 x PNP, 500 mALeakage current: **Safety outputs:< 0,3 mAPower consumption: Emitter 2 W,Receiver 3 WData interface: –Status and diagnostics: 7-segment andLED displayAmbient temperature: 0 °C … + 55 ºCStorage andtransport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºCLegend:A: Total lengthB: Distance of the outermost beamsC: 120 mm** In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply)the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.ApprovalsOrdering detailsSLG 412-P-E/R0500-02-12Ordering detailsAccessories:Connector plug M 12 x 1for emitter/receiverKD M12-8-5 mKD M12-8-15 mFurther accessories can be found onpages 292-294.284

Safety light curtains and safety light grids with integrated muting functionSystem features:• Control Category 4 acc. to EN 954-1or acc. to IEC 61496, Type 4• Integrated muting sensors (“T” & “L” models)• External and internal muting sensors• Integrated override function• Diagnostics display• Optical synchronisation• Compact design• Simple, flexible mounting and adjustment8

Safety light curtains and safety light grids with integrated muting functionSLC/SLG 415IThe SLC/SLG 415I is a systemfor universal use withintegrated muting function.The M12 connectors allow adirect connection and flexiblepositioning of the differentmuting sensors (e.g. inductive,capacitive or optical sensors).In this way, a safe triggering ofthe muting function can beobtained for objects ofdifferent sizes. The additionalintegrated override functionallows for a controlled restartof the machine to transportthe accumulated material outof the protection field after afailure.The safety light curtains/gridswith muting function enable asmooth and trouble-freematerial feeding (input andoutput), whilst offering apermanent protection ofhuman life.• Integrated muting functionfor material transport in 1 or2 directions• Connection of 2 or 4external muting sensors• Connection of differentmuting sensors• Direct connection (M12) ofthe muting sensors to theSLC/SLG• Muting controller forcrosswise or parallelarrangement of the externalsensors• Adjustable muting time of30s, 90 min or unlimited• Integrated override function• Range up to 16m or 60m• Optional muting box withintegrated muting lamp,restart and override functionSLG 415LThe SLG 415L is a safety lightgrid with integrated mutingfunction. The muting sensorsare integrated in the horizontalarms and mechanically andelectrically connected to thelight grid. This simplifiesfitting and positioning of theprepared muting sensors andprovides a fault freeinstallation.The additional integratedoverride function allows for acontrolled restart of themachine to transportaccumulated material out ofthe protection field after afailure. The SLG 415L allowsfor a smooth and trouble-freematerial output (e.g. on palletloaders) whilst offering apermanent protection ofhuman life.• Integrated muting functionfor transporting material outof the hazardous area• 2 integrated optical mutingsensor blocks• Muting controller forcrosswise and parallelarrangement of theintegrated sensors• Adjustable muting time of30s or 90min• Integrated override function• Range: with crosswisearranged sensors: between1 – 2.5 m; with parallelarranged sensors: between0 – 2 m• Integrated sensors withadjustable height and angleposition• Optional muting box withintegrated muting lamp,restart and override function• Parallel muting sensors withgreen light for the detectionof transparent objects(glass, bottles, film, etc.)286

Safety light curtains and safety light grids with integrated muting functionSLG 415TThe SLG 415T is a safety lightgrid with integrated mutingfunction. The mutingfunctions are integrated in twohorizontal arms andmechanically and electricallyconnected to the light grid(right and left).This simplifies fitting andpositioning of the mutingsensor block and provides fora fault free installation.The additional integratedoverride function allows for acontrolled restart of themachine to transportaccumulated material out ofthe protection field after afailure. The SLG 415T safetylight grid enables a smoothand trouble-free materialfeeding (input and output),whilst offering a permanentprotection of human life.• Integrated muting functionfor material transport in 2directions• Integrated optical mutingsensor blocks• Muting controller forcrosswise and parallelarrangement• Adjustable muting time of30s, 90min or unlimited• Integrated override function• Range: crosswise arrangedsensors: between 1 – 2.5 m;parallel arranged sensors:between 0 – 2 m• Integrated sensors withadjustable height and angleposition• Optional muting box withintegrated muting lamp,restart and override function• Parallel muting sensors withgreen light for the detectionof transparent objects(glass, bottles, film etc.)8287

CCSafety light curtains and safety light grids with integrated muting functionSLC 415I288A1878S1S36050 60BMUTS2S4101253850• Safety light curtain• Control category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2• Resolution 30, 40 and 90 mm• Protection field heights from 310 mmto 1810 mm• Integrated start/restart interlock• Integrated contactor control• Integrated muting and override function• Range 0 ... 16 m or 0 ... 60 m• Semiconductor outputs• Optical synchronisation• Status display• Protection class IP 65Ordering detailsSLC 415I-E/R➀-➁-12-➂No. Replace Description➀ xxxx Protected heights (mm)Available lengths:0310 mm 0460 mm0610 mm 0760 mm0910 mm 1060 mm1210 mm 1360 mm1510 mm 1660 mm1810 mm➁ 30*** Resolution 30 mm40 Resolution 40 mm90 Resolution 90 mm➂Range 0 ...16 mH** Range 0 ...60 mHigh RangeSLG 415IA1878S1S36050 60BMUTS2S41012538• Safety light grid• 2-, 3-, 4-beames light grid• Protection field heights 510 mm,810 mm or 910 mmLegend: A: Height of the receiver B: Protection field height C: 72 mm (SLC), 120 mm (SLG)ApprovalsApprovalsOrdering details50SLG 415I-E/R➀-12-➁No. Replace Description➀Distance betweenoutermost beams:0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam0900-04 900 mm, 4-beam➁Range 0 ... 16 mHRange 0 ...60 mHigh Range** only for resolution 40 mm*** Protection field height ≤ 1210 mmMounting brackets and T-slots are included inthe delivery.Technical dataStandards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2Control category toIEC/EN 61496-1, -2 Type 4Enclosure:AluminiumEnclosure dimensions:50 x 60 mmConnection: (Emitter): connector plugM 12, 5-pole,(Receiver): connectorplug M 23, 19-pole,(Muting sensors): 2 x connectorplug M 12, 5-poleMax. cable length:100 mProtection class: IP 65 to EN 60529Response time: 7 – 28,5 ms (depends onlength and resolution)Detection sensitivity (Resolution): 30, 40and 90 mmProtection field height:(Resolution 30 mm): 310 ... 1210 mm(Resolution 40, 90 mm): 310 ... 1810 mm(Resolution 40 (H)): 610, 910, 1210 mm(2-, 3-, 4-beam): 510, 810, 910 mmProtection field width, range:(Resolution 30, 40 mm): 0 ... 16 m (Srandard)(Resolution 40 (H)): 0 … 60 m (High Range)(2-, 3-. 4-beam): 0 ... 16 m (Standard)0 … 60 m (High Range)Start/restart interlock:integratedContactor control:integratedMuting and override function: integratedMuting sensors:2 or 4 externalsensorsLight emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),codedUe: 24 VDC ± 20%Safety outputs:2 x PNP, 500 mALeakage current: *Safety outputs:< 0,3 mAPower consumption: Emitter 2 W,Receiver 3 WData interface: –Status and diagnostics: 7-segment andLED displayAmbient temperature: 0 °C … + 55 ºCStorage andtransport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºC* In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply)the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.Ordering detailsAccessories:Connector plug M 12 x 1for emitterKD M12-5-5 mKD M12-5-15 mfor muting sensors KSW M12-5-5 m(without cable, angled) KWS M12-5(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)R = angled connectorKD M12-5-RS = straight connectorKD M12-5-SConnector plug M 23 x 1for receiverFurther accessoriescan be found onpages 292-294.KD M23-19-3 mKD M23-19-5 mKD M23-19-10 mKD M23-19-15 mKD M23-19-20 m

CCSafety light curtains and safety light grids with integrated muting functionSLG 415LA4578S 1S 3MUTS2S 42510133035• Safety light grid• Control category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2• 2-, 3-beam light grid• Integrated start/restart interlock• Integrated contactor control• Integrated muting and override function• Integrated muting sensors• Semiconductor outputs• Optical synchronisation• Status display• Protection class IP 65Legend:A: Height of the receiverC: 72 mmSLG 415L...PBA4578S1S 3MUTS2S 425101• Safety light grid• Muting-Sensors parallel crosswise33035Technical dataStandards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2Control category toIEC/EN 61496-1, -2 Type 4Enclosure:AluminiumEnclosure dimensions:50 x 60 mmConnection:(Emitter): connectorplug M 12, 5-pole,(Receiver): connectorplug M 23, 19-pole,(Muting sensors, integrated):2 x connector plug M 12, 5-poleMax. cable length:100 mProtection class: IP 65 to EN 60529Response time:7 – 28,5 ms(depends onlength and resolution)Detection sensitivity (Resolution): –Protection field height:510, 810 mmMuting-Sensoren, range:(2 parallel): 0 ... 2,0 m(PB = parallele beams)(2 crosswise): 1 ... 2,5 mStart/restart interlock:integratedContactor control:integratedMuting and override function: integratedLight emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),codedUe: 24 VDC ± 20%Safety outputs:2 x PNP, 500 mALeakage current: **Safety outputs:< 0,3 mAPower consumption: Emitter 2 W,Receiver 3 WData interface: –Status and diagnostics: 7-segment andLED displayAmbient temperature: 0 °C … + 55 ºCStorage andtransport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºCApprovalsApprovals** In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply)the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.Ordering detailsSLG 415L-E/R➀-12-➁No. Replace Description➀Distance betweenoutermost beams:0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam➁ PB Muting-Sensorsparallel crosswiseNoteMounting brackets and T-slots are included inthe delivery.Ordering detailsAccessories:Connector plug M 12 x 1for emitterKD M12-5-5 mKD M12-5-15 m(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)R = angled connector KD M12-5-RS = straight connector KD M12-5-SConnector plug M 23 x 1for receiverFurther accessories can befound on pages 292-294.KD M23-19-3 mKD M23-19-5 mKD M23-19-10 mKD M23-19-15 mKD M23-19-20 m289

Safety light grids with integrated muting functionSLG 415TSLG 415T...PBTechnical dataA4523078 CS1S 325MUTS 2S 410133035• Safety light grid• Control category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2• 2-, 3-beam light grid• Integrated start/restart interlock• Integrated contactor control• Integrated muting and override function• Integrated muting sensors• Semiconductor outputs• Optical synchronisation• Status display• Protection class IP 65Legend:A: Height of the receiverC: 72 mmA4523078 CS1S 3MUTS2S 425101• Safety light grid• Muting-Sensors parallel crosswise33035Standards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2Control category toIEC/EN 61496-1, -2 Type 4Enclosure:AluminiumEnclosure dimensions:50 x 60 mmConnection:(Emitter): connectorplug M 12, 5-pole;(Receiver): connectorplug M 23, 19-pole;(Muting sensors, integrated):2 x connector plug M 12, 5-poleMax. cable length:100 mProtection class: IP 65 to EN 60529Response time:7 – 28,5 ms(depends onlength and resolution)Detection sensitivity (Resolution): –Protection field height:510, 810 mmMuting-Sensoren, range:(4 parallel): 0 ... 2,0 m(PB = parallele beams)(2 crosswise): 1 ... 2,5 mStart/restart interlock:integratedContactor control:integratedMuting and override function: integratedLight emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),codedUe: 24 VDC ± 20%Safety outputs:2 x PNP, 500 mALeakage current: **Safety outputs:< 0,3 mAPower consumption: Emitter 2 W,Receiver 3 WData interface:Status and diagnostics:7-segment andLED displayAmbient temperature: 0 °C … + 55 ºCStorage andtransport temperature: – 20 °C … + 70 ºCApprovalsApprovals** In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply)the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.Ordering detailsSLG 415T-E/R➀-12-➁No. Replace Description➀Distance betweenoutermost beams:0500-02 500 mm, 2-beam0800-03 800 mm, 3-beam➁ PB Muting-sensorsparallel crosswise290NoteMounting brackets and T-slots are included inthe delivery.Ordering detailsAccessories:Connector plug M 12 x 1for emitterKD M12-5-5 mKD M12-5-15 m(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)R = angled connectorKD M12-5-RS = straight connectorKD M12-5-SConnector plug M 23 x 1for receiverFurther accessoriescan be found onpages 292-294.KD M23-19-3 mKD M23-19-5 mKD M23-19-10 mKD M23-19-15 mKD M23-19-20 m

Accessories for safety light curtains / grids with integrated muting functionControl unit SLG-MCB• Control unit for the SLC/SLG 415/412 series• Integrated restart pushbutton• Integrated muting lamp• Integrated override key selector switch• Two safety relay outputs andone signalling contact• DIP switch to configure thelight grid/light curtain• Plug-in terminal blocks forcable connection• Possibility to connect an externalmuting lamp• Possibility to connect an internal orexternal feedback loop• Cable entry for machine connectionTechnical dataEnclosure:glass-fibre reinforcedthermoplasticFixation:4 mounting holesConnection:M23 or M12 connector,metric thread couplingProtection class: Gehäuse IP 66 gem. EN60529Ue:19 – 30 VDCIe:depending onthe connectedSLC/SLG typeInput signal "1":> 12 VDCInput signal "0":> 5 VDCMax. cable length:100 mOutputs:2 enabling pathsUtilisation category:AC-15, DC-13Switching voltage:max. 250 VACLoad current: max. 2 A (cos ϕ = 1)Switching capacity:max. 500 VAShort-circuit protection: 6 A (slow blow)Signalling output:1 relay output(NO contact) forSLG- MCB3/4EMC rating:EMC Directive toEN 61496-1Overvoltage category: II to DIN VDE 0110Ambient temperature: - 10 °C … + 55 ºCStorage andtransport temperature: – 10 °C … + 55 ºCDimensions:110 x 180 x 110 mmNoteInductive loads (contactors, relays, etc.) are tobe suppressed by means of a suitable circuit.Approvals Ordering detailsSLG-MCB➀No. Replace Description➀ 1 Restart pushbutton,key selector switch foroverride function, mutinglamp, 2 safety relays perenabling contact2 Restart pushbutton,2 safety relays perenabling contactOrdering detailsNo. Replace Description3 Restart pushbutton,key selector switch foroverride function, mutinglamp, 2 safety relays perenabling contact,1 signalling contact4 Restart pushbutton,2 safety relays perenabling contact,1 signalling contactOrdering detailsAccessoriesfor emitter mutingboxfor receiver mutingboxmVL MB-M12-5-3 mVL MB-M12-5-5 mVL MB-M12-5-10 mVL MB-M23-19-3VL MB-M23-19-5 mVL MB-M23-19-10 m291

==Accessories for safety light curtains / grids with integrated muting functionSystem componentsSystem componentsSystem components3330 H 30110334012M8A711002015 60910°40°90°11510°3430°3Deflecting mirror SMBDeflecting mirror ST LGMMounting angle BF SMBSelection table: Deflecting mirror SMB:Protected Number Deflectingheight of beams mirrorSelection table: Floor-stand withintegrated deflecting mirror ST LGM65SLC SLG SMB0160 - 2500310 - 3700460 - 5400610 2 7150760 - 8850910 3 10601060 4 12301210 - 14001360 - 14501510 - 15751660 - 17501810 - 1900A = 1000 mmA = 1200 mmA = 1330 mmA = 1970 mmST LGM-02ST LGM-03ST LGM-04ST LGM-2000202Floor-stand STB LG230Mounting angle BF LC 11Ordering detailsDeflecting mirror:Mirror height 250 mm SMB 250Up to1900 mm SMB 1900Other heights available onrequestOrdering detailsFloor-stand with integrateddeflecting mirrorFloor-stand (empty enclosure)ST LGM-02ST LGM-03ST LGM-04ST LGM-2000ST LGOrdering detailsMounting angle fordeflecting mirrorBF SMBFloor-stand basefor ST LG/LGMSTB LGMounting angle (rotating) BF LC 11292

Accessories for safety light curtains / grids with integrated muting functionSystem components33156M6M6=¤25 =Vibration absorber VA 15-6System components11748 5059,3Alignment kit LAT SLC-270System componentsTest rodsM6787024 203¤17270M6¤122425,56Vibration absorber VA 210/410-2/-3Alignment kit LAT SLC-449Ordering detailsVibration absorber VA 15-6Vibration absorber VA 210/410-2VA 210/410-3Ordering detailsAlignment kitLAT SLC-2LAT SLC-4Ordering detailsTest rodswith resolution 14 mmwith resolution 20 mmwith resolution 30 mmwith resolution 40 mmwith resolution 50 mmSLC TR-14SLC TR-20SLC TR-30SLC TR-40SLC TR-50293

294SaferbyDesign

Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety componentsBesides the traditional safety relay controls, Schmersaloffers CE-type tested safety controls or other safetyorientedbus systems (e.g. AS-i Safety at Work) fordifferent levels of complexity and combination depths,which provide the user with many visualization anddiagnostic possibilities.8

Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety systemsSRB 301 LCB• Suitable for signal processing of outputsconnected to potentials (AOPDs),e.g. safety light grids/curtains• 1 or 2 channel control• 3 enabling paths, Stop 0• 1 indication contact (NC)• Reset with edge detection or automatic start• 4 LEDs to show operating conditions• Control Category 4 to EN 954-1Technical dataStandards:IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 954-1, BG-GS-ET-20Stop category 3x Stop 0Control category: 4Start conditions:Reset button with edge detection, auto startEnclosure:glass-fibre reinforced thermoplastic, ventilatedConnection:screw terminalsCable section:max. 2.5 mm 2 solid or multi-strand lead(incl. conductor ferrules)Ue: 24 VDC –15%/+20%, residual ripple max. 10%24 VAC –15%/+10%Frequency range:50/60 Hz (on AC operational voltage)Ie:max. 0.08 AProtection class: terminals IP 20enclosure IP 40 to EN 60529Power consumption:max. 3.8 VA, 2.4 WMax. fuse rating: Internal glass fuse F1, tripping current > 0.25 A,Monitored inputs1 or 2 channelsFeedback circuit:yesDrive circuits:S11/S12, S21/S22: max. 28 VDCEnabling contacts:3 enabling pathsUtilisation category:AC-15, DC-13Switching capacity:enabling paths: 6 A/230 VAC, 6 A/24 VDCMax. switching frequency:5 HzFuse rating:enabling paths: 6 A gG D-fuseSignalling contacts:1 NC contactSwitching capacity:Indicating contact: 2 A/24 VDCContact material:AgNi, AgSnO, self-cleaning, positive actionContact resistance:max. 100 mΩ in new conditionPull-in delay:≤ 30 msDrop-out delay:≤ 50 msAir clearances and creepage distances:DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2Overvoltage category: III to DIN VDE 0110Degree of pollution: 2 to DIN VDE 0110Ambient temperature: – 25 °C … + 45 °C(Derating curve on request)Mechanical life:10 million operationsFunction display:4 LEDsWeight:230 gDimensions:22.5 x 100 x 121 mmApprovals Ordering detailsSRB 301 LCB – 24 VAC/DC296

Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety systemsNoteWiring diagram• Input level: dual-channel control (ExampleAOPD, with two OSSDs with externalstart/restart button J.• The control recognises cable break and earthleakages in the monitoring circuit.• F1 = Glass fuse• S = Feedback circuit• Relay outputs: Suitable for 2 channel control,for increase in capacity or number of contactsby means of contactors or relays withpositive-guided contacts.• For 1-channel control, connect NC contactto S11/S12 and bridge S12/S22• Connect potential p-type outputs of safetylight grids/curtains to S12/S22. The devicesmust have the same reference potential.• Automatic start:The automatic start is programmed byconnecting the feedback circuit to terminalsS12/X3. If no feedback circuit is required,establish a bridge.SLC/SLGESLC/SLGRA1AC/DCA2F1S12 S11 S21 S22Control logicX3 X2 13UB Ui K2K1 K2SRB 301 LCBJK1KB142324L1KA33 4134 42N3 MSLEDFunction display:The integrated LEDs indicatethe following operational states.• Position relay K1• Position relay K2• Supply voltage UB• Internal operating voltage UiNoteThe wiring diagram is shown with guard doors closed and in de-energised condition.8297

Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety systemsSRCORAST LC ST-ASTechnical dataNoteM30x1,5¤2816,5 70ca. 200066ca. 500252• Input module for 2 monitored PNPsemiconductor outputs for safetylight curtains and light grids• AS-Interface LED status display• AS-Interface M12 connector• Thermoplastic enclosure• Long life• Protection class IP 67ApprovalsCST2ST1Standards: EN 50295, EN 60947-5-1,EN 954-1, EN 61496-1Enclosure:glass-fibre reinforcedthermoplastic,self-extinguishingAS-Interfaceconnection type:connector M12Protection class: IP 67 to EN 60529AS-Interfaceoperating voltage:26.5 ... 31.6 VDC,via AS-Interface,reverse-polarity proofAS-Interface operating current: ≤ 50 mAAS-Interface specification:(V 2.1) Profile: S-0.BIO-Code:0x0ID-Code:0xBID-Code1: 0xFID-Code2: 0xEInputs:Contact Status Data bits1 on D0/D1 = dynamic codetransmission1 off D0/D1 = static code “00”2 on D2/D3 = dynamic codetransmission2 off D2/D3 = static code “00”Outputs:A0 ... A3 not usedParameter bits:P0 .. P3 not usedInput module address: default on address 0,programmable via theAS-Interface Master orHand-held programming deviceIndications: AS-Interface: voltage LED green,communication LED red,OSSD1/2;Enabling status: LED yellowPower supplyfor AOPD:PELV power supplyto IEC 364-4-41Reaction time:≤ 20 msEMC rating:conforming toEMC DirectiveAmbient temperature: – 25 °C … + 60 ºCStorage and transporttemperature: – 25 °C … + 85 ºCConnector ST1 42 3Connector ST11 4253Connector ST22 31541: AS-i +2: spare3: AS-i –4: spare1: + 24 VDC2: spare3: GND4: spare5: FE (functional earth)1: + 24 VDC2: OSSD 13: GND4: OSSD 25: FE (functional earth)Ordering detailsAST LC ST-ASNoteA separate address jack is not available as anoption. The addressing must take place via thecable end or the M12 connector.298

Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety systemsSRCORNoteWiring diagrame• The wiring diagram shows an activeoptoelectronic device (AOPD) (typeSLC/SLG) with a safety input module ASTLC ST-AS (Opto-Tube) connected to the AS-iSafety at Work system.Emitter• The Opto-Tube is directly connected to thereceiver module (ST2). The AOPD receivesits 24 VDC power supply via the secondM12-cable connection (ST1).Receiver• The Opto-Tube itself is connected via theM12 connector (ST) to the AS-i network.Before hand the module has to beprogrammed with an individual address(1 - 31).See noteST2• The emitter module has be wired upseparately as described in its mountingand wiring instruction.24 VDC (ST1)AS-i (ST)8299

300SaferbyDesign

Safety light barriersSystem features:• Control Category 2 and 4 acc. to EN 954-1or acc. to EN 61496, Type 2 and Type 4• Up to 4 pairs of one-way light barrierscan be connected• Different functionsStart/Restart interlockContactor monitoringCyclic testing• Integrated soiling check• Status and error indication• Signalling outputs for external indications• Free of maintenance• Extremely compact design• Simple and flexible mounting and adjustment8

Safety light barriersSLB 2002030,8¤9,62443,450,339,45,516,110¤8,5¤1018,8¤4,4• Control Category 2 to EN 954-1only in combination with safetymonitoring module SLB 200-C04-1R• Extremely compact design• Range to 4 m• Protection class IP 67• Maintenance free• Integral soiling check• LEDs visible from both sides• Simple flexible mountingand adjustmentTechnical dataComprising: emitter SLB 200-E31-21receiver SLB 200-R31-21Standards: IEC/EN 61496Control Category: 2 (only in combinationwith SLB 200-C)Enclosure:ABS10 % GFEnclosure dimensions: 31 x 50.5 x 19 mmConnection: emitter: 10 cm conductor,M 8 x 1, 3-pole coupler socketreceiver: 10 cm conductor,M 8 x 1, 4-pole coupler socketMax. cable length:50 mProtection class: IP 67 to EN 60529Response time:30 ms(only in combinationwith SLB 200-C)Range:4 mStart/Restart interlock: only in combination withsafety monitoring moduleContactor control: only in combination withsafety monitoring moduleLight emissionwavelength:880 nmUe: 24 VDC ± 20%Safety outputs: only in combination withsafety monitoring moduleAngle of radiation: ± 4°Min. size of object:9 mm ØLED status indication: soiling, switchingcondition andpower onAmbient temperature: – 10 °C ... + 55 °CStorage andtransport temperature: – 20 °C … + 80 ºCSystem componentsSLB 200-C04-1RConnector plug M 8 x 1 (with cable)Mounting angle BF 31ApprovalsMounting angle BF UNI 1Ordering detailsSLB 200-➀31-21No. Replace Description➀ E/R Emitter / receiver302NoteThe system components (safety monitoringmodule, connector plug, cable, etc.) arenot included in delivery.Ordering detailsMonitoring of safety light barriersSLB 200-C04-1R refer to page 304Connector plug M 8 x 1emitter:KDE M8-3 (without cable)KDE M8-3-2mKDE M8-3-5mreceiver: KDR M8-4 (without cable)KDR M8-4-2mKDR M8-4-5mMounting angles BF 31Mounting angles universal BF UNI 1

Safety light barriersSLB 40063,513,51746441644,350M12x14044• Control Category 4 to EN 954-1only in combination with safetymonitoring module SLB 400-C10-1R• Very compact design• Range to 15 m• Protection class IP 67• Connecting plug can be rotated• Maintenance free• Integral soiling check• LED switching conditions display• Simple flexible mountingand adjustment4,34Technical dataComprising: emitter SLB 400-E 50-21Preceiver SLB 400-R 50-21PStandards: IEC/EN 61496Control Category: 4 (only in combinationwith SLB 400-C)Enclosure:ABSEnclosure dimensions: 50 x 50 x 17 mmConnection: M 12 x 1, 4-pole couplersocket, can be rotatedMax. cable length:100 mProtection class: IP 67 to EN 60529Response time:25 ms(only in combinationwith SLB 400-C)Range:15 mStart/Restart interlock: only in combination withsafety monitoring moduleContactor control: only in combination withsafety monitoring moduleLight emissionwavelength:880 nmUe: 24 VDC ± 20%Safety outputs: only in combination withsafety monitoring moduleAngle of radiation: ± 2°Min. size of object:13 mm ØLED status indication: soiling, switchingcondition andpower onAmbient temperature: 0 °C ... + 60 °CStorage andtransport temperature: – 20 °C … + 80 ºCSystem componentsSLB 400-C10-1RConnector plug M 12 x 1 (with cable)Mounting angle BF 50ApprovalsHOrdering detailsSLB 400-➀50-21PNo. Replace Description➀ E/R Emitter / receiverNoteThe system components (safety monitoringmodule, connector plug, cable, etc.) arenot included in delivery.Mounting angle BF UNI 1Ordering detailsMonitoring of safety light barriersSLB 400-C10-1R refer to page 306Connector plug M 12 x 1emitter/receiver: KD M12-4 (without cable)KD M12-4-2mKD M12-4-5mMounting angles BF 50Mounting angles universal BF UNI 1303

Safety light barriersSLB 200-C• To IEC 61496• Control Category 2 to EN 954-1, BWS-T• Up to two pairs of light barrier devicescan be connected• 1 enabling path• 1 signalling output• Operating voltage 24 VDC• Test input• LED display of switching conditions• Response time ≤ 30 ms• Start/Restart interlock can beswitched active or inactive• Contactor monitoring can beswitched active or inactive• Additional cyclic testing• Co-ordinated for use withSLB 200 R/E safety light barriersTechnical dataStandards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2, EN 954-1Control category: 2Start-up test:yesStart conditions:Test button, start-reset button, on/off codingFeedback circuit:yesEnclosure:polycarbonateMounting: snaps onto standard DIN rail to EN 50022Connection:screw terminalsCable section:max. 4 mm 2 (incl. conductor ferrules)Protection class: IP 20 to EN 60529Ue: 24 VDC ± 20%Ie:180 mAPower consumption: –Inputs:test input: command device: NC contactrelease start/restart interlock (start/reset): enable via commanddevice (NO contact), contactor monitoring (NC contacts)Monitored inputsmax. 2 pairs of light barriersInput resistance: –Max. cable length: –Test and feedback:potential-free contactOutputs:1 enabling pathEnabling contacts:1 enabling pathUtilisation category:AC-15, DC-13Ie/Ue:2 A / 250 VAC, 2 A / 24 VDCContact load capacity: max. 250 VAC, max. 2 A (cos ϕ = 1)Switching voltage:max. 250 VACLoad current:8 AMax. fuse rating:4 A gG D-fuseSignalling output:1 transistor outputSwitch-on conditions:test duration: ≤ 150 ms (without relay control)≤ 450 ms (with relay control)Switch-off time:response time (complete sy.): ≤ 30 msIndications:red LED for light barrier interruptedgreen LED for light barrier freesoiling: flashing red/greenFunction display:4 LEDsEMC rating:conforming to EMC DirectiveMax. switching frequency:10 HzOvervoltage category: II to DIN VDE 0110Degree of pollution: 3 to DIN VDE 0110Resistance to vibration:10 ... 55 Hz / amplitude 0.35 mmResistance to shock:10 g / 16 msAmbient temperature: 0 °C … + 50 ºCStorage and transport temperature: – 20 °C … + 80 ºCDimensions:45 x 84 x 118 mmNote:Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) areto be suppressed by means of a suitable circuit.ApprovalsOrdering detailsSLB 200-C04-1R304

Safety light barriersNoteWiring diagram• For protection in Control Category 2 toEN 954-1• Monitoring two pairs of light barrier devicesand the power contactor using theSLB 200-C safety monitoring module• Test push button IThe test push button is connected to X13and X14 in order to carry out a check ofthe light barrier monitoring function. Theterminals X15 and X16 must be bridged.• The wiring diagram is shown for thede-energised condition.• Contactor checkTo monitor an external contactor, the feedbackcircuit is connected to X17 and X18.The terminals X19 and X20 must be bridged.• Start push button HThe start push button can be used to startthe monitoring of the light barriers for a newstart or after an interruption. The terminalsX3 and X4 must be bridged.• It is also possible to connect only onepair of light barrier devices.+24 VDC0VA1A2BNWHSLB-R SLB-E SLB-R SLB-E1 1 2 2BNBKBNWHBNBKX1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X12 13K3K4max.X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 X18 X19 X20 X21 X22 Y1 X23 14K1NL1SLB 200-C3MNoteIn order to set for the desired mode ofoperation and number of light barriersconnected, remove the front cover of thesafety monitoring module. As supplied allswitches are in Position 1.NoteThe required functions can be selected by means of the internal DIP switches.DIP switch 1 DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3Position 1 With contactor check With start/restart interlock Connection of twolight barriersPosition 2 Without contactor check Without start/restart interlock Connection of onelight barrier305

Safety light barriersSLB 400-C• To IEC 61496• Control Category 4 to EN 954-1, BWS-S• Cross-wire monitoring• ISD Integral System Diagnostics• Operating voltage 24 VDC• Feedback circuit to monitorexternal contactors• Two short-circuit proof additionaltransistor outputs• Response time ≤ 30 ms• Start/Restart interlock can beswitched active or inactive• Contactor monitoring can beswitched active or inactive• Can be coded• Up to 4 light barrier pairs SLB 400can be connectedTechnical dataStandards: IEC/EN 61496-1/-2, EN 954-1Control category: 4Start-up test:yesStart conditions:Start-reset button, on/off codingFeedback circuit:yesEnclosure:glass-fibre reinforced thermoplasticMounting: snaps onto standard DIN rail to EN 50022Connection:screw terminalsCable section:max. 4 mm 2 (incl. conductor ferrules)Protection class: terminals IP 20, enclosure IP 40 to EN 60529Ue: 24 VDC ± 15%Ie:0.3 A without additional transistor outputsPower consumption: –Inputs:S1, S2Monitored inputsmax. 4 pairs of light barriersInput resistance:approx. 2 kΩ to groundInput signal „1“:10 ... 30 VDCInput signal „0“:0 ... 2 VDCMax. cable length:100 m of 0.75 mm 2 conductorOutputs:2 enabling pathsEnabling contacts:2 enabling pathsUtilisation category:AC-15, DC-13Ie/Ue:2 A / 250 VAC, 2 A / 24 VDCContact load capacity: max. 250 VAC, max. 2 A (cos ϕ = 1)Switching voltage:max. 250 VACLoad current:max. 2 ASwitching capacity:max. 500 VAMax. fuse rating:2 A gG D-fuseAdditional outputs: additional transistor outputs Y1, Y2, Ue – 4 V,100 mA total, short-circuit proof, p-typeSignalling output: 2 transistor outputs, Y1 + Y2 = max. 100 mA, p-type, short-circuit proofSwitch-on time: –Response time:≤ 25 msMonitoring for synchronism of muting sensors: –Indications:ISDFunction display:9 LEDs (ISD*)EMC rating:conforming to EMC DirectiveMax. switching frequency:10 HzOvervoltage category: II to DIN VDE 0110Degree of pollution: 3 to DIN VDE 0110Resistance to vibration: 10 ... 55 Hz / amplitude 0.35 mm, ± 15 %Resistance to shock:30 g / 11 msAmbient temperature: 0 °C … + 55 ºCStorage and transport temperature: – 25 °C … + 70 ºCDimensions:99.7 x 75 x 110 mmNote:Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) areto be suppressed by means of a suitable circuit.ApprovalsHOrdering detailsSLB 400-C10-1R306

Safety light barriersNote• For protection in Control Category 4 toEN 954-1• Monitoring up to four pairs of light barrierdevices and the power contactors using theSLB 400-C safety monitoring module• The wiring diagram is shown for thede-energised condition.• Connection of two pairs of safety lightbarrier devicesWhen two pairs of safety light barriersare connected, the terminals X9-X10and X11-X12 must be bridged.• Restart push button JThe restart function can be selected bymeans of the DIP switches. When a startpush button is connected to X5 and X6,it must be operated for min. 250 ms andmax. 5 s after an interruption of thesafety light barriers.Wiring diagram+24 VDCSLB-E1234A1X124V T00VA2SLB-R1234 1234 1234X2Q1RESTARTX3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 13 23 33 41T2SLB-ESLB-RT3 Q3 T4 Q4 PM INDIC.RQ2 RESTART CONT.MMade in Germany+ -U OUTBRELAYUBOUT+X9 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 Y1 Y2 - 14 24 34 42L10V0V1234 1234 1234 1234K4SLB-ESLB-RSLB-ESLB-RNK53MISDThe following faults are registeredby the safety monitoring modulesand indicated by ISD• Short-circuit on the connecting leads• Interruption of the connecting leads• Failure of the safety relay to pull-inor drop-out• Fault on the input circuits or the relay controlcircuits of the safety monitoring module• Mutual influence between the connectedpairs of light barrier device and others onneighbouring systems8307

Safety light barriers accessories SLB 200 and SLB 400System componentsSystem componentsMirror SLB 200/400 SMA 80Mounting post ST 1250Mounting angle BF SMA 80-1Floor-stand base STB 1Mounting angle BF SMA 80-2T-slot nut NST 20-8Ordering detailsMirror SMA 80Mounting anglesfor mirror BF SMA 80-1BF SMA 80-2T-slot nut NST 20-8Ordering detailsMounting post ST 1250Floor-stand base STB 1308

SAFETY CATEGORY 3 PRESSURE MATSGENERAL PRODUCT FEATURESSCHMERSAL’s Series SMS Safety Pressure Mats feature a 100% active area,low actuating force, rugged cable termination, durable “unibody construction”cable entry, IP67 submersible rating, highly chemical resistant mat material, CEcompliance,and a 3-year warranty. When properly installed with a compatiblesafety controller (described herein) they meet the stringent requirements ofEN954-1 safety category 3.8309

SERIES SMS 3Safety Pressure MatsFeatures & Benefits• 100% active mat area … ramp edge trim and insulatingstrip-contact design ensure actuation over entire matsurface• High chemical resistance … mat material is tolerant tomost acids, alcohols, aldehydes, caustics, solvents and oilsfound in an industrial environment• Non-slip surface profile … unique surface geometrydesigned to enhance traction and minimize slippage• Meets safety category 3 requirements of EN 954-1 …suitable for most industrial applications• Modular design … permits protection over a diversity ofhazardous area shapes/sizes• Easy-to-install … simple 4-wire connection (without needof a terminal resistor or additional base plate)• Integral 6m cable … satisfies wiring requirements for awide variety of applications• Rugged IP67 design … with mechanical life expectancy ofmore than 5 million actuations• Fully CE-compliant … third-party certified to EN1760-1• Extended warranty … mats are warranteed for 3 yearsfrom date of shipmentDescriptionThe maintenance-free series SMS 3 safety mat system isdesigned to safeguard personnel when entering a hazardousarea around dangerous machinery. A person’s presence isdetected upon their stepping/walking on the mat. Theinterconnected safety controller (such as the SRB 301 HC/Ror SRB 301 HC/T) continuously monitors the integrity of thesafety mat system, sending a “stop” signal to the machineryin the event of a system fault or pressure mat actuation.When properly installed with the ramp edge profiles, a 100%mat actuation area is achieved… thus complying with thestringent requirements of EN 954-1 safety category 3OperationThe series SMS 3 safety mat consists of two electrodes(steel plates) separated by an internal layer of compressibleelastomeric insulating strips. The insulating strips are cappedby a conductive u-shaped strip whose edges overhang thecompressible insulator.Upon the application of pressure (e.g. walking/stepping on themat), the insulating strips compress allowing the conductivestrip to close the normally-open circuit between the steelelectrodes. This closure signal is detected by the system’ssafety controller whose safety output(s) sends a “stop” signalto the machinery being approached.ModelSMS 3 25-25SMS 3 25-50SMS 3 25-100SMS 3 50-50SMS 3 50-100SMS 3 50-150SMS 3 75-75SMS 3 75-100SMS 3 75-150SMS 3 100-100SMS 3 100-150SMS 3 120-120AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELSLength x Width ofMat without Trim Kit“Ramp Edge”Trim Kit(Must be orderedseparatley)*250 mm x 250 mm SMS PF 100-25-25250 mm x 500 mm SMS PF 100-25-50250 mm x 1000 mm SMS PF 100-25-100500 mm x 500 mm SMS PF 100-50-50500 mm x 1000 mm SMS PF 100-50-100500 mm x 1500 mm SMS PF 100-50-150750 mm x 750 mm SMS PF 100-75-75750 mm x 1000 mm SMS PF 100-75-100750 mm x 1500 mm SMS PF 100-75-1501000 mm x 1000 mm SMS PF 100-100-1001000 mm x 1500 mm SMS PF 100-100-1501200 mm x 1200 mm SMS PF 100-120-120SMS 3 120-1501200 mm x 1500 mm SMS PF 100-120-150Other sizes and non-rectangular shapes available. Please consult factory.*SMS 3 Safety Mats and Trim Kits must be ordered with a compatiblesafety controller module. “Active Edge” trim is also available. Pleaseconsult factory.310

SERIES SMS 3 SAFETY PRESSURE MATTECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSConformance to Standards EN 1760-1Degree of Ingress Protection IP67 per IEC 60529Response Time≤ 30ms (single mat only)Mechanical Life Expectancy > 5 million operationsMaximum Load2000 N/cm 2 (2,900 lbs/sq. in)MaterialMat: Plastisol; Ramp Edge: AluminumMat Thickness12mm (.47 in.)Mat Weight18 kg/m 2 (3.7 lbs/sq. ft)Standard Cable Length 6 meters (19.7 ft) (Other lengthsavailable. Please consult factory.)Ambient Operating-30°C to +50°CTemperature Range(-23°F to +122°F)Warranty Period3 Years (from date of shipment)Agency ApprovalsCE-CompliantChemical ResistanceWater: ExcellentMineral Acids: Good – ExcellentOrganic Acids: Good – ExcellentAlcohols: GoodAldehydes: Good – ExcellentCaustics: Good – ExcellentPetroleum Solvents: Fair – GoodOils: GoodTRIM KIT DETAILSMat installation with 2-1/2" ramp edge trimfor perimeter finishing and “active thresholdjoining trim” for interior multiple-mat bridging.Ramp edge trim installation detail. Place rampedge trim flush against edge of mat as shown.“Active Threshold” joiner trim installation detail.8311

SERIES SMS 3 COMPATIBLE SAFETY CONTROLLERSThe SMS 3 safety mat system includes a choice of two compatible safety controllers … one ofwhich is required for each installation.These choices are summarized in the chart below with complete technical specifications shown at the right.Model NumberType Reset(See Note 1)Number ofSafety OutputsAvailable SignalingOutputSafety ControllerInput VoltageSRB 301 HC/T-24V Automatic 3 1 N.C. (Voltage-free) 24V AC/DCSRB 301 HC/T-230V Automatic 3 1 N.C. (Voltage-free) 48-240V ACSRB 301 HC/R-24V* Manual 3 1 N.C. (Voltage-free) 24V AC/DCSRB 301 HC/R-230V* Manual 3 1 N.C. (Voltage-free) 48-240V ACNote 1: Manual reset units require the presence of a discrete “trailing edge” signal (24V to 0V) to activate(reset) the safety outputs. A reset button must be provided.Automatic reset units do not require a reset signal. These units automatically re-activate (reset)the safety outputs when pressure is removed from the mat and no other safety circuit faults exist.A discrete reset button may be used for increased safety.Each of these DIN-rail mountable safety controllers are designed to monitor the integrity of the SMS 3safety mat circuit. In the event of mat actuation or the occurrence of a fault in the circuit, the safetyoutput(s) will be activated to stop the hazardous machinery. Detectable faults include:• Open circuit in interconnection wiring• Short in the interconnection wiring• Fault in one or more of the controller’s safety relays• Welded contact in the controlled positive-guided motor contactor or control relayIn addition, each unit features LED system status indicators to aid in installation and trouble shooting.*May also be used to monitor two-hand control units.312

SERIES SMS 3 COMPATIBLE SAFETY CONTROLLERSTECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSConformance to StandardsHousing MaterialUL, CSA, BG (CE-Compliant)PolycarbonateMounting Arrangement DIN-rail mounting according to DIN EN 50022Housing DimensionsDegree of Ingress ProtectionOperating VoltagePower ConsumptionInputsOutput SignalsSwitching Voltage/Switching PowerResponse TimeSignallingAmbient OperatingTemperature RangeStorage Temperature RangeWeightAgency Approvals100mm/45mm/121mmTerminals: IP20Housing: IP40(per IEC 60529)24V DC version:24V DC -15%/+20%; residual ripple max. 10%24V AC version:24V AC -15%/+10%230V AC version:48-240V AC24V version: max. 1.6W; 3.7 VA230V version: max. 2.0W; 5.1 VAChannel A, B: Voltage-free contacts3 enabling (safety) outputs(Two N.O. relay contacts in series)1 signaling contact(Two N.C. relay contacts in parallel)250V, 8A ohmic (inductive with suitable supressor)≤ 20 msGreen LEDs for control voltage,Channel A, channel B, Output-25°C to +60°C (-13°F to +140°F)-40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F)HC/R: 320 gm (24V version); 340 gm (230V version)HC/T: 290 gm (24V version); 300 gm (230V version)UL, CSA, CE-Compliant8313

OPTIONAL JUNCTION BOX FOR MULTIPLE MATSSPECIFICATIONS7.10 in. (180,3 mm)6.29 in. (159,8 mm)5.87 in. (149,1 mm)Mounting Holes11.06 in. (280,9 mm)9.44 in. (239,8 mm)9.02 in. (229,1 mm)Mounting Holes3.5 in. (88,9 mm)0.61 in. (15,5 mm)5.13 in. (130,3 mm)0.58 in. (14,7 mm)4.72 in. (119,9 mm)6.29 in. (159,8 mm)6.35 in. (161,3 mm)7.10 in. (180,3 mm)314Up to 5 MatsPart Number SMS JB 5 Part Number SMS JB 10Weight 1.9 lbs Weight 2.7 lbsUp to 10 MatsMaterial Acylonitrile Butadine Styrene (ABS) Material Acylonitrile Butadine Styrene (ABS)Temp. Range -40 F to +180 F with standard Neoprene gasket Temp. Range -40 F to +180 F with standard Neoprene gasket(-4 C to +82 C) (-4 C to +82 C)-40 F to +266 F with optional silicone gasket -40 F to +266 F with optional silicone gasket(-4 C to +130 C) (-4 C to +130 C)Protection Class NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 5, 12 and 13 Protection Class NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 5, 12 and 13IP65IP65DIN 40050 DIN 40050Capacity 6 integral cable grips will accept up to 5 Capacity 12 integral cable grips will accept up to 10Safety mat cables. 4 plugs provided to sealSafety mat cables. 9 plugs provided to sealunused positionsunused positionsControl Cable 18/4 SVT Black 20' cable .245" OD Control Cable 18/4 SVT Black 20' cable .245" ODWires are designated as black-#1, white-#2, Wires are designated as black -#1,black-#3 and white-#4.white-#2, black-#3 and white-#4.(Maximum cable length: 300')(Maximum cable length: 300')Terminal Strips 24-position tubular contacts. (No wire lugs Terminal Strips 48-position tubular contacts. (No wire lugsrequired.) Captive screws and “dead front”required.) Captive screws and “dead front”construction eliminate short circuits.construction eliminate short circuits.

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONSProper UseThe series SMS 3 safety mat system isa pressure sensitive safety device usedfor the safeguarding of hazardous areasaround machines. The tactile matshould be placed on a flat smoothsurface around the machine. Whendesigning machine safeguarding,approach speed, safety distance andthe possibility of stepping behind orbypassing of the safety device must beconsidered.The operator must not be able toreach the nearest danger point beforethe machine has stopped. This isaccomplished by the proper calculationof the safety distance and installationof the tactile mat(s). When choosingthe safety device, the appropriateregulations have to be considered.Safety categories in accordance withEN 954-1 for pressure sensitive mats(safety mats) on machines are statedin type C standards.We recommend the operator be givena general introduction to the featuresand function of the safety mat and theprotected zone. Correct installation,inspecting, testing and periodicinspection are required for proper useof the device.IMPORTANT INSTALLATION NOTE:When designing a machine orinstalling a safety mat system,the safety requirements of themachinery directive (98/37/EC) andtheir appendices and amendments,as well as the relevant safetystandards, must be respected.Safety DistanceCalculationsThe correct positioning of the tactilemats with regard to the nearest dangerpoint is mainly dependent on thestopping performance of the machineand the assumed approach speed ofthe operator. The standard EN 999(Safety of Machinery, Hand/Arm-Speed)provides a formula for calculating theappropriate safety distance.Safety distance formula:S = K x (T1 + T2) + (1200 – 0.4 H)S is the minimum distance inmillimeters, from the danger zoneto the detection point, line, planeor zoneK is a parameter in millimeters persecond, derived from data onapproach speeds of the body orparts of the bodyH distance above the floor (i.e.,platform) in mm (for safety matsthis term is usually 0 mm)T1 is the maximum time between theactuation of the sensing function(tactile mat) and the switching off ofthe safety enabling outputs (e.g., theoutput signal switching device OSSDof the safety module) (response timesee “Technical specifications”,Section 9)T2 is the response time of the machine,i.e., the time required to stop themachine or remove the risks afterreceiving the signal from the SRBsafety controllerThe safety distance can generally becalculated as follows:S = 1600 mm/s x (T1 + T2) + 1200 mmSafety DistanceCalculation ExampleCalculate the safety distance for amachine for which the stop time is117.5 ms, the response time of thetactile mat and safety module is 70 ms;the tactile mats are at floor level.S = 1600 mm/s x (0,07 s + 0,1175 s)+ 1200 mmS = 1600 mm/s x (0,1875 s)+ 1200 mmS = 300 mm + 1200 mmS = 1500 mm8315

316SaferbyDesign

FAIL-TO-SAFE SAFETY EDGESSELECTION GUIDESCHMERSAL’s Series SE Safety Edges/Bumpers are available as sub-assemblycomponents or as custom assemblies produced to user specifications. The followingpages provide details regarding operation, construction and ordering details. Amongthe user options are safety edge profile, mounting frame profile and length. Pleasecontact us if you have any questions, special needs or require assistance withproperly specifying the safety edge which meets your requirements.8317

SERIES SEOptical Safety Edges/BumpersFeatures & Benefits• Can be cut & mounted in the field … easy to fit and adjustlength when placing the edge on the door• Safety controller SE 100 handles up to 2 safety edges …reduced cost in multiple door applications• Rugged corrosion & abrasion resistance rubber profiles… tolerant to most industrial environments• Watertight design … meets IP 68 environmentalrequirements.• Low operating force … assures reliable operation• Automatic gain control … tolerates slight bending• Simple field installation … low cost & easy to repair• Meets rigid safety agency standards … BG, UL and CSADescriptionThe series SE Safety edge consists of a rugged high tearresistant rubber profile, an aluminum mounting rail, a plug-inoptoelectronic transmitter and receiver pair and acompatible safety controller. The design features a highreflective internal rubber surface and a self-adjusting gainoptical pair whose performance is uncompromised by slightbending … and predictable over the specified operatingrange.Units can be quickly and easily assembled (without specialskills or use of adhesives) for lengths of 400 mm to 10 m.The self adjusting optical pair assure the same sensitivityand performance independent of chosen length.The mechanical design assures encapsulation of thetransmitter and receiver ensuring reliable operationunaffected by environmental soiling.OperationIn operation the transmitted IR beam is detected, by thereceiver resulting in enabling of the safety controllers safetyoutput(s). Deformation of the rubber profileinterrupts/weakens the signal between the transmitter andreceiver. This is sensed by the safety controller disabling theoutputs allowing the hazardous movement to be stopped.Depending upon the choice of safety controller the systemmeets the requirements of EN 954-1 Safety control category1 or 4.Typical ApplicationsIdeal wherever crushing or shearing points are to besafeguarded, such as on guard doors, elevating platforms,rising stages, moving stock shelving, operating processtables, loading ramps, hoists or tipping equipment.Note: Not recommended for use on overhead doors. Please consultfactory for such applications.318®is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

SERIES SE ORDERING & ASSEMBLY INFORMATIONAVAILABLE SUBASSEMBLY COMPONENTSParts required for a system are:Aluminum profile, rubber profile,sensor set and safety controllerAluminum ProfileSE-AL10-1250SE-AL10-2500SE-AL12-1250SE-AL12-2500SE-AL20-1250SE-AL20-2500SE-AL22-1250SE-AL22-2500Description1.25 m2.50 m1.25 m2.50 m1.25 m2.50 m1.25 m2.50 mRubber ProfileDescriptionSE- P 40 - 1250 mm SE-P40 - 1250SE- P 40 - 2500 mmSE-P40 - 2500SE- P 70 - 1250 mmSE-P70 - 1250SE- P 70 - 2500 mmSE-P70 - 2500Sensor SetDescriptionSE- SETSE - T Transmitter &SE - R ReceiverSafety ControllerDescriptionSE- 100C(2 Bumpers)Safety Control Category 1SE- 400CSafety Control Category 4Safety Control Category 3SE- 304C(Please contact(4 Bumpers)factory for details)AccessoriesDescriptionSE- EC 40 (2 required) End Cap for SE - P 40SE- EC 70 (2 required) End Cap for SE - P 70SE- SCRubber profile shearsSE- WAWiring aidSE- J1Junction Box}}} P70}}AL 10 & AL 12 for use with P40 rubber profile.AL 20 & AL 22 for use with P70 rubber profileP40 Rubber profile for use with AL 10 & AL 12 mounting rail.Rubber profile for use with AL 20 & AL 22 mounting rail.1CutSix steps to install the safety edgealuminum railto desired lengthand fasten in place4Pressthetransmitter andreceiver unitsinto the ends ofthe rubberprofile2Cutthe rubberprofile to desiredlength5Threademitter or receiver cable throughprofile to desired cable exit end of rubberprofile.3Clipthe rubberprofile into thealuminum rail6Connectto the desired safety controllerIt is ready !8319

SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATAAluminum Mounting Rail Profiles & Dimensions (mm)121291,52centering groove9centering groove2530SE AL 10SE AL 201,5122129centering groove9centering groove25 2030 20SE AL 12SE AL 22Rubber Mounting Rail Profiles & Dimensions (mm)Table of PropertiesRubber Profile SE - P 40 , SE - P 70Rubber Material EPDM , shore hardness 60Temperature Range- 40 °C to + 170 °C ( short term)- 30 °C to + 170 °C ( long term)Resistancegood against ozone , moderateagainst oils, acids, solvents, fuelsØ13,4Ø 13,4Ø10,9Ø10,91033253158,5SE P 4030320SE P 70

SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATAForce/Travel diagram for the rubberprofiles with SE 100 C controller unitForce/Travel diagram for the rubberprofiles with SE 400 C controller unitForce/Travel table of rubber profiles with SE-100 CForce/Travel Fa [N] Sa [mm] Fn [N] Sn [mm]Testing Speed 100 mm/s 10 mm/sSE-P40 92 9 250 16400 18600 20SE-P70 22 8 250 46400 47600 48Force/Travel table of rubber profiles with SE-400 CForce/Travel Fa [N] Sa [mm] Fn [N] Sn [mm]Testing Speed 100 mm/s10 mm/sSE-P40 140 11 250 14400 16600 18SE-P70 23 9 250 43400 44600 45Legend Fa Actuating forceSa Actuating travelFn Overtravel forceSn OvertravelSg Total deformation travelwith the above test data.The measurements are carried out according to EN 1760-2*Sg = Sa + SnThe complete system is suitable for finger recognition in accordanceTest conditionsMeasurement parametersTemperature: T = 20 °CMounting position B (to EN 1760-2*)Place of measurement C 3 (to EN 1760-2*)* preliminary8321

SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATATransmitter and Receiver PairTechnical Data for SE - T / SE - RTechnical DataSE - T , SE - RMaterialPolyurethaneProtection class IP 68Dimensions11.5 mm dia., 37 mm longConnecting cable 3 x 0.14 mm2 stranded wireCable lengthTransmitter 6.6 mReceiver 3 mPermissibleMax. 200 mcable lengthOperating -25 °C to +75 °CtemperatureFitting the rubber profile in a light bendLight bends in the profile reduce the maximum possiblelength of safety edge.The infrared signal between the transmitter and receiverovercomes light bends by reflection in the inner wall of theprofile and self adjusting gain to increase transmissionpower.Large radii offer less resistance in this case than smallerones.The reflective properties of the individual batches suppliedare not absolutely constant and affect the reproducibilitywithin certain limits.The reflective characteristics of the SE-P40 and SE-P70profiles are the same. The SE-P40 profile allows tighter radiito be used than the SE-P70 because of its smallerdimensions. When formed into tight bends, rubber profilestend to buckle, thus leading to total blockage of the lightchannel.arlMaximum Bend BendRadius (r) Angle (a) Length (l)0 m 0° 10,0 m1 m 15° 4,5 m0,5 m 63° 2,5 m0,3 m 90° 1,25 mNote: Maximum edge length is a function of both bendangle and bend radius.The above values areguidelines only.322

SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATASE SeriesSafety ControllersElectrical SpecificationSE - 100 CSE - 400 CStandards EN 1760-2, EN60947-5-1, VDE 0660 Part 200 EN1760-2, EN60947-5-1,VDE 0660 Part 200Safety Control Category 1 to EN 954-1 4 to EN 954-1Enclosure PE (black), Crastin (grey) PE (black), Crastin (grey)Fixing DIN rail EN 50 022 DIN rail EN 50 022Screw terminals max. 2 x 2.5 mm 2 solid wire max. 2 x 2.5 mm 2 solid wiremax. 2 x 1.5 mm 2 stranded wire with end thimble max. 2 x 1.5 mm 2 stranded wire with end thimbleProtection class (terminals) (IP 20) Enclosure IP 40 IEC/EN 60529/ VDE 0470-1 (IP20) Enclosure IP40 IEC/EN 60529/ VDE 0470-1Operational voltage 24VDC (+ 20 % / – 10 %) 24VDC (+ 20 % / – 10 %)Fuse rating (supply) 1A (surge-resistant) 1A (surge-resistant)Inputs 1 or 2 pairs SE-T/R Transmitter/Receiver 1 pair SE-T/R Transmitter/ReceiverOutputs Changeover contacts Normally open contactsSafety contacts 11/14 13/14, 23/24Signalling contacts 21/22/24 Semiconductor X1, Connection to internalground Umax. 36 V, Imax. 50 mAMax. switching capacity max. 1000 VA max. 1000 VAUtilization category AC-15; DC-13 AC-15; DC-13Rated operational current/voltage Ie / Ue 2 A/230VAC; 2 A/24VDC 2 A/230VAC; 3 A/24VDCSwitching voltage 250V AC/DC 250V AC/DCMax. switching current 6A (resistive load) 4A (resistive load)Contact fuse rating 6A surge-resistant 4A surge-resistantMechanical life 2 x 10 7 switching cycles 3 x 10 7 switching cyclesReadiness time Max. 300ms Approx. 32msSwitch-on delay Max. 300ms Approx. 32msSwitch-off delay Typically 15ms Typically 15msAmbient temperature +5 °C to +55 °C +5 °C to +55 °CShock resistant < 5g / 33Hz (VDE 0160) < 5g / 33Hz (VDE 0160)Interference According to EMC Directive According to EMC DirectiveWeight Approx. 0.18kg Approx. 0.2kgClearance and creepage distances Degree of soiling 2 to VDE 0160 Degree of soiling 2 to VDE 0160Overvoltage category III / 4kV to VDE 0160 Overvoltage category III / 4kV to VDE 0160Power consumption < 4 W < 4 WNote: Maximum distance to controller: 200m. Use 20AWG to extend bumper leads to safety controller.8323

SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATASE 304CElectrical SpecificationStandardsSafety Control CategoryEnclosureMountingScrewterminalsProtection class (terminals)Operating voltageFuse rating (supply)InputsOutputsSafety contactsSignalling contactsMax. switching capacityUtilization categoryRated operational current/voltageSwitching voltageMax. switching currentMechanical lifeSwitch-off delayAmbient temperatureShock resistantInterferenceWeightPower consumptionSE - 304CEN 1760-23 to EN954-1ThermoplasticDIN rail EN50 022Max. 2x2.5mm 2 solid wireMax. 2x1.5mm 2 stranded with end thimble(IP20) Enclosure IP40 IEC/EN 60529/VDE 0470-124VDC (+20%/-10%)24VAC (+10%/-10%)1A (Slow-blow)1 to 4 pairs SE-T/R Transmitter/ReceiverNO contact13/14Semi-conductor XI, Imax. 50 mAMax. 1500VAAC-15, DC-132A/230VAC, 2A/24VDC250VAC/60VDC2A>10 7 switching cyclesTypically 17ms+5°C to +55°C

SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATATypical Wiring DiagramExample with SE - 100 CExample with SE - 400 CSE1 S E 2SE-R SE-T SE-R SE-Tbnbngngnwhwh+24VL1+24V-+24V-SE-RgnbrSE-TL1SA1(+)A4(-)S12S22A3(+)2111A1(+)A4(-)S12 A3(+)X1X2X3 1323K1K1U-sensors inputrelay outputK2K1U-K2 K2K1sensors inputrelay outputK1 K2K2K1K2A2(-) 24 22 14 2SE-100CA2(-)SE-400C14240VNM3NM3SE-RgnbnwhExample with SE - 304 CSE1SE-Twh gnbnSE-RSE4SE-TSE-RgnbnwhSE2SE-TSE-RgnbnwhSE3SE-Tgn1S12gn2S22wh bn gn3 gn4A4(-)A3(+)S32S428325

326SaferbyDesign

GENERAL & SPECIFIC-PURPOSESAFETY CONTROLLERSGENERAL PRODUCT FEATURESSCHMERSAL’s PROTECT Series Safety Controllers have been designed tosatisfy a wide range of application requirements. Features include:• Removable, plug-in screw terminals• Compact size• Electronic fuses• Feedback monitoring• Convection-cooled housings• PNP and/or dry contact monitoring capability• Stop category 0 and Stop category 1 models• Cross short monitoring• Multiple-voltage operation• Safety Category 3 and 4 models• Monitored manual reset8327

ModelSRB 201 ZHSRB 301 HC/ROperatingVoltage (UB)24V DC24V AC/DC or48-230V ACTypes of InputsMonitoredTwo-hand control(dry contacts)Two-hand control(dry contacts)SERIESSAFETY CONTROLLERS*Suitable for use in systems designed for up to Safety Control Category 3 per EN954-1.All others are suitable for use in systems up to Safety Control Category 4 per EN954-1.DIFFERENTIATED-INPUT SAFETY CONTROLLERS***Please see selection chart on Page 348.SELECTION GUIDENumber ofInput DevicesMonitored**Number ofSafety OutputsNumber ofAuxiliaryOutputsFeedbackMonitoringType of ResetSAFETY OUTPUT EXPANSION MODULECross-shortMonitoringPageNumber2 2 1 N.C. Yes Automatic Yes 3302 3 1 YesMonitoredmanualYes 330SRB 202 MSL 24V DC Muting module 2 2 2 Yes Automatic Yes 332SRB 206 ST*SRB 206 SQ*SRB 211 ANNew!SRB 211 STSRB 301 LC orSRB 301 LCISRB 301 MCSRB 301 STSRB 301 ST-230VSRB 301 SQ-230VSRB 324STNew!24V AC/DC or48-230V AC24V AC/DC or48-230V ACDry contacts 6 2Dry contacts 6 224V AC/DC Dry contacts 124V AC/DC24V AC/DC24V AC/DC24V AC/DCDry contacts orPNP-type outputsDry contacts orPNP-type outputsDry contacts orPNP-type outputsDry contacts orPNP-type outputs12 (stop category 0)1 (stop category 1)2 (stop category 0)1 (stop category 1)YesYesYesYes1 3 1 N.C. Yes1 3 1 Yes1 3 1 N.C. Yes48V-230V AC Dry contacts 1 3 1 N.C. Yes48V-230V AC Dry contacts 1 3 1 N.C. Yes24V AC/DCDry contacts orPNP-type outputs13 (stop category 0)2 (stop category 1)1 N.C. plus3 semiconductorsSRB 401 LC 24V AC/DC Dry contacts 1 4 1 YesSRB 504 ST24V AC/DCDry contacts orPNP-type outputsYes1 5 4 YesSRB 202 C 24V DC Dry Contacts 2 2 2 N.C. YesSRB 400 C 24V DC Dry Contacts 2 4 None Yes6(Semiconductor)Monitoredmanualor Automatic6(Semiconductor)1(Semiconductor)1(Semiconductor)Monitoredmanualor AutomaticMonitoredmanualor AutomaticMonitoredmanualor AutomaticManual orAutomaticManual orAutomaticMonitoredmanualor AutomaticMonitoredmanualor AutomaticMonitoredmanualor AutomaticMonitoredmanualor AutomaticManual orAutomaticMonitoredmanualor AutomaticDepends uponmodel***Depends uponmodel***No 334Yes 334Yes(selectable)Yes(selectable)Yes(selectable)336338340Yes 342Yes(selectable)344No 344Yes 344Yes 346Yes 350Yes 354**Without daisy-chainingDepends uponmodel***Depends uponmodel***SRB 402 EM 24V AC/DC N/A N/A 4 2 N.C. Yes Automatic N/A 352348348SRB 401 EM 115V AC N/A N/A 4 1 Yes Automatic N/A 352Protect-IE-02 &Protect-IE-11328INPUT EXPANSION MODULE24V DC Dry contacts 4 N/A 4 N/A N/A Yes 356NOTE: For FWS and AZS Series, please refer to the AZM section on page 74.For AES Series, please refer to the BNS section on page 159.For SRB 301 HC/T and /R Series, please refer to the Safety Mat section on page 312.For SRB 301 LC/B, please refer to page 206.

SAFETY CONTROLLER SELECTION CRITERIAIt helps the selection process to view a safety controller ashaving four basic characteristics, each determined by theapplication requirements. This approach can be applied toany safety controller.FOUR BASIC SAFETY CONTROLLER CHARACTERISTICSSupply VoltageInputMonitoringFeedback &Reset CircuitOutputSUPPLY VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTSSelect your supply voltage. While many voltages are possible(24VDC, 24VAC, 24VAC/DC, 115VAC and 230VAC),24 VDC gives the most flexibility since virtually all controllersare available in this voltage. Also, since a transformerand rectifier are not required, this unit generally isless expensive and smaller than a 115VAC model.It is important to recognize that the safety controllersupply voltage is always converted by the controllerelectronics to 24VDC for internal operation and forpowering monitored input devices. Hence monitoredinput devices need only be rated for 24VDC.INPUT MONITORING REQUIREMENTSThe first step is to determine whether you need singlechannel (up to Safety Control Category 2) or dual-channel(Control Category 3 & 4) operation.Single-channel systems must monitor one N.C. positivebreakcontact. Dual-channel systems can monitor1 N.O./1 N.C. or 2 N.C. contacts. Generally, these needto be isolated dry contacts since most controllers will viewC-form contacts as a short circuit. Remember that 24VDCis supplied by the safety controller for monitoring thesecontacts.Safety controllers are also available for monitoringnon-potential free contacts (such as PNP outputs fromlight curtains). Models are also available that allow usersto field select the monitored contact configuration.Another consideration is crossed wire detection (a shortbetween channels). This requires special circuitry in thesafety controllers and is required for Safety ControlCategory 4 safety control systems.FEEDBACK & RESET CIRCUIT REQUIREMENTSSafety controllers with feedback capability can alsomonitor control relays and motor contactors with positiveguidedcontacts. Such feedback is required for SafetyControl Category 3 & 4 systems. A NC auxiliary contact iswired into the feedback loop (with or without a reset (start)button) to detect welded contacts in these external controldevices. The safety controller detects the existence of aweld when the relay shuts down due to a power loss oropen machine guard and prevents a restart.In order to reset the controller, the feedback loop must beclosed (at least temporarily). If the NC auxiliary contactstays open due to a contact weld, the controller cannot bereset.Safety Control reset can be automatic or be achievedusing the edge of a 24VDC reset signal. With automaticreset the controller will automatically reset (outputs close)when the machine guard is closed. Alternately, a reset orstart button (manual reset) can be added to the feedbackloop if desired. The controller only needs to momentarilysee a 24VDC signal at the feedback terminals to reset.With a monitored-manual reset, some type of pushbuttonis required. For monitored-manual resets, the feedbackloop circuitry is designed so that it needs to see a 24V to0V transition (trailing edge) in order to reset. This methodof reset is generally required when a person can actuallyget inside a machine guard (where they would be at risk ifthe equipment should automatically restart when theguard closes).OUTPUT REQUIREMENTSDetermine the number and type of safety controller outputsrequired for machine control elements and signaling.Following are the typical types of safety controller outputs:A. N.O. safety enable circuits — eitherinstantaneous or timed.B. N.O. or N.C. auxiliary relay contacts — theseare not to be used for safety functions, butonly for annunciation/signaling.C. Semiconductor outputs for annunciation.8329

SERIES SRB 201 ZH &SRB 301 HC/RTwo-Hand Control Safety ControllerTECHNICAL FEATURES*DescriptionThe Model SRB 201 ZH is designed expressly for usewith two-hand control units. It is equipped for connectionto two actuators … each with 1Normally-Open (N.O.) and1 Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts. Both actuators(inputs) must be operated simultaneously (that is, within500ms as required by EN574 type III/C requirements formachine operation to be enabled. Should the input actuatorsnot be simultaneously operated within this specific500ms period, both must be released before a start cyclecan be initiated.Input Voltage24 VDC# Discrete Input 2Devices MonitoredCompatible Input Device1 N.O. & 1 N.C.Contact Configuration(Dry Contacts)Number & Type Safety Outputs 2 N.O. (Dry Contacts)Number & Type Auxiliary1 N.C. (Dry Contact)(Non-Safety or Signalling Output)Typical Input Devices Monitored Two-hand controlType of ResetAutomaticFeedback MonitoringYesLED DisplaysGreen LEDs for:• K1 (safety relay 1)• K2 (safety relay 2)Conformity to StandardsUL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)Stop Category 0Safety Control Category Rating 4Per EN 954-1Selected Features• Plug-in screw terminals• Electronic fuse• Cross-short recognition• Automatic resetAVAILABLE MODELSFront View*Model NumberSRB 201 ZHSRB 301 HC/R-24V**SRB 301 HC/R-230V**Operating Input Voltage24V DC24V AC/DC48-240V AC* For model SRB 201 ZH only**Please refer to page 313 in the SMS section for specifications onthe SRB 301 HC/R330

SERIES SRB 201 ZH & SRB 301 HC/RMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS*Dimensions (W x H x D)Ambient OperatingTemperature RangeMechanical Life ExpectancyWeightMountingTYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM*22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")-25°C to +45°C(-13°F to +113°F)10 7 switching cycles200 gmDIN railELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS*Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15% / +20%,residual ripple max. 10%Power ConsumptionFuse (Input Power)Fuse (Safety Outputs)Switching Capacity(Safety Outputs)1.2 W (max.)Internal electronic fuse*F1, F2 : tripping current >.02 AF3 : tripping current >.06 A (Hybrid)6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)230 VAC, 6 A Resistive(inductive with suitablesuppressor circuit)Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 2 A(Auxiliary Contacts)Application Category AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1Pick-up Delay≤ 50 msDrop-out Delay≤ 30 msContact Type & Materials AgSnO self cleaning, positively drivenContact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2Creepage DistanceCable Connections • Plug-in self-lifting screw terminalsfor 13 to 20 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013*Resets automatically after a short time-delay.TERMINAL CONNECTIONS*Supply Voltage(24VDC)Monitored Input #1(N.O. Contact)Monitored Input #1(N.C. Contact)Monitored Input #2(N.O. Contact)A1A2A2.1 S12A1.1 S11A1.1 S22Monitored Input #2(N.C. Contact)Safety Output #1(N.O.)Safety Output #2(N.O.)Feedback Monitoringwith Automatic ResetA2.1 S2113 1423 24X1X2Auxiliary Output(N.C.)31 328331

SERIES SRB 202 MSLMuting Safety Controller(for dry contact & PNP-type input monitoring)TECHNICAL FEATURESDescriptionA muting safety controller permits the safety function to betemporarily disabled for reasons related to equipment ormachine work cycles. Disabling the safety function for a limitedperiod of time is referred to as “muting.” Muting is usedto permit the access of materials of production and preventaccess by personnel. A typical muting application is for palletentrance and/or exit from a hazardous area (palletizing).Activation and subsequent de-activation of the muting functionmust be achieved using two or more hard-wired andindependent signals (i.e., limit switches, optical or proximitysensors) activated by a proper time or space sequence.Input Voltage24V DC# Discrete Input Devices 2-4 (muting sensors)MonitoredCompatible Input Device N.C. (dry contacts) orContact Configuration PNP switchingNumber & Type Safety 2 N.O. (dry contacts)OutputsNumber & Type Auxiliary 2 (24V / 50mA max.)(non-safety or signallingoutputs)Typical Input Devices • Limit switchesMonitored• Devices with PNP outputsType of ResetAutomaticFeedback Monitoring YesLED DisplaysGreen LEDs for:• LA (muting lamps)• K1-K5 (safety relays 1-5)•UB-Ui (voltage at input terminals& beyond fuse)Conformity to StandardsStop CategoryUL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)Function of master safety controllerSafety Control Category 4Rating Per EN 954-1Selected Features• Cross-short recognition• Electronic fuse• Automatic reset• Plug-in screw terminals• Feedback monitoringFront ViewAVAILABLE MODELSModel NumberOperating VoltageSRB 202 MSL24V DC332

SERIES SRB 202 MSLMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D)Ambient OperatingTemperature RangeMechanical Life ExpectancyWeightMountingTypical Wiring Diagram45mm x 100mm x 121mm(1.8" x 3.9" x 4.75")-25°C to +45°C(-13°F to +113°F)>10 7 switching cycles400 gm (0.88 lbs.)DIN railOperating VoltagePower ConsumptionFuse (input power)Fuse (safety outputs)Switching Capacity(safety outputs)• 24V DC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%5.6 W, plus power consumption of mutingsensors and muting indicator lampsInternal electronic fuse,tripping current > 1.25 A4 A slow-blow (recommended)230V AC, 4 A Resistive(inductive with suppressor circuit)Switching Capacity L54, L84: max. 50mA(auxiliary contacts)Application Category AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60947-5-1Pick-up Delay≤ 200 msDrop-out Delay ≤ 20 msContact Type & AgSnO, self-cleaning, positive-guided &MaterialAgNi, self cleaning, positive-guidedContact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1, 4 kV/2Creepage DistanceCable Connections • Self-lifting screw terminalsfor 13 to 20 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013Muting Lamps LA1 / LA2: 24V / 50mA-500mANOTE: Use of muting lamps is a requirement in Europe.Should muting lamps not be used, an equivalentresistance of approximately 220 ohms (3 watts) isnecessary. A version without this lamp monitoringcircuit will be available in the near future.Terminal Connections (shown with dry-input contacts)Supply VoltageMonitored Input 1-3Monitored Input 2-4Safety Output #1*(N.O.)A1A2S11S12S22S2313 14Safety Output #2*(N.O.)Muting LampsFeedback MonitoringManual (leading-edge)Reset23 24LA1LA2X1X2X1MRAuxiliary Output#1L54SimultaneityAuxiliary Output#2L84Lamp Current8* Safety outputs connected to master controller333

SERIES SRB 206 &SRB 206 SQGeneral Purpose Safety Controllers(for dry contact input monitoring)TECHNICAL FEATURESInput VoltageDescriptionThe Model SRB 206 ST/SQ family are “general purpose”units designed for use with safety devices havingNormally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts. Each is equipped forconnection with up to six input devices such as E-stoppush button and safety interlock switches. In addition itfeatures user-selectable monitored-manual or automaticreset, six (non-safety) semiconductor outputs for signalling/annunciation,and two safety outputs. SRB 206 SQand SRB 206 SQ-230 also feature cross-short recognition.Front ViewSRB 206 ST (SQ)24 VAC / DCSRB 206 ST (SQ) - 230 V 48 - 230 V AC# Discrete Input Devices 6 (Single or Dual-Channel)MonitoredCompatible Input Device N.C. (Dry Contacts)Contact ConfigurationNumber & Type2 N.O. (Dry Contacts)Safety OutputsNumber & Type Auxiliary 6 - short circuit proof, PNP-type(Non-Safety orsemiconductor Y1 - Y6 max 20mASignalling Outputs)Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)Monitored• Interlock switches (N.C.)Type of Reset• Monitored-manual(Selectable)(24 VDC trailing edge)• AutomaticFeedback Monitoring YesLED DisplaysGreen LEDs for:• K1 (safety relay 1)• K2 (safety relay 2)• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)• UB (voltage at input terminals)Conformity to StandardsStop Category 0UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)Safety Control Category 3Rating Per EN 954-1Selected Features• Plug-in screw terminals• Cross-short recognition(SRB 206 SQ models only)• Up to 6 monitored devices• Six auxiliary outputs• Selectable monitored-manual orautomatic resetAVAILABLE MODELSModel NumberOperating Input VoltageSRB 206 STSRB 206 ST - 230VSRB 206 SQ*SRB 206 SQ-230*24V AC/DC48 - 230 VAC24V AC/DC48 - 230 VAC*Feature cross-short recognition.334

SERIES SRB 206 & SRB 206 SQMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D)Ambient OperatingTemperature RangeMechanical Life ExpectancyWeightMounting45mm x 100mm x 121mm(1.77" x 3.9" x 4.75")-25°C to +45°C(-13°F to +113°F)>10 7 switching cycles300 gmDIN railTYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM (shown with 1 input)TERMINAL CONNECTIONS (Model SRB 206 ST shown)Supply VoltageMonitored Input #1AELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSOperating VoltagePower ConsumptionFuse (Input Power)24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz48 VAC-240VAC, 50/60 Hz3.6 W (max.), 3.6 VA24 V Internal electronic (hybrid) Fuse F1,Tripping current > 1 A (Resets afterinterruption of supply voltage)230 V Primary : Fuse (glass), trippingcurrent > 1.0 ASecondary : Internal electronic fuse,tripping current > 0.12 AFuse (Safety Outputs)6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 20 mA(Auxiliary Contacts)Switching Capacity 230 VAC, 6 A Resistive(Safety Outputs) (inductive with suitable supressor circuit)Application Category AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1Pick-up Delay≤ 200 msDrop-out Delay≤ 40 msContact Type & Materials AgCdO, self cleaning, positive-guidedContact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2Creepage DistanceCable Connections • Self-lifting, plug-in screw terminalsfor 13 to 20 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013Monitored Input #1BMonitored Input #2AA1A2S11S12S71S72S11S22Monitored Input #2BMonitored Input #3AMonitored Input #3BMonitored Input #4AS72S82S31S32S82S92S31S42Monitored Input #4BMonitored Input #5AMonitored Input #5BMonitored Input #6AS92S102S51S52S102S112S51S62Monitored Input #6BS112S122Feedback Monitoringwith Automatic ResetSafety Output #1 (N.O.)Safety Output #2 (N.O.)13 1423 24PNP-Semiconductor Outputs #1 through #6Feedback Monitoring withMonitored-manual ResetX1X28X1X3Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6335

SERIES SRB 211 ANGeneral Purpose Safety Controller(for dry 1 NO/1 NC contact input monitoring)TECHNICAL FEATURESNew!DescriptionThe Model SRB 211 AN is a “general purpose” unitdesigned for use with safety devices having Normally-Openand Normally-Closed dry contact switching outputs. It isequipped for connection of one monitored input device indual-channel configuration. In addition it features userselectablemonitored-manual or automatic reset, stopcategory 0 & 1 safety outputs, and feedback monitoringof positive-guided controlled loads.Front ViewInput Voltage24 V AC/DC# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Dual-Channel)MonitoredCompatible Input Device N.O./N.C (Dry Contacts)Contact ConfigurationNumber & Type3 N.O. (1 delayed : 1-30 sec.)Safety Outputs(dry contacts)Number & Type Auxiliary PNP(Non-Safety orSignalling Outputs)Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C./N.O.)Monitored• Interlock switches (N.C./N.O.)Type of Reset• Monitored-manual(Selectable)(24 VDC trailing edge)• AutomaticFeedback Monitoring YesLED DisplaysGreen LEDs for:• K1 (safety relay 1)• K2 (safety relay 2)• K3/4 (safety relay 3 & 4)• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)• UB (voltage at input terminals)Conformity to StandardsStop CategoryUL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)0 (2 safety outputs)1 (1 safety output)Safety Control Category 4Rating Per EN 954-1Selected Features• Plug-in screw terminals• Cross-short recognition• Stop category 0 & 1safety outputs• Selectable trailing edge orautomatic reset• Resetable electronic fuse• Feedback monitoringAVAILABLE MODELSModel NumberSRB 211 ANOperating Voltage24 V AC/DC336

SERIES SRB 211 ANMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D)Ambient OperatingTemperature RangeMechanical Life ExpectancyWeightMountingTYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")-25°C to +45°C(-13°F to +113°F)>10 7 switching cycles255 gmDIN railOperating VoltagePower Consumption24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz5.2 W, 7.2 VA (max.), plus signalingoutput Y1Fuse (Input Power) Internal electronic Fuse F1,Tripping current > 1.5 A(Resets approx. 1 second)Fuse (Safety Outputs)Switching Capacity(Safety Outputs)4 A Slow-blow (Recommended)230 VAC, 4 A Resistive(inductive with suitable suppressor circuit)Switching Capacity 24 VDC 100mA(Auxiliary Contacts)Application Category AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1Pick-up Delay≤ 40 msDrop-out Delay ≤ 50 msContact Type & AgSnOAgNi, self cleaning, positive-guidedMaterialsContact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2Creepage DistanceCable Connections • Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminalsfor 13 to 20 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013TERMINAL CONNECTIONSSupply VoltageMonitored Input #1(N.O.)Monitored Input #2(N.C.)Safety Output #1(N.O.)A1A2S13S14S21S2213 14Safety Output #2(N.O.)Safety Output #3(Stop Category 1, N.O.)Feedback Monitoringwith Automatic ResetFeedback Monitoring with Manually-Monitored (Trailing Edge) Reset23 2437 38X1X3X1X2Auxiliary Output(PNP-Semiconductor)Y18337

SERIES SRB 211 STGeneral Purpose Safety Controller(for dry contact and PNP-type input monitoring)TECHNICAL FEATURESDescriptionThe Model SRB 211 ST is a “general purpose” unitdesigned for use with safety devices having Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts or PNP-type switching outputs. Itis equipped for connection of one monitored input device insingle- or dual-channel configuration. In addition it featuresuser-selectable monitored-manual or automatic reset, stopcategory 0 & 1 safety outputs, and feedback monitoring ofpositive-guided controlled loads.Front ViewInput Voltage24 V AC/DC# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual-Channel)MonitoredCompatible Input Device N.C. (Dry Contacts) orContact Configuration PNP-switchingNumber & Type Safety 3 N.O. (1 delayed: 1-30 sec.)Outputs(dry contacts)Number & Type Auxiliary PNP(Non-Safety orSignalling Output)Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)Monitored• Interlock switches (N.C.)• Devices with PNP semiconductoroutputsType of Reset(Selectable)Feedback MonitoringLED DisplaysConformity to StandardsStop Category• Monitored-manual(24 VDC trailing edge)• AutomaticYesGreen LEDs for:• K1 (safety relay 1)• K2 (safety relay 2)• K3/4 (safety relay 3 & 4)• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)•UB (voltage at input terminals)UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)0 (2 safety outputs)1 (1 safety output)Safety Control Category 4Rating Per EN 954-1Selected Features• Plug-in screw terminals• Cross-short recognition• Stop category 0 & 1safety outputs• Selectable monitored-manual orautomatic reset• Hybrid fuse• Feedback monitoringAVAILABLE MODELSModel NumberOperating VoltageSRB 211 ST24V AC/DC338

SERIES SRB 211 STMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D)Ambient OperatingTemperature RangeMechanical Life ExpectancyWeightMountingTypical Wiring Diagram22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")-25°C to +45°C(-13°F to +113°F)>10 7 switching cycles255 gmDIN railOperating VoltagePower Consumption24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz5.1 W, 5.7 VA (max.), plus signalingoutput Y1Fuse (Input Power) Internal electronic (hybrid) Fuse F1,Tripping current > 1 A (Resets afterinterruption of supply voltage)Fuse (Safety Outputs)Switching Capacity(Safety Outputs)4 A Slow-blow (Recommended)230 VAC, 4 A Resistive(inductive with suitable suppressor circuit)Switching Capacity 24 VDC 100mA(Auxiliary Contacts)Application Category AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1Pick-up Delay≤ 40 msDrop-out Delay ≤ 40 msContact Type & AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guidedMaterialsContact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2Creepage DistanceCable Connections • Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminalsfor 13 to 20 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013Terminal ConnectionsSupply VoltageMonitored Input #1(N.C. or PNP)Monitored Input #2(N.C. or PNP)Safety Output #1(N.O.)A1A2S11S12S21S2213 14Safety Output #2(N.O.)Safety Output #3(Stop Category 1, N.O.)Feedback Monitoringwith Automatic ResetFeedback Monitoring withMonitored-manual Reset23 2437 38X1X3X1X2Auxiliary Output(PNP-Semiconductor)Y18339

SERIES SRB 301 LC &General Purpose Safety ControllerSRB 301 LCI(for dry contact and PNP-type input monitoring)TECHNICAL FEATURESDescriptionThe Model SRB 301 LC is a lower cost “general-purpose”unit designed for use with safety devices having Normally-Closed (N.C.) or PNP-type switching outputs. It is equippedfor connection of one input device in single- or dual-channelconfiguration. In addition it features feedback monitoring ofpositive-guided controlled loads, automatic or manual resetand optional cross-short recognition.Front ViewInput Voltage24 V AC/DC# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual-Channel)MonitoredMonitored ContactN.C. (Dry Contacts) orConfigurationPNP-switchingNumber & Type Safety 3 N.O. (Dry Contacts)OutputsNumber & Type Auxiliary 1 N.C. (Dry Contacts)(Non-Safety orSignalling Output)Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)Monitored• Interlock switches (N.C.)• Devices with PNP semiconductoroutputsType of Reset(Selectable)Feedback MonitoringLED DisplaysConformity to StandardsStop Category 0• Manual (24 V Leading Edge)• AutomaticYesGreen LEDs for:• K1 (safety relay 1)• K2 (safety relay 2)• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)•UB (voltage at input terminals)UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)Safety Control Category 4Rating Per EN 954-1Selected Features• Cross-short recognition(Field-wired option)• Screw terminals (LC)• Detachable terminals (LCI)• Feedback monitoring• Electronic fuse (LCI)• Glass fuse (LC)AVAILABLE MODELSModel NumberOperating VoltageSRB 301 LCSRB 301 LCI24V AC/DC24V AC/DC340

SERIES SRB 301 LC & SRB 301 LCIMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D)Ambient OperatingTemperature RangeMechanical Life ExpectancyWeightMountingTYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")-25°C to +45°C(-13°F to +113°F)>10 7 switching cycles230 gm (0.5 lbs.)DIN rail (35mm)Operating VoltagePower ConsumptionFuse (Input Power)Fuse (Safety Outputs)Switching Capacity(Safety Outputs)24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz1.7 W (max.), 1.9 VA• Internal glass fuse F1: T 0.25 A(SRB 301 LC)• Internal electronic fuse*(SRB 301 LCI)6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)230 VAC, 6 A Resistive(inductive with suitablesupressor circuit)Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 2 A(Auxiliary Contacts)Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1Pick-up Delay≤ 30 msDrop-out Delay≤ 50 msContact Type &AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guidedMaterialsContact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2Creepage DistanceCable Connections • Self-lifting, screw terminals for13 to 20 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013*Resets automatically after a short time-delay.TERMINAL CONNECTIONSSupply VoltageMonitored Input #1(N.C.)Monitored Input #2(N.C.)Safety Output #1(N.O.)A1A2S11S12S21S2213 14Safety Output #2(N.O.)Safety Output #3(N.O.)Feedback Monitoringwith Automatic orManual (Leading Edge) ResetAuxiliary Output(N.C.)23 2433 34X1X241 428341

SERIES SRB 301 MCGeneral Purpose Safety Controller(for dry contact and PNP-type input monitoring)TECHNICAL FEATURESDescriptionThe Model SRB 301 MC is a “general-purpose” unitdesigned for use with safety devices having Normally-Closed (N.C.) or PNP-type switching outputs. It is equippedfor connection of one input device in single- or dual-channelconfiguration. In addition it features feedback monitoring ofpositive-guided controlled loads, automatic or manual resetand optional cross-short recognition.Front ViewInput Voltage24 V AC/DC# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual-Channel)MonitoredMonitored ContactN.C. (Dry Contacts) orConfigurationPNP-switchingNumber & Type Safety 3 N.O. (Dry Contacts)OutputsNumber & Type Auxiliary 1 N.C. (Dry Contacts)(Non-Safety orSignalling Output)Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)Monitored• Interlock switches (N.C.)• Devices with PNP semiconductoroutputsType of Reset(Selectable)Feedback MonitoringLED DisplaysConformity to StandardsStop Category 0• Manual (24 V Leading Edge)• AutomaticYesGreen LEDs for:• K1 (safety relay 1)• K2 (safety relay 2)• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)•UB (voltage at input terminals)UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)Safety Control Category 4Rating Per EN 954-1Selected Features• Cross-short recognition(Selectable w/dip-switch)• Screw terminals• Feedback monitoring• Electronic fuseAVAILABLE MODELSModel NumberOperating VoltageSRB 301 MC24V AC/DC342

SERIES SRB 301 MCMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D)Ambient OperatingTemperature RangeMechanical Life ExpectancyWeightMountingTYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")-25°C to +45°C(-13°F to +113°F)>10 7 switching cycles230 gm (0.5 lbs.)DIN rail (35mm)Operating VoltagePower ConsumptionFuse (Input Power)Fuse (Safety Outputs)Switching Capacity(Safety Outputs)24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz2.0 W (max.), 4.9 VAInternal electronic fuse*Tripping current > 0.5 A8 A Slow-blow (Recommended)230 VAC, 8 A Resistive(inductive with suitablesupressor circuit)Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 2 A(Auxiliary Contacts)Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1Pick-up Delay≤ 400 msDrop-out Delay≤ 25 ms (emergency stop);≤ 80 ms (power failure)Contact Type &AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guidedMaterialsContact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2Creepage DistanceCable Connections • Self-lifting, screw terminals for13 to 20 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013*Resets after a 1 second time-delay.TERMINAL CONNECTIONSSupply VoltageMonitored Input #1(N.C.)Monitored Input #2(N.C.)Safety Output #1(N.O.)A1A2S11S12S21S2213 14Safety Output #2(N.O.)Safety Output #3(N.O.)Feedback Monitoringwith Automatic orManual (Leading Edge) ResetAuxiliary Output(N.C.)23 2433 34X1X241 428343

SERIES SRB 301 STSERIES SRB 301 ST - 230VSERIES SRB 301 SQ - 230VGeneral PurposeSafety Controllers(for dry contact andPNP-type input monitoring)Model SRB 301 ST shown.DescriptionThe above “general-purpose” safety controllers aredesigned for use with safety devices having Normally-Closed (N.C.) or PNP-type switching outputs. Each isequipped for connection of one input device in singleordual-channel configuration. In addition they featureplug-in screw terminals, user-selectable monitoredmanualor automatic reset, feedback monitoring ofpositive-guided controlled loads and cross-shortrecognition (on selected models).Front ViewTECHNICAL FEATURESInput VoltageSRB 301 STSRB 301 ST - 230 VSRB 301 SQ - 230 V24 VAC / DC48 - 230 V AC48 - 230 V AC# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual-Channel)MonitoredMonitored ContactN.C. (Dry Contacts) PNP-switchingConfigurationNumber & Type3 N.O. (Dry Contacts)Safety OutputsNumber & Type Auxiliary 1 N.C. (Dry Contacts)(Non-Safety orSignalling Output)Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)Monitored• Interlock switches (N.C.)• Devices with PNP semiconductoroutputs (SRB 301 ST only)Type of Reset(Selectable)Feedback MonitoringLED DisplaysConformity to StandardsStop Category 0• Monitored-manual(24 VDC trailing edge)• AutomaticYesGreen LEDs for:• K1 (safety relay 1)• K2 (safety relay 2)• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)•UB (voltage at input terminals,SRB 301 ST only)UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)Safety Control Category 4Rating Per EN 954-1Type FuseHybridSelected Features• Cross-short recognition (SRB301ST 24 VAC / DC &SRB 301 SQ only)• Plug-in screw terminals• Selectable monitored-manual orautomatic reset• Feedback monitoringAVAILABLE MODELSModel NumberOperating VoltageSRB 301 ST*24V AC/DC344Model SRB 301 ST shown.SRB 301 ST - 230 V 48-230VACSRB 301 SQ - 230 V* 48-230VAC*Feature cross-short recognition.

SERIES SRB 301 STSERIES SRB 301 ST - 230VSERIES SRB 301 SQ - 230VMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D)Ambient OperatingTemperature RangeMechanical Life ExpectancyWeightSRB 301 STSRB 301 ST - 230VMountingTYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAMTERMINAL CONNECTIONS (Model SRB 301 ST shown)Supply Voltage22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")-25°C to +45°C(-13°F to +113°F)>10 7 switching cycles240 gm (0.5 lbs.)250 gmDIN rail (35mm)Monitored Input #1 (N.C.)ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSOperating VoltageSRB 301 ST24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 HzSRB 301 ST (SQ) - 230V 48 VAC - 240 VAC, 50/60 HzPower ConsumptionSRB 301 ST2.4 W (max.), 3.8 VASRB 301 ST (SQ) - 230V 2.8 VAFuse (Input Power)24 V Internal electronic (hybrid) Fuse F1,Tripping current > 0.6 A (Resets afterinterruption of supply voltage)230 V F1 : glass bulb, tripping current 0.5 ASecondary : electronic fuse, trippingcurrent 0.12 AFuse (Safety Outputs)Switching Capacity(Safety Outputs)6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)230 VAC, 6 A Resistive(inductive with suitable surge supressor)Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 2 A(Auxiliary Contacts)Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1Pick-up DelaySRB 301 ST≤ 200 msSRB 301 ST (SQ) - 230V ≤ 30 msDrop-out DelaySRB 301 ST≤ 20 msSRB 301 ST (SQ) - 230V ≤ 30 msContact Type & Materials AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guidedContact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2Creepage DistanceCable Connections • Self-lifting, plug-in screw terminalsfor 13 to 20 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013Monitored Input #2 (N.C.)Safety Output #1 (N.O.)A1A2S11S12S21S2213 14Safety Output #2 (N.O.)23 24Safety Output #3 (N.O.)33 34Feedback Monitoringwith Automatic ResetX3S12Feedback Monitoring withMonitored-manual ResetX2S128Auxiliary Output (N.C.)41 42345

SERIES SRB 324 STGeneral Purpose Safety Controller(for dry contact & PNP-type input monitoringTECHNICAL FEATURESNew!DescriptionThe Model SRB 324 ST is a “general purpose” unitdesigned for use with safety devices having Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts or PNP-type switching outputs.It is equipped for connection of one monitored input devicein single- or dual-channel configuration. In addition it featuresuser-selectable monitored-manual or automaticreset, stop category 0 & 1 safety outputs, and feedbackmonitoring of positive-guided controlled loads.Front ViewInput Voltage24V AC/DC# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual-Channel)MonitoredCompatible Input Device N.C. (Dry Contacts) orContact Configuration PNP-switchingNumber & Type5 N.O. (2 delayed: 1-30 sec.)Safety Outputs(dry contacts)Number & Type Auxiliary 1 N.C. (dry contact)(Non-Safety or3 - PNPSignalling Outputs)Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)Monitored• Interlock switches (N.C.)• Devices with PNP outputsType of Reset (Selectable)Feedback MonitoringLED DisplaysConformity to StandardsStop Category• Monitored-manual (trailing edge)• AutomaticYesGreen LEDs for:• K1-K4 (safety relays 1-4)• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)• UB (voltage at input terminals)UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)0 (3 safety outputs)1 (2 safety outputs)Safety Control Category 4Rating Per EN 954-1Selected Features• Plug-in screw terminals• Cross-short recognition• Stop category 0 & 1• Selectable monitored-manual orautomatic reset• Hybrid fuse• Feed back monitoringAVAILABLE MODELSModel NumberSRB 324 STOperating Voltage24 V AC/DC346

SERIES SRB 324 STMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D)Ambient OperatingTemperature RangeMechanical Life ExpectancyWeightMountingTYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM45mm x 100mm x 121mm(1.8" x 3.9" x 4.75")-25°C to +45°C(-13°F to +113°F)>10 7 switching cycles480 gmDIN rail (35mm)ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSOperating VoltagePower Consumption24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz4.8 W, 7.8 VA max.(Plus signalling contacts Y1-Y3)Fuse (Input Power) • Internal electronic Fuse F1,tripping current > 2.5 A(reset approx. 1 second)• Internal hybrid fuse F2,tripping current > 1.0 A(reset after interruption ofsupply voltage)Fuse (Safety Outputs)Switching Capacity(Safety Outputs Stop 0)Switching Capacity(Auxiliary Contacts)6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)230 VAC, 6 A Resistive(inductive with suitable supressor circuit)Y1-Y3: 24 VDC, 100mA (PNP)61/62: 24 VDC, 2 A max. (Dry)Application Category AC-15 / DC-13 : EN 60 947-5-1Pick-up Delay≤ 30 msDrop-out Delay ≤ 30 ms (13/14, 23/24, 33/34)Contact Type & MaterialContact ResistanceAir Clearance &Creepage DistanceCable ConnectionsAgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided100 mOhm (max. in new state)DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2• Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminalsfor 13 to 20 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013TERMINAL CONNECTIONSSupply VoltageMonitored Input #1Monitored Input #2Safety Output #1 (NO)A1A2S11S12S21S2213 14Safety Output #2 (NO)Safety Output #3 (NO)Safety Output #4Stop Category 1 (NO)Safety Output #5Stop Category 1 (NO)23 2433 3447 4857 58Feedback MonitoringMonitored-Manual ResetAutomatic ResetJumperAuxiliary PNP OutputX1X2X3X4X4X5S31S32Y1 Y2 Y38347

SERIES SRB 202 C &SRB 400 CDifferentiated-Input ControllersDescriptionThe Series SRB202C and SRB400C are (general purpose)units designed for use with safety devices having twoNormally-Closed (N.C.) and/or one Normally-Open (N.O.)and one Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts. Uniquely,they provide for differentiated switching of the safety outputsdepending on the input that is actuated.For example, actuating an E-Stop as Input #1 would disableall of the unit’s safety outputs. Conversely, actuationof Input #2 (e.g., a safety guard interlock switch) wouldonly disable half of the available safety outputs (safetyoutput #2 on SRB202C units and safety outputs #3 & #4on SRB400C units).Thus this functionality, which would normally requiretwo discrete safety controllers, can be achievedwith a single unit (controller).Front ViewTECHNICAL FEATURESInput Voltage24 VDC# Discrete Input Devices 2MonitoredCompatible Input Device Input #1: 2 N.C. (Dry contacts)Contact Configuration Input #2: 2 N.C. or 1 N.O./1 N.C.Number & Type Safety 2 N.O. (SRB202 models)Outputs4 N.O. (SRB400 models)Number & Type Auxiliary SRB202: 2 N.C.(Non-Safety orSRB400: NoneSignalling Outputs)Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)Monitored• Interlock switches (N.C.)Type of Reset• Monitored-manual(Depends on model) (24 VDC trailing edge)• Automatic or ManualFeedback Monitoring YesLED DisplaysGreen LEDs for:• K1 (safety relay 1)• K2 (safety relay 2)• K3 (safety relay 3)• K4 (safety relay 4)• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)• UB (voltage at input terminals)Conformity to StandardsStop Category 0UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)Safety Control Category 4Rating Per EN 954-1Selected Features• Plug-in screw terminals• Cross-short recognition(“Q” models only)• Electronic fuse• Feedback monitoringSelection ChartOutputs Input #1 Input #2Cross-Model # Safety Aux Contacts Reset short Contacts ResetSRB202CA 2 2 2 N.C.AutoNo 1 N.O./1 N.C.*AutoSRB202CS 2 2 2 N.C. or No 2 N.C. orManualManualSRB202CA/Q 2 2 2 N.C. Yes 1 N.O./1 N.C.*SRB202CA/T 2 2 2 N.C. No 1 N.O./1 N.C.*AutoSRB202CS/T 2 2 2 N.C.MonitoredmanualManualNo 2 N.C. orSRB202CA/QT 2 2 2 N.C. Yes 1 N.O./1 N.C.*348SRB400CA 4 0 2 N.C.AutoNo 1 N.O./1 N.C.*SRB400CS 4 0 2 N.C. or No 2 N.C.SRB400CA/Q 4 0 2 N.C.ManualYes 1 N.O./1 N.C.*SRB400CA/T 4 0 2 N.C. No 1 N.O./1 N.C.*SRB400CS/T 4 0 2 N.C.MonitoredmanualNo 2 N.C.SRB400CA/QT 4 0 2 N.C. Yes 1 N.O./1 N.C.**Suitable for use with BNS coded-magnet switches.AutoorManualAutoorManual

SERIES SRB 202 C & SRB 400 CMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D)Ambient OperatingTemperature RangeMechanical Life ExpectancyWeightMountingTYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")-25°C to +45°C(-13°F to +113°F)>10 7 switching cycles235 gmDIN rail (35mm)ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSOperating VoltagePower Consumption24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%4.4 WFuse (Input Power) Internal electronic fuse* F1,Tripping current > 1 AFuse (Safety Outputs)Switching Capacity(Safety Outputs)6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)230 VAC, 6 A Resistive(inductive with suitable suppressor circuit)Switching Capacity 24 VDC 100mA(Auxiliary Contacts)Application Category AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1Pick-up Delay≤ 40 msDrop-out Delay ≤ 50 msContact Type & AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guidedMaterialsContact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2Creepage DistanceCable Connections • Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminalsfor 13 to 20 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013*Resets automatically after a short time-delay.TERMINAL CONNECTIONSInput PowerMonitored Input #1A (N.C.)Monitored Input #1B (N.C.)Monitored Input #2A (N.C.)A1A2A1S12A1S22S31S32Monitored Input #2B (N.C.)Monitored Input #2B (N.O.)*Feedback and ResetInput #1Feedback and ResetInput #2S41S42S43S44A1X1A1X2Output #1Output #2Output #3 (SRB400 only)Output #4 (SRB400 only)13 1413 2433 3433 44Auxiliary Output #1(SRB202 only)31 32Auxiliary Output #2(SRB202 only)31 428*For models having 1 N.O./1 N.C. contacts on Input #2.349

SERIES SRB 401 LCGeneral Purpose Safety Controller(for dry contact input monitoring)TECHNICAL FEATURESDescriptionThe Model SRB 401 LC is a lower cost “general-purpose”unit designed for use with safety devices having Normally-Closed (N.C.) switching outputs. It is equipped for connectionof one input device in single- or dual-channel configuration.In addition it features feedback monitoring of positive-guidedcontrolled loads, automatic or manual reset and cross-shortrecognition when monitoring in dual-channel.Front ViewInput Voltage24 V AC/DC# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual-Channel)MonitoredMonitored ContactN.C. (Dry Contacts)ConfigurationNumber & Type Safety 4 N.O. (Dry Contacts)OutputsNumber & Type Auxiliary 1 N.C. (Dry Contacts)(Non-Safety orSignalling Output)Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)Monitored• Interlock switches (N.C.)Type of Reset• Manual (24 V Leading Edge)(Selectable)• AutomaticFeedback Monitoring YesLED DisplaysGreen LEDs for:• K1 (safety relay 1)• K2 (safety relay 2)• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)•UB (voltage at input terminals)Conformity to StandardsStop Category 0UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)Safety Control Category 3Rating Per EN 954-1Selected Features• Cross-short recognition• Screw terminals• Feedback monitoring• Glass fuseAVAILABLE MODELSModel NumberOperating VoltageSRB 401 LC24V AC/DC350

SERIES SRB 401 LCMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D)Ambient OperatingTemperature RangeMechanical Life ExpectancyWeightMountingTYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")-25°C to +45°C(-13°F to +113°F)>10 7 switching cycles210 gm (0.47 lbs.)DIN rail (35mm)Operating VoltagePower ConsumptionFuse (Input Power)Fuse (Safety Outputs)Switching Capacity(Safety Outputs)24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz2.5 W (max.), 4.2 VAInternal glass fuse F1: T 0.25 A6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)230 VAC, 6 A Resistive(inductive with suitablesupressor circuit)Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 2 A(Auxiliary Contacts)Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1Pick-up Delay≤ 15 msDrop-out Delay≤ 30 msContact Type &AgCdO, self cleaning, positive-guidedMaterialsContact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2Creepage DistanceCable Connections • Self-lifting, screw terminals for13 to 20 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013Single-channel configuration shownTERMINAL CONNECTIONS (Single-channel configuration)Supply VoltageMonitored Input #1(N.C.)Safety Output #1(N.O.)Safety Output #2(N.O.)A1A2S11S1213 1423 24Safety Output #3(N.O.)Safety Output #4(N.O.)Feedback Monitoringwith Automatic orManual (Leading Edge) ResetAuxiliary Output(N.C.)33 3443 44S33S3451 528351

SERIES SRB 402 EM &SRB 401 EM-115VSafety Output Expansion ModuleTECHNICAL FEATURESInput VoltageNumber & Type Safety OutputsSRB 402 EM: 24V AC/DCSRB 401 EM-115V: 115V AC4 N.O. (Dry Contacts)Number & Type AuxiliarySRB 402 EM: 2 N.C.(Non-Safety or Signalling Outputs) SRB 401 EM-115V: 1 N.C.LED DisplaysConformity to StandardsStop Category 0Safety Control Category RatingPer EN 954-1Selected FeaturesGreen LEDs for:• K1/K2 (safety relay 1 & 2)UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)Function of Master SafetyController (mounted in samecontrol cabinet)• Plug-in screw terminals• Compatible with all SRBPROTECT SM Series modelsDescriptionThe Models SRB 402 EM and 401 EM are designed foruse as an accessory for SCHMERSAL’s PROTECT SMSeries safety controllers. It provides additional safety(enabling) outputs where required to satisfy the systemcontrol requirements.AVAILABLE MODELSModel NumberOperating VoltageSRB 402 EM24V AC/DCSRB 401 EM-115V 115V ACFront ViewModel SRB 402 EM shown352

SERIES SRB 402 EM & SRB 401 EM-115VMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D)Ambient OperatingTemperature RangeMechanical Life ExpectancyWeightMountingTYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm(0.9" x 3.94" x 4.75")-25°C to +45°C(-13°F to +113°F)>10 7 switching cyclesSRB 402 EM: 215 gm (0.47 lbs.)SRB 401 EM: 260 gm (0.57 lbs.)DIN rail (35mm)ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSOperating Voltage:SRB 402 EMSRB 401 EM-115VPower Consumption24V DC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%24V AC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz115V AC -15% / +6%, 50/60 Hz1.0 VA (max.) / 1.0 W (max.)Fuse (Input Power) Glass fuse F1: 1.0 A / 250 V (Slow-blow)(for SRB 402 EM only)Fuse (Safety Outputs) 6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)Switching Capacity 230V AC, 6 A Resistive(Safety Outputs) (inductive with suitable supressor)Switching Capacity 24V DC, 2 A(Auxiliary Contacts)Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN IEC 60947-5-1Pick-up Delay≤ 30 msDrop-out Delay≤ 35 msContact Type & Materials AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guidedContact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2Creepage DistanceCable Connections • Self-lifting, screw terminals for13 to 24 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013Model SRB 402 EM shownTERMINAL CONNECTIONSSupply VoltageSafety Output #1(N.O.)Safety Output #2(N.O.)Safety Output #3(N.O.)A1A213 1423 2433 34Safety Output #4(N.O.)Feedback Monitoring toMain ModuleAuxiliary Output #1(N.C.)Auxiliary Output #2*(N.C.)43 44X1X251 5261 628*Featured on SRB 402 EM model only353

SERIES SRB 504 STGeneral Purpose Safety Controller(for dry contact and PNP-type input monitoring)DescriptionThe above “general-purpose” safety controllers aredesigned for use with safety devices having Normally-Closed (N.C.) or PNP-type switching outputs. Each isequipped for connection of one input device in singleordual-channel configuration. In addition they featureplug-in screw terminals, user-selectable monitoredmanualor automatic reset, feedback monitoring ofpositive-guided controlled loads and optional crossshortrecognition.Front ViewTECHNICAL FEATURESInput Voltage24 VAC / DC# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Single or Dual-Channel)MonitoredMonitored ContactN.C. (Dry Contacts) orConfigurationPNP-switchingNumber & Type5 N.O. (Dry Contacts)Safety OutputsNumber & Type Auxiliary 1 N.C. (Dry Contacts) & 3-PNP(Non-Safety orSignalling Output)Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C.)Monitored• Interlock switches (N.C.)• Devices with PNP semiconductoroutputsType of Reset• Monitored-manual(Selectable)(24V DC trailing edge)• AutomaticFeedback Monitoring YesLED DisplaysGreen LEDs for:• K1 (safety relay 1)• K2 (safety relay 2)• K3 (safety relay 3)• K4 (safety relay 4)• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)•UB (voltage at input terminals)Conformity to StandardsStop Category 0UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)Safety Control Category 4Rating Per EN 954-1Type FuseHybridSelected Features• Cross-short recognition• Plug-in screw terminals• Selectable trailing edge orautomatic reset• Feedback monitoring• Resetable (hybrid) fuseAVAILABLE MODELSModel NumberOperating VoltageSRB 504 ST24V AC/DC354

SERIES SRB 504 STMECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D)Ambient OperatingTemperature RangeMechanical Life ExpectancyWeightMountingTYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM45mm x 100mm x 121mm(1.8" x 3.9" x 4.75")-25°C to +60°C(-13°F to +140°F)>10 7 switching cycles420 gm (0.93 lbs.)DIN rail (35mm)ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSOperating VoltagePower Consumption24V DC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%24V AC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz3.2 W (max.), 7.1 VA, plus signallingoutputsFuse (Input Power) Internal electronic Fuse F1,Tripping current > 2.5 A (Resets afterinterruption of supply voltage)Fuse (Safety Outputs)Switching Capacity(Safety Outputs)6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)250V AC, 6 A Resistive(inductive with suitable surge supressor)Switching Capacity 24V DC, 2 A(Auxiliary Contacts)Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1Pick-up Delay≤ 400 ms auto startDrop-out Delay≤ 30 ms (at emergency stop)≤ 80 ms (at power failure)Contact Type & Materials AgSnO, AgNi self cleaning,positive-guidedContact ResistanceAir Clearance &Creepage DistanceCable Connections100 mOhm (max. in new state)DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2• Self-lifting, plug-in screw terminalsfor 13 to 20 AWG• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013TERMINAL CONNECTIONSSupply VoltageMonitored Input #1 (N.C.)Monitored Input #2 (N.C.)Safety Output #1 (N.O.)A1A2S11S12S21S2213 14Safety Output #2 (N.O.)Safety Output #3 (N.O.)Safety Output #4 (N.O.)Feedback Monitoring23 2433 3443 44X1X2Safety Output #5 (N.O.)Manually-monitored(Trailing Edge) ResetAutomatic ResetAuxiliary Output (N.C.)53 54X3X4X4X561 62Auxiliary Output(PNP-Semiconductor)Y1 Y2 Y3S31JumpersS328355

SERIES PROTECT-IE-02 &PROTECT-IE-11Input Expansion ModuleTECHNICAL FEATURESDescriptionThe Protect-IE is designed for use as an accessory forSchmersal’s Protect Series Safety Controllers. It provides 4additional sensor inputs where required to satisfy the systemcontrol requirements. Depending on the version, the Protect-IE monitors 1 NO/1NC or 2 NC contacts. It is possible tocascade multiple units to monitor up to 80 sensors.Input VoltageNumber & Type ofOutputsNumber & Type Auxiliary(non-safety or signallingoutputs)Reset & FeedbackMonitoringTypical Input DevicesMonitoredLED DisplaysConformity to StandardsStop Category 0Safety Control CategoryRating Per EN 954-1Selected Features24 VDC2 N.O. (dry contacts) to mastersafety controller4 – 24 VDC (Y1-Y4)Performed by master controller• E-stops• Interlocks• Coded-magnetsGreen LEDs for:•UB (voltage at input terminals)• Y1-Y4 (signalling output)UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)(In preparation)A function of the master safetycontroller (mounted in samecontrol cabinet), with a maximumof Control Category 3• Cage-clamp terminals• Cross-short recognition• Electronic fuse• Compatible with all SRBProtect Series models with2 N.C. inputsFront ViewModel NumberProtect-IE-02Protect-IE-11AVAILABLE MODELSMonitoring Configurationof Sensors2 NC1 NO/1 NCOperatingVoltage24 VDC24 VDCNote: Screw terminals are also available. Add -SK to the ModelNumber.356

SERIES PROTECT-IE-02 & PROTECT-IE-11MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONSDimensions (W x H x D)Ambient OperatingTemperature RangeMechanical Life ExpectancyWeightMounting48mm x 126mm x 61mm(1.89" x 4.96" x 2.4")-25°C to +55°C(-13°F to +131°F)>10 7 switching cycles140 gmDIN railTypical Wiring Diagram (Model Protect-IE-02 shown)ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONSOperating VoltagePower ConsumptionFuse (input power)Fuse (outputs)Switching Capacity(outputs)Switching Capacity(auxiliary contacts)Pick-up DelayDrop-out DelayContact ResistanceAir Clearance &Creepage DistanceCable Connections24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripplemax. 10%1.7 W max.; plus Y1-Y4Internal electronic fuse,tripping current > 100 mA2 A slow-blow24V, 2 A Resistive(inductive with suitable suppressor)24 VDC, 100 mA (Y1-Y4)≤ 20 ms≤ 20 ms100 mOhm (max. in new state)DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2• Cage-clamp terminals formin. 0.08mm 2 & max. 2.5mm 2• Stranded or multi-core withwire end ferruleTerminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013Terminal Connections (Model Protect-IE-02 shown)Supply VoltageOutput #1(N.O.)Output #2(N.O.)Signalling Outputs(24 VDC)A1A213 1423 24Y1Y2Y3Y4Monitored Input#1A (N.C.)Monitored Input#1B (N.C.)Monitored Input#2A (N.C.)Monitored Input#2B (N.C.)+ S1– S2+ S3– S4Monitored Input#3A (N.C.)Monitored Input#3B (N.C.)Monitored Input#4A (N.C.)Monitored Input#4B (N.C.)8+ S5– S6+ S7– S8357

358SaferbyDesign

APPENDICESTopicPage• Frequently Asked Questions Regarding Man-MachineSafeguarding Requirements & Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360• Frequently Asked Questions Regarding Safety Light Curtains . . . . . . . . . . . 388• Selected Machine Safeguarding Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409• Machine Safety Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415• Selected Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419• NEMA, UL, CSA & IEC Ingress Protection Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420359

360

TABLE OF CONTENTSTopicPageI. Man-Machine Safeguarding Principles and Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322II. Control Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332III. Risk Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336IV. Safety Standards, CE Marking and the European Machinery Directive . . 340V. Safety Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343VI. Applications and Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Positive-Break ContactsPositive-Mode MountingActuatorGap ToleranceNormally-Closed Contacts(for monitoring)Normally-Open Contacts(for machine control)ActuatorNormally-Closed ContactsOpenNormally-Open ContactsClosedPositive-Guided ContactsRisk Assessment361

I. Man-Machine SafeguardingPrinciples & Practices1Why should machine guard interlocks be“tamper resistant”?Safety professionals recognize that, in many factories,workers often override or bypass safeguards intended toprotect them from injury. Reported motivation includesreal or perceived inconvenience, production incentives,familiarity with the equipment, or simply the challengepresented by the presence of the safeguard to be defeated.Consequently, manufacturers are increasingly recognizingthe need for, and their obligation to provide, safetyinterlocks which are not easily defeated/bypassed by theoperator or maintenance personnel.Additionally, safety standards-making groups encourageuse of interlocks which are not easily defeated using simple,readily-available means (such as a paper clip, tape,rubber band, piece of rope, screwdriver, etc.).For example, the American National StandardsInstitute’s (ANSI) B11.19 2003, Reference Standard forSafeguarding Machine Tools specifically requires:. Barrier guards that protect against unauthorizedadjustment or circumvention.. Interlock devices that are not easily bypassed.. Reduced liabilityWith the growing number of product liability cases, companiesare recognizing the benefits of designing safetycircuits with interlock devices that are difficult to defeat.To further reduce their liability exposure, firms are selectingonly those devices that have been tested and certifiedfor use in safety applications by a recognized, independentthird-party agency.Manufacturers are encouraged to surpass safety designexpectations. As cited at a recent DESIGN NEWS seminarentitled “Product Liability — A Survival Kit for the90’s”, jurors expect companies to go beyond mere compliance.They give greater benefit to firms who havedesigned their products with the latest state-of-the-artmachine guarding safety devices.2What is meant by the term “difficult to defeat”when related to safety interlock switches insafety standards such as ANSI B11.19, ANSIB11.20, ANSI-RIA 15.02, OSHA 1910.212, et al?“Difficult to defeat” is a subjective term related to workers’propensity to override or bypass safety devicesintended to protect them from injury. Colloquially itmeans that the relevant devices or systems cannot bedefeated or bypassed using readily available means(such as a piece of wire, tape, simple hand tool, etc.). Itimplies the basic safety interlock switch design serves asa deterrent to easily overriding or bypassing its intendedfunction.362

3How is this requirement (“difficult to defeat”)being addressed by safety interlock switchmanufacturers?Safety interlock switch manufacturers are addressingthis requirement by:. Designing two-piece keyed interlocks which feature ageometrically-unique actuating key and associatedoperating mechanism which function together todeter “bypassing”.. Designing “coded-magnet” sensors whose multiplereed contacts can only be actuated in the presenceof a matched magnetic field array.. Encouraging “positive-mode” mounting of singlepieceinterlock switches.4What are “positive-break” safety interlocks?“Positive-break” safety interlocks are electromechanicalswitches designed with normally-closed (NC) electricalcontacts which, upon switch actuation, are forced toopen by a non-resilient mechanical drive mechanism.(Spring actuators are not considered positive-breakmechanisms.)One example of a “positive-break” safety interlock isshown in the photo below. This third-party certified andwidely used safety switch features a two-piece construction:an electromechanical switching mechanism and ageometrically-unique actuator key.A simple illustration of this design concept is shown inFigure 2.The actuator key is typically mounted to a movable guard– such as an access door, protective grating, equipmenthood, or plexiglass safety cover. When the guard isclosed, the actuator mates with the electromechanicalswitching mechanism. Upon opening of the movableguard, the actuator key mechanically rotates a cammechanism – forcing the NC electrical contacts to openthe safety circuit.For machine applications with residual motion after shutdown,key actuated interlocks are available with a solenoidlatch – which, in conjunction with a time-delay,motion detector, position sensor or other machinery statusmonitor, can delay access to hazardous areas untilsafe conditions exist.Four optionalactuator keyentry locations(one on backof unit)Actuator keytypically mounted tomovable guard“Positive-break” switchmechanism, typicallymounted to guardframeFIGURE 1363

364FIGURE 2Conventional versus Positive-Break Contacts

5Are conventional electromechanical limitswitches designed with “positive-break”contacts?Conventional “limit” switches are typically designed touse a spring force to open normally-closed electricalcontacts. Such designs are subject to two potential failuremodes:. Spring failure. Inability of the spring force to overcome “stuck” or“welded” contacts.When “actuated,” either situation may result in an unsafecondition due to failure to open normally-closed contacts.Consequently, such designs are not certified orrecognized as suitable for safety applications.SCHMERSAL offers several “limit” switches designedwith “positive-break” contacts in both snap-acting andslow-action models for use in safety applications.6How can I recognize “positive-break” safetyinterlock switches?Devices which feature a “positive-break” design carry thefollowing internationally-recognized (IEC) safety symbol:These designs meet the international requirementsestablished for such safety interlock switches.Typically, the positive-break symbolcan be found on products as part ofproduct specification identification,as shown below.FIGURE 3365

7What is meant by a “positive linkage” switchactuator, and why is it recommended for safetyapplications?A “positive linkage” switch actuator is designed to eliminatepossible slippage between the actuator and itsmounting shaft. Examples of such designs are pinned,square and serrated shafts (see Figure 4, below).PinnedActuatorSquareSerratedPositive LinkageFIGURE 48What is “positive-mode” mounting and why is itessential in safety applications?“Positive-mode” mounting assures that an electromechanicalsafety interlock switch is positively-actuatedwhen equipment or machinery shut-down is desired.Safe “Positive-Mode” Mounting (Figure 5)When mounted in the positive-mode, the non-resilientmechanical mechanism which forces the normallyclosed (N.C.) contacts to open is directly driven by thesafety guard. In this mounting mode, opening the safetyguard physically forces the N.C. contacts to open whenthe guard is open.366FIGURE 5POSITIVE-MODE INSTALLATION

Unsafe “Negative-Mode” Mounting (Figure 6)When mounted in the “negative-mode,” the force appliedto open the normally-closed (N.C.) safety circuit contactsis provided by an internal spring. In this mounting modethe N.C. contacts may not open when the safety guard is“Open.” (Here welded/stuck contacts, or failure of thecontact-opening spring, may result in exposing themachine operator to a hazardous/unsafe area of themachinery.)Positive-mode installation is especially important whenusing single-piece safety interlock switches. This installationmode takes full advantage of the device’s “positivebreak”design — using the external force applied by thesafety guard to open the N.C. contacts.FIGURE 6NEGATIVE-MODE INSTALLATION9What are the risks of installing single-piece,safety interlock switches in the “negativemode”?When mounted in the “negative-mode” (see Figure 6above), single-piece safety interlock switches can beeasily defeated/circumvented by the operator … oftensimply by taping down the switch actuator when the safetyguard is open.In addition, spring-driven, normally-closed contacts canfail to open due to sticking, contact welding, or a springfailure.Under such circumstances the operator or maintenancepersonnel may be exposed to an unsafe or hazardouscondition.Consequently, where possible, two-piece, key-actuated,tamper-resistant safety interlocks are recommended.These devices are designed to be difficult to defeat,while providing the assurance of safety circuit interruptioninherent with “positive-break” interlock switchdesigns.367

10What are “self-checking,” “redundancy,”and “single-fault tolerance”?Self-Checking: The performing of periodic self-diagnosticson a safety control circuit to ensure critical individualcomponents are functioning properly. Faults or failures inselected components will result in system shut-down.Redundancy: In safety applications, redundancy is theduplication of control circuits/components such that if onecomponent/circuit should fail, the other (redundant) component/circuitwill still be able to generate a stop signal.When coupled with a “self-checking” feature, a safety circuitcomponent failure, or component failure within thesafety circuit monitoring module or safety relay module,will be automatically detected and the machine shut downuntil the failure is corrected.Single-Fault Tolerance: A safety circuit is considered tobe single-fault tolerant if no foreseeable single fault willprevent normal stopping action from taking place.Rugged, “fail-to-safe,” safety circuit controllers (often calledsafety relay modules) are also available that incorporatethe above features to satisfy the “control reliability” requirementsof existing domestic and international safety standards.11Are cable-pull switches acceptable for use inE-Stop circuits?OSHA and the European safety standards permit use ofcable-pull switches in E-Stop circuits provided they:(1) Operate whether the cable is pulled or goes slack (e.g.breaks or is cut).(2) Feature positive-break NC contacts.(3) Must be manually reset before the controlled equipmentcan be restarted.12In addition, European Norm EN418 requires that theswitch latch at the same time that the contacts changestate.SCHMERSAL offers a variety of cable-pull switches thatmeet both EN418 and the OSHA guidelines. These arecomplemented by several safety circuit controllers andsafety relay modules designed expressly for use in E-Stopcircuits.Are reed switches recommended or acceptablein safety circuits and, if so, under whatconditions?’Reed switches may be used as interlocks in safety circuitsprovided:. they are designed to be actuated by a specific(coded) magnetic-field array matched to the switch’sreed-array pattern.. they are used in combination with a safety controllercapable of periodically checking the integrity and performanceof the reed switch contacts.One such combination is shown in Figure 8, below.Coded-magnets are required to actuate the sensor, thusmaking it difficult for the operator or maintenance personnelto “defeat” or “bypass.”The safety controller features multiple safety relays withpositive-guided contacts, redundant control circuits, andself-diagnostics that check safety system operation.368

In the event of a component or interconnection wiringfailure in the safety circuit, or in the safety circuit controller,the unit will shut down the system in a “safe” state.Note: Reed switches used without an approved safetycircuit controller do not satisfy safety requirements.Reed switches are susceptible to stickingdue to power surges, shock, or vibration.Additionally, reed switches tend to fail in the“closed” position. This failure mode cannot beaddressed by using a fuse. To ensure reliability ofa safety circuit using reed-type switches, use of asafety controller is required. Depending upon theapplication, it is also recommended that they featuretwo independent contacts to permit dualchannelmonitoring.FIGURE 813What is meant by “controlled access”?“Controlled access” generally refers to a movablemachine guard that is designed such that it can only beopened under specific conditions. Typically such movableguards restrict access to an area of a machine whichcontinues to present a hazard to the operator immediatelyupon the removal of power. In these situationsopening of the guard is prevented until the hazardouscondition has abated.This is usually achieved by a solenoid-latching interlockswitch controlled by a motion detector, position sensor,time-delay or other machine-status monitor which releasesthe interlock (allowing the operator to open the guard)only after safe conditions exist.14What is “diverse redundancy,” and how does itheighten the reliability of a safety circuit?“Diverse redundancy” is the use of different types ofcomponents and software in the construction of redundantcircuits/systems performing the same function. Itsuse is intended to minimize or eliminate failure of redundantcircuits and components due to the same cause(“common-cause” failure). Such designs serve toincrease the functional reliability of the safety circuits andsystems.369

15Why are safety interlock switches and safetycontrollers required?For machinery builders who export to the EuropeanUnion, the use of such components designed expresslyfor machine guarding safety systems is mandated by therequirements of the European Machinery Directive andthe need to comply with relevant safety standards. Theserequirements include:. Use of interlock switches that feature positive-breaknormally closed contacts.. Use of interlock switches or machine guarding positionsensors, which are tamper-resistant/difficult todefeat.. (Where risk level dictates) the need to monitor theintegrity of the safety circuit components and itsinterconnection wiring to ensure the system willfunction properly when called upon to do so.For machinery builders selling in the U.S., the use ofsuch components is encouraged by the safety guidelinesand standards of the Federal government and severalindustry standards-making groups including:. OSHA (Occupational Health & Safety Administration). ANSI (American National Standards Institute). UL (Underwriters Laboratories). ISA (Instrument Society of America). SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers).16As an OEM, what are the benefits of usingpositive-break and tamper-resistant interlocksin safety applications?Proper selection and installation of safety interlocks whichhave been tested and certified by an approved, independentsafety testing body benefits the equipment manufacturerby:. Providing greater protection from injury for machineoperators, maintenance personnel, set-up and otheruser personnel.. Satisfying international safety regulations … a must forU.S. equipment manufacturers who wish to export tothe European Economic Community.. Enhancing product marketability.. Satisfying safety standards and guidelines againstwhich manufacturer’s responsibility, in the event of aninjury, is judged.. Reducing liability risks.. Minimizing insurance claims/costs.370

17As an “in-plant” user, what are the benefits ofusing positive-break, and/or tamper-resistantinterlocks in safety applications?Proper selection and installation of such safety interlockswhich have been tested and certified by an approved,independent testing body benefit the in-plant user by:. Providing greater protection from injury for machineoperators, maintenance personnel, and otheremployees.. Satisfying safety standards and guidelines againstwhich employer responsibility, in the event of aninjury, is measured.. Reducing the indirect costs associated with workerinjury (e.g. lost production, loss of skilled workers,reduced productivity due to employee stress, etc.). Reducing liability risks.. Minimizing insurance claims/costs.18What are the benefits of using SCHMERSALsafety interlock switches and related controls?While SCHMERSAL is not the only manufacturer of suchdevices, there are a number of factors which favor yourconsideration. These include:(1) All SCHMERSAL safety interlocks have been thirdpartytested and certified to meet relevant directives— all are CE-compliant.(2) Each can be provided with a Declaration ofConformity.(3) Each has been designed expressly for safety applicationsto meet the requirements of ANSI, OSHAand the European Machinery Directive.(4) SCHMERSAL’s individually-coded keyed interlocks(AZ16zi, AZ17zi, and AZM170zi) provide the highestlevel of tamper resistance.(5) SCHMERSAL’s safety interlocks and related controllershave been proven in thousands of installationsworldwide.(6) SCHMERSAL’s microprocessor-based Series AESsafety controllers feature integrated systems diagnosticswhich, using a visual colored LED displaypattern, help identify the type of system fault that hasoccurred and its location (to minimize downtime).(7) SCHMERSAL’s safety controllers are easily integratedwith their more than 200 “positive-break” interlockswitches and coded-magnet sensors to achieve anydesired safety level. And, they are also compatiblewith other manufacturers’ safety-approved components.371

II. Control Reliability19What is meant by “control reliability”?“Control reliability” implies that the safety device or systemis designed, constructed and installed such that thefailure of a single component within the device or systemshall not prevent normal machine stopping action fromtaking place … but shall prevent a successive machinecycle from being initiated.20How does this definition of “control reliability”relate to the European machinery safetyrequirements?Safety systems which are “single component failure controlreliable” meet the requirements of a Category 3safety-related control system as defined by the harmonizedEuropean machinery safety standard EN954-1.372

21What are “positive-guided” or “force-guided”relays, and why are they preferred over conventionalrelays when designing safety systems?Positive-guided relays feature N.O. and N.C. contactswhich operate interdependently. For such relays, the N.O.and N.C. contacts can never be closed simultaneously. Inthe event one of the contacts welds closed, the other contactscannot change state. For example, should one ormore of the N.O. contacts weld/stick shut when closed, theN.C. contact(s) will remain open with a minimum gap of0.5mm.This unique feature is desirable in machine safety circuitswhere “fail- to-safe” and/or “single component failure controlreliability” is desired. The positive relationship (interdependentoperation) between N.O. and N.C. contacts permitself-checking/monitoring of the performance of thesedevices. Such relays provide a higher level of safety systemintegrity and reliability.A simple illustration of the interdependent function of positive-guidedcontacts is shown in Figure 9.FIGURE 9POSITIVE-GUIDED VS. CONVENTIONAL CONTACTS373

22What are “redundant” logic circuits, and whatare their benefits in safety circuit applications?“Control reliability” implies that the safety device or systemis designed, constructed and installed such that thefailure of a single component within the device or systemshall not prevent normal machine stopping action fromtaking place … but shall prevent a successive machinecycle from being initiated. To achieve this, safety controllersare typically designed with dual logic circuits,each of which can provide safety circuit checking/monitoring.These functionally-equivalent logic circuitscross-monitor each other, as well as checking thesafety circuit for component failures, short circuits, opencircuits, etc.Since these controllers detect faults in the safety circuitcomponents and interconnection wiring to effectmachine shutdown, such “redundant” self-monitoring circuitsenhance safety system reliability. In so doing theyprovide a higher level of safety for the machine operatorand maintenance personnel.To heighten the integrity and reliability of these units,SCHMERSAL engineers have had each of the redundantlogic circuit microprocessors programmed by a differentsoftware specialist … thus reducing the probabilityof a simultaneous logic-circuit malfunction due to aprogramming error.Use of such safety controllers, in combination with safetyinterlock switches, tamper-resistant coded-magnetswitches, and emergency cable-pull switches enablescontrol engineers to achieve the “single component failurecontrol reliability” required by OSHA, ANSI, and internationalmachine guarding safety standards/guidelines.23What characterizes “fail-to-safe” operation?“Fail-to-safe” safety devices are designed such that a componentfailure will cause the device to attain rest in a safecondition. This term is generally applied to electronic safetyinterlock systems using non-mechanical presence orposition sensors (such as reed switches, proximity switches,et al) and/or safety controllers. Such controllers areoften designed to feature redundancy, self-diagnostics,and positive-guided contacts.374

24Why should I upgrade or enhance my currentsafety interlock or safety barrier design?Heightened awareness and concern for worker safety has,and is, precipitating compelling reasons for such upgradesor enhancements. These are embodied in a variety ofindustrial safety standards and guidelines against whichmachinery manufacturers’ and users’ level of responsibilityand degree of liability are measured.Several of these current and emerging standards andguidelines are listed under references at the end of thisbooklet. The following excerpts are provided simply toillustrate the importance and need to consider providingnew or improved safety systems.OSHA GuidelinesOSHA 1910.212 “General Requirements for allmachines”: “One or more methods of machine guardingshall be provided to protect the operator and otheremployees from hazards… The guarding device shall bein conformity with any appropriate Standards thereof…”25OSHA 1910.5 “Applicability of Standards”: “Any Standardshall apply according to its terms to any employment andplace of employment in any industry even though particularStandards are prescribed for the industry…”OSHA 1910.6 “Incorporation by Reference”: “TheStandards of agencies of the U.S. Government, andorganizations which are not agencies of the U.S.Government which are incorporated by reference in thispart, have the same force and effect as other Standards inthis part…”ANSI B11.19-2003 Machine Tool Safeguarding…7.2.6: “The user shall ensure that barrier guards areinstalled, maintained, and operated so as to protectagainst unauthorized adjustment or circumvention…”Annex C: Performance of safety-related function(s)“Control reliability is not provided by simpleredundancy. There must be monitoring toassure that redundancy is maintained. Controlreliability uses monitoring and checking todetermine that a discernable component, module,device or system has failed and that thehazardous motion (or situation) is stopped, orprevented from starting or restarting. Controlreliability ensures that a failure of the controlsystem or device will not result in the loss of thesafety-related function(s).”What is “fault exclusion” and how does it affectsafety circuit design?In selected situations the occurrence of known possiblecomponent failures (“faults”) can be minimized by thesafety system design or component selection. Simpleexamples are:(1) the use of an overrated contactor to preclude the possibilityof contact welding.(2) design of a machine guard such that the interlockswitch actuator cannot be damaged.(3) use of positive-break safety interlock switches togetherwith a safety controller, such that the possibility of acontact weld resulting in the loss of the safety functionis eliminated.The elimination of such faults are a compromise betweenthe technical safety requirements and the theoretical probabilityof their occurrence. Design engineers are permittedto exclude such faults when constructing the machinery’ssafety system. However, each “fault exclusion” must beidentified, justified, and documented in the Technical Filesubmitted to satisfy the European Machinery Directive.375

III. Risk Assessment26What is “risk assessment”?Various machines present different types of hazards andrisks to the operator and/or maintenance personnel. Riskassessment is a systematic means of quantifying theserisk levels in order to determine the scope of the requiredsafety system needed to protect personnel from possibleinjury.27How do I go about assessing the risk level presentedby a machine or manufacturing process?Different machines and processes have different levels ofrelative risk. Determining this relative risk level involvesevaluating four major factors. These include:(1) Severity of the potential injury.(2) Frequency of exposure to the potential hazard.(3) Possibility of avoiding the hazard if it occurs.One approach provides guidelines for risk assessmentbased upon five defined levels of risk. These levels rangefrom the lowest risk (level B) in which the severity of injuryis slight and/or there is relatively little likelihood of occurrence,to the highest risk (level 4) in which the likelihood ofa severe injury (if the safety system fails) is relatively high.This particular method is depicted in Figure 10, in whichthe following qualitative definitions apply:S: Severity of potential injuryS1: slight injury (bruise)S2: severe injury (amputation or death)F: Frequency of exposure to potential hazardF1: infrequent exposureF2: frequent to continuous exposureP: Possibility of avoiding the hazard if it occurs (generallyrelated to the speed/frequency of movement ofhazard point and distance to hazard point)P1: possibleP2: less possibleFor further details of the above, the reader is referred tothe EN 954-1 (Safety of Machinery: Principles for theDesign of Related Control Systems).Selection of the Safety Category:A brief overview of these safety categories is providedin Figure 11.Preferred categoriesPossible categories, which require additionalmeasuresOver-dimensioned measures for the relevant riskFIGURE 10Another methodology is outlined in ANSI’s TechnicalReport B11.TR3. This guideline suggests a “task-based”review of potential hazards by both the equipment designerand the ultimate end-user.376

28What are the defined levels of relative risk formachinery within which the safety systemshould be designed?The European harmonized standard, EN954-1 (Safety ofMachinery — Design of Safety Related ControlSystems), outlines five relative levels of risk associatedwith the operation/maintenance of machinery. Thegreater the possibility and/or severity of injury, thegreater the requirements are on the design and integrityof the machine safety systems.In general, these levels of risk are defined as follows:º SafetyCat.BGeneral SafetySystem RequirementsSafety system designed tomeet operational requirementsand withstand expected externalinfluences.(This category is usually satisfiedby selecting componentscompatible with the applicationconditions … e.g. temperature,voltage, load, etc.)1 Safety system must meet therequirements of Category B, butmust use “well-tried” safety principlesand components.“Well-tried” principles and componentsinclude those which:. avoid certain faults … e.g.short circuits.. reduce probability of faults… e.g. over-rating selected components,over-dimensioning forstructural integrity.. detect faults early … e.g.ground fault protection.. assure the mode of the fault… e.g. ensure an open circuitwhen it is vital that power beinterrupted should an unsafe conditionarise.. limit the consequences ofthe fault.2 Safety system must meet therequirements of Category B. Inaddition the machine shall beprevented from starting if a faultis detected upon application ofmachine power, or upon periodicchecking during operation.(This suggests the use of asafety relay module with redundancyand self-checking. Singlechanneloperation is permittedprovided that the input devices …such as machine guard interlocks,E-stop pushbuttons, et al… are tested for proper operationon a regular basis.)General SafetySystem BehaviorA single fault orfailure in the safetysystem canlead to the loss ofthe safety function.A single fault orfailure in the safetysystem canlead to the loss ofthe safety function.However, theuse of “well tried”safety principlesand safety componentsresults in ahigher level ofsafety system reliability.Here, too, a singlefault or failurein the safety systemcan lead tothe loss of thesafety functionbetween thechecking intervals.However, periodicchecking maydetect faults andpermit timelymaintenance ofthe safety system.SafetyCat.General SafetySystem Requirements3 Safety system must meet therequirements of Category B. Inaddition the safety control systemmust be designed such that asingle fault will not lead to theloss of the safety function. And,where practical, the single faultwill be detected.(This requires redundancy inthe safety circuit monitoring moduleand the use of dual-channelmonitoring of the input and outputdevices such as machineguard interlock switches, E-stoppushbuttons, safety relays, etc.)4* Safety system must meet therequirements of Category B. Inaddition the safety control systemmust be designed such that asingle fault will not lead to theloss of the safety function andwill be detected at or before thenext demand on the safety system.If this is not possible, thenthe accumulation of multiplefaults must not lead to the loss ofthe safety function.(This also requires redundancyin the safety circuit and the use ofdual-channel monitoring of theinput and output devices such asmachine guard interlock switches,E-stop pushbuttons, safety relays,etc. Here the number of allowablefaults will be determined by theapplication, technology used, andsystem structure.)General SafetySystem BehaviorHere a singlefault or failure inthe safety systemwill not lead to theloss of the safetyfunction and,where possible,will be detected.Here a singlefault or failure inthe safety systemwill not lead to theloss of the safetyfunction, and it willbe detected intime to prevent theloss of the safetyfunction.*Category 4 safety requirements are usually associatedwith extremely high-risk applications. Since general machinedesign practice respects classic safety hierarchy, in whichmost machine hazards are either:designed out,guarded against (if they cannot be designed out), and,. (as a last resort) warned against,Category 4 requirements may arise relatively infrequently.FIGURE 11377

29Which of these risk category safety systemrequirements is consistent with OSHA andANSI’s requirement for a “control reliable”safety circuit?Within the above defined levels of risk, a Category 3 safetysystem would satisfy OSHA and ANSI’s requirement fora “control reliable” safety circuit. Here use of an appropriatefail-to-safe, safety controller in combination with one ormore safety interlock switches and/or coded-magnet sensorswill meet the single component failure detectionand system shutdown criteria, while preventing a successivemachine cycle from being initiated when a fault isdetected.30How can the safety system requirements, andthe requirement for machine safety system“control reliability,” be satisfied?Machine safety system control reliability can be achievedthrough use of:. Safety components which feature fail-to-safe design.. Electromechanical safety interlocks which featurepositive-break N.C. contacts.. Use of safety relays which feature positive-guidedcontacts.. Use of self-checking safety controllers.. Use of redundant monitoring/checking circuits andrelated safety system components.The selection of these components will, of course, be afunction of the application and its level of risk assessment.SCHMERSAL has available an applications andsafety circuit wiring handbook to serve as a reference forselecting, designing and wiring the appropriate safetycircuit for a given level of risk assessment.31Are safety controllers needed whenaddressing Category 1 or 2 safety systemrequirements?Category 1 and 2 safety system requirements can beachieved without the use of safety controllers. However,this requires very careful design of the safety control circuitand a thorough understanding of the standards relatedto the Machinery Directive. Use of a safety circuit controllerensures meeting Category 1 and 2 requirementswithout a time-consuming study of the machine controlsystem.378

32How common are Category 4 safety systemrequirements and how can they be satisfied?Category 4 safety system requirements are typically associatedwith extremely high-risk applications in which:(a) The severity of a potential injury is extremely high (e.g.amputation or death).(b) The employee/operator is exposed to the hazard highlyfrequently or continuously.(c) There is little possibility of the employee/operatoravoiding the hazard.Classic safety hierarchy states that dangers should be:(1) designed out;(2) guarded against, if they cannot be designed out; andthen(3) (as a last resort) warned against.When Category 4 safety requirements are encountered(that is, when the safety control system must be able todetect any single fault, or provide multiple fault tolerance,without loss of the safety function), it is important toremember these define the performance requirements ofthe overall safety system … not of the individual components.(This, of course, is true for all safety categories …not only Category 4.)In this “system” context, it is clear that safety system componentselection and design for equipment assessed as aCategory 4 risk will be dictated by the number of faults thesystem can tolerate without loss of the safety function.Hence the appropriate safety system components areapplication-specific, requiring a thorough understanding ofthe operation of the machinery and its control system.Use of a safety controller rated at Category 4 does not, initself, assure the overall safety system meets this level ofperformance requirements.Since this classic safety hierarchy reflects generalmachine design practice, few machines present Category4 risk conditions.379

IV. Safety Standards,Marking and theEuropean Machinery Directive33What is the “” mark and what does it mean?The “CE” mark (for Conformite Europeene) is a symbolapplied to finished products and machinery which meetapplicable European Directives. For electrical and electronic“finished products,” these include the Low VoltageDirective and, where relevant, the ElectromagneticCompatibility (EMC) Directive.34No, the CE mark is not a safety mark. It simply serves toadvise European customs officials that the product meetsall applicable European Directives, allowing it to be placed35The CE mark on a machine indicates that the machineas a whole conforms to the requirements of theEuropean Machinery Directive (EMD). The EMD statesthat the machine must comply with the Essential Health& Safety requirements and the EMC.Does the mark on a safety interlock switch,coded-magnet sensor, safety controller or otherfinished product intended for use in a safetycircuit signify the product is safe?on the European Economic Market Area (The EuropeanUnion and the countries of Iceland, Liechtenstein andNorway).Are third-party approvals needed to apply themark to safety components?Third-party examination by an approved, independenttesting agency or notified body is required for some safetycomponents. Specific products include light curtains,safety mats, and two-hand controls. In addition somecountries, such as Germany, require third-party certificationfor safety circuit controllers.For most other safety components (such as interlockswitches, coded-magnet sensors, limit switches, et al)self-certification by the manufacturer is acceptable.380Despite this liberty, as policy SCHMERSAL has all oftheir safety products certified by an independent thirdparty (such as the BG).Whether third-party or self-certified, all CE-marked componentsmust be documented by a Declaration ofConformity. This document, signed by a highly positionedtechnical manager (e.g. Director of Engineering, et al),lists all standards and directives to which the productconforms. In addition, component manufacturers mustmaintain technical files documenting test results, etc.

36Are machine guarding safety interlock switchesand related safety control productssubject to -marking?SCHMERSAL considers all of their safety interlockswitches, sensors and related control accessories asproducts requiring mandatory CE-marking. Consequentlythese products are designed to meet the EMCand Low Voltage Directives as required. The CE-markingon SCHMERSAL’s products affirms their compliance withthese applicable Directives.37Since -marking of safety products is (formost items) a self-certification process, howcan a user be assured “ -marked” productstruly meet relevant European Directives?Users of CE-marked products have three vehicles ofassurance at their disposal. These include an ECDeclaration of Conformity, EC Type-Examination, andType-Certification (Technical Report). Each of these isdescribed below.EC Declaration of ConformityThe Declaration of Conformity is mandatory for all productsthat are CE-marked. It is also mandatory formachine components which, if they fail, could lead to adangerous or hazardous condition on the machine.These mandates are defined in the European MachineryDirective, and must be issued by the manufacturer for allproducts that are CE-marked.This document, signed by a highly-positioned technicalmanager (e.g. Director of Product Development, Directorof Research, Head of Engineering, et al), lists all theStandards and Directives to which the product conforms.It is a self-certification procedure normally undertaken bythe manufacturer.All SCHMERSAL safety products have a Declaration ofConformity document according to the EuropeanMachinery Directive mandates.EC Type-ExaminationThis is a third-party examination conducted by anapproved, independent testing agency/notified body(such as the BG in Germany), and is compulsory forselected safety equipment. Here the product is investigatedto confirm that it conforms to all the Standards andDirectives listed in the Declaration of Conformity.The examination procedure, the definition of anapproved independent testing agency/notified body, andthe types of safety equipment for which this examinationis mandatory is defined in the European MachineryDirective. (Specific products for which an EC Type-Examination is mandated include light curtains, safetymats, and two-hand controls. In addition the Germanauthorities include safety circuit controllers as requiringsuch testing.)This examination may only be conducted once, by oneapproved body, whose findings are then valid for theentire European Economic Community.All SCHMERSAL safety controllers are so tested andcertified. And each can be supplied with an “EC Type-Examination Certificate” issued by a recognized,approved body/notified body.Type Certification (Technical Report)This is similar to the EC Type-Examination, but is notcompulsory. Here the product is investigated by anapproved independent testing laboratory (usually by anotified body) to confirm that it conforms to all theStandards and Directives listed in the Declaration ofConformity. This examination may be carried out in asmany countries and as often as required.All SCHMERSAL safety products not covered by an ECType-Examination certificate (such as our electromechanicalsafety interlock switches) have been so testedand certified. And each can be supplied with a “TypeCertificate” issued by a recognized, notified body (e.g.BG, TÜV).381

38To what type machines does the EuropeanMachinery Directive apply?The European Machinery Directive applies to all machinerythat is powered and has moving parts. Excluded aremanually-powered equipment, motor vehicles, medicalmachinery and other special equipment … some ofwhich is regulated by other legislation under EuropeanCommunity Directives.39Who is responsible for certifying that anaffected machine complies with the “essentialhealth and safety requirements” embodied inthe European Machinery Directive?For most classes of machines, the affixing of the CEmark to demonstrate compliance with relevant EuropeanDirectives is a self-certification process. For the mostdangerous types of machines (Schedule 2, Annex IV ofthe European Union Machinery Directive, such as presses,sawing machines, manually-loaded injection/compressionplastics molding machines and otherslisted in this Schedule), certification must be done by arecognized, independent, third party (known in Europeas a “notified body”). A list of notified bodies is availablefrom The Official Journal of the European Communities,U.S. Contact, UNIPUB; Lanham, MD.While self-certification of many machines is legallyacceptable, many machinery buyers prefer purchasingmachines which have been evaluated and certified byindependent, recognized third parties. This preference, insome cases, has been precipitated by sale of self-certifiedmachines which were found to not meet relevantDirectives.40What are “Consensus Standards,”and how dothey relate to OSHA guidelines?“Consensus Standards” are those industry standardsdeveloped by groups of professionals representing across-section of firms within that industry. Examples arestandards prepared by ANSI (American NationalStandards Institute), ISA (Instrument Society ofAmerica), ASME (American Society of MechanicalEngineers), SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers) andRIA (Robotics Industry Association). These standardsprovide safety guidelines for machinery designers andusers.OSHA specifically requires that guarding devices at thepoint-of-operation be in conformity with any appropriatestandards (which include any OSHA or “industry consensusstandards”). Hence OSHA may cite such consensusstandards as a basis for their findings andenforcement.382

V. Safety Controllers41What are “safety controllers” andwhat are their functions?Safety controllers (such as SCHMERSAL’s AES andAZR Series) are connected between machine guardinginterlock/E-Stop switches and the machine’s stop controlelements (such as a motor contactor or control relay).These controllers contain dual, self-checking safety systemmonitoring circuits and positive-guided outputrelays. Each is designed to monitor faults in the safetysystem’s interlock/E-Stop switches, the safety circuitinterconnection wiring, and their own internal monitoringcircuits and output relays.Detection of a fault in the machine’s safety circuit or of anopen machine guard, disables the module’s output signal(s)facilitating machine stoppage, and/or prevents therestarting of the machine until the fault has been corrected.In addition to detecting open guards and/or actuated E-Stop switches, safety controllers are capable of detectingthe following types of safety system faults:. “Short-circuit” in interconnection wiring. “Short-to-ground” in interconnection wiring. Welded contact in controlled output device. (such as positive-guided motor contactor). Failure of safety controller’s positive-guided relay(s). Fault in safety system monitoring circuit. Insufficient operating voltage.Some microprocessor-based safety controllers, such asSCHMERSAL’S AES Series, also feature integrated systemdiagnostics with visual LED outputs which indicatesfault type and location — thus minimizing machine downtime.. Guard monitoring switch/sensor failure. “Open-circuit” in interconnection wiringSafety controllers detect and locate system faults. Units are available for use with guard interlock switches,coded-magnet sensors, safety edges, light curtains, E-stops and emergency cable-pull switches to satisfya broad range of application requirements.383

42Why should safety controllers be used withsafety interlocks/E-Stops?Safety controllers increase the reliability of the machineguarding safety system. Their ability to detect safety circuitfaults, and shut down the machine until the fault iscorrected, greatly heighten the safety level.43What is the difference between a single anddual-channel safety controller, and whenshould each be used?A single-channel safety controller is capable of acceptingonly one (normally-closed) input. When used in safetycircuits they are unable to detect a short-circuit failure inthe interconnection wiring, or a failure of the monitoredinput to change state.A dual-channel safety controller is capable of acceptingtwo inputs; one to each of its two, redundant self-monitoringsafety circuits. When used in safety circuits theyare typically capable of detecting interconnection wiringfaults (such as short-circuits, open circuits, and groundfaults) or a failure of one of the monitored input(s) tochange state. As such they provide a higher level of safetythan single-channel units.Single-channel safety controllers are suitable for relativelylow levels of risk assessment (e.g. EN 954-1 SafetyCategories B, 1 and 2). Dual-channel units are appropriatewhen designing “control reliable” safety systems —that is, systems in which a single component failure willnot prevent normal machine stopping action from takingplace, but will prevent a successive machine cycle frombeing initiated.44How do I decide which safetycontroller to use?Safety controller selection is usually based on:(1) the type of inputs being monitored (e.g. E-Stops,interlock switches, light curtains, coded-magnet sensors,et al).(2) the number of inputs being monitored.(3) the number and type of outputs required from thesafety controller (e.g. number of parallel outputs fromthe module’s positive-guided relays and the numberof auxiliary/signaling outputs).(4) the need/desire to monitor the integrity of the positive-guidedcontacts in the controlled output device(e.g. motor contactor, control relay, et al).(5) the level of safety desired (this is usually determinedby a structured risk assessment).These application parameters will normally narrow, andsimplify, the choice of safety controller to one or twounits.384

45When is it necessary to design a safety systemto satisfy the requirements of EN 954-1Category 4?Category 4 safety requirements are usually associatedwith extremely high-risk applications. Consequently thesafety system needed to satisfy these conditions can bequite complex and costly.Since general machine design practice respects classicsafety hierarchy, most extremely high-risk hazards —that is:(a) those which the operator cannot avoid(b) those in which the operator is exposed frequently orcontinuously, and(c) those which could result in serious injury, amputationor deathConsequently for most applications it is generally notnecessary to incur the cost/complexity of Category 4safety system design. Many low-risk situations can besatisfied by safety systems that meet the requirements ofCategory B, 1 or 2 as defined by EN 954-1.In most higher-risk situations, a suitable safety system(and one which meets ANSI’s requirement for “controlreliability”) can be achieved with a system designed tomeet the Category 3 requirements of EN 954-1.When needed, Category 4 requirements can be satisfiedby proper selection from SCHMERSAL’s wide range ofCE-compliant safety interlocks and related safety controllers.are designed-out during machine development or areguarded against (if they cannot be designed-out).385

VI. Applications and Solutions46What are some of the applications in whichpositive-break and tamper-resistant safetyinterlocks are used?Positive-break and tamper-resistant safety interlocks areinherently safer alternatives to conventional industrialcomponents such as:. (Non-safety) electromechanical limit switches. Inductive proximity switches. Snap-acting position switches (without positive-break). Uncoded reed switches. Hall-effect sensors. Magnetic position switches. Photoelectric sensorsSuch conventional industrial sensors/switches are notrecommended for safety applications.For increased safety and reduced liability, only componentswhich have been tested and certified by an independent,recognized safety commission/agency are recommended.Typical applications for these safety interlocks include:. Metal cutting machine tools. Metal forming machine tools. Grinding machines. Woodworking machinery. Packaging equipment. Printing presses. Stamping/punch presses. Textile machinery. Material handling/conveyor lines. Forging equipment. Crushing machines. Sawing systems. Robot work-cell enclosures. Emergency trip-wire systems. Assembly equipment386

SaferbyDesign387

Frequently Asked QuestionsSelection & Application of Safety Light Barriers388WithGlossary ofLight CurtainTerminology

TABLE OF CONTENTSTopicPageI. Selection & Application Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318II. Safety Distance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325III. Wiring & Installation Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329IV. Standards & Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332V. Glossary of Selected Light Curtain Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333direction ofapproachreference plane389

I. Selection & Application Characteristics1What is meant by “protected height”?“Protected height” is the length of the light curtain’s active sensingarea… that is the distance from center of the first beam to thecenter of the last beam in the light curtain’s transmitter/receiverarray.2What is meant by “range” of a light curtain?“Range” is the maximum effective distance that may exist between thelight curtain’s emitter (transmitter) and its receiver. The effective rangeis generally reduced by use of reflecting mirrors and environmentalcontaminants (such as fog, smoke, steam, dust, moisture, etc.)390

3What is meant by “response time”of a light curtain?The “response time” of the light curtain is the time it takes for the lightcurtain to transmit the output (alarm) signal to the safety interface ormachine control element after the protection field has been interrupted.The overall response time of the light curtain safety system includes theresponse time of the light curtain, the response time of any interposedinterface (such as a safety controller or safety PLC), and the responsetime of the machine primary control elements (e.g. motor contactor orcontrol relay). Response time is one of the important factors that mustbe considered when calculating the proper minimum safety distance.4What is meant by “minimum object sensitivity”and does it mean the same as “optical pitch”or “beam spacing”?“Minimum object sensitivity” refers to the smallest object (diameter) thatthe light curtain can detect. It is commonly stated as the “resolution” ofthe light curtain and is also referred to as “detection capability”.“Optical” or “beam spacing” refers to the distance from the center lineof one beam to the center line of the next beam.It is important to understand that it is possible for an object to be in sucha position that it does not block the path of a single beam even thoughit is the same diameter of the optical pitch. Therefore the resolution of alight curtain is equal to the optical pitch plus one lens diameter.P=Pitch between two lensesD=Diameter of one lensR=Resolution391

5What light curtain resolutions arecommonly used?The most common light curtain resolutions are:• 14mm (0.55 inches) for finger protection• 30mm (1.25 inches) for hand protection• 50mm (2.0 inches) to 500mm (20.0 inches) for body protection.Finger DetectionHand DetectionWhole Body Protection6What do “angle of divergence” and “angle ofacceptance” mean and what are the applicationconsiderations that they imply?“Angle of divergence” is the cone angle of the emitted light from thetransmitter. “Angle of acceptance” is the cone angle within whichthe receiver will detect this emitted light. The wider the angles, theeasier it is to align the light curtain. However, one must recognizethat a wider angle of acceptance can result in possible interferencefrom another photoelectric device emitting light energy within thereceiver’s angle of acceptance. Contemporary light curtain standards(IEC 61496) require a maximum angle of divergence of± 2.5 degrees for Safety Category 4 units. (SCHMERSAL SeriesSLC/SLG light curtains feature a coded signal, and hence are notaffected by interference from other photoelectric devices).392

7What are “two box” and “three box”light curtain systems?A “three box” light curtain system consists of an emitter, a receiverand a separate safety controller (safety relay module). A “two box”system consists of an emitter and a receiver with the safety controllerfunctions integral to the emitter-receiver pair. A two box light curtainsystem generally results in lower wiring and installation cost.89What is an “OSSD”?“OSSD” is the abbreviation for “Output Signal Switching Device”(also known as the light curtain’s safety outputs). For example theSCHMERSAL Series SLC 410 light curtains have two OSSD’s (two,500mA PNP safety outputs).What is “fixed blanking” and“floating blanking”?“Fixed Blanking” is when a fixed set of adjacent light beams are renderedpermanently inactive for the purpose of allowing product orpart of the process to enter the sensing area without deactivatingthe light curtain safety outputs. An example would be the “blanking”of a small segment of the light curtain to allow finished parts to ejectfrom a machining operation through this specific “opening” in theprotected field.“Floating blanking” is when a set number (one or more) of adjacentbeams is allowed to ignore the presence of an object within theirportion of the protection field. However, unlike fixed blanking (wherethe specific set of inactive beams are fixed), “floating blanking”allows the set number of adjacent beams to “float” within protectedfield … thus allowing the object to be ignored to move within theprotected field without deactivating the light curtain safety outputs.As long as no more than the selected number of adjacent beams isinterrupted, the system remains operational and does not stop themachine. If one or more additional beams are interrupted, the lightcurtain system will provide a signal to initiate machine stoppage. Anexample would be similar to the ejected parts example above, butwhere the parts eject through a “moving opening” … that is, at differentpoints through the protected field.393

10What is “muting”?“Muting” is the provisional and automatic overriding of the light curtainsafety output function during normal, uninterrupted machinecycle operation. This is an important function in applications inwhich the light curtain or light grid must be interrupted by some partof the machine or the materials being processed without stoppingthe operation or process.An example is a palletizing system within which the palletized productmust be allowed to pass through the opening protected by thelight curtain, while the entry of a person must stop the machine.Muting is typically accomplished using additional sensing devices(such as safety limit switches or photoelectric sensors that can bechecked for functionality) in conjunction with a light curtain and amuting controller (such as SCHMERSAL’s model SCM 3R) to detectthe presence of the material/machine element and override the lightcurtain’s safety function.• materials authorized• people non-authorizedto go through the barrier394

1112What is “PSDI”?“PSDI” (Presence Sensing Device Initiation) refers to the use of thesensing device (e.g. light curtain) to activate the machine/ manufacturingprocess once it has been determined that a human is nolonger in the hazard area.I want to set up my light curtain so itoperates in PSDI mode. What are someof the requirements?Use of a light curtain in the “PSDI” mode requires that it have a maximumobject sensitivity of not less than 31.75 mm (1.25 inch) and be located atthe correct “safety distance” from the point of the hazard. “Blanking” ofthe sensing field is not permitted when operating in this mode.13What application characteristics suggest that alight curtain may be a more suitable means ofprotection than some other alternative safetydevice? (such as a safety pressure mat, interlockedmovable guards, or a laser scanner)?Some of the application characteristics that may suggest use of alight curtain are:• The hard guards require frequent (and costly) cleaning… such as in a food processing application.• The operator is required to gain frequent access to thehazardous area … such that hard guards or movableguards are inconvenient and/or compromise efficientprocess operations.• Products of different sizes/shapes are required to passthrough the guarded area without interrupting production.• A single light curtain might be less costly and may beused without compromising the safety of personnel.• Fork lifts or other vehicles must frequently enter the hazardousarea.395

14What questions might I ask to better evaluateif a light curtain is suitable solution for myapplication?Typical application “screening" questions might include:• Will the presence of dirt, dust, moisture, oil mist, orother environmental contaminants adversely affect alight curtain’s performance?• Can the light curtains be installed such that theiralignment and performance are maintained?• Can the light curtains be installed to respect therequired safety distance for the application?• Will ambient light conditions (such as welding arcs,AGV or forklift strobe lights) adversely affect the lightcurtain’s performance?396

II. Safety Distance Requirements1516How do I define the “danger zone?”The “danger zone” is that area of a machine or manufacturing cellwithin which a person will be exposed to a hazard and potentialinjury. When using safety light curtains it is important to locate themat the proper “safety distance” such that they initiate the stopping ofthe machine/process before personnel reach a point-of-hazard.How important are “safety distance”calculations, and who should assumethe responsibility for making thiscalculation?“Safety distance” calculations are essential to the effective applicationand use of safety light curtains. Failure to respect the required safedistance in a given application may place personnel at risk of injury.Since proper safety distance calculations require consideration ofambient conditions, equipment stop times, response times of otherinterposing light curtain safety system components (such as motorcontactors, control relays, safety controllers, etc.), such calculationsare best done by the OEM supplying the light curtain as an integralcomponent to their machine or equipment, or alternatively by theend-user in whose facility the light curtain is being installed.397

17How do I calculate the correct “safety distance”between the hazard and the location of thelight curtain?For the U.S., the “safety distance” is typically calculated using OSHA’ssuggested formula:Ds = Hs x (Ts+Tp+Tr+2Tm) DpWhere:Ds =Hs =Ts =Tp =Tr =Minimum safety distance (in inches).Hand Speed constant of 63 inches per second (1.6 m/s).Maximum machine stopping time (in seconds).Maximum response time of the light curtain (in seconds).Maximum response time of all other interposing control elements…e.g. safety controller, motor contactor, safety PLC (inseconds).Tm = Increase in the press stopping time allowing for brake wear(in seconds).Dp =Penetration depth factor (using the OSHA Penetration DepthFactor Calculation chart or formula)In addition ANSI (American National Standards Institute) has established aformula that will result in a similar calculation.In Europe, the following formula (adopted from EN 999) should be used anddocumented in the technical file:S = K (t1+t2+t3) +CWhereS =K =t1 =t2 =t3 =C =minimum safety distance (mm)approach speed of object to the hazard (mm/sec)response time of the safety light curtain (in seconds)response time of the safety interface… e.g. safety controller,PLC (in seconds)machine response time (in seconds)additional distance (safety factor)398Note: C and K will vary depending on application characteristics and light curtainresolution. For further details see SCHMERSAL Safety Light CurtainCatalog-Handbook GK-3.

Example:Calculate the safety distance required when using a14mm resolution light curtain to guard a point-ofoperationhazard for which the response time of thelight curtain is 6ms, the response time of the interposingsafety controller is 12ms, the machine stop time is60ms and the safety factor is negligible.S = 1600 mm/sec x (0.006 + 0.012 + 0.060)S = 125 mm (5 inches)safety barrierpoint of dangerdirection ofapproachreference plane18How do I calculate the “Penetration DepthFactor?”“Penetration Depth Factor” can be calculated using OSHA’sPenetration Depth Factor Calculation chart or by using the following formula:Dp = 3.4 (S - 0.276)Where Dp = Depth penetration factorS = Object Sensitivity or Light Curtain resolution (in inches)399

19After doing the “safety distance” calculations,I have found that due to space limitations Icannot locate my light curtain the requireddistance from the point-of-hazard to stop themachine in time. What can I do to provide asafe situation?Depending upon the application, there are a few possible solutions.These include the following:1. If the machine presenting the hazard is controlled by an ACmotor, one can install a dynamic brake to reduce the stoppingtime of the machine.2. If the equipment presenting the hazard is controlled pneumaticallyor hydraulically, one can install a safety valve thatproduces equal pressure on both sides of the control cylinder’sactuator reducing the stopping time of the equipment.3. One can install a movable hard guard (in lieu of a light curtain)that allows access to the hazardous area only after thesystem has stopped or the hazard no longer exists.400

III. Wiring & Installation Considerations2021How can I guard multiple sidesof a machine with one light curtain?Multiple sides of a machine or manufacturing cell can be guardedwith a single light curtain using reflecting mirrors to bend the lightbeams around the corners … provided that the performance characteristicsof the light curtain and mirrors are adequate to span thesensing distance effectively.Does the use of reflecting mirrors affect themaximum sensing range of the light curtain?Yes. Each mirror typically reduces the maximum sensing range by 10%to 25% depending upon the light curtain and the type of mirror used(e.g. front-surface reflecting, rear-surface reflecting, metal mirror, etc.)22What, if any, environmental conditions must beconsidered when using safety light curtains?Abnormal or unusual environmental conditions can compromisethe performance of a safety light curtain system. For example:• Sudden changes in temperature may result in condensationon the light curtain lenses or deflectingmirrors.• The presence of fog, smoke or dense fumes typicallyreduce the effective range of a light curtain.23• The presence of steam or dust also typically reducesthe effective range of a light curtain.Must I be concerned about other light sourcescreating problems with my light curtain?Yes, one must be aware of other light sources (such as sunlight, reflectionsfrom nearby surfaces, welding arcs, light energy from other lightcurtains). Each should be considered when using safety light curtains.401

24Must light curtains only be used in thevertical position?No, some applications call for light curtains to be used in the horizontalorientation. When using light curtains horizontally, relevantindustry standards (such as ANSI-RIA 15.06) should be respected.25Some light curtains are “matched sets” andsome are not. Why and what does that mean toa user?A “matched set” means that the light curtain transmitter and receiverare matched at the factory (during manufacturing) for optimalperformance. If during operation of the light curtain, the transmitteror receiver is damaged or fails, both must be replaced and returnedto the factory for repair and adjustment.If the light curtain’s transmitter and receiver are not matched, and areceiver or transmitter unit fail or become damaged, it can simplybe replaced with another unit. SCHMERSAL’s light curtain pairs(transmitter and receiver) need not be matched.26Does my light curtain have to be hard-wired ormay I use quick-disconnects?Both types of terminations are permitted. In either case, disconnectingthe receiver or transmitter will result in a shut-down.27If I am using a Safety PLC, do I still have to usea safety controller (safety relay module) withmy light curtain?A safety PLC may be used without a safety controller (safety relaymodule) provided that it:• Can accept the light curtain’s safety output signals,• Has the correct diagnostics to meet the control reliabilityrequirements, and402• Can provide a safety output suitable for initiating stoppageof the machine posing the hazard.

28When using a light curtain with two safetyoutputs, may I use one for “safety” and onefor “annunciation” (e.g. to send a signal tomy PLC that the light curtain has beeninterrupted)?The answer depends on the safety category desired, as well as otherelements in the safety system. For higher safety categories (Category3 or 4) dual (redundant) safety outputs are needed to satisfy controlreliability requirements. For such applications the answer is no.29How does one select the proper light curtainsystem for a given application?Typical selection factors include:• How large is the object/body part that is being detected/protected?(This will determine the minimumrequired light curtain resolution.)• What is the height/length of the area (“protected field”)to be guarded?• What is the maximum distance (“range”) that will separatethe emitter and the receiver in the application?• How quickly must I stop the machine or process afterinterruption of the light curtain, and will the light curtainsafety system have a fast enough “response time” todo so based on its intended location?• What type of load will the light curtain safety outputscontrol, and are they sufficient for the application? (Thiswill help determine the current capability required of thesafety signals … e.g. semiconductor outputs for controllinga safety PLC or solid state relay vs. relay outputsfor direct control of a motor contactor).• What safety level or safety control category does theapplication’s risk assessment indicate is required?403

IV. Standards & Certifications30Does OSHA or ANSI certify Safety LightCurtains?No, neither OSHA or ANSI certifies any safety device or system.However, there are many independent third-parties (notified bodiessuch as UL, CSA, or TUV) that can test and certify safetydevices for compliance to industry standards.3132What is IEC 61496 and why is it important?IEC 61496 is the European standard that defines the performancerequirements for electro-optic safety devices. It is importantbecause it addresses both the hardware and software requirements,and must be satisfied if light curtains are to meet the CErequirements of the European Economic Community.Is third-party certification of light curtainsrequired, or may the manufacturer self-certify?Safety light curtains must be certified for their compliance to relevantstandards by an independent, recognized third-party. Theymay not be self-certified by the manufacturer.404

V. Glossary of Selected Light Curtain TerminologyAOPD:“AOPD” is the abbreviation for Active Optoelectronic Protective Device… such as alight curtain, light grid, and single light beam.Alignment:Positioning of a light curtain beam so that the maximum amount of emitted light energyreaches the receiver element.Alignment Aid:Typically a built-in light curtain feature that facilitates alignment of the emitter (transmitter)and receiver during installation. For long-range sensing, or when using deflectingmirrors, an external alignment aid (such as a laser aligning tool) may be used duringinstallation.Ambient Conditions:The environmental conditions in the area in which the light curtain is installed (e.g.humidity, temperature, light level, etc.).Angle of Acceptance:The included angle of the field of view within which the receiver will respond to theemitter’s (transmitter’s) transmitted light energy.Angle of Divergence:The included angle of the field of light energy transmitted by the emitter element of thelight curtain.Attenuation:A reduction in the energy level of the emitted light caused by environmental elementssuch as dirt, moisture, or other contaminants in the ambient.Beam Spacing:The distance between the centerline of each of the beams of light energy transmittedby the emitter.BG:“BG” is the abbreviation for “Berufgenossenschaft”… an independent German insuranceagency whose legislative arm recommends industry safety practices. The BG isone of many independent, recognized test agencies (also known in Europe as “notifiedbodies”) authorized to certify that safety products comply with all relevant standards.405

Blanking (Fixed Blanking):“Fixed Blanking” is when a fixed set of adjacent light beams are rendered permanentlyinactive for the purpose of allowing product or part of the process to enter the sensingarea without deactivating the light curtain safety outputs. An example would be the“blanking” of a small segment of the light curtain to allow finished parts to eject from amachining operation through this specific “opening” in the protected field.Blanking (Floating Blanking):“Floating blanking” is when a set number (one or more) of adjacent beams is allowedto ignore the presence of an object within their portion of the protection field. However,unlike fixed blanking (where the inactive beams are fixed), “floating blanking” allows theset number of adjacent beams to “float” within protected field … thus allowing theobject to be ignored to move within the protected field without deactivating the lightcurtain safety outputs.As long as no more than the selected number of adjacent beams is interrupted, thesystem remains operational and does not initiate stoppage of the machine. If one ormore additional beams are interrupted, the light curtain system will initiate machinestoppage. An example would be similar to the ejected parts example above, butwhere the parts eject through a “moving opening”… that is, at different pointsthrough the protected field.“CE” Mark:The “CE” mark (for Conformite Europeene) is a symbol applied to finished products(including components such as light curtains, safety mats, safety interlock switches,safety controllers and machinery) which meet all applicable European Directives.CSA:Abbreviation for Canadian Standards Association. An independent testing agency similarto Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) in the United States. A product that is “CSAcertified” has been type-tested and approved by the Canadian Standards Associationas meeting relevant electrical and safety codes.Emitter (photoelectric):The light generating member of a light curtain pair. Also called the “transmitter”.IEC:The International Electrotechnical Commission, headquartered in Europe. This organizationwrites and distributes recommended safety and product performance standardsfor electrical products and components … many of which become reference modelsfor U.S. standards.IP Rating:A rating system established by the IEC. The “IP” rating defines the environmental suitabilityof light curtains and other component/system enclosures for various ambientconditions. Similar to NEMA ratings for electrical enclosures.406

LED (Light Emitting Diode):A semiconductor that emits a small amount of light energy when current flows throughit in the forward direction.Light Curtain (light screen):An array of photoelectric sensing beams configured to sense objects present in theirsensing area. “Safety light curtains” are used to detect personnel who enter into anunsafe area around or within a machine or work cell.Minimum Object Sensitivity:Minimum object sensitivity refers to the smallest object (diameter) that the light curtaincan detect. It is commonly stated as the “resolution” of the light curtain, and is alsocalled the detection capability.MPCE:”MPCE” is an abbreviation for Machine Primary Control Element. An MPCE is the finaldevice controlling the power to a machine (e.g. a control relay or motor contactor).MSCE:“MSCE” is the abbreviation for Machine Secondary Control Element. An MSCE is acontrol element other than the MPCE capable of removing power from a machine (e.g.a safety controller, safety PLC).Modulation (photoelectric):Modulation of a light source refers to the repeated turning of it “on” and “off” at ahigh frequency (typically several kilohertz). The secret of a modulated photoelectricsensor’s superior performance is that the emitter and receiver are tuned to the frequencyof modulation. Only the modulated light is amplified, with all other lightreaching the receiver ignored.Muting:“Muting” is the provisional and automatic overriding of the light curtain safety outputfunction during normal, uninterrupted machine cycle operation. This is an importantfunction in applications in which the light curtain or light grid must be interrupted bysome part of the machine or the materials being processed without stopping the operationor process.Nanometer (nm):Unit of measurement used to specify the wavelength of light energy.1 nm = 0.000000001 meter (10 -9 meter).Optical Pitch:“Optical pitch” is the distance from the centerline of one beam to the centerline of thenext beam in a transmitter-receiver beam array. It is also known as “beam spacing”.407

OSSD:“OSSD” is the abbreviation for “Output Signal Switching Device” (also known as thelight curtain’s safety outputs).Protected Height:“Protected height” is the length of the light curtain’s active sensing area … that is thedistance from the center of the first beam to the center of the last beam in the lightcurtains transmitter-receiver beam array.PSDI:“PSDI” (Presence Sensing Device Initiation) refers to the use of the sensing device (e.g.light curtain) to activate the machine and/or manufacturing process once it has beendetermined that a human is no longer in the hazard area.Range (sensing range):The specified maximum operating distance between the light curtain emitter (transmitter)and receiver (without use of deflecting mirrors). Use of deflecting mirrors typicallyreduces the maximum range of a light curtain.Receiver:The light curtain element that responds to the emitted light energy.Resolution:The smallest object profile dimension that will be reliably sensed or detected by agiven light curtain transmitter-receiver pair.Response Time (response speed):The time required for the output (OSSD) of the light curtain/beam to change state inresponse to a change of the input signal (e.g. sensing event). Response time of a sensorbecomes extremely important when calculating a suitable safety distance for agiven light curtain pair.Safety Distance:“Safety distance” is the minimum distance from the safety light curtain to the point-ofhazardthat must be respected to insure that a person will not be exposed to the hazard.It is a function of the speed of approach, and the cumulative response times ofthe safety light curtain, any interposing safety interfaces (such as a safety controlleror safety PLC), the machine primary control element (such as a motor contactor orcontrol relay), and the stop time of the machine.Transmitter (photoelectric):The light generating member of a light curtain pair. Also called the “emitter”.UL:Abbreviation for Underwriters Laboratories Inc. An independent testing agency forproducts sold in the United States. A device that is “UL listed” has been type-testedand certified to meet required electrical and/or safety standards.408

GLOSSARY OFMACHINE SAFEGUARDING TERMINOLOGY409

SELECTED MACHINE SAFEGUARDINGTERMINOLOGYAuthorized Output: an output from a safety controller’spositive-guided relays (used to “authorize” or “enable” amachine’s start circuit when safety system conditionsexist). Also known as “safety output.”Automatic Reset: a safety controller reset circuit thatautomatically resets the safety controller when safesystem conditions (no system faults) exist. A manualreset button is optional.Auxiliary output: a non-safety related contact closureor semiconductor output primarily used for signalingcomponent or system status to a PLC, audible alarmor visual indicator (such as a stack light). Also called a“signaling contact” or “auxiliary monitoring contact”.ANSI (American National Standards Institute): anassociation of industry representatives who, workingtogether, develop safety and other technical standards.Auxiliary monitoring contact: See “auxiliary output”.BG (Berufgenossenschaft): an independent Germaninsurance agency whose legislative armrecommends industry safety practices.One of many “notified bodies” authorizedto certify that safety products comply withall relevant standards.CE (Conformité Europeéne) mark: a symbol (CE)applied to finished products and machinery indicatingit meets all applicable European Directives. For electricaland electronic “finished products”, such as a safety relaymodule, these include the Low VoltageDirective and, where relevant, theElectromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)Directive.Coded-Magnet Sensor: a two-piece position sensorconsisting of an array of reed switches and a multiplemagnet array-actuating element. Such devices will onlydeliver an output signal when the reed switch elementis in the presence of a matched, multiple-magneticfield array. Coded-magnet sensors cannot be actuatedusing a simple magnet. Hence they are far more difficultto defeat/bypass than a simple magnetic switch orproximity sensor.Control Reliability: A term applied to safety devices orsystems which are designed constructed and installedsuch that the failure of a single component within thedevice or system does not prevent normal machinestopping action from taking place…but does410 prevent a successive machine cycle frombeing initiated.CSA (Canadian Standards Association): an independentCanadian testing and standards-makingorganization similar to UnderwritersLaboratories (UL) in the U.S. “CSA-certified”products meet relevant CSA electrical andsafety standards.Declaration of Conformity: a manufacturer’s self-certifieddocument, signed by a highly-positioned technicalmanager, which lists all the Standards and Directives towhich a product conforms. A Declaration of Conformityis mandatory for all CE-marked products, and formachine components which, if they fail, could lead to adangerous or hazardous situation on a machine.Defined Area: a predetermined area scanned by a lightbeam within which the presence of an opaque object ofspecified minimum size will result in the generation of acontrol signal.Direct-Action Contacts: See “positive-break” contacts.Diverse Redundancy: the use of different componentsand/or different microprocessor instruction sets writtenby different programmers in the design and constructionof redundant components/circuits. Its purpose is toincrease system reliability by minimizing the possibilityof common-mode failure (the failure of like componentsused in redundant circuits).Dual-Channel Safety System: a safety control systemcharacterized by two inputs; each connected to one oftwo independent safety circuits. Dual-channel systemsare typically capable of detecting interconnection wiringfaults such as open circuits, short-circuits and groundfaults. As such they provide a higher level of safety thansingle-channel systems.E-Stop (Emergency Stop): the stopping of a machineby actuation of an “emergency stop” switch (such as asafety interlock switch, emergency push button switch,rope-pull switch, foot switch, or other actuating device.European Machinery Directive (EMD) 98/392/EEC:a set of machine safety design requirements which mustbe satisfied to meet the Essential Health and Safetystandards established by the European EconomicCommunity. This Directive, and other relevant EuropeanDirectives (such as the Low Voltage Directive, EMCDirective, et al) must be satisfied for the machine tobear the CE mark.

Fail-to-Danger: a component or system failure whichallows a machine to continue operating, exposingpersonnel to a hazardous or unsafe condition.Fail-to-Safe: “Fail-to-Safe” safety devices are designedsuch that a component failure causes the device/systemto attain rest in a safe condition.Fault Detection: the monitoring of selected safety systemcomponents whose failure would compromise thefunctioning of the safety system. The detection of suchfailures is known as “fault detection.” Examples are:• a short-circuit in the safety circuit’s interconnectionwiring• an open-circuit in the safety circuit’s interconnectionwiring• a welded contact in the safety controller’s positiveguidedrelays• an open machine guardFault Exclusion: the ability to minimize known possiblecomponent failures (“faults”) in a safety system bydesign criteria and/or component selection. Simpleexamples of “excluded faults” are:• The use of an overrated contactor to preclude thepossibility of contact welding.• Design of a machine guard such that the safetyinterlock switch actuator cannot be damaged.• Selection of a suitable safety interlock switch.• Use of positive-break safety interlock switchestogether with a self-monitoring safety relay module,such that the possibility of a contact weld resultingin the loss of the safety function is eliminated.The elimination of such faults are generally a compromisebetween the technical safety requirements andthe theoretical probability of their occurrence. Designengineers are permitted to exclude such faults whenconstructing the machine’s safety system. However,each “fault exclusion” must be identified, justified, anddocumented in the Technical File submitted to satisfythe European Machinery Directive.Feedback Loop: an auxiliary input on a safety controllerdesigned to monitor and detect a contact weld in theprimary machine-controlled device (e.g. motor contactor,relay, et al) having positive-guided contacts.Force-Guided Contacts: See “Positive-GuidedContacts”.Fixed Barrier Guard: See “Hard Guarding”.Guard: a barrier that prevents entry of an individual’shands or other body parts into a hazardous area.Hard Guarding: the use of screens, fences, or othermechanical barriers to prevent access of personnel tohazardous areas of a machine. “Hard guards” generallyallow the operator to view the point-of-operation.Hazardous Area: an area of a machine or processwhich presents a potential hazard to personnel.Interlock: an arrangement in which the operation ofone device automatically brings about or prevents theoperation of another device.Interlocked Barrier Guard: a fixed or movable guardwhich, when opened, stops machine operation.Machine Primary Control Element (MPCE): anelectrically powered component which directly controlsa machine’s operation. MPCE’s are the last controlcomponent to operate when a machine’s motion isinitiated or stopped.Machine Secondary Control Element (MSCE): amachine control element (other than an MPCE) capableof removing power from the hazardous area (s) of amachine.Manual Start-Up Test: a term applied to safety controllersdesigned such that at least one of the system’sinterlocked machine guards must be manually-openedand closed (after applying power) before machine operationis authorized. All SCHMERSAL’S even numberedSeries AES microprocessor--based safety controllers(e.g. AES 1136, AES 1146, AES 1156, AES 3366, et al)are designed to require a manual start-up test.Manually-monitored Reset: a safety controller resetcircuit requiring the presence of a discrete “trailing-edge”signal (24V to 0V) to activate the controller’s authorizedoutputs. A reset button is mandatory.Muting: the ability to program a monitoring and/orcontrol device to ignore selected system conditions.Negative Mode Mounting: the mounting of a singlepiecesafety interlock switch (e.g. a limit switch) suchthat the force applied to open the normally closed (NC)safety contact is provided by an internal spring. (SeeFigure 1.)In this mounting mode the NC contacts may not openwhen the safety guard is “open”. Here welded/stuckcontacts, or failure of a contact-opening spring,may result in exposing the machine operator to ahazardous/unsafe area.When mounted in the “negative-mode”, single-piecesafety interlock switches can be easily circumvented/defeated by the operator…simply by taping down theswitch actuator when the safety guard is open.411

Point-of-Operation: the area(s) of a machine wherematerial or the workpiece is positioned and a process isperformed.Point-of-Operation Guarding: a device or guardinstalled at the interface between the operator and thepoint-of-operation which is intended to protect personnelfrom hazardous areas.Figure 1NEGATIVE-MODE INSTALLATIONOSHA (Occupational Safety Health Administration):a U.S. Department of Labor Federal agency responsiblefor monitoring and regulating workplace safety. OSHAenforcement may reference their own regulations, aswell as those of other industry standards-making groups(e.g. ANSI, NFPA, UL, et al).Positive-Break Contacts: normally-closed (NC) contactswhich, upon actuation, are forced to open by anon-resilient mechanical drive mechanism. Also called“positive-opening” or “direct-action” contacts. (SeeFigure 2.)Positive-Guided Contacts: Normally-open (NO) andnormally-closed (NC) contacts which operate interdependentlysuch that the NO and NC contacts can neverbe closed at the same time. They are designed suchthat if one of the contacts welds/sticks closed,CONVENTIONAL SPRING-DRIVENCONTACTSCONTACTSFigure 3the other contacts cannot change state. (See Figure 3.)The interdependent operation between NO and NCcontacts permits self-checking/monitoring of the functioningof relays and contactors featuring positive-guidedcontacts. Hence they are desirable in machine safetycircuits where “fail-to-safe” or “control reliability” isdesired. Also called “force-guided contacts”.Positive Linkage: a term applied to roller lever, rockinglever and other switch actuating members designedsuch that the integrity of the linkage between the actuatorand the shaft is heightened (beyond a set screw on asmooth shaft) by its mechanical design. Examples ofpositive-linkages are pinned, square and serratedshafts. (See Figure 4.)Figure 2CONVENTIONAL VERSUS POSITIVE-OPENINGCONTACTS412

hazards present to the machine operator and/or maintenancepersonnel. This assessment is usually done inthe early stages of the machine’s design to permit suchhazards to be designed-out or alternatively determinethe scope of the safety system needed to protect personnelfrom possible injury. One approach suggested inEN954-1 is summarized in Figure 6.Figure 6PinnedActuatorSquareSerratedPositive LinkageFigure 4Positive-Mode Mounting: the mounting of a singepiecesafety interlock switch (e.g. a limit switch) suchthat the non-resilient mechanical mechanism whichforces the normally-closed (NC) contacts to open isdirectly driven by the interlocked machine safety guard.In this mode (as opposed to “negative-mode mounting”)the safety guard physically forces the NC contacts toopen when the guard is opened. (See Figure 5.)Selection of the Safety Category:A brief overview of these safety categories is providedin Figure 7.Preferred categoriesPossible categories, which require additionalmeasuresOver-dimensioned measures for the relevant riskHere the safetycategory isdetermined by thefollowing parameters:• S Severity of injury• ■ S1 Slight injury• ■ S2 Serious injury• F Frequencyand/or exposuretime to the hazard• ■ F1 Seldom toquite often• ■ F2 Frequent tocontinuous• P Possibility ofavoiding thehazard• ■ P1 Possibleunder specificconditions• ■ P2 ScarcelypossibleSafeguarding: protecting personnel from hazards usingguards, barriers, safety devices and/or safe workingprocedures.Figure 5Positive-Opening Contacts: See “Positive-BreakContacts”.Push/Pull Operation: a term applied to emergencyrope-pull switches designed to actuate when therope/trip-wire is pulled and when it is pushed (goesslack). Such rope-pull switches provide a higher levelof safety than units which only actuate when the tripwire/ropeis pulled.Redundancy: the duplication of control circuits and/orcomponents such that if one component/circuit shouldfail the other (redundant) component/circuit will ensuresafe operation.Risk Assessment: a systematic means of quantifyingthe relative level of danger different types of machineSafety Controller: an electronic and/or electromechanicaldevice designed expressly for monitoring the integrityof a machine’s safety system. Such controllers aredesigned using positive-guided (force-guided) relays.Depending upon the model, SCHMERSAL’s safetycontrollers are capable of detecting the following typesof potential safety system faults:• Machine guard(s) open• Guard monitoring switch/sensor failure• Interconnection wiring “open circuit”• Interconnection wiring “short circuit”• Interconnection wiring “short-to-ground”• Welded contact in controlled output device• Failure of one of the safety controller’s positiveguidedrelays• Fault in the safety controller’s monitoring circuit• Insufficient safety controller operating voltageUpon detection of a system fault, the safety controller willinitiate a “machine stop” command and/or prevent therestarting of the machine until the fault has beencorrected. The “stop” command may be immediateor time-delayed depending upon the model safety413controller selected.

Safety Enable: (See “Authorized Output.”)Safety Interlock Switch: a switch designed expressly tosafely monitor the position of a machine barrier guard.Such switches typically feature positive-break contactsand are designed to be more tamper-resistant than conventionalposition/presence-sensing switches.Safety Output: (See “Authorized Output.”)Safety Relay: an electromechanical relay designed withpositive-guided contacts.Self-Checking: the performing of periodic self-diagnosticson the safety control circuit to ensure that criticalindividual components are functioning properly.Self-Monitoring: see “Self-Checking”.Single-Channel Safety System: a safety control systemcharacterized by one safety interlock switch whosenormally-closed contact is the sole input to a safety controlleror a motor contactor. Such systems are unable todetect a short circuit failure in the interconnection wiringand are only recommended for addressing SafetyCategories B, 1 and 2 (see “Risk Assessment”).Solenoid-Latching Safety Interlock Switch:a two-piece safety interlock (actuating key and switchmechanism) whose design prevents the removal ofthe actuating key until released by an integral latchingsolenoid. Solenoid latching is typically controlled by atime-delay, motion detector, position sensor or othercontrol components.Stop Categories:“0” Requires immediate removal of power from thecontrolled devices.“1” Allows for a time delay up to 30 seconds for removalof power. This is commonly used with drive systemswhere immediate removal of power may result in alonger stop time.Tamper-Resistant: a term applied to safety interlockswitches referring to their relative ability to be defeatedor bypassed using simple, readily available means suchas a screwdriver, paper clip, piece of tape or wire, etc.Switches and sensors designed expressly for use asmachine guard safety interlocks are designed to bemore “tamper-resistant” than conventional switches/sensors (e.g. proximity switches, reed switches, conventionallimit switches).Time-delayed Authorized Outputs: a safety controller’sauthorized outputs whose activation is delayed (up to 30seconds) to satisfy Stop Category 1 requirements.Trailing-edge Reset: (See “Manually-monitored Reset.”)Two-Hand Control: a machine control system whichrequires “simultaneous” use of both of the operator’shands to initiate a machine cycle.UL (Underwriters Laboratories): an independent testingand standards-making organization.UL tests products for compliance torelevant electrical and safety standards/requirements.414

MACHINE SAFETY STANDARDSEuropean Machinery Directive & CE MarkingThe European safety requirements for man and machineare established in the European Machinery Directive(EMD). According to the EMD, machinery must bedesigned and built to meet the Directive’s requirementsas defined by existing and emerging European standards.These “European Norms”, prepared by representativesof the European Economic Community (EEC)member states and produced by the European standardscommittees CEN and CENELEC, provide a harmonizedbaseline for the design and construction of safemachinery.As of January 1, 1997, machinery sold into or within theEEC must comply with the requirements of theEuropean Machinery Directive. Equipment which compliesmay be affixed with the CE mark (for “ConformitéEuropeene”). The CE mark on a machine signifies that itconforms to the essential health and safety requirementsdefined by the relevant European Norms.EUROPEAN STANDARDSThese “Norms” form a hierarchical structure whichinclude:Type A Standards: Fundamental Safety Standardswhich contain basic concepts, principles of design, andgeneral aspects applicable to all machinery.Type B Standards: Group Safety Standards, each ofwhich focuses on a specific subject applicable to arange of machinery types. “B1 Standards” cover a specificsafety aspect defined in the FundamentalStandards. “B2 Standards” cover the requirements ofspecific safety related devices such as two-hand controls,interlocking devices, movable guards, etc.Type C Standards: Specific Machine Safety Standards,each of which define protective measures required forhazardous areas of a specific machine or group ofmachines.Type A and Type B Standards are intended to assist inthe machinery design process, and eliminate the needto repeat these general requirements in the machinespecific(Type C) Standards.Many product standards are still in the planning stageand the number of Type C Standards is continuouslyincreasing. Some are still in draft form (designated as“prEN” standards). Others exist as finished (“EN”) standards.Where no machine-specific standard exists, the requirementsof the Machinery Directive can be satisfied byobserving existing European Standards and relevantnational standards/specifications. Draft standards (prEN)published by the European Union are also accepted andused as a basis for evaluating products for complianceto the Directives. It is important to note that such draftstandards may change before being finalized and adoptedas EN standards.SELECTED EUROPEAN STANDARDSType “A” Standards:EN292, Safety Machinery – Basic Concepts, GeneralPrinciples of Design, Parts 1 & 2.Type “B1” Standards:EN294 Safety of Machinery – Safety Distances toPrevent Danger Zones from Being Reached by UpperLimbs.EN349 Safety of Machinery – Minimum Gaps to AvoidCrushing of Parts of the Human Body.EN954-1 Safety of Machinery – Safety-Related Parts ofControl Systems – Part 1. General Principles of Design.EN999 Safety of Machinery – The Positioning ofProtective Equipment in Respect of Approach Speeds ofthe Human Body.EN1050 Safety of Machinery – Principles of RiskAssessment.prEN811 Safety of Machinery – Safety Distances toPrevent Danger Zones from Being Reached by LowerLimbs.Selected Type “B2” Standards:EN418 Safety of Machinery – Emergency Stop Devices,Functional Aspects – Principles for Design.EN547 Safety of Machinery – Two –Hand ControlDevices, Functional Aspects – Principles for Design.EN1088 Safety of Machinery – Interlocking DevicesAssociated with Guards – Principles for Design &Selection.prEN953 Safety of Machinery – General Requirementsfor the Design and Construction of Guards.415

prEN1760-1 Safety of Machinery – Pressure SensitiveSafety Devices – Mats & Floors.prEN1760-2 Safety of Machinery – Pressure SensitiveSafety Devices – Edges & Bars.prEN61496 Safety of Machinery – ElectrosensitiveProtective Equipment.Type “C” Standards:prEN415 Packaging MachinesprEN692 Mechanical PressesprEN693 Hydraulic PressesprEN746 Thermoprocessing MachinesprEN931 Footwear Manufacturing MachinesprEN1114-1 Rubber & Plastics MachinesprEN1762 Food Processing MachinesDomestic Standards:Concern for worker safety is not limited to the Europeancommunity. Domestically machinery builders, machineusers, and industrial safety professionals have each recognizedthe importance of providing safe workplaces.Several standards-making organizations have developed,and continue to develop, more stringent machinesafety guidelines and standards. These include:Occupational Health and Safety Administration (OSHA)American National Standards Institute (ANSI)Robotics Industry of America (RIA)Instrument Society of America (ISA)National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA)Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)A number of selected domestic standards are listedbelow.OSHA 29 CFR 1910.212General Requirements for (Guarding of) All MachinesOSHA 29 CFR 1910.217(Guarding of) Mechanical Power Presses416ISA S84.01Safety Instrumented SystemsANSI B11.1Machine Tools - Mechanical Power Presses - SafetyRequirements for Construction, Care, and Use ofANSI B11.2Hydraulic Power Presses - Safety Requirements forConstruction, Care, and Use ofANSI B11.3Power Press Brakes - Safety Requirements forConstruction, Care, and Use ofANSI B11.4Shears - Safety Requirements for Construction, Care,and Use ofANSI B11.5Machine Tools - Iron Workers - Safety Requirements forConstruction, Care, and Use ofANSI B11.6Lathes - Safety Requirements for Construction, Care,and Use ofANSI B11.7Cold Headers & Cold Formers - Safety Requirementsfor Construction, Care, and Use ofANSI B11.8Drilling, Milling , and Boring Machines - SafetyRequirements for Construction, Care, and Use ofANSI B11.9Grinding Machines - Safety Requirements forConstruction, Care, and Use ofANSI B11.10Metal Sawing Machines - Safety Requirements forConstruction, Care, and Use ofANSI B11.11Gear Cutting Machines - Safety Requirements forConstruction, Care, and Use ofANSI B11.13Machine Tools - Single- and Multiple- Spindle AutomaticBar and Chucking Machines -Safety Requirements forConstruction, Care, and Use ofANSI B11.14Coil Slitting Machines/Systems — Safety Requirementsfor Construction, Care, and Use ofANSI B11.15Pipe, Tube, and Shape Bending Machines - SafetyRequirements for Construction, Care, and Use of

ANSI B11.16Metal Powder Compacting Presses - SafetyRequirements for Construction, Care, and Use ofANSI B11.17Horizontal Extrusion Presses-Safety Requirements forConstruction, Care, and Use ofANSI B11.18Machinery and Machine Systems for the Processing ofCoiled Strip, Sheet, and Plate - Safety Requirements forANSI B11.19Performance Criteria for the Design, Construction, Care,and Operation of Safeguarding when Referenced byOther B11 Machine Tool Safety StandardsANSI B11.20Machine Tools - Manufacturing Systems/Cells - SafetyRequirements for Construction, Care, and Use ofANSI B183Roll Forming and Roll Bending Machines - SafetyRequirements for Construction, Care, and Use ofANSI/RIA 15.06Safety Requirements for Industrial Robots and RobotSystemsNFPA 79Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery 1994 EditionSources for Standards:EN & IEC Standards are available from:Global Engineering Documents15 Inverness Way EastEnglewood, CO 80112Telephone: (800) 854-7179andAmerican National Standards Institute (ANSI)11 West 42nd StreetNew York, NY 10036Telephone: (212) 642-4900ANSI & NFPA Standards are available from:American National Standards Institute (ANSI)11 West 42nd StreetNew York, NY 10036Telephone: (212) 642-4900OSHA Regulations are available from:Superintendent of DocumentsGovernment Printing OfficeWashington, DC 20402-9371Telephone: (202) 783-3238DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITYEach SCHMERSAL safety product has beencertified to conform to all relevant Standards andDirectives. Copies of the Declaration of Conformityfor any product in this catalog are available uponrequest.417

418SaferbyDesign

SELECTED CONVERSION FACTORSTO CONVERTTO CONVERTfoot pounds hp-hours 5.05 × 10 -7 pounds oz (troy) 1.458 × 10 1Parameter From To Multiply by Parameter From To Multiply byTemperature °C °F (°C × 9/5) + 32 Force centigrams grams 0.01°F °C (°F–32) × 5/9dynes grams 0.00102°C °K °C + 273.18dynes newtons 1.0 × 10 -5dynes kg 1.02 × 10 -6Distance cm inches 0.3937dynes pounds 2.248 × 10 -6mm inches 0.03937grams kilograms 1.0 × 10 -3cm feet 0.03281grams milligrams 1.0 × 10 3inches mm 25.4grams oz (avdp) 3.527 × 10 -2feet cm 30.48grams oz (troy) 3.215 × 10 -2meters feet 3.281grams pounds 2.205 × 10 -3meters inches 39.37kilograms dynes 9.80665 × 10 5kilograms grams 1.0 × 10 3Energy btu gram calories 2.52 × 10 2kilograms newtons 9.807btu hp-hours 3.927 × 10 -4kilograms pounds 2.2046btu joules 1.055 × 10 3kilograms oz (avdp) 3.5274 × 10 1btu kW-hours 2.928 × 10 -4newtons dynes 4.448 × 10 5btu ergs 1.055 × 10 10newtons pounds 0.2248ergs btu 9.486 × 10 -11pounds dynes 1.0 × 10 5ergs joules 1.0 × 10 -7pounds grams 4.5359 × 10 2ergs watt-hours 2.773 × 10 -11pounds newtons 4.448foot pounds btu 1.286 × 10 -3pounds kilograms 4.536 × 10 -1foot pounds gm-calories 3.241 × 10 -1pounds oz (avdp) 1.6 × 10 1419

TypeDesignation420123NEMA, UL, CSA & IECINGRESS PROTECTION RATINGSTABLE 1, NEMA, UL and CSA Enclosure Ratings3R44X61213NEMAENCLOSURE TYPES FOR NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONSNational Electrical ManufacturersAssociation (NEMA Standard 250)and Electrical and ElectronicManufacturers Association of Canada (EEMAC)Enclosures are intended for outdoor use primarily toprovide a degree of protection against contact withthe enclosed equipment or location where unusualservice conditions do not exist.Enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily toprovide a degree of protection against limitedamounts of falling water and dirt.Enclosures are intended for outdoor use primarily toprovide a degree of protection against windblowndust, rain, and sleet; undamaged by the formation ofice on the enclosure.Enclosures are intended for outdoor use primarily toprovide a degree of protection against falling rain andsleet; undamaged by the formation of ice on theenclosure.Enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarilyto provide a degree of protection against windblowndust and rain, splashing water, and hosedirectedwater; undamaged by the formation of ice onthe enclosure.Enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarilyto provide a degree of protection against corrosion,windblown dust and rain, splashing water, andhose-directed water; undamaged by the formation ofice on the enclosure.Enclosures are intended for use indoors or outdoorswhere occasional submersion is encountered.Enclosures are intended for use indoors or outdoorswhere occasional submersion is encountered.Enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily toprovide a degree of protection against dust, sprayingof water, oil, and non-corrosive coolant.This material is reproduced with permission fromNEMA. The preceding descriptions, however, are notintended to be complete representations of NationalElectrical Manufacturers Association standards forenclosures nor those of the Electrical and ElectronicManufacturers Association of Canada.NEMA, UL, CSA and IEC have each established ratingssystems intended to identify an enclosure’s ability to repelelements from the outside environment. These rating systemsaddress the enclosure’s ability to protect against avariety of environmental conditions. These include:• Incidental contact• Rain, sleet and snow• Windblown dust• Hosedown and splashing liquids• Falling dirt• Oil or coolant spraying/splashing• Corrosive agents• Occasional temporary submersion• Occasional prolonged submersionUnderwriters Laboratories Inc.(UL 50 and UL 508)Indoor use primarily to provide protection againstcontact with the enclosed equipment and against alimited amount of falling dirt.Indoor use to provide a degree of protection againstlimited amounts of falling water and dirt.Outdoor use to provide a degree of protection againstwindblown dust and windblown rain; undamaged bythe formation of ice on the enclosure.Outdoor use to provide a degree of protection againstfalling rain; undamaged by the formation of ice on theenclosure.Either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree ofprotection against falling rain, splashing water, andhose-directed water; undamaged by the formation ofice on the enclosure.Either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree ofprotection against falling rain, splashing water, andhose-directed water; undamaged by the formation ofice on the enclosure; resists corrosion.Indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protectionagainst entry of water during temporary submersionat a limited depth; undamaged by the formationof ice on the enclosure.Indoor use to provide a degree of protection againstdust, dirt, fiber flyings, dripping water, and externalcondensation of non-corrosive liquids.Indoor use to provide a degree of protection againstlint, dust seepage, external condensation and sprayingof water, oil, and non-corrosive liquids.This material is reproduced with permission fromUnderwriters Laboratories Inc. Standard for Safety forCabinets and Boxes, UL 50, Copyright 1985 andIndustrial Control Equipment, UL 508, Copyright 1984by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall not beresponsible to anyone for the use of or reliance upona UL Standard by anyone. UL shall not incur any obligationor liability for damages, including consequentialdamages, arising out of or in connection with theuse, interpretation of, or reliance upon a ULStandard.Canadian Standards Association(Standard C22.2 No. 94)General purpose enclosure. Protects against accidentalcontact with parts.Indoor use to provide a degree of protection againstdripping and light splashing of noncorrosive liquidsand falling dirt.Indoor or outdoor use; provides a degree ofprotection against rain, snow, and windblown dust;undamaged by the external formation of ice on theenclosure.Indoor or outdoor use; provides a degree of protectionagainst rain and snow; undamaged by the externalformation of ice on the enclosure.Indoor or outdoor use; provides a degree of protectionagainst rain, snow, windblown dust, splashingand hose-directed water; undamaged by the externalformation of ice on the enclosure.Indoor or outdoor use; provides a degree of protectionagainst rain, snow, windblown dust, splashingand hose-directed water; undamaged by the externalformation of ice on the enclosure; resists corrosion.Indoor or outdoor use; provides a degree of protectionagainst the entry of water during temporary submersionat a limited depth; undamaged by the externalformation of ice on the enclosure; resists corrosion.Indoor use; provides a degree of protection againstcirculating dust, lint, fibers, and flyings; dripping andlight splashing of non-corrosive liquids; not providedwith knockouts.Indoor use; provides a degree of protection againstcirculating dust, lint, fibers, and flyings; seepage andspraying of non-corrosive liquids, including oils andcoolants.This material is reproduced with permission from theCanadian Standards Association.While these ratings are intended to help you make amore informed product selection, there are some differencesbetween each organization’s system.As shown in Table 1, the NEMA, UL and CSA ratingsmost commonly used in North America are based on similarapplication descriptions and expected performance.However, while UL and CSA require testing in the laboratories(and periodic manufacturer site inspections toensure continued adherence to prescribed standards),NEMA leaves compliance and certification up to the manufacturer.While the European IEC (IP) ratings summarized inTable 2 are based on similar test methods, their performancehas some slight and subtle differences in interpretation.For example, selected IP ratings permit limited

TABLE 2, IEC (IP) Enclosure RatingsIP Tests IP Tests0 No protection 0 No protection1 Protected againstsolid objects up to50mm, e.g. accidentaltouch by hands2 Protected againstsolid objects up to12mm, e.g. fingers3 Protected againstsolid objects over2.5mm, e.g. toolsand wires4 Protected againstsolid objects over1mm5 Protected againstdust (limited ingress,no harmful deposit)6 Totally protectedagainst dust1234567Protected againstvertically fallingdrops of water, e.g.condensationProtected againstdirect sprays ofwater up to 15° fromverticalProtected againstsprays to 60° fromverticalProtected againstwater sprayed fromall directions (limitedingress permitted)Protected againstlow pressure jets ofwater from all directions(limited ingresspermitted)Protected againststrong jets of waterProtected againstthe effects of immersionbetween 15 cmand 1 mingress of water, while UL/CSA ratings do not.For your reference and convenience we have attemptedto provide an approximate cross-reference betweenNorth American enclosure ratings (NEMA, UL and CSA)and selected IEC (IP) enclosure ratings (Table 3). Pleaserecognize that these are nearest-equivalents only andshould not be considered as direct comparisons.Example:Characteristic letters1st characteristic numeral(Protection against solid objects)2nd characteristic numeral(Protection against liquids)IP 2 3An enclosure with this designation is protected againstthe penetration of solid objects greater than 12mm andagainst spraying water.TABLE 3, NEMA, UL & CSA vs. IEC (IP) Ingress Protection Ratings*NEMA,UL,CSARating1233R3S44X61213IP23 IP30 IP32 IP64 IP65 IP66***IEC Rating*These are nearest equivalents only, and should not be used to make direct conversions from IEC to NEMA classifications.******IP67*421

GENERAL TERMS & CONDITIONS OF SALEORDERS & BLANKET ORDERSAll orders must include proper description, pricing, quantity andshipping requirements. Buyer must contact the Seller’s headquartersfor terms and conditions associated with blanketorders.PRICESUnless otherwise stated, prices are firm for thirty days. Sellerreserves the right to revise price if there is a change in quantity,size, finish, or method and time shipment differing from thoseindicated herein. Prices and terms on this quotation and/oracknowledgement of order are not subject to verbal changes orother agreements unless approved in writing by the Seller’sheadquarters’ staff. Unless otherwise negotiated, prices fororders for future delivery will be invoiced at the prevailing priceat the time of shipment.DELIVERYAll material is sold and priced F.O.B. Tarrytown, NY, USA.Unless otherwise specified by the Buyer, all shipments will bemade via UPS Ground.MINIMUM ORDER & PACKAGING CHARGESUnless otherwise agreed upon, the minimum order billing is$100 per shipment exclusive of shipping, insurance or othermiscellaneous charges.PAYMENT TERMSPayment terms are net 30 days. Seller reserves the right to holdshipments to firms with unpaid past due balances. Seller alsoreserves the right to charge interest at the rate of 1 1 ⁄2% interestper month for accounts in arrears more than 30 days. This interestwill never be greater than that allowed by local law.TITLETitle to material, priced at Seller’s shipping point, shall pass toBuyer upon shipment. Any charges by carrier for switching,demurrage or other services shall be paid by the Buyer.CHANGES & CANCELLATIONSShould Buyer desire to cancel, revise or suspend this order forreasons beyond the Buyer’s control, Seller shall discuss thematter promptly with the Buyer and do all possible to make amutually satisfactory agreement. In cases where the materialhas been manufactured partially or completely for Buyer’srequirements, Seller will advise Buyer of charges incurred toBuyer’s account.CLAIMS FOR DEFECTIVE MATERIALSAll material is warranted to be free from defects in quality andworkmanship, and to meet the specifications to which ordered.The Seller’s obligation under this warranty is limited to repairingor replacing defective material, or crediting the Buyer with theprice of the defective material. If Buyer believes the material tobe defective, Buyer must notify Seller within 30 days after delivery.Seller has the right to reinspect any goods before determinationof a reasonable settlement. Toward this end, Buyer mustcontact Seller’s headquarters requesting a formal ReturnMaterial Authorization (RMA). Seller will not accept any materialreturns without reference to the RMA number of the Buyer’sreturned goods packing list.ORDERS FOR NON-STANDARD/SPECIAL ITEMSUnless otherwise negotiated and confirmed in writing by theSeller, orders for non-standard and special items made to theBuyer’s specifications are non-cancelable. Seller reserves theright to bill Buyer for materials purchased for the production ofsuch items, and for all goods fully or partially manufactured atthe time of notice of the Buyer’s desire to cancel the order.SPECIAL TOOLINGSpecial tooling required and paid for by the Buyer shall becomethe property of the Buyer. Where such tooling incorporates tradesecrets, it shall be held in perpetuity at the manufacturer’s premisesfor the exclusive use of the Buyer.GENERALAll agreements are contingent upon strikes, accidents, fires,availability of materials and all other causes beyond the Seller’scontrol. Typographical, accounting and other administrativeerrors are subject to correction. Buyer assumes the liability forpatent and copyright infringement for goods made to Buyer’sspecifications. When Buyer furnishes material for use in production,ample allowance must be made for reasonablespoilage. Such materials must be of suitable quality to facilitateefficient production. Conditions not specifically stated hereinshall be governed by established trade customs. Terms inconsistentwith those stated herein that may appear on the Buyer’sformal order will not be binding on the Seller.SUSPENSIONS & CANCELLATIONSUnless otherwise negotiated and agreed to by the Seller, theBuyer must accept final and/or complete delivery on all orderswithin 90 days from date of first shipment. Should the Buyer failto accept the complete order within this or the negotiated periodfor order, the Seller reserves the right to cancel the order andre-bill the Buyer at the price schedule covering the total quantityof parts shipped through the date of cancellation.WARRANTY AND LIMITATIONS OF WARRANTY:SCHMERSAL INC agrees to replace or repair products whichhave been found defective due to workmanship or material.This warranty is made only for a period within one year of thedate of the invoice to the Buyer. This warranty applies toproducts which have been subjected to normal and properusage, and to which inspection of the product by theSCHMERSAL INC shows it to be thus defective. THE AGREE-MENT TO REPAIR OR REPLACE SUCH PRODUCT IS LIMIT-ED TO F.O.B. SHIPPING POINT AND IS IN NO WAY ALIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL,OR FOR DELAYS, INSTALLATION, TRANSPORTATION,ADJUSTMENT OR OTHER EXPENSES ARISING INCONNECTION WITH SUCH PRODUCT. SCHMERSAL INC isnot responsible in this warranty for product which is repaired oraltered. Nor is SCHMERSAL INC responsible in this warrantyfor products subject to misuse, negligence, or accident.SCHMERSAL INC IS IN NO WAY LIABLE OR RESPONSIBLEFOR INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPER-TY ARISING FROM OR OUT OF USE OF THE PRODUCTWITHIN DESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS. Except for thewarranty hereinbefore stated, THERE ARE NO EXPRESSWARRANTIES AND NO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-CHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE, OTHER THAN THOSE EXPRESSLY SET FORTHABOVE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ANDEXCLUDES ALL OTHER REPRESENTATIONS MADE, BOTHEXPRESS AND IMPLIED, UNLESS SET FORTH IN WRITINGAND SIGNED BY AN AUTHORIZED EXECUTIVE OF THESCHMERSAL INC.422

NOTES423

424NOTES